《合诵经》的注释巴利
10. Saṅgītisuttavaṇṇanā
296 在十千轮围界这里,指的是作为佛土、数量有十千那么大的轮围界。因为在这个轮围界里,只有天和人曾经做过修行积累;在其他轮围界里,则是天众更为殊胜。因此说“在十千轮围界中铺开智网”。而“铺开智网”,就是指为了辨明那些有情的意乐等差别,让智慧生起运作。所以他说“观察世间”,意思是观察有情世间,特别是指深入洞察并看清有情的意乐、随眠、行为、胜解等种种差别。“让他们诵说吉祥”,意思是“这将成为他们未来获得殊胜成就的智慧依据,长久地给他们带来利益和安乐”。“以三藏审察”,意思是从三藏出发,按照一法、二法等的归纳方式去审察、去验证。想要了解的意义就是问题,而这些问题在这部经里按一法等方式出现,一共有一千零一十四个,所以说“以一千零一十四问来庄严”。这里先把要讲的论题总合起来显示出来,接下来在经文结尾处,会以“按一法说了两个问题”等方式,逐项分别计算,亲自显示出来。巴利
296.Dasasahassacakkavāḷeti buddhakhettabhūte dasasahassaparimāṇe cakkavāḷe. Tattha hi imasmiṃ cakkavāḷe devamanussāyeva katādhikārā, itaresu devā visesabhāgino. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dasasahassacakkavāḷe ñāṇajālaṃ pattharitvā’’ti. Ñāṇajālapattharaṇanti ca tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ āsayādivibhāvanavasena ñāṇassa pavattanameva. Tenāha ‘‘lokaṃ volokayamāno’’ti, sattalokaṃ byavalokayamāno āsayānusayacaritādhimuttiādike visesato ogāhetvā passantoti attho. Maṅgalaṃ bhaṇāpessanti ‘‘taṃ tesaṃ āyatiṃ visesādhigamassa vijjāṭṭhānaṃ hutvā dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya bhavissā’’ti. Tīhi piṭakehi sammasitvāti tipiṭakato ekakadukādinā saṅgahetabbassa saṅgaṇhanavasena sammasitvā vīmaṃsitvā. Ñātuṃ icchitā atthā pañhā, te pana imasmiṃ sutte ekakādivasena āgatā sahassaṃ, cuddasa cāti āha ‘‘cuddasapañhādhikena pañhasahassena paṭimaṇḍetvā’’ti. Evamidha sampiṇḍetvā dassite pañhe parato suttapariyosāne ‘‘ekakavasena dve pañhā kathitā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.349) vibhāgena parigaṇetvā sayameva dassessati.
乌巴他咖新集会堂的注释巴利
Ubbhatakanavasandhāgāravaṇṇanā
297 297. 因为它是高高竖立起来的,所以那座集会堂就像是从地面拔升起来一样,因此得到了“拔起者”(ubbhataka)这个名字。所以他说“或者因为高耸,才这样说”。集会堂大厅就是一座大讲堂。因为国王们在出征等时候,站在那里说“这么多人往前走,那么多人在后面”等等,坐在那里制定规约、划定界限,所以那个地方就叫“集会堂”。另外,从出征的地方回来以后,直到用牛粪涂抹等方式把住处修整好为止,那一两天里国王们就在那里停留歇息,所以也叫集会堂;那也是那些国王共同议事和教导的地方,所以也叫集会堂。又或者说,因为他们聚集在那里,商量“这个时节该耕种,这个时节该播种”等等居家事务,把千头万绪的居家生活维持打理下去,所以那里就是维系居家事务的“集会堂”,那座讲堂也就是集会堂大厅。“天”指的是家宅天。因为从来没有人进去住过,所以说“或者任何人类”。不过为了施工,人们确实在那里安排了座位等。为了说明天女们这样欢喜满足地正念思惟:“世尊亲自来到我们这里,完全是我们福德的缘故,我们真是有福啊”,所以说了“由我们……”等话。巴利
297. Uccādhiṭṭhānatāya taṃ sandhāgāraṃ bhūmito ubbhataṃ viyāti ‘‘ubbhataka’’nti nāmaṃ labhati. Tenāha ‘‘uccattā vā evaṃ vutta’’nti. Sandhāgārasālāti ekā mahāsālā. Uyyogakaraṇādīsu hi rājāno tattha ṭhatvā ‘‘ettakā purato gacchantu, ettakā pacchā’’tiādinā tattha nisīditvā sandhaṃ karonti mariyādaṃ bandhanti, tasmā taṃ ṭhānaṃ ‘‘sandhāgāra’’nti vuccati. Uyyogaṭṭhānato ca āgantvā yāva gehaṃ gomayaparibhaṇḍādivasena paṭijagganaṃ karonti, tāva ekaṃ dve divase te rājāno tattha santhambhantītipi sandhāgāraṃ, tesaṃ rājūnaṃ saha atthānusāsanaagārantipi sandhāgāranti. Yasmā vā te tattha sannipatitvā ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle kasituṃ vaṭṭati, imasmiṃ kālevapitu’’ntiādinā gharāvāsakiccaṃ sandharanti, tasmā chiddāvachiddaṃ gharāvāsaṃ tattha sandharantītipi sandhāgāraṃ, sā eva sālāti sandhāgārasālā. Devatāti gharadevatā. Nivāsavasena anajjhāvutthattā ‘‘kenaci vā manussabhūtenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kammakaraṇavasena pana manussā tattha nisajjādīni kappesumeva. ‘‘Sayameva pana satthu idhāgamanaṃ amhākaṃ puññavaseneva, aho mayaṃ puññavanto’’ti haṭṭhatuṭṭhā evaṃ sammā cintesunti dassento ‘‘amhehī’’tiādimāha.
298 阿塔卡是指为了作画而绑起来的床架。刚完成是说,就在那个时候,集会堂里的新建工程已经完工,因此他用“刚作成”等话,把前面已经说过的意思阐明出来。林园就是应当去游乐的地方,拥有这些林园的人就是好乐林园者。铺设就是铺开的东西,在这里,一切全都铺展开来,所以叫一切皆铺,这是按中性词来解释。因此说:就像一切都已经被铺设好一样。巴利
298.Aṭṭakāti cittakammakaraṇatthaṃ baddhā mañcakā. Muttamattāti tāvadeva sandhāgāre navakammassa niṭṭhāpitabhāvamāha, tena‘‘acirakārita’’ntiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāveti. Araññaṃ ārāmo āramitabbaṭṭhānaṃ etesanti araññārāmā. Santharaṇaṃ santhari, sabbo sakalo santhari etthāti sabbasanthari, bhāvanapuṃsakaniddesoyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yathā sabbaṃ santhataṃ hoti, eva’’nti.
299 “一切处皆清净悦意”是说,从四面八方、每一个部分都能让人生起清净信心,并且具足善巧。“占据八十肘的范围”这句话,是因为诸佛身体的光明本来就遍满八十肘的范围,所以这样说。若以神通威力,则能照亮无边无量的处所。六色就是青、黄、赤、白、橙、光耀这六种颜色。“一切方位”是就身体光明广大遍照而说的。巴利
299.Samantapāsādikoti samantato sabbabhāgena pasādāvaho cāturiyaso. ‘‘Asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhātī’’ti idaṃ buddhānaṃ kāyappabhāya pakatiyā asītihatthe ṭhāne abhibyāpanato vuttaṃ. Iddhānubhāvena pana anantaṃ aparimāṇaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjotateva. Nīlapītalohitodātamañjaṭṭhapabhassaravasena chabbaṇṇā. Sabbe disābhāgāti sarīrappabhāya bāhullato vuttaṃ.
被云、雾之类染污的天空,空荡荡的,不好看;而布满星辰的夜空,却因众星的光芒向四周闪耀而璀璨夺目。所以经文说“犹如星辰升起的虚空”。“一切皆盛开”,是指从根部一直到枝梢全都开满了花。“宛如排成行列而安置”等,是假设性的譬喻。这里确实用了“犹如”这个词。“以威光压倒他方威光”,意思是凭自身的光彩胜过他们的光彩。至于“即使所有比丘全部到场”这句话,应当就他们“少欲”等品质,按世间功德的角度来理解。因为并非所有比丘都具足十种论事的功德。因此说“忆念经典……乃至……证得阿罗汉果”。所以在场那些圣者,是通过全部语句而获得觉悟的;而凡夫比丘,则是通过那些开显世间功德的语句获得启发的,因此不像前面那样单独列出“八十位大长老”等,因为此前已经包含了那些证得阿罗汉果的人。巴利
Abbhamahikādīhi upakkiliṭṭhaṃ suññaṃ na sobhati, tārakācitaṃ pana antalikkhaṃ tāsaṃ pabhāhi samantato vijjotamānaṃ virocatīti āha ‘‘samuggatatārakaṃ viya gaganatala’’nti. Sabbapāliphulloti mūlato paṭṭhāya yāva sākhaggā phullo. ‘‘Paṭipāṭiyāṭhapitāna’’ntiādi parikappūpamā. Tathā hi viya-saddaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Siriyā siriṃ abhibhavamānaṃ viyāti attano sobhāya tesaṃ sobhanti attho. ‘‘Bhikkhūpi sabbevā’’ti idaṃ nesaṃ ‘‘appicchā’’tiādinā vuttaguṇesu lokiyaguṇānaṃ vasena yojetabbaṃ. Na hi te sabbeva dasakathāvatthulābhino. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘suttantaṃ āvajjetvā…pe… arahattaṃ pāpuṇissantī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.296). Tasmā ye tattha ariyā, te sabbesampi padānaṃ vasena bodhitā honti. Ye pana puthujjanā, te lokiyaguṇadīpakehi padehīti na tathā heṭṭhā ‘‘asītimahātherā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pubbe arahattabhāgino gahitā.
佛的仪容,是以色身圆满具备三十二大人相、八十随形好而为庄严,并显现身光、臂光与光鬘交相辉映的绚烂。世尊放出六色佛光,在瞻仰、顾视等动作中,达到了至高无上的殊胜境地,这是唯佛独有的、彻底寂静的佛之威仪。“于此”,指的就是在那集会之中。巴利
Rūpakāyassa asītianubyañjana-paṭimaṇḍita-dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇakāyappabhābyāmappabhāketumālāvicittatāva (dī. ni. 2.33; 3.200; ma. ni. 2.385) buddhaveso. Chabbaṇṇā buddharasmiyo vissajjentassa bhagavato kāyassa ālokitavilokitādīsu paramukkaṃsagato buddhāveṇiko accantupasamo buddhavilāso. Assanti tassaṃ.
与集会堂随喜相关的部分,是按照“能挡住寒冷、炎热”这类方式,说明与集会堂功德相应的、能带来建造集会堂善业果报的内容。杂论则是没有收入结集的种种详细解说,为了契合听法者的意乐,用种种广大而多方面的因缘和譬喻来庄严,具备多种理趣而显得丰富多彩。因此才说“那时……”等等。这样说,是因为它以没有杂染而极其清净、广大无量的义理,能让听法者平息身心的热恼,就像使空中恒河降下一样;又因为对别人来说极难做到、义理深具精要,就像从大地中汲取地味一样;又因为通过说明动摇的因缘处所,把前后文连贯起来,就像抓住大阎浮树顶摇动它一样;又因为把教说汇归到四谛的终点,让听法者获得义的通达和法的通达,从而施予甘美甜蜜的法味滋养,就像接上水管引水给人喝一样。蜜团,就是一层蜂蜜。巴利
Sandhāgārānumodanapaṭisaṃyuttāti ‘‘sītaṃ uṇhaṃ paṭihantī’’tiādinā (cūḷava. 295, 315) nayena sandhāgāraguṇūpasañhitā sandhāgārakaraṇapuññānisaṃsabhāvinī. Pakiṇṇakakathāti saṅgītianāruḷhā suṇantānaṃ ajjhāsayānurūpatāya vividhavipulahetūpamāsamālaṅkatā nānānayavicittā vitthārakathā. Tenāha ‘‘tadā hī’’tiādi. Ākāsagaṅgaṃ otārento viya nirupakkilesatāya suvisuddhena, vipulodāratāya aparimeyyena ca atthena suṇantānaṃ kāyacittapariḷāhavūpasamanato. Pathavojaṃ ākaḍḍhanto viya aññesaṃ sudukkaratāya, mahāsāratāya vā atthassa. Mahājambuṃ matthake gahetvā cālento viya cālanapaccayaṭṭhānavasena pubbenāparaṃ anusandhānato. Yojaniya…pe… pāyamāno viya desanaṃ catusaccayante pakkhipitvā atthavedadhammavedasseva labhāpanena sātamadhuradhammāmatarasūpasaṃharaṇato. Madhugaṇḍanti madhupaṭalaṃ.
300 “默然不动,默然不动”这句话,是为了说明在表达心意时所用的重复语,才说了“无论哪一种”等话。这里的“anu”(随)与“pari”(遍)意思相同,而这里的“观看”也应当理解为世尊用双眼来观看。所以先简略地说“以肉眼……从各处观看之后”,为了详细展示这个意思,才说了“因为以肉眼”等话。用手做出的卑劣行为,叫作“手的恶作”,也就是把所做的卑劣行为本身称为恶作。脚的恶作也应当这样理解。他们一动不动地坐着,既是因为自身善于调伏,也是出于对佛陀的恭敬。“然而又使光明增长”等话,是带着“世尊有时也会这样做”的意趣而说的。因为世尊并不像声闻弟子那样需要修成这种智的运用。由于希望肉眼也能对那些被遮蔽、处于远处的色法产生作用,所以应当加以审察。趣向阿罗汉果的,是阿罗汉果的近因。把相安立在眼睛的瞳仁上,是指由于禅修运用的圆满,把在所有这些比丘的眼睛瞳仁中所得的、被称为诸根寂静且远离昏沉睡眠的状态之相,安放在自己心中,加以观察。为什么他会疲倦呢?提出质疑的人的意思是:他可是承载着百千万亿头象的力量啊。老师(佛陀)说,这就是诸行的本性,也就是无常。而那些无常的法,因为完全被生灭所逼迫,所以就是苦。为了说明在这样以苦为本性的事物中,世尊身上之所以生起苦,这个就是原因,才说了“因为世尊”等话。背部生起了风(病),而那也是由过去所造之业为缘。这个意思应当依照《胜义显示》中《优陀那注》里所来的方式来了知。巴利
300.‘‘Tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūta’’nti byāpanicchāyaṃ idaṃ āmeḍitavacananti dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ yandisa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Anuviloketvāti ettha anu-saddo ‘‘parī’’ti iminā samānattho, vilokanañcettha satthu cakkhudvayenapi icchitabbanti ‘‘maṃsacakkhunā…pe… tato tato viloketvā’’ti saṅkhepato vatvā tamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘maṃsacakkhunā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Hatthena kucchitaṃ kataṃ hatthakukkuccaṃ kukatameva kukkuccanti katvā. Evaṃ pādakukkuccaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Niccalā nisīdiṃsu attano suvinītabhāvena, buddhagāravena ca. ‘‘Ālokaṃ pana vaḍḍhayitvā’’tiādi kadāci bhagavā evampi karotīti adhippāyena vuttaṃ. Na hi satthu sāvakānaṃ viya evaṃ payogasampādanīyametaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Tirohitavidūravattanipi rūpagate maṃsacakkhuno pavattiyā icchitattā vīmaṃsitabbaṃ . Arahattupagaṃ arahattapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Cakkhutalesu nimittaṃ ṭhapetvāti bhāvanānuyogasampattiyā sabbesaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cakkhutalesu labbhamānaṃ santindriyavigatathinamiddhatākārasaṅkhātaṃ nimittaṃ attano hadaye ṭhapetvā sallakkhetvā. Kasmā āgilāyati koṭisatasahassahatthināgānaṃ balaṃ dhārentassāti codakassa adhippāyo. Ācariyo esa saṅkhārānaṃ sabhāvo, yadidaṃ aniccatā. Ye pana aniccā, te ekanteneva udayavayapaṭipīḷitatāya dukkhā eva, dukkhasabhāvesu tesu satthu kāye dukkhuppattiyā ayaṃ paccayoti dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Piṭṭhivāto uppajji, so ca kho pubbe katakammapaccayā. Svāyamattho paramatthadīpaniyaṃ udānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatanayeneva veditabbo.
分裂尼干陀事的注释巴利
Bhinnanigaṇṭhavatthuvaṇṇanā
301 正如上面在《清净经注》(《长部注》3.164)中已经说过的。巴利
301.Heṭṭhā vuttameva pāsādikasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.164).
302 想要讲说“善说之法”,就是自己先把法弄明白,然后想要说法;或者,想要把导师所善说的法,亲自为比丘们宣讲。因为声闻弟子们正是从各处取来导师所宣说的法,再为同梵行的伙伴们宣讲。巴利
302.Svākhyātaṃ dhammaṃ desetukāmoti svākhyātaṃ katvā dhammaṃ kathetukāmo, satthārā vā svākhyātaṃ dhammaṃ sayaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kathetukāmo. Satthārā desitadhammameva hi tato tato gahetvā sāvakā sabrahmacārīnaṃ kathenti.
303 “应当由和合的人共同宣说”,意思是:应当彼此和合一致地宣说,也就是应当一起诵习并加以解说。不过,为了说明大众是如何和合结集的,又说了“以同一之语”等话。“以同一之语”,是指因为没有对立,所以语言一致。因此他说“以不相违之语”等。“想要显示和合之味”:在那次结集此法时,由于善于说法,希望能体会到和合之味,所以那位尊者想用一法、二法、三法等多种方式,来显示和合之味。“一切有情”,是指没有剩余的一切有情;“食住立者”,是指以缘为安住之根据者,也就是依缘而生起、存活。对于有不同作用的词,也有外在义复合词,如“胸毛”。他说“从食物而住立,这些是食住立者”。“以此而住立”即住立,食物是这些的住立,因此是“食住立者”;这里也可以这样理解复合词的分解。所谓“食住立者”,即依缘而住立者,也就是依赖缘而存续者,这是其含义。这里“食”一词的缘之义,如“此食对于未生起的欲贪等之生起”等处那样。如此,以“一切有情”这一说法,也把无想有情包括在内了。然而,这种食住立性,从究竟义上说,是行法,不是有情法。因此,注释师们说:“在说到‘一切有情是食住立者’之处,应知这是行世间。”如果这样,那么“一切有情”这句话又怎么讲呢?这是以人为所依的说法,所以这不是过失。正如世尊所说:“诸比丘,比丘于一法中正厌离、正离贪、正解脱、正见边际、正通达,于现法自身作证,成为苦的终结者。哪一法呢?‘一切有情是食住立者’。”这一法,即“一切有情是食住立者”这个以人为所依的说法,通过食的方便,一般地宣说了这一切行的依缘而住立,也就是缘法。这食名为一法。以如实了知,即以如实自性而现证。以正善宣说,即以现证的方式正确地宣说。巴利
303.Samaggehi bhāsitabbanti aññamaññaṃ samaggehi hutvā bhāsitabbaṃ, sajjhāyitabbañceva vaṇṇetabbañcāti attho. Yathā pana samaggehi saṅgāyanaṃ hoti, tampi dassetuṃ ‘‘ekavacanehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekavacanehīti virodhābhāvena samānavacanehi. Tenāha ‘‘aviruddhavacanehī’’tiādi. Sāmaggirasaṃ dassetukāmoti yasmiṃ dhamme saṅgāyane sāmaggirasānubhavanaṃ icchitaṃ desanākusalatāya, tattha ekakadukatikādivasena bahudhā sāmaggirasaṃ dassetukāmo. Sabbe sattāti anavasesā sattā , te pana bhavabhedato saṅkhepeneva bhinditvā dassento ‘‘kāmabhavādīsū’’tiādimāha. Byadhikaraṇānampi bāhiratthasamāso hoti yathā ‘‘urasilomo’’ti āha ‘‘āhārato ṭhiti etesanti āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti. Tiṭṭhati etenāti ṭhiti, āhāro ṭhiti etesanti āhāraṭṭhitikāti evaṃ vā ettha samāsaviggaho daṭṭhabbo. Āhāraṭṭhitikāti paccayaṭṭhitikā, paccayāyattavuttikāti attho. Paccayattho hettha āhāra-saddo ‘‘ayaṃ āhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassauppādāyā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.183, 232) viya. Evañhi ‘‘sabbe sattā’’ti iminā asaññasattāpi pariggahitā honti. Sā panāyaṃ āhāraṭṭhitikatā nippariyāyato saṅkhāradhammo, na sattadhammo. Tenevāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā ‘‘sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikāti āgataṭṭhāne saṅkhāraloko veditabbo’’ti (visuddhi. 1.136; pārā. aṭṭha. verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; udā. aṭṭha. 30; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 65; udā. aṭṭha. 186) yadi evaṃ ‘‘sabbe sattā’’ti idaṃ kathanti? Puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanāti nāyaṃ doso. Yathāha bhagavā ‘‘ekadhamme bhikkhave bhikkhu sammā nibbindamāno sammā virajjamāno sammā vimuccamāno sammā pariyantadassāvī sammattaṃ abhisamecca diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro hoti, katamasmiṃ ekadhamme? Sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti (a. ni. 10.27) eko dhammoti ‘‘sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti yvāyaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya kathāya sabbesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ paccayāyattavuttitāya āhārapariyāyena sāmaññato paccayadhammo vutto, ayaṃ āhāro nāma eko dhammo. Yāthāvato ñatvāti yathāsabhāvato abhisambujjhitvā. Sammadakkhātoti teneva abhisambuddhākārena sammadeva desito.
问难者对所讲的义理不能正确把握,把需要再加以引申的经文词句固执地当作已经确定无疑的义理,停留在“一切有情”这个字面上,就用“难道不是……”等话来责难。导师为了阐明其中无误的、真正想要表达的意思,先说了“并不矛盾”,然后又说“因为他们的禅那成为食”。所谓“禅那”,指的是能带来一蕴有之生、以离想的方式生起的色界第四禅。经典里说“无食”,是针对无想有情的状态中四种食都不存在而说的,并不是说没有缘食。“即便如此”这句话,是为了说明:如果在教法中,对于“食”这个词特别约定俗成的那些用法,在“食之住立者”这里只取那些,就会犯不周遍的过失;而如果把一切缘法都理解为食,又会和这一系列关于食的经文产生矛盾。为了显示这一点,他开始说明。为了展开“并不矛盾”这句话的真正意图,他说了“因为在这经中”等。段食等,通过摄取食素第八等色法,是在直接意义上成为食。比如,段食通过摄取食素第八等来滋养色身,同样,触食等通过引生受等来滋养名身。因此,虽然它们都有令果法生起的作用,但“滋养支持”这一功能在食素等方面尤为突出,被当作主要的食义,所以唯独它们被说为在直接意义上具有食的特相的法。“在这里”,指在这部《结集经》中。以间接的意义说“缘就是食”,也就是说,任何缘法都能带来自己的果报,因此获得了“食”这种间接的称呼。所以他说“因为一切诸法”等。其中,“一切诸法”指一切有为法。现在,为了用经典(《增支部》10.61)来证明所说的这个义理,便说了“因此他这样说”等。这个“此”,指的就是缘食。巴利
Codako vuttampi atthaṃ yāthāvato appaṭipajjamāno neyyatthaṃ suttapadaṃ nītatthato dahanto ‘‘sabbe sattā’’ti vacanamatte ṭhatvā ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādinā codeti. Ācariyo aviparītaṃ tattha yathādhippetamatthaṃ pavedento ‘‘na virujjhatī’’ti vatvā ‘‘tesañhi jhānaṃ āhāro hotī’’ti āha. Jhānanti ekavokārabhavāvahaṃ saññāya virajjanavasena pavattaṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘anāhārā’’ti vacanaṃ asaññabhave catunnaṃ āhārānaṃ abhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na paccayāhārassa abhāvato. ‘‘Evaṃ santepī’’ti idaṃ sāsane yesu dhammesu visesato āhāra-saddo niruḷho, ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti ettha yadi te eva gayhanti, abyāpitadoso āpanno. Atha sabbopi paccayadhammo āhāroti adhippeto, imāya āhārapāḷiyā virodho āpannoti dassetuṃ āraddhaṃ. ‘‘Na virujjhatī’’ti yenādhippāyena vuttaṃ, taṃ vivaranto ‘‘etasmiñhi sutte’’tiādimāha. Kabaḷīkārāhārādīnaṃ ojaṭṭhamakarūpāharaṇādi nippariyāyena āhārabhāvo. Yathā hi kabaḷīkārāhāro ojaṭṭhamakarūpāharaṇena rūpakāyaṃ upatthambheti, evaṃ phassādayo ca vedanādiāharaṇena nāmakāyaṃ upatthambhenti, tasmā satipi janakabhāve upatthambhakabhāvo ojādīsu sātisayo labbhamāno mukhyo āhāraṭṭhoti te eva nippariyāyena āhāralakkhaṇā dhammā vuttā. Idhāti imasmiṃ saṅgītisutte. Pariyāyena paccayo āhāroti vutto sabbo paccayo dhammo attano phalaṃ āharatīti imaṃ pariyāyaṃ labhatīti. Tenāha ‘‘sabbadhammānañhī’’tiādi. Tattha sabbadhammānanti sabbesaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ. Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ suttena (a. ni. 10.61) samatthetuṃ ‘‘tenevāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayanti paccayāhāro.
非异门食也同样被包含在内,因为凡是作为缘,以缘的方式令果生起、又作为支持者带来种种果报,就可以这样说。这里说的“其中”,是指在异门食和非异门食这两种食当中。在无想有情的存在中,虽然非异门食得不到,但缘食还是可以得到的,缘食具有异门食的特征。现在为了详细说明这个道理,才说了“在佛陀还没有出世的时候”等话。因为佛陀出世的时候,依止外道师传之见的人修习禅那不能成功,所以说“在佛陀还没有出世的时候”。佛教徒不生起那样的禅那,所以说“出家于外道处”。因为外道在某种生起中执有解脱想,或者对种种离贪与不离贪之法见到过患与功德,于是生起无想定,生于非闲暇之地,而佛教徒则不如此。在风遍处作预备业之后,或者说在风遍处生起前三禅之后,于第三禅修习自在,从那里出定后,为了证得第四禅而作预备业。因此说“生起第四禅之后”。然而为什么这里只说在风遍处作预备业呢?这里应当说的,在《梵网经注》中已经详细说明了。“咄”是厌离之义的语助词,因此“咄,心”的意思是厌离于心。可厌的此心,愿此我的心成为可厌的。 “确实”是表示推测,以厌离而推测地说。“名”也是表示推测,以此推测心的不存在。为了说明心有与无的过患与功德,才说了“心确实”等话。生起忍与欲之后,即“心的不存在确实是好的、善的”这一见忍,以及对此的欢喜,生起之后。巴利
Nippariyāyāhāropi gahitova hoti, yāvatā sopi paccayabhāveneva janako, upatthambhako ca hutvā taṃ taṃ phalaṃ āharatīti vattabbataṃ labhatīti. Tatthāti pariyāyāhāro, nippariyāyāhāroti dvīsu āhāresu. Asaññabhave yadipi nippariyāyāhāro na labbhati, paccayāhāro pana labbhati pariyāyāhāralakkhaṇo. Idāni imamevatthaṃ vitthārena dassetuṃ ‘‘anuppanne hi buddhe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Uppanne buddhe titthakaramatanissitānaṃ jhānabhāvanāya asijjhanato ‘‘anuppannebuddhe’’ti vuttaṃ. Sāsanikā tādisaṃ jhānaṃ na nibbattentīti ‘‘titthāyatane pabbajitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Titthiyā hi upattivisese vimuttisaññino, aññāvirāgāvirāgesu ādīnavānisaṃsadassino vā hutvā asaññasamāpattiṃ nibbattetvā akkhaṇabhūmiyaṃ uppajjanti, na sāsanikā. Vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvāti vāyokasiṇe paṭhamādīni tīṇi jhānāni nibbattetvā tatiyajjhāne ciṇṇavasī hutvā tato vuṭṭhāya catutthajjhānādhigamāya parikammaṃ katvā. Tenāha ‘‘catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā’’ti. Kasmā panettha vāyokasiṇeyeva parikammaṃ vuttanti? Yadettha vattabbaṃ , taṃ brahmajālaṭīkāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.41) vitthāritameva. Dhīti jigucchanatthe nipāto, tasmā dhī cittanti cittaṃ jigucchāmīti attho. Dhibbatetaṃ cittanti etaṃ mama cittaṃ jigucchitaṃ vata hotu. Vatāti sambhāvane, tena jigucchaṃ sambhāvento vadati. Nāmāti ca sambhāvane eva, tena cittassa abhāvaṃ sambhāveti. Cittassa bhāvābhāvesu ādīnavānisaṃse dassetuṃ ‘‘cittañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvāti ‘‘cittassa abhāvo eva sādhu suṭṭhū’’ti imaṃ diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiṃ, tattha ca abhiruciṃ uppādetvā.
已经这样修习禅那、达到住分的状态、没有退失禅那的人,只有在外道道场出家的修行者才能这样修习禅那,所以经文说“在人间”。心已倾向是指临死的时候心被安放在那个状态。如果是以站姿等方式投生的,那么靠着业力,直到身体坏灭为止,都会以那种方式保持,所以说“他以那种威仪……”等等。巴利
Tathā bhāvitassa jhānassa ṭhitibhāgiyabhāvappattiyā aparihīnajjhānassa titthāyatane pabbajitasseva tathā jhānabhāvanā hotīti āha ‘‘manussaloke’’ti. Paṇihito ahosīti maraṇassa āsannakāle ṭhapito ahosi. Yadi ṭhānādinā ākārena nibbatteyya, kammabalena yāva bhedā tenevākārena tiṭṭheyya vāti āha ‘‘so tena iriyāpathenā’’tiādi.
“即使对色法也是如此”意思是:即使对无心的(色法)也是如此。用“也”这个字,是要显示有心者就更不用说了。那么,针对“无心的这些(法)怎么能受用缘食”这一问难,为了举出例证,说了“犹如……”等话。巴利
Eva rūpānampīti evaṃ acetanānampi. Pi-saddena pageva sacetanānanti dasseti. Kathaṃ pana acetanānaṃ nesaṃ paccayāhārassa upakappananti codanaṃ sandhāya tattha nidassanaṃ dassento ‘‘yathā’’tiādimāha.
有些人只是靠努力精进地度过一天,得到一点这种努力带来的结果,就以此维持生活,他们就是靠精进成果生活的人。而有些人只靠自己的福报结果来生活,他们就是靠福报结果生活的人。至于地狱众生,他们既没有靠努力精进来维持生活,也连一点点福报结果都没有,所以说“那些地狱众生……既不是靠精进成果生活的人,也不是靠福报结果生活的人”。说“意思食”是因为它能摄取结生识,并不是指任何一种结果,质疑者带着这个意图提出责难:“难道有五种食吗?”导师为了说明:如果你指的是非引申义的食,你的责难才有立足之处,但在这里并没有这个立足之处,于是说“五种并非五种,这话不该说”。接着为了说明这里只指引申义的食,又说“不是说缘就是食吗?”因此,因为任何缘都可以被承认为“食”。现在,为了用圣典来证明刚才所说的义理,便说了“凡所缘于……”等话。巴利
Ye uṭṭhānavīriyeneva divasaṃ vītināmetvā tassa nissandaphalamattaṃ kiñcideva labhitvā jīvikaṃ kappenti, te uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvino. Ye pana attano puññaphalameva upajīventi, te puññaphalūpajīvino. Nerayikānaṃ pana neva uṭṭhānavīriyavasena jīvikākappanaṃ, puññaphalassa pana lesopi natthīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ye pana te nerayikā…pe… na puññaphalūpajīvīti vuttā’’ti. Paṭisandhiviññāṇassa āharaṇena manosañcetanāhāroti vuttā, na yassa kassaci phalassāti adhippāyena ‘‘kiṃ pañca āhārā atthī’’ti codeti. Ācariyo nippariyāyāhāre adhippete siyā tava codanāyāvasaro, sā pana ettha anavasarāti dassetuṃ ‘‘pañca na pañcāti idaṃ na vattabba’’nti vatvā pariyāyāhārasseva panettha adhippetabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘nanu paccayo āhārotivuttameta’’nti āha. Tasmāti yassa kassaci paccayassa ‘‘āhāro’’ti icchitattā. Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ pāḷiyā samatthento ‘‘yaṃ sandhāyā’’tiādimāha.
为了说明地狱众生即使从根本食的角度来看也是靠食维持的,所以说了“抟食……中略……成办”。如果这样的话,难道地狱众生也有感受快乐的吗?为了说明并非如此,就说了“因为连唾液……”等等。所谓“三”,是指三种无色食,因为不存在抟食。所谓“其余的”,是指除了无想有情之外的其余众生。因为在欲有等中投生的众生,缘食对一切众生都是共通的。所谓“这个问题”,就是指“哪一法是……”这样提出的那个问题。说已,就是解答完毕。巴利
Mukhyāhāravasenapi nerayikānaṃ āhāraṭṭhitikataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kabaḷīkāraṃ āhāraṃ…pe… sādhetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ nerayikā sukhapaṭisaṃvedinopi hontīti? Noti dassetuṃ ‘‘kheḷopi hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tayoti tayo arūpāhārā kabaḷīkārāhārassa abhāvato. Avasesānanti asaññasattehi avasesānaṃ. Kāmabhavādīsu nibbattasattānaṃ paccayāhāro hi sabbesaṃ sādhāraṇoti. Etaṃ pañhanti ‘‘katamo eko dhammo’’ti evaṃ coditametaṃ pañhaṃ. Kathetvāti vissajjetvā.
在这里,第一个问题的解答和第二个问题的引出并没有像这里这样完成;正是基于同样的意图,从这以后在二法、三法等各个问题中,只在每一处的开头和结尾做了引出和解答,其余地方则没有这样做——这句话就是在说明这一点。因为果依此而生起,所以它是缘,是因;那个又造作自己的果,所以称为行,因此说于此中……中略……被称为行。食缘是指以摄取为特质的缘。这里,摄取以能生为主导,造作则以能资助为主导,这就是它们之间的差别。所以他说这是此处与下面的差别。当以非异门的方式取用食时,虽然说一切众生,但无想有情实际上并没有被包括在内,因此一切这个词只是用于部分范围,就像在一切皆颤栗于刀杖等中一样。在这里,并没有包含诸漏尽者等。由于诸问题的特殊与一般之领域,本应显而易见。然而诸义注师并没有采纳。没有名为法的有为,这是意旨所在。在此处的第二问中,行正是被说为缘,这就是其关联。巴利
‘‘Tattha tattha…pe… dukkhaṃ hotī’’ti etena yathā idha paṭhamassa pañhassa niyyātanaṃ, dutiyassa uddharaṇaṃ na kataṃ, evaṃ iminā eva adhippāyena ito paresu dukatikādipañhesu tattha tattha ādipariyosānesu eva uddharaṇaniyyātanāni katvā sesesu na katanti dasseti. Paṭicca etasmā phalaṃ etīti paccayo, kāraṇaṃ, tadeva attano phalaṃ saṅkharotīti saṅkhāroti āha ‘‘imasmimpi…pe… saṅkhāroti vutto’’ti. Āhārapaccayoti āharaṇaṭṭhavisiṭṭho paccayo. Āharaṇañcettha uppādakattappadhānaṃ, saṅkharaṇaṃ upatthambhakattappadhānanti ayametesaṃ viseso. Tenāha ‘‘ayamettha heṭṭhimato viseso’’ti. Nippariyāyāhāre gahite ‘‘sabbe sattā’’ti vuttepi asaññasattā na gahitā eva bhavissantīti padesavisayo sabba-saddo hoti yathā ‘‘sabbe tasantidaṇḍassā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 130). Na hettha khīṇāsavādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ hoti. Pākaṭo bhaveyya visesasāmaññassa visayattā pañhānaṃ. No ca gaṇhiṃsu aṭṭhakathācariyā. Dhammo nāma natthi saṅkhatoti adhippāyo. Idha dutiyapañhe ‘‘saṅkhāro’’ti paccayo eva kathitoti sambandho.
当他在大菩提座上证得正自觉的那一刻,就亲自证知了一切应知之法,所以经文说“坐在大菩提座上”。所谓“自己”,就是亲自的意思。“堪任长途”是指能承受长途跋涉、能长久安住,以辗转相续的方式来说的。因此说“因为一个……”等。“以辗转说法的方式”,就是依照辗转说法的规则,指的是义理和文句都按次第规整地来说。以单数的方式,是说每一个问题只有一个数目,所以叫单数。以这种单数方式解答完毕,这就是其意趣。巴利
Yadā sammāsambodhisamadhigato, tadā eva sabbañeyyaṃ sacchikataṃ jātanti āha ‘‘mahābodhimaṇḍe nisīditvā’’ti. Sayanti sāmaṃyeva. Addhaniyanti addhānakkhamaṃ cirakālāvaṭṭhāyi pārampariyavasena. Tenāha ‘‘ekena hī’’tiādi. Paramparakathāniyamenāti paramparakathākathananiyamena, niyamitatthabyañjanānupubbiyā kathāyāti attho. Ekakavasenāti ekaṃ ekaṃ parimāṇaṃ etassāti ekako, pañho. Tassa ekakassa vasena. Ekakaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ vissajjananti adhippāyoti.
304 “四蕴”:为了先说明这些蕴以“名之造作”的意义而成为名,然后再讲涅槃,所以这样说。因为涅槃在后文也会被说成具有同样的名性。“它造作名,使趋向”这里,所谓的造名,就是依“名之造作”的意义而称为名,也就是指自性,这是其意。正因为如此,它们这种造名才格外殊胜。因此说“它们生起时便造作自名”等。现在为了以反面例证阐明这个道理,说了“犹如”等话。依彼名之造作,它们才被称为“名”。这个名不是共称名、假立名或功德名,而是化生名。先举出前三种名作为例子,再否定说“受等并非如此”,然后显示另一种名——即由名之造作义而为名,说“受等……”。问:为什么说“大种等”?难道地等在这里不被认为是名,而被认为是色吗?确实如此。不过,像触、受等一样,地等由于化生名性的共通性,被举出来作譬喻:“如地等”,并不是像非色法那样,色法本身就具有名的性质。因为触、受等非色法,始终具有触等名称;而地等则如发、瓶等名称那样,进入名称,不进入其他名称,并且常有自所作的名性。因此,四蕴与涅槃是以名之造作义而为名。或者,如同“adhicanasamphassa”(胜义触)一样,没有“adhicana”(胜义/名言)之名,那些未积集资粮者便无法把握,它们依名而被把握,故名。而色则无需名之造作,以其自身的变坏性而被把握,故为色。因此说“它们生起时”等。这里也应当依照“如地”等所说的方法,以譬喻的方式理解其义。以“过去时”等语,说明受等中名的想称是约定俗成的,并且是无始以来的。巴利
304.Cattārokhandhāti tesaṃ tāva nāmanaṭṭhena nāmabhāvaṃ paṭhamaṃ vatvā pacchā nibbānassa vattukāmo āha. Tassāpi hi tathā nāmabhāvaṃ parato vakkhati. ‘‘Nāmaṃ karoti nāmayatī’’ti ettha yaṃ nāmakaraṇaṃ, taṃ nāmanti āha ‘‘nāmanaṭṭhenāti nāmakaraṇaṭṭhenā’’ti, attanovāti adhippāyo. Evañhi sātisayamidaṃ tesaṃ nāmakaraṇaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘attano nāmaṃ karontāva uppajjantī’’tiādi. Idāni tamatthaṃ byatirekamukhena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yassa nāmassa karaṇeneva te ‘‘nāma’’nti vuccanti, taṃ sāmaññanāmaṃ, kittimanāmaṃ, guṇanāmaṃ vā na hoti, atha kho opapātikanāmanti purimāni tīṇi nāmāni udāharaṇavasena dassetvā ‘‘na evaṃ vedanādīna’’nti te paṭikkhipitvā itaranāmameva nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena nāmanti dassento ‘‘vedanādayo hī’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Mahāpathaviādayo’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu pathaviāpādayo idha nāmanti anadhippetā, rūpanti pana adhippetāti? Saccametaṃ, phassavedanādīnaṃ viya pana pathaviādīnaṃ opapātikanāmatāsāmaññena ‘‘pathaviādayo viyā’’ti nidassanaṃ kataṃ, na arūpadhammā viya rūpadhammānaṃ nāmasabhāvattā. Phassavedanādīnañhi arūpadhammānaṃ sabbadāpi phassādināmakattā, pathaviādīnaṃ kesakumbhādināmantarāpatti viya nāmantarānāpajjanato ca sadā attanāva katanāmatāya catukkhandhanibbānāni nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena nāmaṃ. Atha vā adhivacanasamphasso viya adhivacananāmamantarena ye anupacitasambhārānaṃ gahaṇaṃ na gacchanti, te nāmāyattaggahaṇā nāmaṃ. Rūpaṃ pana vināpi nāmasādhanaṃ attano ruppanasabhāvena gahaṇaṃ upayātīti rūpaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tesu uppannesū’’tiādi. Idhāpi ‘‘yathāpathaviyā’’tiādīsu vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo nidassanavasena āgatattā. ‘‘Atītepī’’tiādinā vedanādīsu nāmasaññā niruḷhā, anādikālikā cāti dasseti.
因此,对于受等虽然具有过去等区分,但依“命名”的意义而成为“名”,这个“名”的性质是决定性的;然而,在完全没有这种区分、唯一本性、恒常的涅槃中,根本谈不上这些。为了说明这一点,所以说“然而涅槃……中略……依名的意义而为名”。“依名的意义”就是依命名的意义。“朝向”是说:因为必定有所缘,所以它们倾向、倾注于那个所缘,离开那些所缘就无法生起,这就是它的意思。“一切”指四蕴和涅槃。受蕴只在某个所缘上生起时,由于与它相应,想蕴等也在那里生起,所以那个所缘就像是在那里使它们朝向,因为没有它它们就不能生起。这个道理对想蕴等也同样适用,所以说“在所缘上互相使对方朝向”。这是就无过失的法,比如道、果等而说的。当然,在某些色法上也能看到所缘增上的情况,但在涅槃中这种作用特别殊胜,因为涅槃具有绝对寂静、最极殊妙的体性,所以说它以所缘增上缘的方式“使自己朝向自己”。正因为如此,圣者们即使一整天都缘念涅槃而度过,也不会感到满足。巴利
Iti atītādivibhāgavantānampi vedanādīnaṃ nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena nāmabhāvo ekantiko, tabbibhāgarahite pana ekasabhāve nicce nibbāne vattabbameva natthīti dassento ‘‘nibbānaṃ pana…pe… nāmanaṭṭhena nāma’’nti āha. Nāmanaṭṭhenāti nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena. Namantīti ekantato sārammaṇattā tanninnā honti, tehi vinā nappavattantīti attho. Sabbanti khandhacatukkaṃ, nibbānañca . Yasmiṃ ārammaṇeyeva vedanākkhandho pavattati, taṃsampayuttatāya saññākkhandhādayopi tattha pavattantīti so ne tattha nāmento viya hoti vinā appavattanato. Esa nayo saññākkhandhādīsupīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ārammaṇe aññamaññaṃ nāmentī’’ti. Anavajjadhamme maggaphalādike . Kāmaṃ kesuci rūpadhammesupi ārammaṇādhipatibhāvo labbhateva, nibbāne panesa sātisayo tassa accantasantapaṇītatākappabhāvatoti tadeva ārammaṇādhipatipaccayatāya ‘‘attani nāmetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi ariyā sakalampi divasabhāgaṃ taṃ ārabbha vītināmentāpi tittiṃ na gacchanti.
“以变坏之义”这句话,是在说明:因为变坏,所以称为色。其中,当冷等相违的缘聚集时,产生不同的状态,这就是变坏。难道非色法在相违的缘聚合时,不也会产生不同的状态吗?确实会,但并不那么明显。因为这里所说的变坏,是就更为明显的层面而言,从举出冷等例子就可以知道。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,因为变坏,所以称为色。以什么变坏?以冷也变坏,以热也变坏……”如此等等。既然如此,为什么梵天界还有色的名称?因为在那里也仍未超出色的自性,所以仍然有色的名称。或者应该这样理解:是依资助缘的力量,而说相违之缘的聚集。另有人主张:“存在于自身相续中、能成为产生不同状态之因的,就是变坏。”在这个说法下,色就是“使变化、使变异”的意思。也有人说:“由撞击而导致变异,‘变坏’这个词就是这样约定俗成的。”在这个说法下,非色法中根本不会有色的名称,因为没有撞击。还有人主张:“由嗔恚而变坏。”他们说“它的,即色的”,但应该说“名色的”才合理。因为正如对色有详细解说,对名也以受蕴等、以慢与调伏等方式,在《清净道论》中已有详细说明。这样,这一对法是在摄取了善三法所包含的自性法之后而展开的。巴利
‘‘Ruppanaṭṭhenā’’ti etena ruppatīti rūpanti dasseti. Tattha sītādivirodhipaccayasannipāte visadisuppatti ruppanaṃ. Nanu ca arūpadhammānampi virodhipaccayasamāgame visadisuppatti labbhatīti? Saccaṃ labbhati, na pana vibhūtataraṃ. Vibhūtatarañhettha ruppanaṃ adhippetaṃ sītādiggahaṇato. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ruppatīti kho bhikkhave tasmā ‘rūpa’nti vuccati. Kena ruppati? Sītenapi ruppati, uṇhenapi ruppatī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 3.79). Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ brahmaloke rūpasamaññāti? Tatthāpi taṃsabhāvānativattanato hotiyeva rūpasamaññā. Anuggāhakapaccayavasena vā visadisapaccayasannipāteti evamattho veditabbo. ‘‘Yo attano santāne vijjamānassayeva visadisuppattihetubhāvo, taṃ ruppana’’nti aññe. Imasmiṃ pakkhe rūpayati vikāramāpādetīti rūpaṃ. ‘‘Saṅghaṭṭanena vikārāpattiyaṃ ruppana-saddo niruḷho’’ti keci. Etasmiṃ pakkhe arūpadhammesu rūpasamaññāya pasaṅgo eva natthi saṅghaṭṭanābhāvato. ‘‘Paṭighato ruppana’’nti apare. ‘‘Tassāti rūpassā’’ti vadanti, nāmarūpassāti pana yuttaṃ. Yathā hi rūpassa, evaṃ nāmassāpi vedanākkhandhādivasena, madanimmadanādivasena ca vitthārakathā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.456) vuttā evāti. Iti ayaṃ duko kusalattikena saṅgahite sabhāvadhamme pariggahetvā pavattoti.
所谓无明,就是对不该认定的“我、命者、女人、男人”这类东西去认定,所以叫无明;对应该认清楚的“苦、集”这类东西却不认清楚,所以叫无明;对一切法聚都让它变得不被了知,从这个意义上说,就是无明;在无始轮回中驱使众生到处奔走,所以叫无明。但从义理上说,它其实就是覆盖苦等四圣谛自性的迷惑,因此说“于苦等中不知”。所谓有贪求,就是依对欲有等的贪求而生起的渴爱,因此说“于诸有中,有欲”等。这样举出这两种法,是为了显示轮回根本的现起。巴利
Avijjāti avindiyaṃ ‘‘attā, jīvo, itthī, puriso’’ti evamādikaṃ vindatīti avijjā. Vindiyaṃ ‘‘dukkhaṃ, samudayo’’ti evamādikaṃ na vindatīti avijjā. Sabbampi dhammajātaṃ aviditakaraṇaṭṭhena avijjā. Antarahite saṃsāre satte javāpetīti avijjā. Atthato pana sā dukkhādīnaṃ catunnaṃ saccānaṃ sabhāvacchādako sammoho hotīti āha ‘‘dukkhādīsu aññāṇa’’nti . Bhavapatthanā nāma kāmabhavādīnaṃ patthanāvasena pavattataṇhā. Tenāha ‘‘yo bhavesu bhavacchando’’tiādi. Iti ‘‘ayaṃ duko vaṭṭamūlasamudācāradassanatthaṃ gahito.
有见:把五蕴执取为“我以及世间”,然后以“将会存在”的方式执取它,安住于这种见解,就是常见,这是它的含义。因此说“有被称为”等。“将会存在”就是有,意思是在一切时都存在。常就是常的状态。非有见:同样把五蕴执取为“我”和“世间”,然后以“将不存在”的方式执取它,安住于这种见解,就是断见,这是它的含义。因此说“非有被称为”等。将不存在、将灭、将断,就是非有,就是断灭。巴利
Bhavadiṭṭhīti khandhapañcakaṃ ‘‘attā ca loko cā’’ti gāhetvā taṃ ‘‘bhavissatī’’ti gaṇhanavasena niviṭṭhā sassatadiṭṭhīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘bhavo vuccatī’’tiādi. Bhavissatīti bhavo, tiṭṭhati sabbakālaṃ atthīti attho. Sassatanti sassatabhāvo. Vibhavadiṭṭhīti khandhapañcakameva ‘‘attā’’ti ca ‘‘loko’’ti ca gahetvā taṃ ‘‘na bhavissatī’’ti gaṇhanavasena niviṭṭhā ucchedadiṭṭhīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘vibhavo vuccatī’’tiādi. Vibhavissati vinassati ucchijjatīti vibhavo, ucchedo.
“凡不感到惭耻”这句话的意思是:由于某种法,与它相应的法聚或个人不感到惭耻、不羞愧;或者把性别转换一下,应理解为“该法”。“于应羞耻处”中的具格词形是受格的意义,意思是:不厌恶那些与应羞耻相应的身恶行等法。“无惭”就是对恶行不厌弃。“凡不感到愧惧”这里也应按照前面所说的方式理解其义。“于应愧惧处”则是表因义的具格词形,意思是:以那些与应愧惧相应、作为愧惧之因的身恶行等为因。“于应羞耻处”在这里也同样可以这样理解。“不畏惧的状态”就是指面对恶行时不惊惧的样子。巴利
Yaṃ na hirīyatīti yena dhammena taṃsampayuttadhammasamūho, puggalo vā na hirīyati na lajjati, liṅgavipallāsaṃ vā katvā yo dhammoti attho veditabbo. Hirīyitabbenāti upayogatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, hirīyitabbayuttakaṃ kāyaduccaritādidhammaṃ na jigucchatīti attho. Nillajjatāti pāpassa ajigucchanā. Yaṃ na ottappatīti etthāpi vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Ottappitabbenāti pana hetuatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, ottappitabbayuttakena ottappassa hetubhūtena kāyaduccaritādināti attho. Hirīyitabbenāti etthāpi vā evameva attho veditabbo. Abhāyanakaākāroti pāpato anuttāsanākāro.
“凡感到惭耻”等处,应按照前面无惭无愧二法中所说的方式理解其含义。这种心生起的原因来自自身内部的种族等,所以叫“内生”。这种心生起的原因在自身内部之外、在别人的相续中,所以叫“外生”。以自己为尊主,就是“以己为尊”;因为它是从内生、从以己为尊而来的,所以叫“以己为尊的”。“以世间为尊的”在这里也同样理解。安住在惭的自性上,就是以厌恶恶行的样子而安住。安住在畏的自性上,就是以对恶行恐惧的样子而安住。这里只是根据不同情况分别说明惭和愧是“内生”等,并不是说它们有时会互相分离。因为实际上不存在没有畏惧的惭耻,也不存在没有惭耻的对恶行的畏惧。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ hirīyatī’’tiādīsu anantaraduke vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Niyakajjhattaṃ jātiādisamuṭṭhānaṃ etissāti ajjhattasamuṭṭhānā. Niyakajjhattato bahibhāvato bahiddhā parasantāne samuṭṭhānaṃ etissāti bahiddhā samuṭṭhānā. Attā eva adhipati attādhipati, ajjhattasamuṭṭhānattā eva attādhipatito āgamanato attādhipateyyā. Lokādhipateyyanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Lajjāsabhāvasaṇṭhitāti pāpato jigucchanarūpena avaṭṭhitā. Bhayasabhāvasaṇṭhitanti tato uttāsanarūpena avaṭṭhitaṃ. Ajjhattasamuṭṭhānāditā ca hirottappānaṃ tattha tattha pākaṭabhāvena vuttā, na pana tesaṃ kadācipi aññamaññavippayogato. Na hi lajjanaṃ nibbhayaṃ, pāpabhayaṃ vā alajjanaṃ atthīti.
“苦”的意思是艰难,或者不可意的意思。“于违逆之执取者”:就是对法随法行作逆向执取的人。把与那法随法行相反的邪行当作快乐、当作可意,这就是“以违逆为乐者”,即安住于那种以违逆为乐的状态中。这样的人,对于作为教诫的教法次第和教诫者,都没有恭敬之心,所以说“于不恭敬”。“彼之业”:那个难以教导的人,以不恭敬为因而生起的思,就是“难训导”。“彼之性”:就是如前所说的那种“难训导”的存在状态,即“难训导性”,从意义上就是难训导本身。因此说“那从意义上就是行蕴”。因为以思为主导,所以对行蕴这样说。“以如是之相”:以不顺从执取之相。为了说明众生由于与无信、破戒等恶法相应而名为恶人,所以说“那些无信的众生”等。以那种思,众生名为与恶人交往,那种思就是恶友性;或者,四无色蕴以那种方式生起,就是恶友性。说明这一点时说“那从意义上也应看作如同难训导性”。巴利
Dukkhanti kicchaṃ, aniṭṭhanti vā attho. Vippaṭikūlagāhimhīti dhammānudhammapaṭipattiyā vilomagāhake. Tassā eva vipaccanīkaṃ duppaṭipatti sātaṃ iṭṭhaṃ etassāti vipaccanīkasāto, tasmiṃ vipaccanīkasāte. Evaṃbhūto ca ovādabhūte sāsanakkame ovādake ca ādarabhāvarahito hotīti āha ‘‘anādare’’ti. Tassa kammanti tassa dubbacassa puggalassa anādariyavasena pavattacetanā dovacassaṃ. Tassa bhāvoti tassa yathāvuttassa dovacassassa atthibhāvo dovacassatā, atthato dovacassameva. Tenevāha ‘‘sā atthato saṅkhārakkhandho hotī’’ti. Cetanāppadhānatāya hi saṅkhārakkhandhassa evaṃ vuttaṃ. Etenākārenāti appadakkhiṇaggāhitākārena. Assaddhiyadussīlyādipāpadhammayogato puggalā pāpā nāma hontīti dassetuṃ ‘‘ye te puggalā assaddhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yāya cetanāya puggalo pāpasampavaṅko nāma hoti, sā cetanā pāpamittatā, cattāropi vā arūpino khandhā tadākārappavattā pāpamittatāti dassento ‘‘sāpi atthato dovacassatā viya daṭṭhabbā’’ti āha.
“言语令人感到愉快”这句话,是在说:对于那位右绕而行、随顺合意、怀着恭敬的人,言语是令人愉快的,因此说“善言”等等。又像“信等善法是他的朋友,所以称他为善知识”这样,因为想要紧接着那一对法的含义。因此他说:“善言性……中间省略……应当按前面所说的相反方式来了知。”二者,就是善言性和善知识性。那些蕴生起的形态差别,被称为善言性和善知识性;它们既可以是世间的,也可以是出世间的,所以他说“宣说为世间与出世间的混合”。巴利
‘‘Sukhaṃ vaco etasmiṃ padakkhiṇaggāhimhi anulomasāte sādare puggaleti subbacotiādinā, ‘‘kalyāṇā saddhādayo puggalā etassa mittāti kalyāṇamitto’’tiādinā ca anantaradukassa attho icchitoti āha sovacassatā…pe… vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbā’’ti. Ubhoti sovacassatā, kalyāṇamittatā ca. Tesaṃ khandhānaṃ pavattiākāravisesā ‘‘sovacassatā, kalyāṇamittatā’’ti ca vuccanti, te lokiyāpi honti lokuttarāpīti āha ‘‘lokiyalokuttaramissakā kathitā’’ti.
罪聚:依事等种种差别而分开的诸罪,按各自种类归到一起,以类别来执取时,就是诸罪聚。不过,如果不把中间罪也算进去,就有五种罪聚;如果把中间罪也算进去,就有七种罪聚。了知“这些是罪,罪有这么多,罪是这样犯的”的智慧,就是对罪善巧。因此他说“凡于那些……”等。“于那些罪”:就是在那些罪中。其中,对于像事相混杂那样成立、难以了知区分的罪,能无混淆地判定,这特别是对罪善巧;为了显示这一点,才作了第二次“罪”的执取。“与羯磨语同时”:就是与羯磨语一起。由出罪的作用而成为业的语,就是羯磨语,这样的语也包括宣白语,以及“我将观察”这样生起的语。与这羯磨语同时,就在同一刹那,“由这羯磨语,从这罪中出罪;出罪是在第一或第三宣白的可宣处成就,或者在‘我将防护’这句话结束时成就”,像这样了知从种种罪中出罪的界限的智慧,就是对出罪善巧。“出罪”:就是对于所犯的罪,以相应的方法使其没有障碍。这样,以出罪一词,也把忏悔包含在内,其义便得以成立。巴利
Vatthubhedādinā anekabhedabhinnā taṃtaṃjātivasena ekajjhaṃ katvā rāsito gayhamānā āpattiyova āpattikkhandhā. Tā pana antarāpattīnaṃ aggahaṇe pañcapi āpattikkhandhā āpattiyo, tāsaṃ pana gahaṇe sattapi āpattikkhandhā āpattiyo. ‘‘Imā āpattiyo, ettakā āpattiyo, evañca tesaṃ āpajjanaṃ hotī’’ti jānanapaññā āpattikusalatāti āha ‘‘yā tāsa’’ntiādi. Tāsaṃ āpattīnanti tāsu āpattīsu. Tattha yaṃ sambhinnavatthukāsu viya ṭhitāsu, duviññeyyavibhāgāsu ca āpattīsu asaṅkarato vavatthāna, ayaṃ visesato āpattikusalatāti dassetuṃ dutiyaṃ āpattiggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Sahakammavācāyāti kammavācāya saheva. Āpattito vuṭṭhāpanapayogatāya kammabhūtā vācā kammavācā, tathābhūtā anusāvanavācā ceva ‘‘passissāmī’’ti evaṃ pavattavācā ca. Tāya kammavācāya saddhiṃ samakālameva ‘‘imāya kammavācāya ito āpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, hontañca paṭhame vā tatiye vā anusāvaneyyakārappatte, ‘saṃvarissāmī’ti vā pade pariyosite hotī’’ti evaṃ taṃ taṃ āpattīhi vuṭṭhānaparicchedaparijānanapaññā āpattivuṭṭhānakusalatā. Vuṭṭhānanti ca yathāpannāya āpattiyā yathā tathā anantarāyatāpādanaṃ, evaṃ vuṭṭhānaggahaṇeneva desanāyapi saṅgaho siddho hoti.
从这之前是遍作正在进行,从这之后是有分,中间是等至,像这样了知诸等至安止界限的慧,就是对等至善巧。在出定时有善的状态,就是对出定善巧,更何况能明确限定出定界限的智。因此他说“如所限定的时间而住”等。能出定,就是有能力出定。巴利
‘‘Ito pubbe parikammaṃ pavattaṃ, ito paraṃ bhavaṅga majjhe samāpattī’’ti evaṃ samāpattīnaṃ appanāparicchedajānanapaññā samāpattikusalatā. Vuṭṭhāne kusalabhāvo vuṭṭhānakusalatā, pageva vuṭṭhāna paricchedakaraṃ ñāṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yathāparicchinnasamayavasenevā’’tiādi. Vuṭṭhānasamatthāti vuṭṭhāpane samatthā.
关于“界善巧”:这里说的地界等、乐界等、欲界等诸界,都包含在这些界当中。所以,当对这些界的善巧已经显示出来时,对那些界的善巧也就同样显示出来了。因此说了“十八界:眼界……乃至……意识界”,接着又说“对十八界自性善分辨者”。其中,“自性善分辨者”是指如实通达自性的慧。“闻慧、持慧”等等,每一处都要补上“慧”字。对诸界的听闻、受持之慧,属于闻所成;其余的则属于修所成。在这当中,观察慧属于世间,因为那是观慧;其余的则属于出世间。以相、以无常等而作意,就是作意,对此善巧,就是“于作意善巧”。为了说明这种善巧按初、中、后分为三种,所以说“观察慧、通达慧、省察慧”。观察慧是它的初,通达慧是它的中,省察慧是它的后。巴利
‘‘Dhātukusalatā’’ti ettha pathavīdhātuādayo, sukhadhātuādayo, kāmadhātuādayo ca dhātuyo etāsveva antogadhāti etāsu kosalle dassite tāsupi kosallaṃ dassitameva hotīti ‘‘aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo cakkhudhātu…pe… manoviññāṇadhātū’’ti vatvā ‘‘aṭṭhārasannaṃ dhātūnaṃ sabhāvaparicchedakā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha sabhāvaparicchedakāti yathābhūtasabhāvāvabodhinī. ‘‘Savanapaññā dhāraṇapaññā’’tiādinā paccekaṃ paññā-saddo yojetabbo. Dhātūnaṃ savanadhāraṇapaññā sutamayā, itarā bhāvanāmayā. Tatthāpi sammasanapaññā lokiyā. Vipassanā paññā hi sā, itarā lokuttarā. Lakkhaṇādivasena, aniccādivasena ca manasikaraṇaṃ manasikāro, tattha kosallaṃ manasikārakusalatā. Taṃ pana ādimajjhapariyosānavasena tidhā bhinditvā dassento ‘‘sammasanapaṭivedhapaccavekkhaṇapaññā’’ti āha. Sammasanapaññā hi tassā ādi, paṭivedhapaññā majjhe, paccavekkhaṇapaññā pariyosānaṃ.
以文句和义理的方式理解诸处,从而了知它们关于界的特相等分别的智慧,就是领解了知慧。了知观察、通达、省察方法的智慧,就是作意了知慧。因为诸处从义理上说就是诸界,而作意就是依领解等方式对它们作意的方法,所以为了把三种善巧合在一起说明,才说了“再者”等话。如同听闻一样,领解和省察也属于少智之事,因此说“听闻、领解、省察属于世间”。在圣道刹那,观察和作意达到圆满究竟,因此可以取其出世间的异门而说“观察、作意是世间与出世间的混合”。诸缘法如因等,对于它们所生的法来说,以因缘等的方式成为缘,这就是缘相。此缘相依无明等十二缘起支而有十二种,因此说“十二缘相”。依领解等,就是依领解、作意、听闻、观察、通达、省察。巴利
Āyatanānaṃ ganthato ca atthato ca uggaṇhanavasena tesaṃ dhātulakkhaṇādivibhāgassa jānanapaññā uggahajānanapaññā. Sammasanapaṭivedhapaccavekkhaṇavidhino jānanapaññā manasikārajānanapaññā. Yasmā āyatanānipi atthato dhātuyova manasikāro ca uggaṇhanādivasena tesameva manasikāravidhi , tasmā dhātukusalatādikā tissopi kusalatā ekadese katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Savanaṃ viya uggaṇhanapaccavekkhaṇānipi parittañāṇakattukānīti āha ‘‘savana uggahaṇapaccavekkhaṇā lokiyā’’ti. Ariyamaggakkhaṇe sammasanamanasikārānaṃ nipphatti pariniṭṭhānanti tesaṃ lokuttaratāpariyāyopi labbhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sammasanamanasikārā lokiyalokuttaramissakā’’ti. Paccayadhammānaṃ hetuādīnaṃ attano paccayuppannānaṃ hetupaccayādibhāvena paccayabhāvo paccayākāro, so pana avijjādīnaṃ dvādasannaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṅgānaṃ vasena dvādasavidhoti āha ‘‘dvādasannaṃ paccayākārāna’’nti. Uggahādivasenāti uggahamanasikārasavanasammasanapaṭivedhapaccavekkhaṇavasena.
“处”是指它安住,而果则依它而运转;也就是以因和缘的方式去作、去成就,所以叫“因”。对于那些耳识等等来说。这个二法组的含义应当这样连接起来理解:凡是某些法因为作为某法的因,就成了那法的“处”;而正是这些法,对于缺少这个因的法来说,由于不是因,就成了“非处”。在第一种解释方式里,是通过果的差别来说明同一法的处与非处;在第二种解释方式里,虽然果没有差别,却是以缘法的差别来说明那些缘法的处与非处。这就是两者的不同。因为具足正见的圣者,任何时候都不会成为执常的因,但无作见倒可能成为它的因。巴利
Ṭhānañceva tiṭṭhati phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti kāraṇañca hetupaccayabhāvena karaṇato nipphādanato. Tesaṃ sotaviññāṇādīnaṃ. Etasmiṃ duke attho veditabboti sambandho. Ye dhammā yassa dhammassa kāraṇabhāvato ṭhānaṃ, teva dhammā taṃvidhurassa dhammassa akāraṇabhāvato aṭṭhānanti paṭhamanaye phalabhedena tasseva dhammassa ṭhānāṭṭhānatā dīpitā; dutiyanaye pana abhinnepi phale paccayadhammabhedena tesaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānatā dīpitāti ayametesaṃ viseso. Na hi kadāci ariyā diṭṭhisampadā niccaggāhassa kāraṇaṃ hoti, akiriyatā pana siyā tassa kāraṇanti.
正直的状态就是正直,不歪、不曲、不扭,这就是它的含义。为了通过排除不正直来显示这个含义,所以说了“牛尿弯”等话。这个不正直,对比丘们来说,大多数是因为邪命,以及行于非行处而产生的,所以说“有一种人确实……而行”。所谓“牛尿弯”,是指从开始一直到结束,整个修行过程都弯曲。所谓“像前面那样”,是指像前面所说的那种比丘。“月弯”,是指在修行的中间阶段出现弯曲。“犁头弯”,是指在最后阶段出现弯曲。而这个“正直”,则是在一切处都成就了正直。说“正直性”,是对表现方式的说明,意思是说明他的正直以什么方式生起,就说明那种方式。羞耻就是有惭耻心,有惭、有愧,它的状态就是有惭性,也就是惭的意思。有惭耻心的人就是有惭,就像说“戴花鬘的人、有幻术的人”一样,他的状态就是有惭者的状态,那就是惭本身。巴利
Ujuno bhāvo ajjavaṃ, ajimhatā akuṭilatā avaṅkatāti atthoti tamatthaṃ anajjavapaṭikkhepamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘gomuttavaṅkatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Svāyaṃ anajjavo bhikkhūnaṃ yebhuyyena anesanāya, agocaracāritāya ca hotīti āha ‘‘ekacco hi…pe… caratī’’ti. Ayaṃ gomuttavaṅkatā nāma ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā paṭipattiyā vaṅkabhāvato. Purimasadisoti paṭhamaṃ vuttabhikkhusadiso. Candavaṅkatā nāma paṭipattiyā majjhaṭṭhāne vaṅkabhāvāpattito. Naṅgalakoṭivaṅkatā nāma pariyosāne vaṅkabhāvāpattito. Idaṃ ajjavaṃ nāma sabbatthakameva ujubhāvasiddhito. Ajjavatāti ākāraniddeso, yenākārenassa ajjavo pavattati, tadākāraniddesoti attho. Lajjatīti lajjī, hirimā, tassa bhāvo lajjavaṃ, hirīti attho. Lajjā etassa atthīti lajjī yathā ‘‘mālī, māyī’’ti ca, tassa bhāvo lajjībhāvo, sā eva lajjā.
能够忍受他人伤害等行为的忍耐,就是安忍之忍。清净的戒行,就是柔善。因为它乐于行善,或者说是很好地远离了恶、戒除恶的状态,所以叫柔善。因此说它是善乐性。巴利
Parāparādhādīnaṃ adhivāsanakkhamaṃ adhivāsanakhanti. Sucisīlatā soraccaṃ. Sā hi sobhanakammaratatā, suṭṭhu vā pāpato oratabhāvo viratatā soraccaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘suratabhāvo’’ti.
在“名与色”等说法中,还有另一种解释方式:从“命名”这个意义上说,就是不观待其他任何东西,自身本来就有命名的自性,这就是它的意思。因为,如果某物是给别的某物命名,那这个命名就依赖那个被命名的东西,是依赖他者的命名,所以不具有命名的自性。因此,那些由大众给亲属、功德等安立共同名称的施设者,就不能算是“名”。而被别人命名的那个东西,也不具有命名的自性,所以根本就不是“名”。然而,受等法因为是自性成就的,受等法具有命名的自性,所以说它们有“名”的性质。举地等为例,只是要说明“名”是自性成就的,并不是说“名”有共同的体性。不过,按照约定俗成的用法,“名”这个词只用在无色法上,不用在地等色法上,所以地等不是“名”。因为,不像色法那样——抛开地等名称,还可以用头发等名称来称呼——无色法在抛开受等名称之后,并不存在还需要用别的名称来称呼的聚集状态。巴利
‘‘Nāmañca rūpañcā’’tiādīsu ayaṃ aparo nayo – nāmakaraṇaṭṭhenāti aññaṃ anapekkhitvā sayameva attano nāmakaraṇasabhāvatoti attho. Yañhi parassa nāmaṃ karoti, tassa ca tadapekkhattā aññāpekkhaṃ nāmakaraṇanti nāmakaraṇasabhāvatā na hoti, tasmā mahājanassa ñātīnaṃ, guṇānañca sāmaññanāmādikārakānaṃ nāmabhāvo nāpajjati. Yassa ca aññehi nāmaṃ karīyati, tassa ca nāmakaraṇasabhāvatā natthīti, natthiyeva nāmabhāvo. Vedanādīnaṃ pana sabhāvasiddhattā vedanādināmassa nāmakaraṇasabhāvato nāmatā vuttā. Pathavīādi nidassanena nāmassa sabhāvasiddhataṃyeva nidasseti, na nāmabhāvasāmaññaṃ, niruḷhattā pana nāma-saddo arūpadhammesu eva vattati, na pathavīādīsūti na tesaṃ nāmabhāvo. Na hi pathavīādināmaṃ vijahitvā kesādināmehi rūpadhammānaṃ viya vedanādināmaṃ vijahitvā aññena nāmena arūpadhammānaṃ voharitabbena piṇḍākārena pavatti atthīti.
或者也可以说:色法,比如眼等根和色等境,因为它们是能显现的和被显现的,所以即使没有名称也很明显;但无色法不是这样,所以它们就像“增语触”一样,必须依靠名称才能被把握,因此被称为“名”。有对触也不像眼等那样离开名称还能自己显现,所以也被称为“名”——或者因为它属于无色法,和其他的“名”同类而被归入其中;或者因为它和其他的触有共同的性质。从词义上也能说得通:能显现、能变形,所以叫“色”;能令名称生起——也就是因为如果没有名称就不显著,从而生起能显示它的名称——所以叫“名”,这里后一词和前一词的道理都成立。能显现、能变形的意思是:即使没有名称也能显示自己。能令名称生起的意思是:因为没有名称就不显著,所以使自己显示出来的名称生起。所谓“以所缘增上缘性”,虽然色法也有所缘增上缘的性质,但它不像作为究竟安息的涅槃那样以殊胜的导向状态为缘,所以唯独涅槃被称为“名”。巴利
Atha vā rūpadhammā cakkhādayo rūpādayo ca, tesaṃ pakāsakapakāsitabbabhāvato vināpi nāmena pākaṭā honti, na evaṃ arūpadhammāti te adhivacanasamphasso viya nāmāyattaggahaṇīyabhāvena ‘‘nāma’’nti vuttā. Paṭighasamphasso ca na cakkhādīni viya nāmena vinā pākaṭoti ‘‘nāma’’nti vutto, arūpatāya vā aññanāmasabhāgattā saṅgahitoyaṃ, aññaphassasabhāgattā vā. Vacanatthopi hi rūpayatīti rūpaṃ, nāmayatīti nāmanti idha pacchimapurimānaṃ sambhavati. Rūpayatīti vināpi nāmena attānaṃ pakāsetīti attho. Nāmayatīti nāmena vinā apākaṭabhāvato attano pakāsakaṃ nāmaṃ karotīti attho. Ārammaṇādhipatipaccayatāyāti satipi rūpassa ārammaṇādhipatipaccayabhāve na taṃ paramassāsabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ viya sātisayaṃ nāmanabhāvena paccayoti nibbānameva ‘‘nāma’’nti vuttaṃ.
“无明与有爱”这一对,是为了显示众生轮回根本的现起活动。所谓“现起活动”就是samudācāra(活动、现行);轮回的根本本身就是现起活动,所以叫“轮回根本的现起活动”。或者说,通过显示轮回的根本,也就显示了这些根本的进行,因此这些根本的现起活动就叫“轮回根本的现起活动”。这一对的目的就是显示这个意思。巴利
‘‘Avijjāca bhavataṇhā cā’’ti ayaṃ duko sattānaṃ vaṭṭamūlasamudācāradassanattho. Samudācaratīti hi samudācāro, vaṭṭamūlameva samudācāro vaṭṭamūlasamudācāro, vaṭṭamūladassanena vā vaṭṭamūlānaṃ pavatti dassitā hotīti vaṭṭamūlānaṃ samudācāro vaṭṭamūlasamudācāro, taṃdassanatthoti attho.
在每一种情况下,都是依据对“我”和“世间”的执取方式不同,才说“我与世间”:要么是把某一个蕴执取为“我”,而把另一个属于自己的受用对象执取为“世间”;要么是把自己的我执取为“我”,而把他人的我执取为“世间”。就是根据这些不同的情况,才说“我与世间”。巴利
Ekekasmiñca ‘‘attā’’ti ca ‘‘loko’’ti ca gahaṇavisesaṃ upādāya ‘‘attā ca loko cā’’ti vuttaṃ, ekaṃ vā khandhaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā aññaṃ attano upabhogabhūtaṃ ‘‘loko’’ti gaṇhantassa, attano attānaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā parassa attānaṃ ‘‘loko’’ti gaṇhantassa vā vasena ‘‘attā ca loko cā’’ti vuttaṃ.
与学同时应学的法就是“共法”;处在那个共法关系中的人,就是“共法者”;对于那个人,就是“在共法者方面”。把 dovacassa 这个词后面的 āya 不作别的理解,就说成 dovacassāya,意思是导致粗恶语的原因;或者说,粗恶语本身的运作和生起,就是“粗恶语因”。即使是亲近修习,也含有依内心意向而随学、交往的意思,所以说“亲近……交往”。从一切方面恭敬奉侍,就是“全面敬奉”。巴利
Saha sikkhitabbo dhammo sahadhammo, tattha bhavaṃ sahadhammikaṃ, tasmiṃ sahadhammike. Dovacassa-saddato āya-saddaṃ anaññattaṃ katvā ‘‘dovacassāya’’nti vuttaṃ, dovacassassa vā ayanaṃ pavatti dovacassāyaṃ. Āsevantassāpi anusikkhanā ajjhāsayena bhajanāti āha ‘‘sevanā…pe… bhajanā’’ti. Sabbatobhāgena bhatti sambhatti.
与业语同时,是指与出罪、除草、敷具等羯磨的业语,以及“尊者,我犯了某某罪”这类话同时发生。正因为与业语同时,罪出的结果才被确定下来:犯戒的因是以犯相为特征的身业或语业,而出罪的因则是业语。这是从因和果同时被了知的角度,才说“与业语同时”。按照这个道理,“与前行同时”等处也应同样理解。巴利
Saha kammavācāyāti abbhānatiṇavatthārakakammavācāya, ‘‘ahaṃ bhante itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpajji’’ntiādikāya ca saheva. Saheva hi kammavācāya āpattivuṭṭhānañca paricchijjati, ‘‘paññattilakkhaṇāya āpattiyā vā kāraṇaṃ vītikkamalakkhaṇaṃ kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ vā, vuṭṭhānassa kāraṇaṃ kammavācā’’ti kāraṇena saha phalassa jānanavasena ‘‘saha kammavācāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.‘‘Saha kammavācāyā’’ti. Iminā nayena saha parikammenāti etthāpi attho veditabbo.
一切关于界的慧,都是界善巧。其中一部分是作意善巧,本着这个意思,前面那句话里说的也是思择、通达的慧。不过,严格来说,观等慧本身就是作意上的善巧,因此说:正是对这些界的思择、通达、省察之慧。巴利
Dhātuvisayā sabbāpi paññā dhātukusalatā. Tadekadesā manasikārakusalatāti adhippāyena purimapadepi sammasanapaṭivedhapaññā vuttā. Yasmā pana nippariyāyato vipassanādipaññā eva manasikārakosallaṃ, tasmā ‘‘tāsaṃyeva dhātūnaṃ sammasanapaṭivedhapaccavekkhaṇapaññā’’ti vuttaṃ.
在说明“一切与处相关的慧都是处善巧”时,先说了“对十二处的学习、作意、了知之慧”,接着又说“再者……”等等。或者,在这两种情况下,通过对处品和界品圣典的熟诵而作意,这就是作意。同样地,在学习时、作意时、为了理解其义而听闻时、从文本和义理上受持时,以及通过“这叫做眼处,这叫做眼界”等方式,从自性和数目上区分了知的慧,就称为学习慧等。而在“作意”这个词中,所有这四种慧都可以算作学习,由它生起的无常等作意,就称为“学习作意”。了知这些就是它们本身的运作,了知“正如学习已运作,学习就如此运作”,就是学习了知。了知“作意应当这样运作,而它确实这样运作了”,就是“作意了知”。这两者也被称为“作意善巧”。因为即使是学习,由于与作意相应,也应当获得作意的名称。再者,应当被作意的对象,以及作意的方法,这一切都可以称为“作意”,对此善巧,就是作意善巧。思择就是慧,当它与道相应时,能完成无常等思择的作用,因为它断除了常想等。作意与思择相应,当它与道相应时,在这里也能完成无常等作意的作用,所以说“思择与作意是世间和出世间混合的”。以“因为这个原因,所以有那个”的方式,了知无明等作为缘而生起行等的缘性,就是缘起善巧。巴利
Āyatanavisayā sabbāpi paññā āyatanakusalatāti dassento ‘‘dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ uggahamanasikārajānanapaññā’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dvīsupi vā padesu vācuggatāya āyatanapāḷiyā, dhātupāḷiyā ca manasikaraṇaṃ manasikāro. Tathā uggaṇhantī, manasi karontī , tadatthaṃ suṇantī, ganthato ca atthato ca dhārentī, ‘‘idaṃ cakkhāyatanaṃ nāma, ayaṃ cakkhudhātu nāmā’’tiādinā sabhāvato, gaṇanato ca paricchedaṃ jānantī ca paññā uggahapaññādikā vuttā. Manasikārapade pana catubbidhāpi paññā uggahoti tato pavatto aniccādimanasikāro ‘‘uggahamanasikāro’’ti vutto. Tassa jānanaṃ pavattanameva, ‘‘yathā pavattaṃ vā uggahaṃ, evameva pavatto uggaho’’ti jānanaṃ uggahajānanaṃ. ‘‘Manasikāro evaṃ pavattetabbo, evañca pavatto’’ti jānanaṃ manasikārajānanaṃ. Tadubhayampi ‘‘manasikārakosalla’’nti vuttaṃ. Uggahopi hi manasikārasampayogato manasikāraniruttiṃ laddhuṃ arahati. Yo ca manasikātabbo, yo ca manasikaraṇūpāyo, sabbo so ‘‘manasikāro’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati, tattha kosallaṃ manasikārakusalatāti. Sammasanaṃ paññā, sā maggasampayuttā aniccādisammasanakiccaṃ sādheti niccasaññādipajahanato. Manasikāro sammasanasampayutto, so tattheva aniccādimanasikārakiccaṃ maggasampayutto sādhetīti āha ‘‘sammasanamanasikārā lokiyalokuttaramissakā’’ti. ‘‘Iminā paccayenidaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ avijjādīnaṃ saṅkhārādipaccayuppannassa paccayabhāvajānanaṃ paṭiccasamuppādakusalatā.
安忍就是忍受、忍耐。因为把他人的恶行和恶语,通过不与之对抗的方式,安放在自己身上而安住,所以称为安忍。不粗暴,就是不愤怒。由于忧恼而不让他人眼中流泪,就是无泪。心意自悦,就是自己内心喜悦的状态。心的无嗔意乐,就是心意自悦。或者,把心的相续当作一个整体来看,在其中间生起的、伴随喜的意乐,就是心意自悦。或者,自悦的人,他的状态就是自悦性,但为了避免落入人我见,所以说是心的。具有安忍相的忍耐,就是安忍之忍。清净善妙的戒性,就是柔善。因为那是喜爱善行的状态。完全远离恶行、善于调伏的状态,就是离性,所以是柔善。因此说善行之性。巴利
Adhivāsanaṃ khamanaṃ. Tañhi paresaṃ dukkaṭaṃ duruttañca paṭivirodhākaraṇena attano upari āropetvā vāsanaṃ ‘‘adhivāsana’’nti vuccati. Acaṇḍikkanti akujjhanaṃ. Domanassavasena paresaṃ akkhīsu assūnaṃ anuppādanā anassuropo. Attamanatāti sakamanatā. Cittassa abyāpanno sako manobhāvo attamanatā. Cittanti vā cittappabandhaṃ ekattena gahetvā tassa antarā uppannena pītisahagatamanena sakamanatā. Attamano vā puggalo, tassa bhāvo attamanatā, sā na sattassāti puggaladiṭṭhinivāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘cittassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Adhivāsanalakkhaṇā khanti adhivāsanakhanti. Sucisīlatā soraccaṃ. Sā hi sobhanakammaratatā. Suṭṭhu pāpato oratabhāvo viratatā soraccaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘suratabhāvo’’ti.
言语柔和的人称为“柔和者”,他的状态就是柔和性,也就是言语柔和。不过,他们是透过反面的方式来说明它,于是引出圣典中“其中,什么是柔和性”等语句。在这里,“疙瘩”是指有瑕疵的树上流出的树脂凝块,或者长出来的菌类等,人们叫它“疙瘩”。而棉絮树被煮过之后,冒出来的像卵一样的粉块或节瘤,也叫疙瘩。但在这里,因为语言有恼害、粗涩等性质,或者说语言带有疙瘩般的本性,所以称为“疙瘩语”。应当看作像莲花梗一样摩擦着耳道强行进入的粗涩语。由于是嗔怒所生,作为它的眷属,便是与嗔怒相邻的。古时养在闺中成长的女子叫淑女,像淑女那样柔细、柔软的语言,就像淑女一样,所以叫“淑女语”。这里的“于彼处”,既可以连到前面说的“被说出”这个动作上,也可以理解为“在那语言中”。透过“言语柔和的状态”等语句,显示了促使那语言生起的思。友善之人的柔软状态就是柔和,也就是友善而柔软的状态。由于得不到物质利益,也同样得不到法,这两方面就成了裂缝。在自他之间,因为物质和法都得不到而生起的裂缝、间隙、分裂,去安慰、填补、结合,就是和合。为了透过圣典的展示,从它的自性和实践两方面来说明这一点,所以说了“在阿毗达摩中也有”等。不取顶端,就是不把顶端据为己有。授读,就是诵读巴利圣典和义注。解释巴利文句,就是解释巴利文句的意义。说法,就是以流畅善巧的方式宣说佛法。巴利
Sakhilo vuccati saṇhavāco, tassa bhāvo sākhalyaṃ, saṇhavācatā. Taṃ pana byatirekamukhena vibhāventī yā pāḷi pavattā, taṃ dassento ‘‘tattha katamaṃ sākhalya’’ntiādimāha. Tattha aṇḍakāti sadosavaṇe rukkhe niyyāsapiṇḍiyo, ahicchattakādīni vā uṭṭhitāni ‘‘aṇḍakānī’’ti vadanti . Pheggurukkhassa pana kuthitassa aṇḍāni viya uṭṭhitā cuṇṇapiṇḍiyo, gaṇṭhiyo vā aṇḍakā. Idha pana byāpajjanakakkasādibhāvato aṇḍakapakatibhāvena vācā ‘‘aṇḍakā’’ti vuttā. Padumanāḷaṃ viya sotaṃ ghaṃsayamānā pavisantī kakkasā daṭṭhabbā. Kodhena nibbattattā tassa parivārabhūtā kodhasāmantā. Pure saṃvaddhanārī porī, sā viya sukumārā mudukā vācā porī viyāti porī. Tatthāti ‘‘bhāsitā hotī’’ti vuttāya kiriyāyātipi yojanā sambhavati, tattha vācāyāti vā. ‘‘Saṇhavācatā’’tiādinā taṃ vācaṃ pavattayamānaṃ cetanaṃ dasseti. Sammodakassa puggalassa mudukabhāvo maddavaṃ sammodakamudukabhāvo. Āmisena alabbhamānena, tathā dhammena cāti dvīhi chiddo. Āmisassa, dhammassa ca alābhena attano parassa ca antare sambhavantassa hi chiddassa vivarassa bhedassa paṭisantharaṇaṃ pidahanaṃ saṅgaṇhanaṃ paṭisanthāro. Taṃ sarūpato, paṭipattito ca pāḷidassanamukhena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘abhidhammepī’’tiādimāha. Aggaṃ aggahetvāti aggaṃ attano aggahetvā. Uddesadānanti pāḷiyā, aṭṭhakathāya ca uddisanaṃ. Pāḷivaṇṇanāti pāḷiyā atthavaṇṇanā. Dhammakathākathananti sarabhaññasarabhaṇanādivasena dhammakathanaṃ.
“悲”是指悲梵住。“悲的前分”是说它的前分近行定。在巴利语句中,无论哪一种悲都叫作“悲”,但“悲心解脱”则只指已经达到安止的悲。慈也是同样的道理。从“清净”这个词的“状态”义出发,做yya的变化,再把i改成e,这样来解释,所以说“清净即清净状态”。清净状态是清净,这暂且不论,可它怎么又是慈的前分呢?因此才说“此亦已说”等。巴利
Karuṇāti karuṇābrahmavihāramāha. Karuṇāpubbabhāgoti tassa pubbabhāgaupacārajjhānaṃ vadati. Pāḷipade pana yā kāci karuṇā ‘‘karuṇā’’ti vuttā, karuṇācetovimuttīti pana appanāppattāva. Mettāyapi eseva nayo. Suci-saddato bhāve yya-kāraṃ, i-kārassa ca e-kārādesaṃ katvā ayaṃ niddesoti āha ‘‘soceyyanti sucibhāvo’’ti. Hotu tāva sucibhāvo soceyyaṃ, tassa pana mettāpubbabhāgatā kathanti āha ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādi.
“念已忘失”所以叫失念,它的状态就是失念性。这是与念对立的心所法,并不只是念的不存在。因为当对立面存在时,由于它的力量,念就离开、远离了,所以经中说“念的远离”。在“无念”等说法里,否定前缀a应当理解为指对立面,而不是否定补特伽罗。就像葫芦浮在水上,心因此仿佛只是在所缘上漂来漂去,不能沉入,这就是漂浮性。由此,即使把握了所缘也会忘掉、想不起来,这就是忘失性。正如无明是与明对立、应当被明断除的,同样,不正知是与正知对立的,它本身就是无明。巴利
Muṭṭhā sati etassāti muṭṭhassati, tassa bhāvo muṭṭhassaccaṃ, satipaṭipakkho dhammo, na satiyā abhāvamattaṃ . Yasmā paṭipakkhe sati tassa vasena sativigatā vippavutthā nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sativippavāso’’ti. ‘‘Assatī’’tiādīsu a-kāro paṭipakkhe daṭṭhabbo, na sattapaṭisedhe. Udake lābu viya yena cittaṃ ārammaṇe pilavantā viya tiṭṭhati, na ogāhati, sā pilāpanatā. Yena gahitampi ārammaṇaṃ sammussati na sarati, sā sammussanatā. Yathā vijjāpaṭipakkhā avijjā vijjāya pahātabbato, evaṃ sampajaññapaṭipakkhaṃ asampajaññaṃ, avijjāyeva.
根律仪的破坏,就是指根律仪的毁坏。无思择,是指没有反思、以不恰当的方式,对饮食受用中的过患与利益没有审察。巴利
Indriyasaṃvarabhedoti indriyasaṃvaravināso. Appaṭisaṅkhāti apaccavekkhitvā ayoniso ca āhāraparibhoge ādīnavānisaṃse avīmaṃsitvā.
“无思择”是指在应当如此做的时候没有去省察,这是一种名称。无智以无思择为相。“不被动摇的智”是指不被它压倒的智,也就是在各地生起的省察智,以及作为省察顶点的出世间智。从直接的意义上说,道的修习就叫作“修习”,而为了这个目的所做的一切,都是针对正在修习的人而言才是所期望的,不是针对已经修习完毕的人,所以说“对正在修习者生起的力量”。因此说:“对诸善法的修习、多修习。”巴利
Appaṭisaṅkhāyāti itikattabbatāsu appaccavekkhaṇāya nāmaṃ. Aññāṇaṃ appaṭisaṅkhāta nimittaṃ . Akampanañāṇanti tāya anabhibhavanīyaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tattha tattha paccavekkhaṇāñāṇañceva paccavekkhaṇāya muddhabhūtaṃ lokuttarañāṇañca. Nippariyāyato maggabhāvanā bhāvanā nāma, yā ca tadatthā, tadubhayañca bhāventasseva icchitabbaṃ, na bhāvitabhāvanassāti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhāventassa uppannaṃ bala’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘yā kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ āsevanā bhāvanā bahulīkamma’’nti.
确实,在相应诸法当中,坚固的状态也还是属于“力”的范畴;不过,由于不被对立诸法所动摇这一点更为殊胜,所以就说“以不失念而不可动摇之力”。因为能令敌对诸法止息,所以定就是止。因为以无常等种种方式观察,所以观就是慧。“把握了那行相”,意思是把握了等持的行相。心在过去是以怎样的方式不沉滞、不掉举、处于中道、进入修习之道而成为等持的,就把握、觉察那行相。“以相故”,就是以因故。“这同样适用”这句话,是在说明:策励也是在把握那行相之后,对于应当再次令其生起的策励,以因相故,称为策励之相;它的含义应依照止当中所说的方法来理解。策励就是精进,因为它不让心从懈怠那一方沉落下去,而是加以策励。不散乱就是一境性,因为它是散乱和掉举的对立面。由于能生起审虑的作用,所以出世间诸法具有审虑力的意义;同样,由于在把握先前已生起的行相之后,有止与策励在后继续生起,所以说止相与策励相也是混合的。巴利
Kāmaṃ sampayuttadhammesu thirabhāvopi balaṭṭho eva, paṭipakkhehi pana akampanīyatā sātisayaṃ balaṭṭhoti vuttaṃ ‘‘assatiyā akampanavasenā’’ti. Paccanīkadhammasamanato samatho samādhi. Aniccādinā vividhenākārena dassanato vipassanā paññā . Taṃ ākāraṃ gahetvāti samādhānākāraṃ gahetvā. Yenākārena pubbe alīnaṃ anuddhataṃ majjhimaṃ bhāvanāvīthipaṭipannaṃ hutvā cittaṃ samāhitaṃ hoti, taṃ ākāraṃ gahetvā sallakkhetvā. Nimittavasenāti kāraṇavasena. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā paggahova taṃ ākāraṃ gahetvā puna pavattetabbassa paggāhassa nimittavasena paggāhanimittanti imamatthaṃ atidisati, tassattho samathe vuttanayānusārena veditabbo. Paggāho vīriyaṃ kosajjapakkhato cittassa patituṃ adatvā paggaṇhanato. Avikkhepo ekaggatā vikkhepassa uddhaccassa paṭipakkhabhāvato. Paṭisaṅkhānakiccanibbattibhāvato lokuttaradhammānaṃ paṭisaṅkhānabalabhāvo, tathā pubbe pavattākārasallakkhaṇavasena samathapaggāhānaṃ upari pavattisabbhāvato samathanimittadukassapi missakatā vuttā.
破坏按照所受持方式持守的戒,就是违犯。毁坏戒的,是没有守护。毁坏正见的,是染污那依照“有布施”等理路展开的正见。巴利
Yathāsamādinnassa sīlassa bhedakaro vītikkamo. Sīlavināsako asaṃvaro. Sammādiṭṭhivināsikāti ‘‘atthi dinna’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 1.441; 2.94; vibha. 793) nayappavattāya sammādiṭṭhiyā dūsikā.
所谓“戒的成就”,是指从各个方面让戒没有欠缺,所以说“由成就、由圆满”。因为“成就”这个词本身就是圆满的意思。所谓“意戒”,是指为了清净戒而舍断贪欲等。所谓“见圆满的智”,是指以“有布施”等正见的圆满状态而生起的智慧。巴利
Sīlassasampādanaṃ nāma sabbabhāgato tassa anūnatāpādananti āha ‘‘sampādanato paripūraṇato’’ti. Pāripūrattho hi sampadā-saddoti. Mānasikasīlaṃ nāma sīlavisodhanavasena abhijjhādippahānaṃ. Diṭṭhipāripūribhūtaṃ ñāṇanti atthikadiṭṭhiādisammādiṭṭhiyā pāripūribhāvena pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
能够引导到清净,就是说能够成为心清净等更高层清净的助缘。因为只有完全清净的戒,才是那些清净的基础。能够引导到清净的见,是指能够引导、令达到智见清净和究竟清净即涅槃的业自性智等正见。因此说“在对阿毗达摩中”等。在这里,“这是不善业,不是自己的业;这业才是自己的业”——像这样从反面和正面了知业属于自己这一道理的智,就是业自性智。因此说“在这里”等。“由他人所作”这句只是举例:就像由他人所作的那样,即使是由自己所作的,也不算是自己的业;或者,由自己怂恿他人所作的,也算作自己的业——应当这样理解。因为凡是出于怂恿他人而作的,那也叫做自己的业,这就是这里的用意。破坏义利,是因为它破坏现世利益等一切利益。产生义利,是因为它产生现世利益、来世利益和究竟利益。在开始修行时,“无常、苦、无我”这样的言语真实,在通达诸相时的观智是随顺的,因为就在那里通达。而究竟真理即涅槃,并不违背、不冲突,因为它绝对地引导到达。巴利
Visuddhiṃpāpetuṃ samatthanti cittavisuddhiādiuparivisuddhiyā paccayo bhavituṃ samatthaṃ. Suvisuddhameva hi sīlaṃ tassā padaṭṭhānaṃ hotīti. Visuddhiṃ pāpetuṃ samatthaṃ dassananti ñāṇadassanavisuddhiṃ, paramatthavisuddhinibbānañca pāpetuṃ upanetuṃ samatthaṃ kammassakatāñāṇādisammādassanaṃ . Tenāha ‘‘abhidhamme’’tiādi. Ettha ca ‘‘idaṃ akusalaṃ kammaṃ no sakaṃ, idaṃ pana kammaṃ saka’’nti evaṃ byatirekato anvayato ca kammassakatājānanañāṇaṃ kammassakatāñāṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. ‘‘Parena katampī’’ti idaṃ nidassanavasena vuttaṃ yathā parena kataṃ, evaṃ attanā katampi sakakammaṃ nāma na hotīti. Attanā vā ussāhitena parena kataṃpīti evaṃ vā attho daṭṭhabbo. Yañhi taṃ parassa ussāhanavasena kataṃ, tampi sakakammaṃ nāma hotīti ayañhettha adhippāyo. Atthabhañjanatoti diṭṭhadhammikādisabbaatthavināsanato. Atthajananatoti idhalokatthaparalokatthaparamatthānaṃ uppādanato. Ārabbhakāle ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti pavattampi vacīsaccañca lakkhaṇāni paṭivijjhantaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ anulometi tattheva paṭivijjhanato. Paramatthasaccañca nibbānaṃ na vilometi na virodheti ekanteneva sampāpanato.
“智见”就是指以智为体的一种见,用这个来指说道。与它相应的精进,说的是与第一道相应的精进。为了表明一切道智都是见清净,所以又说“再者”等话。为了表明这个方法与《阿毗达摩》经文(《法集论》550)也相合,便说了“而在阿毗达摩中”等话。巴利
Ñāṇadassananti ñāṇabhūtaṃ dassanaṃ, tena maggaṃ vadati. Taṃsampayuttameva vīriyanti paṭhamamaggasampayuttaṃ vīriyamāha. Sabbāpi maggapaññā diṭṭhivisuddhiyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayameva ca nayo abhidhammapāḷiyā (dha. sa. 550) sametīti dassento ‘‘abhidhamme panā’’ti ādiṃ avoca.
因为“悚惧”其实就是带着惭愧的智,所以“悚惧事”就是以恐惧、应当恐惧的见地而运作的智。因此说“生之怖畏”等。“怖畏”就是人们因它而恐惧,所以叫怖畏;生本身就是怖畏,所以叫“生之怖畏”。“应悚惧”就是应当悚惧、应当恐惧、应当惊吓。“处”就是原因,“事”就是意思。“已生起悚惧的人”就是已经生起悚惧的人。“方法精进”就是应当通过方法而发起的精进。巴利
Yasmā saṃvego nāma sahottappañāṇaṃ, tasmā saṃvegavatthuṃ bhayato bhāyitabbato dassanavasena pavattañāṇaṃ . Tenāha ‘‘jātibhaya’’ntiādi. Bhāyanti etasmāti bhayaṃ, jāti eva bhayaṃ jātibhayaṃ. Saṃvejanīyanti saṃvijjitabbaṃ bhāyitabbaṃ uttāsitabbaṃ. Ṭhānanti kāraṇaṃ, vatthūti attho . Saṃvegajātassāti uppannasaṃvegassa. Upāyapadhānanti upāyena pavattetabbaṃ vīriyaṃ.
对“诸善法”,是指戒等没有过失的法。“修习”,是指让它们生起并不断增长。“不满足的人”,是指不会因为“到这里就够了,为什么还要更多”这种退缩心态而满足的人。“更想得到”,是指一次又一次生起想要修行的愿望。“放弃”,是指退缩、觉得自己做不到。欢喜、满意就是知足;没有这种知足,就是“不知足”,这种状态叫“不知足性”。当精进的势头正在持续时,中途就退回去、折返、倒退,这叫“退转”;有这种退转的人就是“退”;没有这种退转的人就是“不退”;这种状态叫“不退转性”。“恭敬行”是指对善法恭敬而行;“常行”是指恒常而行;“不中断行”是指不在中途停顿、不割裂而行;“不退缩之状态”是指不萎靡地行进的状态;“不舍愿性”是指不舍弃对善的意愿;“不舍精进担性”是指在行善时不舍弃精进的担子。“亲近”是指恭敬地亲近。“修习”是指增长、培育。“多作”是指反复地做。巴利
Kusalānaṃ dhammānanti sīlādīnaṃ anavajjadhammānaṃ. Bhāvanāyāti uppādanena vaḍḍhanena ca. Asantuṭṭhassāti ‘‘alaṃ ettāvatā, kathaṃ ettāvatā’’ti saṅkocāpattivasena na santuṭṭhassa. Bhiyyokamyatāti bhiyyo bhiyyo uppādanicchā. Vosānanti saṅkocaṃ asamatthanti. Tussanaṃ tuṭṭhi santuṭṭhi, natthi etassa santuṭṭhīti asantuṭṭhi, tassa bhāvo asantuṭṭhitā. Vīriyappavāhe vattamāne antarā eva paṭigamanaṃ nivattanaṃ paṭivānaṃ, taṃ tassa atthīti paṭivānī, na paṭivānī appaṭivānī, tassa bhāvo appaṭivānitā. Sakkaccakiriyatāti kusalānaṃ karaṇe sakkaccakiriyatā ādarakiriyatā. Sātaccakiriyatāti satatameva karaṇaṃ. Aṭṭhitakiriyatāti antarā aṭṭhapetvā khaṇḍaṃ akatvā karaṇaṃ. Anolīnavuttitāti na līnappavattitā. Anikkhittachandatāti kusalacchandassa anikkhipanaṃ. Anikkhittadhuratāti kusalakaraṇe vīriyadhurassa anikkhipanaṃ. Āsevanāti ādarena sevanā. Bhāvanāti vaḍḍhanā brūhanā. Bahulīkammanti punappunaṃ karaṇaṃ.
“三明”就是宿命智、天眼智和漏尽智,这三种就是三明。因为能破除对立面、又能让过去世曾存在的诸蕴等变得清楚明了,所以特别殊胜的解脱就叫“解脱”。这种殊胜应当通过去除对立面、去除相应障碍来理解。为了说明这两方面,所以说了“在此”等话。其中,由于那种殊胜,诸等至从敌对法中很好地解脱出来,因此没有恐惧,并对所缘感到欢喜;基于那种殊胜,它们因为更加解脱、并对所缘生起胜解,所以叫“胜解”,也就是“心的胜解”。所谓“已解脱故”,是指从一切行当中殊胜地出离,所以称为解脱。巴利
Tisso vijjāti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ, dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇanti imā tisso vijjā. Paṭipakkhavijjhanaṭṭhena pubbe nivutthakkhandhādīnaṃ viditakaraṇaṭṭhena visiṭṭhā muttīti vimutti. Svāyaṃ viseso paṭipakkhavigamanena, paṭiyogivigamanena ca icchitabboti tadubhayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yena visesena samāpattiyo paccanīkadhammehi suṭṭhu muttā, tato nirāsaṅkatāya ārammaṇe ca abhiratā, taṃ visesaṃ upādāya tā adhikaṃ muccanato, ārammaṇe adhimuccanato ca adhimuttiyo nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘cittassa ca adhimuttī’’ti. Muttattāti sabbasaṅkhārehi visesena nissaṭattā vimutti.
“尽智”:通过彻底断除来灭尽烦恼,这就是“尽”,也就是圣道;属于那圣道的智,就是“尽智”。“以结生的方式”:是指那些分别由各道所断的烦恼,在道生起之后,又在蕴的相续中再次结生的方式。“于无生”:是指在各自的果中。“以无生为终点”:能令不再生起的道就是“无生”,在它的终点;或者,就烦恼不再生起这一意义所说的终点,也就是坏灭,这就是它的意思。巴利
Khaye ñāṇanti samucchedavasena kilese khepetīti khayo, ariyamaggo, tappariyāpannaṃ ñāṇaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ.Paṭisandhivasenāti kilesānaṃ taṃtaṃmaggavajjhānaṃ uppannamagge khandhasantāne puna sandahanavasena. Anuppādabhūteti taṃtaṃphale. Anuppādapariyosāneti anuppādakaro maggo anuppādo, tassa pariyosāne, kilesānaṃ vā anuppajjanasaṅkhāte pariyosāne, bhaṅgeti atthoti.
305 305. 为了说明在法上并没有另一个造作者,所以依“作者成就”的方式说“贪染,所以叫贪”。通过它而贪染,或者只是贪染这个行为本身,这个意思用“所作成就”的方式也完全讲得通。在“嗔”“痴”等处,也是同样的道理。贪既是不善,又因为是从非善巧产生的,所以是纯粹的不善;它被称为“根”,是因为它能使与自己相应的诸法稳固建立,而不是因为它能使那些法成为不善。因为不善法的不善性并不是从根而来的,善法等各自的善等性质也不是从根而来的。如果真是那样,那么在两种与痴俱生的心中,痴的不善性就不存在了。这里的“这些”指贪等诸根。而“不贪染,所以是无贪”等说法,则是从对立面的方式来解释的。巴利
305. Dhammato añño kattā natthīti dassetuṃ kattusādhanavasena ‘‘lubbhatīti lobho’’ti vuttaṃ. Lubbhati tena, lubbhanamattametanti karaṇabhāvasādhanavasenapi attho yujjateva. Dussati muyhatīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Akusalañca taṃ akosallasambhūtaṭṭhena ekantākusalabhāvato mūlañca attanā sampayuttadhammānaṃ suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanato, na akusalabhāvasādhanato. Na hi mūlakato akusalānaṃ akusalabhāvo, kusalādīnañca kusalādibhāvo. Tathā sati momūhacittadvaye mohassa akusalabhāvo na siyā. Tesanti lobhādīnaṃ. ‘‘Na lubbhatīti alobho’’tiādinā paṭipakkhanayena.
恶行:从缘、从相应法、从活动方式来看,就是没有好好、正确地生起。丑恶:就是现在令人厌恶,未来也因体性不可爱而如此。以身:通过作为工具的身门。从身:从身门。对于“善行”等词,应当以相反的意义来理解。某一学处,若违犯它便生起由身体所犯的罪,这学处就是于身门所制定的。不违犯就是身善行——这是就遮戒而言;或者就作戒而言,若不做便会犯戒。语恶行与语善行的区分,也应依照同样的方法理解。在身门和语门二处所制定的学处,违犯它才是意恶行,因为意门中并没有制定学处。这应当理解为:在二门中,以不作为而犯戒的方式来说。不违犯如前所说的犯戒,就是意善行。有些人说:“一切学处的不违犯都是意善行。”然而那两种——作戒和指示所制定的学处——其不违犯,有时是身善行,有时是语善行。巴利
Duṭṭhucaritānīti paccayato, sampayuttadhammato, pavattiākārato ca na suṭṭhu asammā pavattitāni. Virūpānīti bībhacchāni sampati, āyatiñca aniṭṭharūpattā. Kāyenāti kāyadvārena karaṇabhūtena. Kāyatoti kāyadvārato. ‘‘Suṭṭhu caritānī’’tiādīsu vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Yassa sikkhāpadassa vītikkame kāyasamuṭṭhānā āpatti hoti, taṃ kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadaṃ. Avītikkamo kāyasucaritanti vārittasīlassa vasena vadati, cārittasīlassapi vā, yassa akaraṇe āpatti hoti. Vacīduccaritasucaritaniddhāraṇampi vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ. Ubhayattha paññattassāti kāyadvāre, vacīdvāre ca paññattassa. Sikkhāpadassa vītikkamova manoduccaritaṃ manodvāre paññattassa sikkhāpadassa abhāvato, tayidaṃ dvāradvaye akiriyasamuṭṭhānāya āpattiyā vasena veditabbaṃ. Avītikkamoti yathāvuttāya āpattiyā avītikkamo manosucaritaṃ. ‘‘Sabbassāpi sikkhāpadassa avītikkamo manosucarita’’nti keci. Tadubhayañhi cārittasīlaṃ uddissapaññattaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ, tassa avītikkamo siyā kāyasucaritaṃ, siyā vacīsucaritanti.
有情因为这种行为而被杀害,所以叫杀生;这样生起的思就是杀生。同样,不与取等也是如此。因此说:杀生等三种就是思。即使是在语门中生起的思,也可以成为身恶行;因为业虽然生起于不同的门,但在多数情况下和惯常行为中,并不舍弃它原本的名称。所以注释师们说:巴利
Pāṇo atipātīyati etāyāti pāṇātipāto, tathāpavattā cetanā, evaṃ adinnādānādayopīti āha ‘‘pāṇātipātādayo pana tisso cetanā’’ti. Vacīdvārepi uppannā kāyaduccaritaṃ dvārantare uppannassāpi kammassa sanāmāpariccāgato yebhuyyavuttiyā, tabbahulavuttiyā ca. Tenāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā –
诸业在门中运作,但门并不是造业者;
因此,诸业依门而互相确定。巴利
‘‘Dvāre caranti kammāni, na dvārā dvāracārino; Tasmā dvārehi kammāni, aññamaññaṃ vavatthitā’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. kāmāvacarakusaladvārakathā);
应将语恶行理解为在身门和语门中也生起,并加以联系。与思相应的法,是指与作为意业的思相应的法。然而,与作为身业和语业的思相应的贪欲等,它们或者是那一类的组成部分,或者是不须论及的。与思相应的法就是意善行,在这里也是同样的道理。由于不做三种恶行而生起的三思以及离,也是身善行,因为它们是避免身体的违犯而生起的;至于以身受持学处时,戒本身就是身善行,这更不必说了。同样的道理也适用于语善行。巴利
Vacīduccaritaṃ kāyadvārepi vacīdvārepi uppannāti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Cetanāsampayuttadhammāti manokammabhūtāya cetanāya sampayuttadhammā. Kāyavacīkammabhūtāya pana cetanāya sampayuttā abhijjhādayo taṃ taṃ pakkhikā vā honti abbohārikā vāti. Cetanāsampayuttadhammā manosucaritanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tividhassa duccaritassa akaraṇavasena pavattā tisso cetanāpi viratiyopi kāyasucaritaṃ kāyikassa vītikkamassa akaraṇavasena pavattanato, kāyena pana sikkhāpadānaṃ samādiyane sīlassa kāyasucaritabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Eseva nayo vacīsucarite.
“与欲相应”这里,欲有两种:事物欲和烦恼欲。其中,在事物欲这方面,寻是以所缘的方式与欲相应,所以叫欲寻。在烦恼欲这方面,则应当理解为寻是以相应结合的方式与欲相应。“与嗔恚相应”等说法,应当知道只是以相应结合为义。如果把以嗔恚为所依而相应者也当作“与嗔恚相应”来理解,那么两种方式都能成立。“与害相应”这里也是同样的道理。所谓“害”,是指通过它来危害有情,或者它就是对有情的危害,所以叫害;与它相应,就是与害相应。应当通过针对不可爱、不可意的诸行生起嗔恚寻,以非理加害的情况来说明。为了显示嗔恚寻的范围,所以说“乃至毁坏”。而“毁坏”就是指杀生。那么,为什么说“于诸行中并没有所谓‘应被加害’者”呢?难道那些被认为“应被加害”的有情想,从意义上说也不过是诸行吗?确实如此。不过,那些被诸根所系缚、具有识而能感受苦的,才被认可为害寻的所缘,也就是取有情想者。至于那些不能感受苦、不符合上述特征的,则针对它们说“害寻不在诸行中生起”。为了说明害寻在哪里生起、如何生起,才说了“这些有情”等。巴利
Kāmapaṭisaṃyuttoti ettha dve kāmā vatthukāmo ca kilesakāmo ca. Tattha vatthukāmapakkhe ārammaṇakaraṇavasena kāmehi paṭisaṃyutto vitakko kāmavitakko. Kilesakāmapakkhe pana sampayogavasena kāmena paṭisaṃyuttoti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Byāpādapaṭisaṃyutto’’tiādīsu sampayogavaseneva attho veditabbo. Byāpādavatthupaṭisaṃyuttopi byāpādapaṭisaṃyuttoti gayhamāne ubhayathāpi yojanā labbhateva. Vihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyuttoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Vihiṃsanti etāya satte, vihiṃsanaṃ vā esā sattānanti vihiṃsā, tāya paṭisaṃyutto vihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyuttoti evaṃ saddattho veditabbo. Appiye amanāpe saṅkhāre ārabbha byāpādavitakkappavatti aṭṭhānāghātavasena dīpetabbā. Byāpādavitakkassa avadhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yāva vināsanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vināsanaṃ pana pāṇātipāto evāti. ‘‘Saṅkhāro’’ hi dukkhāpetabbo nāma natthī’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu ye ‘‘dukkhāpetabbā’’ti icchitā sattasaññitā, tepi atthato saṅkhārā evāti? Saccametaṃ, ye pana indriyabaddhā saviññāṇakatāya dukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedenti, tasmā te vihiṃsāvitakkassa visayā icchitā sattasaññitā. Ye pana na dukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedenti vuttalakkhaṇāyogato, te sandhāya ‘‘vihiṃsāvitakko saṅkhāresu nuppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yattha pana uppajjati, yathā ca uppajjati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ime sattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
无贪因为已经从贪里出来,所以称为出离;初禅因为已经从诸盖里出来,所以也是出离;一切善法因为已经从一切不善里出来,所以也是出离;而涅槃因为已经从一切有为法里出来,所以也是出离。通过近依、相应、作为所缘这三种方式与出离相关联,就是“与出离相应”。出离寻就是正思惟。现在为了按地的分类来显示它,所以说“它”等。“不净前分”是指在不净禅那的前分。这里提及不净,是为了显示欲寻的直接对立面,因为出离寻正是欲寻的对治。这样说明之后,又通过展示上面两种寻的地,举出了带有前分的慈、悲等禅那。“于不净禅那”是指以不净为所缘的初禅。这是以整体之名指称部分,就像说“树有枝”一样。“以禅那为根基”只是举例说明。因为观察那个禅那而生起道果的时候,它也是出世间的。无嗔是对治嗔恚的,或者说,依靠它就不再嗔恚,所以称为无嗔,也就是慈。与它相应的,就是“与无嗔相应”。“于慈禅那”是指通过修慈而证得的初禅。“于悲禅那”中,道理也一样。无害是对治害的,或者说,依靠它不害有情,所以称为无害,也就是悲。巴利
Nekkhammaṃ vuccati lobhato nikkhantattā alobho, nīvaraṇehi nikkhantattāpi paṭhamajjhānaṃ, sabbākusalehi nikkhantattā sabbo kusalo dhammo, sabbasaṅkhatehi pana nikkhantattā, nibbānaṃ. Upanissayato, sampayogato, ārammaṇakaraṇato ca nekkhammena paṭisaṃyuttoti nekkhammapaṭisaṃyutto. Nekkhammavitakko sammāsaṅkappo. Idāni taṃ bhūmivibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘so’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asubhapubbabhāgeti asubhajjhānassa pubbabhāge. Asubhaggahaṇañcettha kāmavitakkassa ujuvipaccanīkadassanatthaṃ kataṃ. Kāmavitakkapaṭipakkho hi nekkhammavitakkoti. Evañca katvā uparivitakkadvayassa bhūmiṃ dassentena sapubbabhāgāni mettākaruṇājhānādīni uddhaṭāni. Asubhajjhāneti asubhārammaṇe paṭhamajjhāne. Avayave hi samudāyavohāraṃ katvā niddisati yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā’’ti. Jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvāti nidassanamattaṃ. Taṃ jhānaṃ sammasitvā uppannamaggaphalakālepi hi so lokuttaroti. Byāpādassa paṭipakkho, kiñcipi na byāpādeti etenāti vā abyāpādo, mettā, tāya paṭisaṃyutto abyāpādapaṭisaṃyutto. Mettājhāneti mettābhāvanāvasena adhigate paṭhamajjhāne. Karuṇājhāneti etthāpi eseva nayo. Vihiṃsāya paṭipakkho, na vihiṃsanti vā etāya satteti avihiṃsā, karuṇā.
难道不是这样吗:因为无贪与无嗔互不相离,所以依它们而生起的出离寻等,彼此之间并不混杂,因此并不能成立它们有确定的区分?为了表明“并非如此”,才开始了“当……的时候”等文句。“无贪为首”,意思是无贪是主导。当以决定、成熟、现行等方式,以无贪为主导、重视出离的心生起时,那时获得机会的出离寻就站住了脚。然而,与那心相应的无嗔,具有不嗔恨的特征,借着它的力量,那心本身也可能以无嗔寻的方式出现;而如果有了无嗔寻,又因为某人具有不害的本性,也可能以无害寻的方式出现。这两者就是另外两个寻。“随顺于它”,意思是随顺那个出离寻;因为从它们自身的相状上看不出来,所以只能通过“有它时它们就有,没有它时它们就没有”来推论。其余两个寻的道理,也应当按这个方式理解。“正如所说的那样”,应当依照“与欲相应的意图就是欲意图”等说法,以及在三种寻的教法中已经说过的道理来理解,因为它们在意义上并无差别。如果是这样,那为什么还要再次开示呢?这只是为了随顺那些能通过这样的开示而觉悟的人的意乐,所作的纯粹开示而已。巴利
Nanu ca alobhādosānaṃ aññamaññāvirahato tesaṃ vasena uppajjanakānaṃ imesaṃ nekkhammavitakkādīnaṃ aññamaññaṃ asaṅkaraṇato vavatthānaṃ na hotīti? Noti dassetuṃ ‘‘yadā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Alobho sīsaṃ hotīti alobho padhāno hoti. Niyamitapariṇatasamudācārādivasena yadā alobhappadhāno nekkhammagaruko cittuppādo hoti, tadā laddhāvasaro nekkhammavitakko patiṭṭhahati. Taṃsampayuttassa pana adosalakkhaṇassa abyāpādassa vasena yo tasseva abyāpādavitakkabhāvo sambhaveyya, sati ca abyāpādavitakkabhāve kassacipi aviheṭhanajātikatāya avihiṃsāvitakkabhāvo ca sambhaveyya, te itare dve. Tadanvayikāti tasseva nekkhammavitakkassa anugāmino, sarūpato adissanato ‘‘tasmiṃ sati honti , asati na hontī’’ti tadanumānaneyyā bhavanti. Sesadvayepi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘kāmapaṭisaṃyutto saṅkappo kāmasaṅkappo’’tiādinā vitakkattike vuttanayeneva (dī. ni. 3.288) veditabbo atthato abhinnattā. Yadi evaṃ kasmā puna desanā katāti? Tathā desanāya bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena desanāmattamevetaṃ.
如同欲寻等的生起方式,应当依照“它们二者既在有情中生起,也在诸行中生起”等说法来了知。其中,指出了原因:“因为它们确实只与那(心识)相应。”同样地,就像出离寻等通过“在不净修行的前行阶段属于欲界”等说法被说明为具有欲界等性质,这些出离想等也同样应当了知为具有欲界等性质。巴利
Kāmavitakkādīnaṃ viya uppajjanākāro veditabbo ‘‘tāsu dve sattesupi saṅkhāresupi uppajjantī’’tiādinā. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘taṃsampayuttāyeva hi etā’’ti. Tathevāti yathā nekkhammavitakkādīnaṃ ‘‘asubhapubbabhāge kāmāvacaro hotī’’tiādinā kāmāvacarādibhāvo vutto, tatheva tāsampi nekkhammasaññādīnampi kāmāvacarādibhāvo veditabbo.
与欲相应,是指通过结合而与欲相应。以思量的方式为思量。特别地,以思量的方式为寻。以意图和遍计的方式为思惟。在其他与欲相应的法也存在的情况下,唯独在寻这里固定使用了“欲”这个界字,应当知道是因为寻在使欲思惟生起方面特别突出。这个道理也适用于嗔恚界等。一切不善法都属于欲界,因为它们被下劣意乐的人所贪求,所以是可供贪欲的界,也因为是烦恼欲的所缘自性。恼害就是损害。那里,是指在前面所说的那个欲界三法中。用总摄一切不善的欲界来包含其余二界而加以说明,就是总摄说。三种界互不混杂地说明,就是不相混杂。其余二界已被包含,是说其余二界确实已经被包含了,因为已经说了“一切不善法都是欲界”,这是通过总体说明而过度涵盖了自己的范围。从那里,就是从那个总摄其余二界的欲界。抽出,就是简择出来。显示,就是世尊这样显示,可以这样说。他宣说了嗔恚界……等。为什么呢?因为人们首先会对特别排除的部分产生执着,之后总摄才能进行;或者说,除了特别排除的范围之外,绕过它,总摄才能进行。这个道理在世间是确定了的。巴利
Kāmapaṭisaṃyuttoti sampayogavasena kāmena paṭisaṃyutto. Takkanavasena takko. Visesato takkanavasena vitakko. Saṅkappanaparikappanavasena saṅkappo. Aññesupi kāmapaṭisaṃyuttesu dhammesu vijjamānesu vitakke eva kāmopapado dhātu-saddo niruḷho veditabbo vitakkassa kāmasaṅkappappavattiyā sātisayattā. Esa nayo byāpādadhātuādīsu. Sabbepi akusalā dhammā kāmadhātū hīnajjhāsayehi kāmitabbadhātubhāvato kilesakāmassa ārammaṇasabhāvattāti attho. Viheṭhetīti vibādhati. Tatthāti tasmiṃ yathāvutte kāmadhātuttike. Sabbākusalasaṅgāhikāya kāmadhātuyā itarā dve saṅgahetvā kathanaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikā kathā. Tisso dhātuyo aññamaññaṃ asaṅkarato kathā asambhinnā. Itarā dve gahitāva hontīti itarā dve dhātuyo gahitā eva honti sabbepi akusalā dhammā kāmadhātū’’ti vuttattā sāmaññajotanāya savisayassa atibyāpanena. Tatoti itaradhātudvayasaṅgāhikāya kāmadhātuyā. Nīharitvāti niddhāretvā. Dassetīti evaṃ bhagavā dassetīti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Byāpādadhātuṃ…pe… kathesi. Kasmā? Pageva apavādā abhinivisanti, tato paraṃ ussaggo pavattati, ṭhapetvā vā apavādavisayaṃ taṃ pariharantova ussaggo pavattatīti, ñāyo hesa loke niruḷhoti.
“两种说法”是指前一个三法组里所说的“总摄一切”和“不相混杂”这两种说法。应当按照那里所说的方式引过来,再按说法的方式去理解。因此,那里所说的义理,在这里也应当引过来理解,也就是“出离界被摄时,其余二界就已经被摄”等等。巴利
Dvekathāti ‘‘sabbasaṅgāhikā, asambhinnā cā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305) anantarattike vuttā dve kathā. Tattha vuttanayena ānetvā kathanavasena veditabbā. Tasmā tattha vuttaattho idhāpi āharitvā veditabbo ‘‘nekkhammadhātuyā gahitāya itarā dve gahitāva hontī’’tiādinā.
“以空义”是指无我的空性。欲有就是欲,省略了后面的词,以空义而成为界,所以叫欲界。梵天界是指被称为初禅地的梵天界。在提到界的地方,也就是建立了“欲界、色界”等界的论述时,应该用有来区分,也就是依照“欲有、色有”等有的方式来限定其含义,而不是随便用某个界来限定。而且,既然在提到界的地方必须用有来限定,那么在提到有的地方,也应该用界来限定,因为可以用界来限定有。在这里,烦恼轮转的息灭称为灭。这个灭本身以空义而成为界,就是灭界,也就是涅槃。而且,当烦恼的轮转已经息灭时,业与异熟的轮转也就息灭了。巴利
Suññataṭṭhenāti attasuññatāya. Kāmabhavo kāmo uttarapadalopena suññataṭṭhena dhātu cāti kāmadhātu. Brahmalokanti paṭhamajjhānabhūmisaññitaṃ brahmalokaṃ. Dhātuyā āgataṭṭhānamhīti ‘‘kāmadhātu rūpadhātū’’tiādinā dhātuggahaṇe kate. Bhavena paricchinditabbāti ‘‘kāmabhavo rūpabhavo’’tiādinā bhavavasena tadattho paricchinditabbo, na yāya kāyaci dhātuyā vasena. Yadaggena ca dhātuyā āgataṭṭhāne bhavena paricchedo kātabbo, tadaggena bhavassa āgataṭṭhāne dhātuyā paricchedo kātabbo bhavavasena dhātuyā paricchijjanato. Nirujjhati kilesavaṭṭametthāti nirodho, sā eva suññataṭṭhena dhātūti nirodhadhātu, nibbānaṃ. Niruddhe ca kilesavaṭṭe kammavipākavaṭṭā niruddhā eva honti.
在阿毗达摩中,关于“下劣界”等三法,应当用下劣三法来界定,所以说“下劣界,就是十二种不善心生起”。这些确实因为低劣的意义而成为下劣界。处于下劣和殊胜之间的,是中界,就是其余那些属于三地的法。以最上的意义和无上的意义来说,是殊胜界,就是九种出世间法。巴利
Hīnadhātuttiko abhidhamme (dha. sa. tikamātikā 14) hīnattikena paricchinditabboti vuttaṃ ‘‘hīnā dhātūti dvādasa akusalacittuppādā’’ti. Te hi lāmakaṭṭhena hīnadhātu. Hīnapaṇītānaṃ majjhe bhavāti majjhimadhātu, avasesā tebhūmakadhammā. Uttamaṭṭhena atappakaṭṭhena ca paṇītadhātu, navalokuttaradhammā.
五欲功德是它的对象,所以叫“具五欲功德者”,也就是欲贪。“在色界和无色界的生存中”:指在已经证得的色界、无色界转生生存中。但对于还没证得的,它就不算是一种渴求,所以已经被“以生存为力的渴求”这个说法涵盖进去了。“对禅那的爱染”:就是对色界、无色界禅那的爱染。“以生存为力的渴求”:就是对种种生存的渴求。这样一来,通过这四个词句,依次把以广大转生生存为对象、以广大业有为对象、与有见相应、以及成为生存渴求的渴爱,说为“有爱”。把非有见当作“非有”,这是省略了后面的词;与非有相应的渴爱,就是“非有爱”。以依靠色等五种所依的欲境为对象、属于强力染著的渴爱,就是“欲爱”,这是第一种解说;其次,依据“所有三地之法,以可欲之义为欲”这句话,凡是以这些为对象而生起、不与邪见相应的所有渴爱,都是欲爱,这是第二种解说。以上就是它们的区别。巴利
Pañcakāmaguṇā visayabhūtā etassa santīti pañcakāmaguṇiko, kāmarāgo. Rūpārūpabhavesūti rūpārūpūpapattibhavesu yathādhigatesu. Anadhigatesu pana so patthanā nāma na hotīti bhavavasena patthanāti imināva gahito. Jhānanikantīti rūpārūpajjhānesu nikanti. Bhavavasena patthanāti bhavesu patthanāti. Evaṃ catūhipi padehi yathākkamaṃ mahaggatūpapattibhavavisayā, mahaggatakammabhavavisayā, bhavadiṭṭhisahagatā, bhavapatthanābhūtā ca taṇhā ‘‘bhavataṇhā’’ti vuttā. Vibhavadiṭṭhi vibhavo uttarapadalopena, vibhavasahagatā taṇhā vibhavataṇhā. Rūpādipañcavatthu kāmavisayā balavarāgabhūtā taṇhā kāmataṇhāti paṭhamanayo, ‘‘sabbepi tebhūmakadhammā kāmanīyaṭṭhena kāmā’’ti (mahāni. 1) vacanato te ārabbha pavattā diṭṭhivippayuttā sabbāpi taṇhā kāmataṇhāti dutiyanayoti ayametesaṃ viseso.
在阿毗达摩中,“pana”这个词是用来显示差别的。借此显示出一个差别:除了执取五种欲乐的贪之外,还有另一种以欲界法为对象的贪,在阿毗达摩(《分别论》915)中也被称为“欲爱”。虽然同属三界,但它同样是依渴爱而转起的,而且紧接着的说法就是以它为依止而展开的,所以它足以被称为“一轮”。“以此一轮”就是“以这个理路”的意思。“以可染著之义”就是“以可欲之义”。“统取之后”就是“总括把握之后”。“从彼”就是从那个欲爱。“简出之后”就是“简择出来之后”。接着指出另外两种爱:色爱和无色爱。由此说明,“欲爱”是对一切贪的共同称呼,而“色爱、无色爱”则是针对性的特别说法,就像说具欲功德贪、色贪、无色贪那样。“灭爱”就是对生存的灭尽、对生存的彻底断除所生起的渴爱。因为断见认为,处于人间状态、欲界天状态、色界无色界状态中的自我会被彻底断除,所以它是针对生存的灭尽而转起的;因此,与断见相应的渴爱也是针对这一点而转起的。巴利
Abhidhamme panāti pana-saddo visesatthajotano, tena pañcakāmaguṇikarāgato aññopi kāmāvacaradhammavisayo lobho abhidhamme (vibha. 915) ‘‘kāmataṇhā’’ti āgatoti imaṃ visesaṃ joteti. Tikantarampi samānaṃ taṇhaṃyeva nissāya pavattitadesanānantaratāya taṃ ‘‘vāro’’ti vattabbataṃ arahatīti ‘‘iminā vārenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Iminā vārenāti iminā pariyāyenāti attho. Rajanīyaṭṭhenāti kāmanīyaṭṭhena. Pariyādiyitvāti pariggahetvā. Tatoti kāmataṇhāya. Nīharitvāti niddhāretvā. Itarā dve taṇhāti rūpataṇhaṃ, arūpataṇhañca dasseti. Etena ‘‘kāmataṇhā’’ti sādhāraṇavacanametaṃ sabbassapi lobhassa, tassa pana ‘‘rūpataṇhā arūpataṇhā’’ti visesavacanaṃ yathā kāmaguṇikarāgo rūparāgo arūparāgoti dasseti. Nirodhataṇhāti bhavanirodhe bhavasamucchede taṇhā. Yasmā hi ucchedadiṭṭhi manussattabhāve, kāmāvacaradevattabhāve, rūpāvacaraarūpāvacarattabhāve ṭhitassa attano sammā samucchedo hotīti bhavanirodhaṃ ārabbha pavattati, tasmā taṃsahagatāpi taṇhā tameva ārabbha pavattatīti.
在轮回中,指的是三种轮回。正如它们不肯放舍地让人出离,就以作为它们前后生起的条件的方式,把具有那些烦恼的众生结缚在业果轮回中,同样也结缚在烦恼轮回中。存在,是指在究竟意义上真实存在。在色等分别中,是指在色、受等种种区分中。在身中,是指在诸蕴的聚合中。存在的,是指在究竟意义上可以找到。因为由邪见虚构出来的我等在究竟意义上并不存在,但这种邪见本身却是存在的。正在寻找的人,是指正在思辨诸法自性的人。困苦,就是感到疲累。执取,就是从外面抓取。因为持由戒清净、由禁戒清净这种观点的人,已经偏离了清净道,这就是在执取那道之外的东西。以二十事为处的见,是指将色等诸法,或作为所依,或作为依处,或作为拥有者,通过假设而转起的我见,共有二十种。疑惑,是指对诸法不能正确地或错误地思惟,因此以犹豫不决之义而不能决断,也就是不能进入实践的意思。颠倒执取,是指在不清净的道上,颠倒地执取为清净道。巴利
Vaṭṭasminti tividhepi vaṭṭe. Yathā te hi nissarituṃ appadānavasena kammavipākavaṭṭe taṃsamaṅgisattaṃ tesaṃ parāparuppattiyā paccayabhāvena saṃyojenti, evaṃ kilesavaṭṭepīti. Satīti paramatthato vijjamāne. Rūpādibhedeti rūpavedanādivibhāge. Kāyeti khandhasamūhe. Vijjamānāti satī paramatthato upalabbhamānā. Diṭṭhiyā parikappito hi attādi paramatthato natthi, diṭṭhi pana ayaṃ atthevāti. Vicinantoti dhammasabhāvaṃ vīmaṃsanto. Kicchatīti kilamati. Parāmasatīti parato āmasati. ‘‘Sīlena suddhi, vatena suddhī’’ti gaṇhanto hi visuddhimaggaṃ atikkamitvā tassa parato āmasati nāma. Vīsativatthukā diṭṭhīti rūpādi-dhamme, paccekaṃ te vā nissitaṃ, tesaṃ vā nissayabhūtaṃ, sāmibhūtaṃ vā katvā parikappanavasena pavattiyā vīsativatthukā attadiṭṭhi vīsati. Vimatīti dhammesu sammā, micchā vā mananābhāvato saṃsayitaṭṭhena amati, appaṭipajjananti attho. Vipariyāsaggāhoti asuddhimagge ‘‘suddhimaggo’’ti viparītaggāho.
“久住之义”是指因为长久居住而成为旧有的状态。“漏泄之义”是指流出的意思,也就是生起的意思。Savati 就是转起、生起。前缀 ā- 有界限的意思,而界限又分为两种:分界和遍包。其中,分界是把动作留在界限之外而转起,比如“从华氏城开始下雨了”。遍包则是把动作完全涵盖而转起,比如“乃至有顶天,世尊的声誉都在传扬”。应当知道,这里的 ā- 是遍包的意思。巴利
Cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhenāti ciraparivutthatāya purāṇabhāvena. Āsavanaṭṭhenāti sandanaṭṭhena, pavattanaṭṭhenāti attho. Savatīti pavattati. Avadhiattho ā-kāro, avadhi ca mariyādābhividhibhedato duvidho. Tattha mariyādo kiriyaṃ bahi katvā pavattati yathā ‘‘ā pāṭaliputtā vuṭṭho devo’’ti. Abhividhi kiriyaṃ byāpetvā pavattati yathā ‘‘ā bhavaggā bhagavato yaso pavatto’’ti. Abhividhiattho ayaṃ ā-kāro veditabbo.
“在某些地方提到了两种漏”,这句话是针对律藏《波罗夷》39 说的。因为在那个地方,漏被分成两种来讲:“为了防护现法漏,为了对治来世漏。”所谓“在某些地方”,是指三集《漏经》,以及其他像《六处经》这样的经典里。因为在《六处经》等经里也只提到三种漏:“贤友,有三种漏:欲漏、有漏、无明漏。”所谓“导向地狱”,就是趋向地狱的。因为在这里,有漏的善业和不善业是借“漏”这个说法来宣说的,所以这些漏是以能导致众生趣向五趣的方式来讲的。在这部《集异门经》里,提到了三种漏。在这里,虽然在其他经典中,从有顶一直到种姓智现起时的慢等烦恼也存在,但只有这些烦恼,因为执取我、我所等,以及因为压倒、膨胀、骄慢的作用,才与漏相似,别的并不相似,所以应当理解,“漏”这个词只固定用在这些烦恼上。这里也不应该想“见漏怎么没提到”,因为通过含摄“有漏”,有爱和有见也都已经被包含进去了。所谓“欲漏”,是从“欲”的意义和“漏泄”的意义得名的。从义理上说,其实并没有差别,正如前面已经说过的那样。巴利
Katthaci dve āsavā āgatāti vinayapāḷiṃ (pārā. 39) sandhāyāha. Tattha hi ‘‘diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāyā’’ti (pārā. 39) dvidhā āsavā āgatāti. Katthacīti tikanipāte āsavasutte, (itivu. 56; saṃ. ni. 5.163) aññesu ca saḷāyatanasuttādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.321). Saḷāyatanasuttesupi hi ‘‘tayome āvuso āsavā kāmāsavo bhavāsavo avijjāsavo’’ti tayo eva āgatāti. Nirayaṃ gamentīti nirayagāminīyā. Yasmā idha sāsavaṃ kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ āsavapariyāyena desitaṃ, tasmā pañcagatisaṃvattanīyabhāvena āsavā āgatā. Imasmiṃ saṅgītisutte tayo āgatāti. Ettha yasmā aññesu ca ā bhavaggaṃ ā gotrabhuṃ pavattantesu mānādīsu vijjamānesu attattaniyādiggāhavasena, abhibyāpanamadakaraṇavasena āsavasadisatā ca etesaṃyeva, na aññesaṃ, tasmā etesveva āsava-saddo niruḷho daṭṭhabbo. Na cettha ‘‘diṭṭhāsavo nāgato’’ti cintetabbaṃ bhavataṇhāya, bhavadiṭṭhiyāpi bhavāsavaggahaṇeneva gahitattā. Kāmāsavo nāma kāmanaṭṭhena, āsavanaṭṭhena ca. Vuttāyeva atthato ninnānākaraṇato.
以“寻求、遍求诸欲”这个说法,是指为了对诸欲的希求、遍求或受用而现起的贪,这叫欲求。有求则是对“有”的希求,是为了对有感到喜乐、对有执著而现起的贪。为诸见行者所认同,是指被外道们所设想、所推崇的。梵行,是指苦行的修习。与他们共存,是指和那些贪、见一起生起、共同存在。业,是指不善业。这种业也是以生起诸欲等为根本、为依止而现起的,所以说它在“寻求”。边执见,这只是举例而已。实际上,任何以苦行为因产生的邪见,本身就是梵行求。巴利
Kāme esati gavesati etāyāti kāmesanā, kāmānaṃ abhipatthanāvasena, pariyeṭṭhivasena, paribhuñjanavasena vā pavattarāgo. Bhavesanā pana bhavapatthanā, bhavābhiratibhavajjhosānavasena pavattarāgo . Diṭṭhigatikasammatassāti aññatitthiyehi parikappitassa, sambhāvitassa ca. Brahmacariyassāti tapopakkamassa. Tadekaṭṭhanti tāhi rāgadiṭṭhīhi sahajekaṭṭhaṃ. Kammanti akusalakammaṃ. Tampi hi kāmādike nibbattanādhiṭṭhānādivasena pavattaṃ ‘‘esatī’’ti vuccati. Antaggāhikā diṭṭhīti nidassanamattametaṃ. Yā kāci pana micchādiṭṭhi tapopakkamahetukā brahmacariyesanā eva.
“形态与安立”是指以殊胜的形态而安住。“如何”是指以什么方式安住,意思是平稳地安住。从词义上说,vidahana(安排、安立)就是以殊胜形态安住,这叫vidhā;以不同形态被安放、被安置,也叫vidhā,意思是部分、类别。由于安排,即以下劣等种种形态来施设、执取,所以叫vidhā,就是慢。所谓“依胜、等、劣”,就是依胜、等、劣的如实与非如实状态。所说的三种慢,是只对胜者生起的。这个道理对相等者和下劣者也同样适用。因此说“因为这个慢”等等。现在,为了按所依之事来分辨前面列出的九种慢,所以说“在此”等等。这些慢在王和出家众身上都会生起,为什么呢?因为他们特别把自己执为胜者。现在为了详细说明这个道理,说“因为王”等等。“有谁与我相等”:这个“谁”字有否定的意味,意思是“没有别的相等者”。就在这些人当中——也就是王和出家众当中——生起,因为该慢以殊胜者为所依。在“我是下劣者”这种慢里,道理也是一样的。巴利
Ākārasaṇṭhānanti visiṭṭhākārāvaṭṭhānaṃ kathaṃvidhanti hi kena pakārena saṇṭhitaṃ, samavaṭṭhitanti attho. Saddatthato pana vidahanaṃ visiṭṭhākārena avaṭṭhānaṃ vidhā, vidhīyati visadisākārena ṭhapīyatīti vidhā, koṭṭhāso. Vidahanato hīnādivasena vividhenākārena dahanato upadhāraṇato vidhā, mānova. Seyyasadisahīnānaṃ vasenāti seyyasadisahīnabhāvānaṃ yāthāvā’ yāthāvabhūtānaṃ vasena. Tayo mānā vuttā seyyasseva uppajjanakā. Esa nayo sadisahīnesupi. Tenāha ‘‘ayañhi māno’’tiādi. Idāni yathāuddiṭṭhe navavidhepi māne vatthuvibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rājūnañceva pabbajitānañca uppajjati kasmā? Te visesato attānaṃ seyyato dahantīti. Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārato dassento ‘‘rājā hī’’tiādimāha. Ko mayā sadiso atthīti ko-saddo paṭikkhepattho, añño sadiso natthīti adhippāyo. Etesaṃyevāti rājūnaṃ, pabbajitānañca. Uppajjati seṭṭhavatthukattā tassa. ‘‘Hīnohamasmī’’ti mānepi eseva nayo.
“有哪个别的王臣能和我相比?”或者“我和别人有什么差别?”或者“所谓大臣,不过就是个名称罢了……只是名称而已”——这是为了说明对与自己相等的人,生起胜慢、等慢、劣慢这三种表现方式。巴利
‘‘Ko mayā sadiso añño rājapuriso atthī’’ti vā ‘‘mayhaṃ aññehi saddhiṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇa’’nti vā ‘‘amacco ti nāmāmeva…pe… nāmāha’’nti vāti sadisassa seyyamānādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pavattiākāradassanaṃ.
“奴隶等”中的“等”字,涵盖了受雇者、佣工等依附他人生活的人。或者,用“等”字本身就表明“连弗居娑、旃陀罗之类也算在内”。有人问:慢的特质本来就是高举,那它怎么会以卑慢的形式出现呢?那种慢也是通过轻视的方式,以差别对象为根据,依高举方式而转起的,所以并不矛盾。因此他说:“什么,我是奴隶!”这些人就生起了慢。正因为如此,说明了其如实慢性。巴利
Dāsādīnanti ādi-saddena bhatika kammakarādīnaṃ parādhīnavuttikānaṃ gahaṇaṃ . Ādi-saddena vā gahite eva ‘‘pukkusacaṇḍālādayopī’’ti sayameva dasseti. Nanu ca māno nāmāyaṃ saṃpaggaharaso, so kathaṃ omāne sambhavatīti? Sopi avakaraṇamukhena vidhānavatthunā paggaṇhanavaseneva pavattatīti nāyaṃ virodho. Tenevāha ‘‘kiṃ dāso nāma ahanti ete māne karotī’’ti. Tathā hissa yāthāvamānatā vuttā.
如实慢就像对存在的爱著,也像我见一样,并不是大过失,所以它们不会导致堕入恶趣。因为那些如实慢是以真实的事物为依据的。说“为阿罗汉道所断”,是就它们被彻底断除而言。而在第二道和第三道中,那些比较粗重的和最粗重的慢则依次被断除。慢以“我是”的方式生起,在更高的道中,它成为正见的直接对立面而被断除。所谓非如实慢,是以不真实的事物为依据,正因为如此,它们具有大过失性,所以被说为初道所断。巴利
Yāthāvamānā bhavanikanti viya, attadiṭṭhi viya ca na mahāsāvajjā, tasmā te na apāyagamanīyā. Yathābhūtavatthukatāya hi te yāthāvamānā. ‘‘Arahattamaggavajjhā’’ti ca tassa anavasesappahāyitāya vuttaṃ. Dutiyatatiyamaggehi ca te yathākkamaṃ pahīyanti, ye oḷārikatarā, oḷārikatamā ca. Māno hi ‘‘ahaṃ asmī’’ti pavattiyā uparimaggesu sammādiṭṭhiyā ujuvipaccanīko hutvā pahīyati. Ayāthāvamānā nāma ayathābhūtavatthukatāya, teneva te mahāsāvajjabhāvena paṭhamamaggavajjhā vuttā.
“不断运行、持续转起,所以叫‘时’(addhā)”,也就是时间。因此说“三时就是三个时间”。所谓“依经教方式”,是指依照《善一夜者经》等(中部第三册第283页)中所说的方式。因为在那些经里,针对现在时这样说道:“贤友,意和诸法,这两者都是现在。如果识在现在被欲贪系缚,由于识被欲贪系缚,便对它欢喜;对它欢喜的人,就沉没在现在的诸法中。”(中部第三册第284页)因此说“从结生以来”等等。所谓“其间”,就是那些死与结生之间的间隔,即现在时。因为它是过去与未来的中间,所以在“对过去未来疑惑”(《法集论》第1123条)、“对过去未来无知”(《法集论》第1067、1106、1128条)等处,也被称为“过去未来”。坏灭的法被过去分所包含,所以说“从坏灭以上,叫过去时”。同样,尚未生起的法被未来分所包含,所以说“在生起之前,叫未来时”。所谓“三刹那”,就是在生、住、灭这三个刹那中。当法在因缘和合时生起,以及当它灭去时,在这两个刹那中,也像住刹那一样,都算是现在。因为诸法的成熟状态所依的,是生起;坏灭状态所依的,是灭去;这两者的中间,是住。如果这样,那么这个“时”难道就只是法本身吗?不是法,而是法的状态差别;依据这个,世间才有时间的通称。为了说明这一点,所以说“这名叫过去等的分别”等等。所谓“此处”,是指这个世间。所谓“就以那种说法”,是指依据那种种状态差别,法被说成“过去、未来、现在”;因为从究竟意义来说,时间只是法的运行本身,并不真实存在,但依据那法运行的状态差别,就用那种说法说“过去时”等等。巴利
Atati satataṃ gacchati pavattatīti addhā, kāloti āha ‘‘tayo addhāti tayo kālā’’ti. Suttantapariyāyenāti bhaddekarattasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 3.283) āgatanayena. Tattha hi ‘‘yo cāvuso mano, ye ca dhammā, ubhayametaṃ paccuppannaṃ, tasmiṃ ce paccuppanne chandarāgapaṭibaddhaṃ hoti viññāṇaṃ, chandarāgapaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīratī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.284) addhāpaccuppannaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paṭisandhito pubbe’’tiādi. Tadantaranti tesaṃ cutipaṭisandhīnaṃ vemajjhaṃ paccuppanno addhā, yo pubbantāparantānaṃ vemajjhatāya ‘‘pubbantāparante kaṅkhati, (dha. sa. 1123) pubbantāparante aññāṇa’’nti (dha. sa. 1067, 1106, 1128) evamādīsu ‘‘pubbantāparanto’’ti ca vuccati. Bhaṅgo dhammo atītaṃsena saṅgahitoti āha ‘‘bhaṅgato uddhaṃ atīto addhā nāmā’’ti. Tathā anuppanno dhammo anāgataṃsena saṅgahitoti āha ‘‘uppādato pubbe anāgato addhā nāmā’’ti. Khaṇattayeti uppādo, ṭhiti, bhaṅgoti tīsu khaṇesu. Yadā hi dhammo hetupaccayassa samavāye uppajjati, yadā ca veti, iti dvīsupi khaṇesu ṭhitikkhaṇe viya paccuppannoti. Dhammānañhi pākabhāvūpādhikaṃ pattabbaṃ udayo, viddhaṃsabhāvūpādhikaṃ vayo, tadubhayavemajjhaṃ ṭhiti. Yadi evaṃ addhā nāmāyaṃ dhammo eva āpannoti? Na dhammo, dhammassa pana avatthābhedo, tañca upādāya loke kālasamaññāti dassetuṃ ‘‘atītādibhedo ca nāma aya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ loke. Teneva vohārenāti taṃ taṃ avatthāvisesaṃ upādāya dhammo ‘‘atīto anāgato paccuppanno’’ti yena vohārena voharīyati, dhammappavattimattatāya hi paramatthato avijjamānopi kālo tasseva dhammassa pavattiavatthāvisesaṃ upādāya teneva vohārena ‘‘atīto addhā’’tiādinā vutto.
“边”这个词在世间指终点、尽头。为了说明这个意思,他说“边就是边”,意思是尽头就是边。“彼岸”就是最远的边际。“运行、去到,有的延续在这里终结”,所以叫“边”,也就是尽头。“去、到达终结”,所以叫“边”,也就是终点。而这个“边”,因为经中说“这就是苦的边际”,指的是苦海的彼岸,所以他说“彼岸”。“被轻视、被蔑视、被轻贱”,所以叫“边”,也就是低劣。“被思量、被部分地了知”,所以叫“边”,也就是部分,因此他说“部分就是边”。实际存在的、以究竟义而存在的身体是诸法之聚,所以叫“有身”,即诸蕴;然而那些成为圣谛的(诸蕴)在此处被意指,所以说“五取蕴”。“前爱”是指那些(蕴)生起之因的爱,早在那些(蕴)生起之前就已存在的爱。“不起”是指那两者在此处不现行,是它们不现行的处所。如果以“有身是边”等语,由于相互区别而摄取了苦谛等,那么为何不摄取道呢?为此他说“然而道……”等。其中,“以方便故”是指由于是方便,由于是能达成之因的意思。巴利
Anta-saddo loke pariyosāne, koṭiyaṃ niruḷhoti tadatthaṃ dassento ‘‘antoyeva anto’’ti āha, koṭi antoti attho. Parabhāgoti pārimanto. Amati gacchati bhavappabandho niṭṭhānaṃ etthāti anto, koṭi. Amanaṃ niṭṭhānagamananti anto, osānaṃ. So pana ‘‘esevanto dukkhassā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.393; saṃ. ni. 2.51) vuttattā dukkhaṇṇavassa pārimantoti āha ‘‘parabhāgo’’ti. Ammati paribhuyyati hīḷīyatīti anto, lāmako. Ammati bhāgaso ñāyatīti anto, aṃsoti āha ‘‘koṭṭhāso anto’’ti. Santo paramatthato vijjamāno kāyo dhammasamūhoti sakkāyo, khandhā, te pana ariyasaccabhūtā idhādhippetāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcupādānakkhandhā’’ti. Purimataṇhāti yesaṃ nibbattikā, tannibbattito pageva siddhā taṇhā. Appavattibhūtanti nappavattati tadubhayaṃ etthāti tesaṃ appavattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Yadi ‘‘sakkāyo anto’’tiādinā aññamaññaṃ vibhattitāya dukkhasaccādayo gahitā, atha kasmā maggo na gahitoti āha ‘‘maggo panā’’tiādi. Tattha upāyattāti upāyabhāvato, sampāpakahetubhāvatoti attho.
如果认为只要把握了“有因”就已经把因包含在内,那么仅仅把握“有身”时,岂不是也已经把作为其因的“有身集”包含在内了吗?若真是这样,这就和“有为二法”“有缘二法”一样,成了二法,而不是三法。再者,如果把握有身就已经包含有身集,那么把握有身灭时,也应该一并包含灭除有身的方法;这样一来,就成了四法,而不是三法。所以,不应该认为把握“有因”就已经把因包含在内。这里真正合适的意趣应该是:有身和有身集是无始以来就存在的;只要还没有修习圣道,因缘就不会止息,所以它们也没有尽头。而涅槃没有因缘,因为它自身恒常,所以一切时候都存在,因此也是无始、无边的。正是基于这个共同点,大长老把这三谛说成“三边”这样一个三法。但圣道只是偶尔、难得才能获得,并不是一直如此;为了显示它极其难遇,就把它排除在三法之外。这是我对这个地方的看法。巴利
Yadi pana hetumantaggahaṇeneva hetu gahito hoti, nanu evaṃ sakkāyaggahaṇeneva tassa hetubhūto sakkāyasamudayo gahito hotīti? Tassa gahaṇe saṅkhataduko viya, sappaccayaduko viya ca dukovāyaṃ āpajjati, na tiko. Yathā pana sakkāyaṃ gahetvā sakkāyasamudayopi gahito, evaṃ sakkāyanirodhaṃ gahetvā sakkāyanirodhupāyo gayheyya, evaṃ sati catukko ayaṃ āpajjeyya, na tiko, tasmā hetumantaggahaṇena hetuggahaṇaṃ na cintetabbaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo yutto siyā – idha sakkāyasakkāyasamudayā anādikālikā, asati maggabhāvanāyaṃ paccayānuparamena apariyantā ca, nibbānaṃ pana appaccayattā attano niccatāya eva sabbadābhāvīti anādikāliko, apariyanto ca. Iti imāni tīṇi saccāni mahāthero imāya sabhāgatāya ‘‘tayo antā’’ti tikaṃ katvā dasseti . Ariyamaggo pana kadāci karahaci labbhamāno na tathāti tassa ativiya dullabhapātubhāvataṃ dīpetuṃ tikato bahikatoti ayamettha attanomati.
“苦性”就是指苦的状态,或者就像“天”本身就是“天”一样,苦本身就是苦性。不过,“苦”这个词,也会用在本质上并不苦的乐受和舍受上,因为其中某种不可意的特殊性而这么说。为了排除这种情况,就用一个表示本质之苦的“苦”字来加以限定,说“苦苦性”。因为即使在纯粹是那种本质的意义上,也可能因为与别的法有某种相似而产生混淆,所以需要限定,就像说“色色”“芝麻油”那样。所谓“以行的体性”,就是指有为的体性。被各种缘所造作,所以叫“行”,这里指不苦不乐受。正因为是被造作的,所以没有坚实,极其微弱;在生起的当下,就像正趋向坏灭一样,以被逼迫的状态而现起,因此说“由于是有为的,所以被生、老、坏灭所逼恼”。“因此”,就是根据上面所说的道理。因为没有其他苦的本质:也就是说,没有苦苦、变易苦等另外的苦之本质。所谓“在变异中”,就是在变易中,意思是消失。所以《破斥迷执》中说:“变易苦,就是不存在状态之苦。”对于还没有遍知诸所缘的人来说,乐受的止息会显现为苦;这个道理也应该通过爱别离来说明。因此他说“乐之灭故”等等。前面说的方法只限于一部分,只以受的差别为对象,所以为了显示无余的行苦性,又说“再者”来展示第二种方法。那么,难道因为“一切行皆苦”这句话,乐受和苦受也都成为行苦了吗?确实如此,但那是以共通性来说的,被作为例外而说的其他苦性之语所排除,所以并不矛盾。因此他说“除苦受与乐受”。巴利
Dukkhatāti dukkhabhāvo, dukkhaṃyeva vā yathā devo eva devatā. Dukkha-saddo cāyaṃ adukkhasabhāvesupi sukhupekkhāsu kañci aniṭṭhatāvisesaṃ upādāya pavattatīti tato nivattento sabhāvadukkhavācinā ekena dukkha-saddena visesetvā ‘‘dukkhadukkhatā’’ti āha. Bhavati hi ekantato taṃsabhāvepi atthe aññassa dhammassa yena kenaci sadisatālesena byabhicārāsaṅkāti visesitabbatā yathā ‘‘rūparūpaṃ tilatela’’nti (vibha. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakathā) ca. Saṅkhārabhāvenāti saṅkhatabhāvena. Paccayehi saṅkharīyantīti saṅkhārā, adukkhamasukhavedanā. Saṅkhariyamānattā eva hi asārakatāya paridubbalabhāvena bhaṅgabhaṅgābhimukhakkhaṇesu viya attalābhakkhaṇepi vibādhappattā eva hutvā saṅkhārā pavattantīti āha ‘‘saṅkhatattā uppādajarābhaṅgapīḷitā’’ti. Tasmāti yathāvuttakāraṇato. Aññadukkhasabhāvavirahatoti dukkhadukkhatāvipariṇāmadukkhatāsaṅkhātassa aññassa dukkhasabhāvassa abhāvato. Vipariṇāmeti pariṇāme, vigameti attho. Tenāha papañcasūdaniyaṃ ‘‘vipariṇāmadukkhāti natthibhāvo dukkha’’nti. Apariññātavatthukānañhi sukhavedanuparamo dukkhato upaṭṭhāti, svāyamattho piyavippayogena dīpetabbo. Tenāha ‘‘sukhassa hī’’tiādi. Pubbe vuttanayo padesanissito vedanāvisesamattavisayattāti anavasesato saṅkhāradukkhataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’ti dutiyanayo vutto. Nanu ca ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhā’’ti (dha. pa. 278) vacanato sukhadukkhavedanānampi saṅkhāradukkhatā āpannāti ? Saccametaṃ, sā pana sāmaññajotanāapavādabhūtena itaradukkhatāvacanena nivattīyatīti nāyaṃ virodho. Tenevāha ‘‘ṭhapetvā dukkhavedanaṃ sukhavedanañcā’’ti.
“邪性”是指:即使有人这样发愿“愿它能给我带来利益和安乐”,但由于实际上并不如此;而且对于不净等对象,是以“净”等颠倒的方式生起的,所以是邪性,意思是虚妄之性。因为在杀母等行为中现行的那些法,也是由于想要利益和安乐才现行的,所以那些法也被发愿为“愿它们能给我带来利益和安乐”。同样,由于对不净、苦、无常、无我以“净”等颠倒而坚固执取,无间业和决定邪见才得以现行,所以那些法对于不净等对象,是以“净”等颠倒的方式生起的。在给与果报时,也就是在蕴坏之后立刻给与果报,所以是决定的;它既是邪的又是决定的,所以叫“邪性决定”。如果造了许多无间业,其中力量最强的那个会成熟,其他的不会成熟,所以不能说它们“必定生果”。因此说“在给与果报时”。“蕴坏之后”就是死没之后。因为死,在解释死的时候被称为“诸蕴之坏”。这句话的意思是:在给与果报时,这些业的果报时间就是在死没之后立刻,而不是其他时间。这是以果报时间的决定来说决定,不是以必定给与果报来说决定。因为如果以必定给与果报为决定,那么其他的投生受业、现法受业也会因决定而成为决定,所以对于有果报法的诸法,即使因缘条件不具足等而不成熟,也以其自性犹如果报法性一样,即使由强有力的无间业给与了果报而不成熟,无间业的果报给与也是决定自性的、无间业自性的现行,因此以其自性来说,正是以果报给与的决定而成为决定,也应知道无间性。而且,它们决定是决定自性的、无间业自性的现行,这一点应当接受:在没有其他强有力的无间业时,从死没之后立刻必定给与果报。巴利
Micchāsabhāvoti ‘‘hitasukhāvaho me bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ āsīsitopi tathā abhāvato, asubhādīsuyeva ‘‘subha’’ntiādiviparītappavattito ca micchāsabhāvo, musāsabhāvoti attho. Mātughātakādīsu pavattamānāpi hi hitasukhaṃ icchantāva pavattantīti te dhammā ‘‘hitasukhāvahā me bhavissantī’’ti āsīsitā honti. Tathā asubhāsukhāniccānattesu subhādivipariyāsadaḷhatāya ānantariyakammaniyatamicchādiṭṭhīsu pavatti hotīti te dhammā asubhādīsu subhādiviparītappavattikā honti. Vipākadāne sati khandhabhedānantarameva vipākadānato niyato, micchatto ca so niyato cāti micchattaniyato. Anekesu ānantariyesu katesu yaṃ tattha balavaṃ, taṃ vipaccati, na itarānīti ekantavipākajanakatāya niyatatā na sakkā vattunti ‘‘vipākadāne satī’’ti vuttaṃ. Khandhabhedānantaranti cutianantaranti attho. Cuti hi maraṇaniddese ‘‘khandhānaṃ bhedo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.390; ma. ni. 1.123; 3.373; vibha. 193) vuttā, etena vacanena sati phaladāne cutianantaro eva etesaṃ phalakālo, na aññoti phalakālaniyamena niyatatā vuttā hoti, na phaladānaniyamenāti niyataphalakālānaṃ aññesampi upapajjavedanīyānaṃ, diṭṭhadhammavedanīyānampi niyatatā āpajjati, tasmā vipākadhammadhammānaṃ paccayantaravikalatādīhi avipaccamānānampi attano sabhāvena vipākadhammatā viya balavatā ānantariyena vipāke dinne avipaccamānānampi ānantariyānaṃ phaladāne niyatasabhāvā, ānantariyasabhāvā ca pavattīti attano sabhāvena phaladānaniyameneva niyatatā, ānantariyatā ca veditabbā. Avassañca niyatasabhāvā, ānantariyasabhāvā ca tesaṃ pavattīti sampaṭicchitabbametaṃ aññassa balavato ānantariyassa abhāve cutianantaraṃ ekantena phaladānato.
有人会问:如果是这样,那么其他那些投生时受报的业,在没有别的业来给果报的情况下,不也是在死后紧接着就必然给果报吗?这样一来,它们不也具有无间业的性质、具有决定性的性质而转起了吗?并不会。因为它们与无间业不同类,会由于心的愿力和破坏性的业而使果报被扭转,所以并不具备“紧接着必然给果报”的性质。但无间业不是这样:不像初禅等会被第二禅等不同类的法遮止那样,无间业没有任何不同类的果报遮止者,因为一切无间业的果报就是无间地狱;也没有像持戒者希望投生到下界时那种心的愿力那样,能遮止无间业力的愿力,因为无间业即使人不愿意,也会把人抛入无间地狱;也没有任何业能破坏无间业。因此,只有无间业才具有“紧接着必然生果”的性质而转起。再者,造了多种无间业,由于这些业在必然受报上是决定的,不会停止不熟,具有必定成熟的体性,所以在本质上被确定为决定的。而死后紧接着生起的果报,就叫作“无间”。这些业系属于这个无间,因为能产生它而有造作无间的性质,以无间为目的,所以它们在本质上就是无间业。然而,在这些同类的业中,当一个业已经给出了果报,其余的因为自己该做的事已被那个业做了,就不会再作第二次、第三次结生,并不是因为它们的能力被破坏了,所以说它们决定的无间性并不会被扭转。因为同类并不会破坏同类的能力。不过应当看到,对一个业来说,其他的业也能成为它的辅助。在正性中,即真实之性中。由正性决定,即以真实决定,因为决定、必然、只在无间给果,所以是正性决定。非决定,即两种方式都不是决定的。其余诸法,即除了烦恼、无间业、出离法之外的其余诸法。巴利
Nanu evaṃ aññesampi upapajjavedanīyānaṃ aññasmiṃ vipākadāyake asati cutianantarameva ekantena phaladānato ānantariyasabhāvā, niyatasabhāvā ca pavatti āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati asamānajātikena cetopaṇidhivasena, upaghātakena ca nivattetabbavipākattā anantarekantaphaladāyakattābhāvā, na pana ānantariyānaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ dutiyajjhānādīni viya asamānajātikaṃ phalanivattakaṃ atthi sabbānantariyānaṃ avīciphalattā, na ca heṭṭhūpapattiṃ icchato sīlavato cetopaṇidhi viya uparūpapattijanakakammabalaṃ ānantariyabalaṃ nivattetuṃ samattho cetopaṇidhi atthi anicchantasseva avīcipātanato, na ca ānantariyupaghātakaṃ kiñci kammaṃ atthi. Tasmā tesaṃyeva anantarekantavipākajanakasabhāvā pavattīti. Anekāni ca ānantariyāni katāni ekante vipāke niyatattā uparatāvipaccanasabhāvāsaṅkattā nicchitāni sabhāvato niyatāneva. Cutianantaraṃ pana phalaṃ anantaraṃ nāma, tasmiṃ anantare niyuttāni, tannibbattanena anantarakaraṇasīlāni anantarapayojanāni cāti sabhāvato ānantariyāneva ca honti. Tesu pana samānasabhāvesu ekena vipāke dinne itarāni attanā kātabbakiccassa teneva katattā na dutiyaṃ tatiyañca paṭisandhiṃ karonti, na samatthatāvighātattāti natthi tesaṃ niyatānantariyatānivattīti. Na hi samānasabhāvaṃ samānasabhāvassa samatthataṃ vihanatīti. Ekassa pana aññānipi upatthambhakāni hontīti daṭṭhabbānīti. Sammāsabhāveti saccasabhāve. Niyato ekantiko anantarameva phaladānenāti sammattaniyamato.Na niyatoti ubhayathāpi na niyato. Avasesānaṃ dhammānanti kilesānantariyakammaniyyānikadhammehi aññesaṃ dhammānaṃ.
“那黑暗”是对复合词的拆解,也就是“黑暗”和“暗黑”。无明被称为“黑暗”,是因为它能遮蔽所缘。因此说:“黑暗已被破坏,光明已生起”“黑暗之蕴已被打破”等等。以无明为首而说疑,是因为疑与巨大的痴任何时候都不分离。“依止”就是达到。“疑惑”,是指像“我在过去世存在过吗?”这样生起疑惑,陷入犹豫。“不能决意”,是指不能以净信和胜解来决定。所以说“不能净信”。因为对任何事,只要疑还没有消除,信胜解在那里就没有立足之地。不仅信胜解,智决意在那里也完全无法安立。巴利
Tamandhakāroti tamo andhakāroti padavibhāgo. Avijjā tamo nāma ārammaṇassa chādanaṭṭhena. Tenevāha ‘‘tamo vihato, āloko uppanno (ma. ni. 1.385; pārā. 12), tamokkhandho padālito’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.164) ca ādi. Avijjāsīsena vicikicchā vuttā mahatā sammohena sabbakālaṃ aviyujjanato. Āgammāti patvā. Kaṅkhatīti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhāna’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) kaṅkhaṃ uppādeti saṃsayaṃ āpajjati. Adhimuccituṃ na sakkotīti pasādādhimokkhavasena adhimuccituṃ na sakkoti. Tenāha ‘‘na sampasīdatī’’ti. Yāvattakañhi yasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ vicikicchā na vigacchati, tāva tattha saddhādhimokkho anavasarova. Na kevalaṃ saddhādhimokkho, nicchayādhimokkhopi tattha na patiṭṭhahati eva.
“不应被守护”的意思是:并不存在“这些是我应当守护的”这样的守护之事,因为根本没有任何需要被别人守护的东西。它们“唯以念而守护”:因为失念已在菩提树下连同习气一起被彻底断除,所以由念应当守护的,其实任何时候都已在守护之中。“如来没有身恶行”,是说如来确实没有身恶行,因为世尊的身行极其清净。并非不清净,而是清净的,因为导致不清净的烦恼已被断除。不过,在律的语境中,从“不知行”的角度来说,其他人可能还有不清净的残余,而世尊则完全没有。为了说明这一点,才说了“然而”等话。其中,“建造住处是罪”,这里要按单数来理解,应把“罪”这个词引到“诸罪”处来搭配。因为词性和数要随所表达的对象而定。这个原则也适用于其余各处。“于意门”这一说法,是为了表明那种罪是由非行而生的。因为在律中,并没有于意门制立的罪。“以可呵责的方式”,是指以可指责的状态,而不是以具有恶行特征的罪的方式,因此世尊会加以遮止。就像尊者摩诃劫宾那也曾这样思惟:“我去布萨,还是不去?我去僧伽羯磨,还是不去?”(《大品》137)所谓“意恶行”,就是依于意门的、不被称赞的行为。因为由于不被大师称赞,它才成为恶行,并不是从本性上就是恶行。巴利
Na rakkhitabbānīti ‘‘imāni mayā rakkhitabbānī’’ti evaṃ katthaci rakkhākiccaṃ natthi parato rakkhitabbasseva abhāvato. Satiyā eva rakkhitānīti muṭṭhassaccassa bodhimūle eva savāsanaṃ samucchinnattā satiyā rakkhitabbāni nāma sabbadāpi rakkhitāni eva. Natthi tathāgatassa kāyaduccaritanti tathāgatassa kāyaduccaritaṃ nāma nattheva, yato suparisuddho kāyasamācāro bhagavato. No aparisuddhā, parisuddhā eva aparisuddhihetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ pahīnattā. Tathāpi vinaye apakataññutāvasena siyā tesaṃ apārisuddhileso, na bhagavatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘na panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha vihārakāraṃ āpattinti ekavacanavasena ‘‘āpattiyo’’ti ettha āpatti-saddaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Abhidheyyānurūpañhi liṅgavacanāni honti. Esa nayo sesesupi. ‘‘Manodvāre’’ti idaṃ tassā āpattiyā akiriyasamuṭṭhānatāya vuttaṃ. Na hi manodvāre paññattā āpatti atthīti. Saupārambhavasenāti savattabbatāvasena, na pana duccaritalakkhaṇāpattivasena, yato naṃ bhagavā paṭikkhipati. Yathā āyasmato mahākappinassāpi ‘‘gaccheyyaṃ vāhaṃ uposathaṃ, na vā gaccheyyaṃ. Gaccheyyaṃ vāhaṃ saṅghakammaṃ, na vā gaccheyya’’nti (mahāva. 137) parivitakkitaṃ. Manoduccaritanti manodvārikaṃ appasatthaṃ caritaṃ. Satthārā appasatthatāya hi taṃ duccaritaṃ nāma jātaṃ, na sabhāvato.
因为具足大悲的世尊,为了包括天神在内的世间众生的利益与安乐而行道,又由于他志趣在于极致的远离,所以当法将(舍利弗长老)生起与之相违的心念时,世尊予以遮止,说道:“你不应生起……当生起……”因此,在世人看来,那位长老生起的心念不被世尊所称赞,于是就成了意恶行;而世尊对它的遮止就是呵责。所以论中说:“对于那意恶行,安立了呵责。”然而世尊自身连这一点点的过失也没有。在《自恣经》中,世尊说:“来吧,比丘们,我现在向你们自恣。你们若对我的身行或语行有任何可指责之处,请指出。”(相应部1.215)比丘僧团则回答:“尊者,我们确实不见世尊在身行或语行上有任何可指责之处。”他们就这样以头顶礼接受了大师清净的身行等。为了说明世尊没有恶行这件事,即使在菩萨地时也早已长久随行于正行,更何况已到佛地,所以论中说:“这并不稀奇……”等等。巴利
Yasmā mahākāruṇiko bhagavā sadevakassa lokassa hitasukhāya eva paṭipajjamāno accantavivekajjhāsayatāya tabbidhuraṃ dhammasenāpatino cittuppādaṃ paṭikkhipanto ‘‘na kho te…pe… uppādetabba’’nti avoca, tasmā so therassa cittuppādo bhagavato na pāsaṃsoti katvā manoduccaritaṃ nāma jāto, tassa ca paṭikkhepo upārambhoti āha ‘‘tasmiṃ manoduccarite upārambhaṃ āropento’’ti. Bhagavato pana ettakampi natthi, yato pavāraṇāsutte ‘‘handa dāni, bhikkhave, pavāremi vo, na ca me kiñci garahatha kāyikaṃ vā vācasikaṃ vā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.215) vutto bhikkhusaṅgho ‘‘na kho mayaṃ bhante bhagavato kiñci garahāma kāyikaṃ vā vācasikaṃ vā’’ti satthu parisuddhakāyasamācārādikaṃ sirasā sampaṭicchi. Ayañhi lokanāthassa duccaritābhāvo bodhisattabhūmiyampi cariyācirānugato ahosi, pageva buddhabhūmiyanti dassento ‘‘anacchariyañceta’’ntiādimāha.
“佛法”是指只有诸佛才具有的法与功德,不是其他人也有的,所以叫“佛法”。因此,它们也被称为诸佛的不共法。在这里,“如来没有身恶行”等话,是在说明没有身、语、意的恶行,这是随各自的主题,赞叹身业等因为始终有智伴随而获得的功德,并不是在指出另一种不共法。因为,在一切身业等都有智伴随而行的时候,身恶行等怎么可能产生呢?有人说,“佛陀有无所障碍的智”等话,是把从一切知智中分出来的三种智,说成像是区分四生、五趣的智一样。然而,那同一个智在三时中无碍,就名为无所障碍智,也就是一切知智本身。没有志欲的退失,是指对众生利益之志欲没有退失。没有精进的退失,是指伴随安稳、远离、寻思的精进没有退失。“没有嬉戏”是指没有以嬉戏为目的的行为。“没有仓促”是指没有仓促的行为。他们说,仓促的行为就是嬉戏,即“我要做别的”而做别的,就是仓促。“失足”是指失误,不被智所触;“唐突”是指慌张、急促的行为;“心不忙碌”是指心没有无益的运作;“不善心”是指无智的舍。而这是长部诵者的读法,似乎混乱。但这一读法并不混乱——巴利
Buddhānaṃyeva dhammā guṇā, na aññesanti buddhadhammā. Tathā hi te buddhānaṃ āveṇikadhammāti vuccanti. Tattha ‘‘natthi tathāgatassa kāyaduccarita’’ntiādinā kāyavacīmanoduccaritābhāvavacanaṃ yathādhikāraṃ kāyakammādīnaṃ ñāṇānuparivattitāya laddhaguṇakittanaṃ, na āveṇikadhammantaradassanaṃ. Sabbasmiñhi kāyakammādike ñāṇānuparivattini kuto kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ sambhavo. ‘‘Buddhassa appaṭihatañāṇa’’ntiādinā vuttāni sabbaññutaññāṇato visuṃyeva tīṇi ñāṇāni catuyonipañcagatiparicchedakañāṇāni viyā’’ti vadanti. Ekaṃyeva hutvā tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇaṃ nāma sabbaññutaññāṇameva. Natthi chandassa hānīti sattesu hitachandassa hāni natthi. Natthi vīriyassahānīti khemapavivekavitakkānugatassa vīriyassa hāni natthi. ‘‘Natthi davāti khiḍḍādhippāyena kiriyā natthi. Natthi ravāti sahasā kiriyā natthī’’ti vadanti, sahasā pana kiriyā davā ‘‘aññaṃ karissāmī’’ti aññakaraṇaṃ ravā. Khalitanti virajjhanaṃ ñāṇena apphuṭaṃ. Sahasāti vegāyitattaṃ turitakiriyā. Abyāvaṭo manoti niratthako cittasamudācāro. Akusalacittanti aññāṇupekkhamāha, ayañca dīghabhāṇakānaṃ pāṭho ākulo viya. Ayaṃ pana pāṭho anākulo –
对过去的部分,佛陀、世尊拥有无碍的智;对未来的部分,对现在的部分,也是如此。具足这三种法的佛陀、世尊,一切身业都以智为先导、随智而行,一切语业、一切意业也是如此。具足这六种法的佛陀、世尊,欲不会退失,说法不会退失,精进不会退失,定不会退失,慧不会退失,解脱不会退失。具足这十二种法的佛陀、世尊,没有嬉戏,没有急躁,没有失误,没有慌张,没有散乱的心,没有不加省察的舍。巴利
Atītaṃse buddhassa bhagavato appaṭihatañāṇaṃ, anāgataṃse, paccuppannaṃse. Imehi tīhi dhammehi samannāgatassa buddhassa bhagavato sabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ ñāṇapubbaṅgamaṃ ñāṇānuparivatti, sabbaṃ vacīkammaṃ, sabbaṃ manokammaṃ. Imehi chahi dhammehi samannāgatassa buddhassa bhagavato natthi chandassa hāni, natthi dhammadesanāya, natthi vīriyassa, natthi samādhissa , natthi paññāya, natthi vimuttiyā. Imehi dvādasahi dhammehi samannāgatassa buddhassa bhagavato natthi davā, natthi ravā, natthi apphuṭaṃ, natthi vegāyitattaṃ, natthi abyāvaṭamano, natthi appaṭisaṅkhānupekkhāti.
其中,不加行舍就是无智舍。其余内容跟前面说的一样。这里,大长老把如来的活命清净归入身、语、意三种清净行中,然后按这三种行来宣说三行。巴利
Tattha appaṭisaṅkhānupekkhāti aññāṇupekkhā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ettha ca tathāgatassa ājīvapārisuddhiṃ kāyavacīmanosamācārapārisuddhiyāva saṅgahetvā samācārattayavasena mahātherena tiko desito.
“障碍”是指某种细微之物。不过,贪等这些烦恼因为具有束缚的作用,所以就像障碍一样,因此称为障碍。所以说:“障碍,就是束缚。”巴利
Kiñcanāti kiñcikkhā. Ime pana rāgādayo palibundhanaṭṭhena kiñcanā viyāti kiñcanā. Tenāha ‘‘kiñcanāti palibodhā’’ti.
“不断烧燃”的意思,就是一次又一次地烧燃。贪等属于无色法,又只是刹那生灭的,怎么能不断烧燃呢?为了消除这个疑问,所以说“于此中,有诸事物”,这里省略了“应当被看见”这句话。“于此中”,是指在贪等不断烧燃这个意义上。“诸事物”,是指在教法和世间中都显而易见、如同现量可见的那些事例。贪生起后,变得非常锐利。因此,由它所产生的火界以极其锐利的形态,连同与它一起生起的诸法,烧燃心脏部位,就像外在的火界烧燃它所依止的东西一样。于是,那位比丘尼就像熟睡一般,因病而烧燃死去。因此说“就以那样的烧燃而死去”。嗔的所依被烧燃,这是很明显的。为了说明其余的部分,所以说“由于痴……”等。“超越”就是跨越。巴利
Anudahanaṭṭhenāti anu anu dahanaṭṭhena. Rāgādayo arūpadhammā ittarakkhaṇā kathaṃ anudahantīti āsaṅkaṃ nivattetuṃ ‘‘tattha vatthūnī’’ti vuttaṃ, daṭṭhabbānīti vacanaseso. Tatthāti tasmiṃ rāgādīnaṃ anudahanaṭṭhe. Vatthūnīti sāsane, loke ca pākaṭattā paccakkhabhūtāni kāraṇāni. Rāgouppanno tikhiṇakaro hutvā. Tasmā taṃsamuṭṭhānā tejodhātu ativiya tikhiṇabhāvena saddhiṃ attanā sahajātadhammehi hadayappadesaṃ jhāpesi yathā taṃ bāhirā tejodhātu sanissayaṃ. Tena sā bhikkhunī supato viya byādhi jhāyitvā matā. Tenāha ‘‘teneva jhāyitvā kālamakāsī’’ti. Dosassa nissayānaṃ dahanatā pākaṭā evāti itaraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mohavasena hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ativattitvāti atikkamitvā.
婆罗门所希求的,确实是应供火等三种火,但那只是他们所希求的而已,并不能像那样真正利益众生。为了指出哪些才是真正能利益众生的对象,才说了“āhuna 被称为……”等话。其中,以恭敬心去侍奉、尊敬,就叫作 āhuna,也就是供养;这样的供养,是他们值得领受的。所以世尊说:“比丘们,‘应受供养者’是父母的称呼。”(《如是语》106)因为父母对子女有种种大恩,所以被称为应受供养者;子女对他们行正道,就能带来利益和安乐,若行邪道,就会带来不利和痛苦,因此说“在他们……产生……”。这里所说的“这个意义”,就是指:对自己(父母)行邪道的子女作为父母不断燃烧的因缘,这就是“不断燃烧”的含义。通过弥达文达迦的故事可以了解这一点:有个叫弥达文达迦的男子对母亲忤逆不孝,就凭这一忤逆之行,他长久在恶趣中受苦,这个故事就是说明。巴利
Kāmaṃ āhuneyyaggiādayo tayo aggī brāhmaṇehi icchitā santi, te pana tehi icchitamattā, na sattānaṃ tādisā atthasādhakā. Ye pana sattānaṃ atthasādhakā, te dassetuṃ ‘‘āhunaṃ vuccatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ādarena hunanaṃ pūjanaṃ āhunanti sakkāro ‘‘āhuna’’nti vuccati, taṃ āhunaṃ arahanti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘āhuneyyāti bhikkhave mātāpitūnametaṃ adhivacana’’nti (itivu. 106). Yadaggena ca te puttānaṃ bahukāratāya āhuneyyāti tesu sammāpaṭipatti nesaṃ hitasukhāvahā, tadaggena tesu micchāpaṭipatti ahitadukkhāvahāti āha ‘‘tesu…pe… nibbattantī’’ti. Svāyamatthoti yo mātāpitūnaṃ attano upari vippaṭipannānaṃ puttānaṃ anudahanassa paccayabhāvena anudahanaṭṭho, so ayamattho. Mittavindakavatthunāti mittavindakassa nāma mātari vippaṭipannassa purisassa tāya eva vippaṭipattiyā cirataraṃ kālaṃ āpāyikadukkhānubhavanadīpanena vatthunā veditabbo.
现在,为了说明这件事发生在迦叶世尊的时代,所以接着说了“弥达文达迦确实……”等话。意思是说,他是出于贪图财物,而不是出于对法的喜好。“无所畏惧”:因为没有人能管束他,所以他觉得哪里都能去。“母亲阻止他”:母亲心里想“出海远航有很多危险”,所以就阻止他。“置于中间”:是指他跨过去,把母亲夹在两只脚之间。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ kassapassa bhagavato kāle pavattaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘mittavindako hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dhanalobhena, na dhammacchandenāti adhippāyo. Akutobhayaṃ kenaci anuṭṭhāpanīyatāya. Nivāresi samuddapayātā nāma bahvantarāyāti adhippāyena. Antaraṃ katvāti atikkamanavasena dvinnaṃ pādānaṃ antare katvā.
船停在那里不动,是因为他恶业的力量使风不吹。有一天,他正凭着过去受持布萨的功德,享受着福报。就像先前那些天女对他说“不要再从这儿往别处去了”,后来的天女也同样这么说,所以经文说“当他被那些天女一再告知‘不要从一处再往另一处去’的时候”。持刀轮者,就是手持像刀刃一样锋利的轮状武器的人。他出现在那里,是他恶业的力量所致。巴利
Nāvā aṭṭhāsi tassa pāpakammabalena vātassa avāyanato. Ekadivasaṃ rakkhitauposathakammānubhāvena sampattiṃ anubhavanto. Yathā purimāhi parato mā agamāsīti vutto, evaṃ aparāparāhipīti āha ‘‘tāhi ‘parato parato mā agamāsī’ti vuccamāno’’ti. Khuracakkadharanti khuradhārūpamacakkadharaṃ ekaṃ purisaṃ. Upaṭṭhāsi pāpakammassa balena.
“与四位”是指与四位像天女一样的天宫天女一起享受福报之后,这是省略的说法。“获得八位”是指他获得了比美色等欲乐功德更殊胜的八位天宫天女。“过度贪求”是指因为他具有被称为过度贪求的极端贪欲,所以到处在欲乐功德中追逐渴求。“轮”是指刀轮。“伤害”是指以带来灾祸的方式折磨他。巴利
Catubbhīti catūhi accharāsadisīhi vimānapetīhi, sampattiṃ anubhavitvāti vacanaseso. Aṭṭhajjhagamāti rūpādikāmaguṇehi tato visiṭṭhatarā aṭṭha vimānapetiyo adhigacchi. Atricchanti atricchāsaṅkhātena atilobhena samannāgatattā atra atra kāmaguṇe icchanto. Cakkanti khuracakkaṃ. Āsadoti anatthāvahabhāvena āsādeti.
所谓“他”,就是家主,也就是丈夫。所谓“依前所说之理”,是指不断燃烧的因缘性。巴利
Soti gehasāmiko bhattā. Purimanayenevāti anudahanassa paccayatāya.
“邪行女”是指越过丈夫去行淫的女人。“夜晚之苦”是指因为自己恶业的力量,被狗咬食的那种苦。“欺瞒”是针对她瞒着他去那个地方而说的。“Paṭapaṭantī”就是发出“啪嗒啪嗒”的声音,这是拟声词。据说有一种让狗消失的办法,就是把一口唾沫吐在地上,然后用脚去蹭。因此才说“他那样做了,那些狗就消失了”。巴利
Aticārinīti sāmikaṃ atikkamitvā cārinī micchācārinī. Rattiṃ dukkhanti attano pāpakammānubhāvasamupaṭṭhitena sunakhena khāditabbatādukkhaṃ. Vañcetvāti taṃ ajānāpetvāva kāraṇaṭṭhānagamanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Paṭapaṭantīti paṭapaṭā katvā. Anuravadassanañhetaṃ. Muṭṭhiyogo kirāyaṃ tassa sunakhantaradhānassa, yadidaṃ kheḷapiṇḍaṃ bhūmiyaṃ niṭṭhubhitvā pādena ghaṃsanaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘so tathā akāsi.Sunakhā antaradhāyiṃsū’’ti.
供养:四种资具被布施出去时,众生依靠这些资具能得到利益和安乐,所以叫供养。值得领受这种供养的人,就叫应供者,也就是比丘僧团。关于瑞瓦蒂的故事,应当按照《天宫事·瑞瓦蒂事》(《天宫事》861等)以及它们的注释书(《天宫事注》977-980;《饿鬼事注》714-736)中所说的方法来理解。巴利
Dakkhiṇāticattāro paccayā diyyamānā dakkhanti etehi hitasukhānīti. Taṃ dakkhiṇaṃ arahatīti dakkhiṇeyyo, bhikkhusaṅgho. Revatīvatthu vimānavatthupetavatthūsu (vi. va. 861 ādayo) tesaṃ aṭṭhakathāyañca (vi. va. 977-980; pe. va. aṭṭha. 714-736) āgatanayena veditabbaṃ.
在“由三种方式摄色”这句话里,难道“摄”只有一种吗?那为什么又说有“四种”呢?这是因为,还没有解释“摄”的含义,就只是针对这个含义尚未确定的词本身来说的。在“由三种方式摄色”等段落中,“摄”这个词,首先按照它自身的含义来说有四种——这里的意思就是这样。或者,即使它的含义差别还没有确定,如果以笼统的方式来把握,在“由三种方式摄色”等语境中说“摄”,也没有什么过失。因为如果差别已经确定,它可能只有一种,但在确定之前就不是这样。即使说到“生摄”,由于“生”这个词需要搭配其他词才能理解,它的含义是“以自己的生类来摄”,这个意思仍然能被理解,因为没有提到其他需要关联的事物,就像“奉事父母”这个短语一样。不过在注释书里,为了把所想要的义理不完整地展示出来,就简略地只说“生摄”。“同类者的摄”或者“同类的摄”,就是“自生摄”。“所生之处”叫“生”,以这个生来摄,就是“生摄”,意思是以出生之处来摄。以这样的行为来摄,就是“行摄”。“色蕴的计数”是指“色蕴”这个计数归于数量,因为它的本质是变坏。在“以三种部分来计数色”这个说法中,就是以将要说的三种部分来摄色,意思是应该被计数。巴利
‘‘Tividhena rūpasaṅgaho’’ti ettha nanu saṅgaho ekavidhova, so kasmā ‘‘catubbidho’’ti vuttoti? ‘‘Saṅgaho’’ti atthaṃ avatvā aniddhāritatthassa saddasseva vuttattā. ‘‘Tividhena rūpasaṅgaho’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. rūpakaṇḍa-tike) padesu saṅgaha-saddo tāva attano atthavasena catubbidhoti ayañhettha attho. Atthopi vā aniddhāritaviseso sāmaññena gahetabbataṃ patto ‘‘tividhena rūpasaṅgaho’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. rūpakaṇḍa-tike) ‘‘saṅgaho’’ti vuttoti na koci doso. Niddhārite hi visese tassa ekavidhatā siyā, na tato pubbeti. ‘‘Jātisaṅgaho’’ti vuttepi jāti-saddassa sāpekkhasaddattā attano jātiyā saṅgahoti ayamattho viññāyateva sambandhārahassa aññassa avuttattā yathā ‘‘mātāpitu upaṭṭhāna’’nti (khu. pā. 5.6; su. ni. 265). Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana yathādhippetamatthaṃ aparipuṇṇaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘jātisaṅgaho’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Samānajātikānaṃ saṅgaho, samānajātiyā vā saṅgaho sajātisaṅgaho. Sañjāyati etthāti sañjāti, sañjātiyā saṅgaho sañjātisaṅgaho, sañjātidesena saṅgahoti attho. Kiriyāya evarūpāya saṅgaho kiriyāsaṅgaho. Rūpakkhandhagaṇananti ‘‘rūpakkhandho’’ti gaṇanaṃ saṅkhyaṃ gacchati ruppanasabhāvattā. Tīhi koṭṭhāsehi rūpagaṇanāti vakkhamānehi tīhi bhāgehi rūpassa saṅgaho, gaṇetabbatāti attho.
色处能当面看见、能现前了知,所以叫“可见”,也就是眼识;或者说,它能显示出来,所以叫“可见”,指的是应当被看见的状态,是眼识的所缘境。它虽然和色处没有差别,但为了把色处和其他法区分开来,就把它当作另一种法来说,说“与可见一起的,就是有可见”,这里应当这样理解。因为当诸法在法自性共性的层面上合为一体时,其中造成差别的那种自性,就可以被当作另一种法来方便表达。这样,才能明白意义上的差别。能撞击眼,就是能对眼产生撞击。而撞击应当理解为像撞击一样。按第二种释义,由于没有那种被称为应当被看见的状态的可见,所以叫“非可见”,应当这样连接理解。在这里,十处中各随其宜,或依自身,或依所依,已到达的和未到达的,都面对面、互相碰触,这就叫“撞击”。由于这种作用等差别为缘,在眼等之上就产生了变异。其中,眼等对各自境域的作用是周遍的,色等有可意与不可意,心对那里的倾注等,都包括在“等”字里。由于这些而产生了变异,对其他缘的作用来说,就视为别异,所以说为无增益无损害的变异。然而亲依止在这里是取为非主要的缘。如果因之因也算因,那它也可能被包括进去。所谓“所说的种类”,就是“名为眼识”所说的种类。“非彼之撞击”这里,也把“所说的种类”带进来连接。其余是十六种微细色。巴利
Rūpāyatanaṃ nipassati paccakkhato vijānātīti nidassanaṃ, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, nidassatīti vā nidassanaṃ, daṭṭhabbabhāvo, cakkhuviññāṇassa gocarabhāvo, tassa ca rūpāyatanato anaññattepi aññehi dhammehi rūpāyatanaṃ visesetuṃ aññaṃ viya katvā ‘‘saha nidassanenāti sanidassana’’nti evamettha attho veditabbo. Dhammasabhāvasāmaññena hi ekībhūtesu dhammesu yo nānattakaro sabhāvo, so añño viya katvā upacarituṃ yutto. Evañhi atthavisesāvabodho hotīti. Cakkhupaṭihananasamatthatoti cakkhuno ghaṭṭanasamatthatāya. Ghaṭṭanaṃ viya ca ghaṭṭanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dutiyena atthavikappena daṭṭhabbabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ nāssa nidassananti anidassananti yojanā. Ettha ca dasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ yathārahaṃ sayaṃ, nissayavasena ca sampattānaṃ, asampattānañca paṭimukhabhāvo aññamaññapatanaṃ paṭihananaṃ, yena byāpārādivikārapaccayantarasannidhāne cakkhādīnaṃ visayesu vikāruppatti. Tattha byāpāro cakkhādīnaṃ savisayesu āvicchannaṃ, rūpādīnaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhatā, tattha ca cittassa ābhujananti ime ādisaddasaṅgahitā. Tehi vikārappattiyā paccayantarabyāpārato aññanti katvā anuggahūpaghāto vikāro. Upanissayo pana appadhānassa paccayo idha gahito. Kāraṇakāraṇampi kāraṇamevāti gayhamāne siyā tassāpi saṅgahoti. Vuttappakāranti ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇasaṅkhāta’’nti vuttappakāraṃ. Nāssa paṭighoti etthāpi ‘‘vuttappakāra’’nti ānetvā sambandho. Avasesaṃ soḷasavidhaṃ sukhumarūpaṃ.
“行作”就是聚集、集合的意思。因为思的作用就是策动、推动,当它在各自的作用中安排、调动与它相应的诸法时,由于这种特殊作用的缘故,它就好像在把这些法聚集起来一样。同样地,对于思自身所生的异熟法,当各种缘会合时,它也像是在行作、在聚集。因此说“俱生的……把它们堆成一堆”。“胜行作”就是特别殊胜地造作。福行相对于其他行的果,其果极为殊胜、截然不同,所以是殊胜的造作——无论从缘、从自性、还是从生起的方式来看,它都造作出自身比其他行更为殊胜的自性。对其余两种行也应如此理解。因为它能产生值得供养的果报,又能净化自己的相续,所以称为“福”。巴利
Saṅkharontīti sampiṇḍenti. Cetanā hi āyūhanarasatāya yathā sampayuttadhamme yathāsakaṃ kiccesu saṃvidahantī viya abhisandahantī vattamānā teneva kiccavisesena te sampiṇḍentī viya hoti, evaṃ attano vipākadhammepi paccayasamavāye saṅkharontī sampiṇḍentī viya hoti. Tenāha ‘‘sahajāta…pe… rāsī karontī’’ti. Abhisaṅkharotīti abhivisiṭṭhaṃ katvā saṅkharoti. Puññābhisaṅkhāro hi attano phalaṃ itarassa phalato ativiya visiṭṭhaṃ bhinnaṃ katvā saṅkharoti paccayato, sabhāvato, pavattiākārato ca sayaṃ itarehi visiṭṭhasabhāvattā. Esa nayo itarehipi. Pujjabhavaphalanibbattanato, attano santānassa punanato ca puñño.
关于“大心之思”:这是指在能产生不可计数寿命等大威神力的大心中生起的思。思只有八种,就是欲界的善思。为什么说“十三种”呢?难道不应该说“九种”吗?为了回应“没有智慧的修习并不相应”这一责难,才说了“就像……”等话。“对于作遍相准备者”:就是对诸遍处正在作禅那准备的人。因为“地、地”等修习,就是遍的准备。当他对这个准备工作修得极为纯熟、专心投入时,由于恭敬用心的缘故,可能会有不带智慧的心生起。对禅那的省察也是如此。有些人甚至把制作曼陀罗圆相也算作修习。巴利
Mahācittacetanānanti asaṅkhyeyyāyunipphādanādimahānubhāvatāya mahācittesu pavattacetanānaṃ. Aṭṭheva cetanā honti, yā kāmāvacarā kusalā. ‘‘Terasapī’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu ‘‘navā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Na hi bhāvanā ñāṇarahitā yuttāti anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi. Kasiṇaparikammaṃ karontassāti kasiṇesu jhānaparikammaṃ karontassa. ‘‘Pathavī pathavī’’tiādi bhāvanā hi kasiṇaparikammaṃ. Tassa hi parikammassa supaguṇabhāvato anuyuttassa tattha ādarākaraṇena siyā ñāṇarahitacittaṃ. Jhānapaccavekkhaṇāyapi eseva nayo. Keci maṇḍalakaraṇampi bhāvanaṃ bhajāpenti.
以布施为条件而现起的心和心所法,就是布施;其中作为主导作用的策励思,因为是以布施为所缘、依布施而生起,所以这样说。对其他的戒等也是如此。这是简略的说法:意思是,这是对福行从简略角度做的义理说明;义理注释就是对义理的阐释。巴利
Dānavasena pavattacittacetasikadhammā dānaṃ, tattha byāpārabhūtā āyūhanacetanā dānaṃ ārabbha, dānañca adhikicca uppajjatīti vuttā. Evaṃ itaresupi. Ayaṃ saṅkhepadesanāti ayaṃ puññābhisaṅkhāre saṅkhepato atthadesanā, atthavaṇṇanāti attho.
以喜悦心:这里应当只理解为显示随喜现起的状态而已。因为即使是以与舍相应的心,也同样能够随念。诚然,恒常戒、布萨戒、决定戒也都是戒,但为了显示圆满、具足一切支分的戒,才说了“为了圆满戒”等话。或者,这也只是显示一种方法。因此,心里想着“我要受持恒常戒、布萨戒、决定戒”而前往精舍的人,在受持之后,对已受持的戒生起“善哉,太好了”这样的随念,以及正在净化那戒的人,在这些情况下现起的思,就是戒所成,应当这样连接并理解此处的含义。巴利
Somanassacittenāti anumodanāpavattidassanamattametaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Upekkhāsahagatenāpi hi anussarati evāti. Kāmaṃ niccasīlaṃ, uposathasīlaṃ, niyamasīlampi sīlameva, paripuṇṇaṃ pana sabbaṅgasampannaṃ sīlaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sīlapūraṇatthāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nayadassanaṃ vā etaṃ, tasmā ‘‘niccasīlaṃ, uposathasīlaṃ, niyamasīlaṃ samādiyissāmī’’ti vihāraṃ gacchantassa, samādiyitvā samādinnasīle ca tasmiṃ, ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhū’’ti āvajjantassa, taṃ sīlaṃ sodhentassa ca pavattā cetanā sīlamayāti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
之前是按修止的方式来讲修行方法的,现在为了从观照思维的角度来说明它,所以说了“依照《无碍解道》中所说的”等话。其中,“以无常”:是从无常的性质来说的。“以苦”“以无我”,这里也是同样的道理。巴利
Pubbe samathavasena bhāvanānayo gahitoti idāni sammasananayena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha aniccatoti aniccabhāvato. Dukkhato, anattatoti etthāpi eseva nayo.
在这里,那些以名色形态被统摄的五取蕴,因为能借助门、所缘以及依门生起的法而得到区分,所以按六门六处等六种六法组来把握。又因为在诸相当中,无我相不容易看清,为了把它阐明出来,所以取了六界。接着,有些外道对某些遍处生起“这是我”的执著,为了说明这些遍处只是那些禅那的所缘显现方式,而这些才是那些禅那,所以取了十遍。然后,作为苦随观的辅助,以厌恶的行相取了三十二身分。前面已经按蕴的方式简要地把握了这些法,现在为了说明既不应太简略也不应太详细地作意,所以取了十二处和十八界。在这些法当中,虽然它们本来就是空、没有造作者、没有运作,但为了说明它们依法的自性以增上的方式生起,从而阐明无我的性质,所以取了诸根。为了说明这些法虽然分成许多种类,但依三地来看只有三种,所以取了三界。到此为止,先显示了所缘,接着为了显示生起,取了欲有等九有。在这么多应当了知的差别中,以善巧的作意来运作,为了说明应当把作意转向那些微细、殊胜、已生起的大法,所以取了禅那、无量、无色定。其中,所谓禅那,是指以其余那些所缘为所缘的色界禅那。再者,为了说明这些法应当从因和因所生法的区分来分别作意,所以取了缘起支。因为对缘起行相的作意能轻松而且更好地阐明三相,所以它被放在后面。这样,这些以蕴等类别被取来作为应观察对象的法,从分类上说有二十五种;如果不再涉及过去等差别而直接取,就有两百种减二。以上是这里对巴利文的界定;至于义理的考察,想要了解的人,应当依照《胜义筐》即《清净道论》注释所说的方式来了知。巴利
Tattha ye pañcupādānakkhandhā nāmarūpabhāvena pariggahitā, te yasmā dvārārammaṇehi saddhiṃ dvārappavattadhammavasena vibhāgaṃ labhanti, tasmā dvārachakkādivasena cha chakkā gahitā. Yasmā pana lakkhaṇesu anattalakkhaṇaṃ dubbibhāvaṃ, tasmā tassa vibhāvanāya cha dhātuyo gahitā. Tato yesu kasiṇesu ito bāhirakānaṃ attābhiniveso, tāni imesaṃ jhānānaṃ ārammaṇabhāvena upaṭṭhānākāramattāni, imāni pana tāni jhānānīti dassanatthaṃ dasa kasiṇāni gahitāni. Tato dukkhānupassanāya parivārabhāvena paṭikkūlākāravasena dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāsā gahitā. Pubbe khandhavasena saṅkhepato ime dhammā gahitā, idāni nātisaṅkhepavitthāranayena ca manasi kātabbāti dassanatthaṃ dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo ca gahitā. Tesu ime dhammā satipi suññānirīhaabyāpārabhāve dhammasabhāvato ādhipaccabhāvena pavattantīti anattabhāvavibhāvanatthaṃ indriyāni gahitāni. Evaṃ anekabhedabhinnāpi ime dhammā bhūmittayapariyāpannatāya tividhāva hontīti dassanatthaṃ tisso dhātuyo gahitā. Ettāvatā nimittaṃ dassetvā pavattaṃ dassetuṃ kāmabhavādayo nava bhavā gahitā. Ettake abhiññeyyavisese pavattamanasikārakosallena saṇhasukhumesu nibbattitamahaggatadhammesu manasikāro pavattetabboti dassanatthaṃ jhānaappamaññārūpāni gahitāni. Tattha jhānāni nāma vuttāvasesārammaṇāni rūpāvacarajjhānāni. Puna paccayapaccayuppannavibhāgato ime dhammā vibhajja manasikātabbāti dassanatthaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṅgāni gahitāni. Paccayākāramanasikāro hi sukhena, suṭṭhutarañca lakkhaṇattayaṃ vibhāveti, tasmā so pacchato gahito. Evaṃ ete sammasanīyabhāvena gahitā khandhādivasena koṭṭhāsato pañcavīsatividhā, pabhedato pana atītādibhedaṃ anāmasitvā gayhamānā dvīhi ūnāni dvesatāni honti. Idaṃ tāvettha pāḷivavatthānaṃ, atthavicāraṃ pana icchantehi paramatthamañjūsāyaṃ visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
不是福,就是无福。它的意思要从“福”这个词的反面来理解。由于能很好地镇伏那些让相续动摇的障碍等法,又因为不存在被称为色爱的动摇,所以是“不动”;这个“不动”本身就被称为“无动”。同样地,以色为所缘、以色相为所缘的,乃至整个第四禅,都毫无例外地被称为“无动”。巴利
Na puññoti apuñño. Tassa puñña-sadde vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Santānassa iñjanahetūnaṃ nīvaraṇādīnaṃ suvikkhambhanato rūpataṇhāsaṅkhātassa iñjitassa abhāvato aniñjaṃ, aniñjameva ‘‘āneñja’’nti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi rūpārammaṇaṃ rūpanimittārammaṇaṃ sabbampi catutthajjhānaṃ nippariyāyena ‘‘āneñja’’nti vuccati.
四种是住于道的人,下面三种是住于果的人,这样一共七种。三种学,就是增上戒学等三种学。因为生于这些学中,所以叫有学。圣者是以圣洁的出生而生于学中,不是生于母胎。或者,以学为习性,也叫有学。又或者,依人而立的说法,“有学的这些法”是以“有学”这个同义词,来指称与其他共通的道与果的三种法。而“无学”这个词,是在可能生起“有学状态”疑惑的地方加以否定,因此应当知道:无论在世间法还是涅槃法上,都不会生起“无学状态”。因为被称为戒、定、慧的学,由于已从各自对立的烦恼中解脱、清净,且不成为随烦恼的所缘,所以在八种道与果中都适合被称为“学”。这样一来,如同四道和下三果的具足者,阿拉汉果的具足者也同样生于那些学中;如果具有学,也可说“有学者的这些法”和“此人有学,具有学之戒”,从而应当被称为有学。为了遮止这种说法,所以说“无学”,以上述方式否定了有学性。因为在阿拉汉果中生起的学,其学的功用已经完成,不再履行学的功用,仅以学之果的状态现起,因此它们不配称为“学”,其具足者也不配称为“有学”,也不配说“以学为习性,生于学中”。但在下三果中,学由于能成为一来道观禅等的助缘,仍在履行学的功用,因此配称为“学”,其具足者配称为“有学”,也配说“以学为习性,生于学中”。巴利
Cattāro maggaṭṭhā, heṭṭhimā tayo phalaṭṭhāti evaṃ sattavidho. Tisso sikkhāti adhisīlādikā tisso sikkhā. Tāsu jātoti vā sekkho, ariyapuggalo hi ariyāya jātiyā jāyamāno sikkhāsu jāyati, na yoniyaṃ. Sikkhanasīloti vā sekkho. Puggalādhiṭṭhānāya vā kathāya sekkhassa ayanti aññāsādhāraṇamaggaphalattayadhammā sekkhapariyāyena vuttā. Asekkhoti ca yattha sekkhabhāvāsaṅkā atthi, tatthāyaṃ paṭisedhoti lokiyanibbānesu asekkhabhāvanāpatti daṭṭhabbā. Sīlasamādhipaññāsaṅkhātā hi sikkhā attano paṭipakkhakilesehivippamuttā parisuddhā upakkilesānaṃ ārammaṇabhāvampi anupagamanato etā ‘‘sikkhā’’ti vattuṃ yuttā aṭṭhasupi maggaphalesu vijjanti, tasmā catumaggaheṭṭhimaphalattayasamaṅgino viya arahattaphalasamaṅgīpi tāsu sikkhāsu jātoti ca taṃsamaṅgino arahato itaresaṃ viya sekkhatte sati sekkhassa ayanti ca sikkhā sīlaṃ etassāti ca ‘‘sekkho’’ti vattabbo siyāti tannivattanatthaṃ asekkhoti yathāvuttasekkhabhāvapaṭisedho kato. Arahattaphale hi pavattamānā sikkhā pariniṭṭhitasikkhākiccattā na sikkhākiccaṃ karonti, kevalaṃ sikkhāphalabhāveneva pavattanti, tasmā na tā sikkhāvacanaṃ arahanti, nāpi taṃsamaṅgī sekkhavacanaṃ, na ca ‘‘sikkhanasīlo, sikkhāsu jāto’’ti ca vattabbataṃ arahati. Heṭṭhimaphalesu pana sikkhā sakadāgāmimaggavipassanādīnaṃ upanissayabhāvato sikkhākiccaṃ karontīti sikkhāvacanaṃ arahanti, taṃsamaṅgino ca sekkhavacanaṃ, ‘‘sikkhanasīlā, sikkhāsu jātā’’ti ca vattabbataṃ arahanti.
“学”所以叫“有学”,这是显示学还没圆满。紧接着说了“漏已尽”等等,又说“不学所以叫无学”,这是显示学已经圆满,而不是指没有学的人,因为那种人已经被算作第三种人了。或者说,学已经达到增长的人就是无学。在这个意思里,有人会问:如果按照前面所说的意义成为有学,那么那些有学法已经达到增长,具足这些法的人、也就是站在最高道位上的人,是不是就获得了无学的状态?不是的,因为在同类情况下并不这样称呼。因为除了遍知等作用以及异熟性之外,阿拉汉果和阿拉汉道并没有差别。所以,那些有学法本身可以说“已经达到最高果法的状态”;又因为异熟乐比善乐更寂静、更殊胜,所以说那些法已经达到增长;因此,具足这些法的人就被称为“无学”。巴利
‘‘Sikkhatīti sekkho’’ti ca apariyositasikkho dassitoti. Anantarameva ‘‘khīṇāsavo’’ti ādiṃ vatvā ‘‘na sikkhatīti asekkho’’ti vuttattā pariyositasikkho dassito, na sikkhārahito tassa tatiyapuggalabhāvena gahitattā. Vuddhippattasikkho vā asekkhoti etasmiṃ atthe sekkhadhammesu eva ṭhitassa kassaci ariyassa asekkhabhāvāpattīti arahattamaggadhammā vuddhippattā, yathāvuttehi ca atthehi sekkhoti katvā taṃsamaṅgino aggamaggaṭṭhassa asekkhabhāvo āpannoti? Na taṃsadisesu tabbohārato. Arahattamaggato hi ninnānākaraṇaṃ arahattaphalaṃ ṭhapetvā pariññādikiccakaraṇaṃ, vipākabhāvañca, tasmā te eva sekkhadhammā ‘‘aggaphaladhammabhāvaṃ āpannā’’ti sakkā vattuṃ, kusalasukhato ca vipākasukhaṃ santataratāya paṇītataranti, vuddhippattā ca te dhammā hontīti taṃsamaṅgī ‘‘asekkho’’ti vuccatīti.
“出生长老”是指因出生而年长、已经走过漫长岁月、到了暮年的人。他确实因为见闻广博,大多数情况下在种族法和家族法等方面达到了稳固,所以叫做“出生长老”。“能成为长老的法”是指在教法中能使人达到坚固的功德,能摧破对立面。“长老”是指在接下来要说的那些法中已经达到坚固的人。“具戒者”是指具备值得称赞的、殊胜的戒,也就是戒具足;这说明他没有被称为“恶戒”的愚痴。“多闻者”是指因为这一点而多闻——这里说的是由此而多闻,这说明他没有名为“寡闻”的愚痴,并依思择力而安住。“是四禅的获得者”以此说明他没有被称为“盖”等的愚痴,并依修习力而安住。“以诸漏尽”等语说明他完全没有被称为“无明”的愚痴,并以漏尽长老的身份显示他的安住。这里并不是在整体上完成句子,而是显示每一句各自完成,所以说“在如此所说的诸法中”。或者名为长老,或者“长老”是这样名称的。巴利
Jātimahallakoti jātiyā vuḍḍhataro addhagato vayoanuppatto. So hi rattaññutāya yebhuyyena jātidhammakuladhammapadesu thāvariyappattiyā jātithero nāma. Therakaraṇā dhammāti sāsane thirabhāvakarā guṇā paṭipakkhanimmadanakā. Theroti vakkhamānesu dhammesu thirabhāvappatto. Sīlavāti pāsaṃsena sātisayena sīlena samannāgato, sīlasampannoti attho, etena dussīlyasaṅkhātassa bālyassa abhāvamāha. Suttageyyādi bahu sutaṃ etenāti bahussuto, etenāssa sutavirahasaṅkhātassa bālyassa abhāvaṃ, paṭisaṅkhānabalena ca patiṭṭhitabhāvaṃ vadati. ‘‘Catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ lābhī’’ti iminā nīvaraṇādisaṅkhātassa bālyassa abhāvaṃ, bhāvanābalena ca patiṭṭhitabhāvaṃ katheti. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā’’tiādinā avijjāsaṅkhātassa bālyassa sabbaso abhāvaṃ, khīṇāsavattherabhāvena patiṭṭhitabhāvañcassa dasseti. Na cettha samudāye vākyaparisamāpanaṃ, atha kho paccekaṃ vākyaparisamāpananti dassento ‘‘evaṃ vuttesu dhammesū’’tiādimāha. Theranāmako vā ‘‘thero’’ti evaṃ nāmako vā.
布施,就是出于摄受或供养,把自己拥有的东西送给别人,这就是布施,也就是舍离的思。布施本身就是布施所成。“maya”这个词只是用来补足音节。它既是福德,又按前面所说的意义属于造作、属于业的状态,所以叫福行事。这是能让别人感到可爱、可意、值得亲近等种种利益的因。依先前……等等……“依……的方式”:就是依照《行集》中所说的布施所成思、持戒所成思、修习所成思的方式。应当知道这些。在这里,就是在这些福行事当中。以身行施,就是用自己的身体去实际做舍离的行为。为了这个目的,就是为了布施的目的,说出“请布施这件应施之物”这样的话。或者,作意于布施波罗蜜之后:就像仅仅说“我布施食物等”而布施时,那种布施成为布施所成的福行事;同样,作意“愿这布施所成成为正觉的助缘”而布施时,因为它在布施时仍然是以布施为首要而进行的,所以也是布施所成。站在戒行的立场上:就是站在“这布施是我的家族传统、家族习俗、家族行为”这样的戒行立场上去布施,那就成为戒行所成的福行事。正如虽然是以舍离应施之物的方式进行的布施思,对于站在戒行立场上布施的人来说,由于前前的加行和后来的思也如此进行,所以成为戒行所成的福行事;同样,对应施之物从坏灭、消散方面确立观照之后去布施的人,由于前前的思和对应施之物的后来的思也如此进行,所以成为修习所成的福行事。巴利
Anuggahavasena, pūjāvasena vā attano santakaṃ parassa dīyati etenāti dānaṃ, pariccāgacetanā. Dānameva dānamayaṃ. Padapūraṇamattaṃ maya-saddo. Puññañca taṃ yathāvuttenatthena kiriyā ca kammabhāvatoti puññakiriyā. Paresaṃ piyamanāpatāsevanīyatādīnaṃ ānisaṃsānaṃ. Pubbe…pe… vasenevāti saṅkhārattike (dī. ni. 3.305; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305) vuttadānamayasīlamayabhāvanāmayacetanāvaseneva. Imāni veditabbānīti sambandho. Etthāti etesu puññakiriyavatthūsu. Kāyena karontassāti attano kāyena pariccāgapayogaṃ pavattentassa. Tadatthanti dānatthaṃ. ‘‘Imaṃ deyyadhammaṃ dehī’’ti vācaṃ nicchārentassa. Dānapāramiṃ āvajjetvā vāti yathā kevalaṃ ‘‘annadānādīni demī’’ti dānakāle taṃ dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu hoti, evaṃ ‘‘imaṃ dānamayaṃ sammāsambodhiyā paccayo hotū’’ti dānapāramiṃ āvajjetvā dānakālepi dānasīseneva pavattitattā. Vattasīse ṭhatvāti ‘‘etaṃ dānaṃ nāma mayhaṃ kulavaṃso kulatanti kulapaveṇī kulacāritta’’nti cārittasīle ṭhatvā dadato cārittasīlamayaṃ. Yathā deyyadhammapariccāgavasena pavattamānāpi dānacetanā vattasīse ṭhatvā dadato sīlamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu hoti pubbābhisaṅkhārassa, aparabhāgacetanāya ca tathā pavattattā, evaṃ deyyadhamme khayato, vayato sammasanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā dadato bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu hoti pubbabhāgacetanāya, deyyadhamme aparabhāgacetanāya ca tathā pavattattā.
恭敬思是指与恭敬相应的思,或者通过它来行恭敬——就像喜贪本身就是与喜贪相应的;又或者,与前面所说的恭敬一同生起、一同运作的,就是与恭敬相应。这是以恭敬的方式生起的福业事。服务是指那种思,即用心去为年长者、具功德者做应做的各种事务;服务本身就是与服务相应。或者说,以被称为服务的义务履行为发起方式,与之相应、一同生起的,就是与服务相应——这样生起的福业事。回向是指通过这种心所,把自己心相续中获得的福德转施给他人。随喜是指通过它,对他人这样转施后的福德生起随喜。随喜也是指通过它,对没有经过转施的福德,纯粹地生起随喜。开示是指通过它来开示法,开示本身就是开示所成。闻法是指通过它来听法,闻法本身就是闻法所成。见正直是指以见解使智慧直接趣入。在所有这一切中,都应参照“福业事”这个词,所以用中性来表达。巴利
Apacīticetanā apacitisahagataṃ apacīyati etāyāti yathā nandīrāgo eva nandīrāgasahagatā, yathāvuttāya vā apacitiyā sahagataṃ sahapavattanti apacitisahagataṃ. Apacāyanavasena pavattaṃ puññakiriyavatthu. Vayasā guṇehi ca vuḍḍhatarānaṃ vattapaṭipattīsu byāvaṭo hoti yāya cetanāya, sā veyyāvaccaṃ, veyyāvaccameva veyyāvaccasahagataṃ. Veyyāvaccasaṅkhātāya vā vattapaṭipattiyā samuṭṭhāpanavaseneva sahagataṃ pavattanti veyyāvaccasahagataṃ, tathāpavattaṃ puññakiriyavatthu. Attano santāne pattaṃ puññaṃ anuppadīyati etenāti pattānuppadānaṃ. Tathā parena anuppadinnatāya pattaṃ abbhanumodati etenāti pattabbhanumodanaṃ. Ananuppadinnaṃ pana kevalaṃ abbhanumodīyati etenāti abbhanumodanaṃ. Dhammaṃ deseti etāyāti desanā, desanāva desanāmayaṃ. Suṇāti etenāti savanaṃ, savanameva savanamayaṃ. Diṭṭhiyā ñāṇassa ujugamanaṃ diṭṭhijugataṃ. Sabbattha ‘‘puññakiriyavatthū’’ti padaṃ apekkhitvā napuṃsakaliṅgatā.
以恭敬的方式所做的合宜行为,就是敬奉。对年长者、有德行的人以及病人,按各自需要去做该做的事,就是服务。这是它们之间的区别,所以说“其中”等等。把四种资具布施给一切众生——这里“一切”是指对这十种福业事的一切——这只是从某一角度作出的最殊胜说明;实际上,无论布施什么可施之物,或者做了什么福德之后,把功德回向说“愿这成为某些众生的,或哪怕只是一个众生的”,这也同样是回向。但这种回向因为被渴爱所执取,所以不是大果报。为他人说法,是怀着利益他人的柔软之心——应接上前文而连接起来。所谓“如是”,就是如此听闻此法之后,成为多闻者,想着“我要以说法来利益他人”,便以利益他人的柔软之心听闻佛法。因为对他来说,听闻佛法由于能成为自己与他人正确修行的助缘,所以会成为大果报。所谓“一切”,是指甚至对十种福业事的一切。所谓“决定之相”,是指大果报性的决定本质。所谓“以见解之正直”,是指由于“有、无”这两种极端的难以超越,所以依“有布施”等(中部2.94;3.136;分别论793)方式运转的正见,唯以正直而运转。因为在布施等中,无论什么,只要被这种正见所净化,就会变得大光明、大遍满。巴利
Pūjāvasena sāmīcikiriyā apacāyanaṃ apaciti. Vayasā guṇehi ca jeṭṭhānaṃ gilānānañca taṃtaṃkiccakaraṇaṃ veyyāvaccaṃ. Ayametesaṃ visesoti āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Cattāro paccaye datvā sabbasattānanti ca ekadesato ukkaṭṭhaniddeso, yaṃ kiñci deyyadhammaṃ datvā, puññaṃ vā katvā ‘‘katipayānaṃ, ekasseva vā patti hotū’’ti pariṇāmanampi pattānuppadānameva. Taṃ na mahapphalaṃ taṇhāya parāmaṭṭhattā. Paresaṃ deseti hitapharaṇena muducittenāti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Evanti evaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā bahussuto hutvā pare dhammadesanāya anuggaṇhissāmīti hitapharaṇena muducittena dhammaṃ suṇāti. Evañhissa savanaṃ attano, paresañca sammāpaṭipattiyā paccayabhāvato mahapphalaṃ bhavissatīti. Sabbesanti sabbesampi dasannaṃ puññakiriyavatthūnaṃ. Niyamalakkhaṇanti mahapphalabhāvassa niyāmakasabhāvaṃ . Diṭṭhiyā ujubhāvenevāti ‘‘atthi, natthī’’ti antadvayassa durasamussāritatāya ‘‘atthi dinna’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 2.94; 3.136; vibha. 793) nayappavattāya sammādiṭṭhiyā ujukameva pavattiyā. Dānādīsu hi yaṃ kiñci imāya eva sammādiṭṭhiyā parisodhitaṃ mahājutikaṃ mahāvipphāraṃ bhavati.
“唯以前三”,是指在经文里已经说到的这三种。它们算在戒所成的福业事里,因为本质上就是行持戒。它们算在施所成里,因为本质上就是布施,也属于布施的范围。开示确实因为本质上是法施,可以说它算在施所成里;但它因为是修习善法,所以说它像站在解脱处的开头那样生起,和听闻一起算在修所成里。有人说:“见端正算在修所成里。”而在见端正当中,随念自己所作的福、为利益他人而把这份福回向出去、称赞功德、随喜他人所作的福业事和正行、以及皈依等,这些种种福德都算在里面,因为它们正是靠见端正的作用才得以成就。巴利
Purimeheva tīhīti pāḷiyaṃ āgateheva tīhi. Sīlamaye puññakiriyavatthumhi saṅgahaṃ gacchanti cārittasīlabhāvato. Dānamaye saṅgahaṃ gacchanti dānasabhāvattā, dānavisayattā ca. Kāmaṃ desanā dhammadānasabhāvato dānamaye saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti vattuṃ yuttā, kusaladhammāsevanabhāvato pana vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā pavattitā viya savanena saddhiṃ bhāvanāmaye saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Diṭṭhijugataṃ bhāvanāmaye’’ti keci. Diṭṭhijugate eva ca attanā katassa puññassa anussaraṇaṃ, tassa ca paresaṃ atthāya pariṇāmanaṃ, guṇapasaṃsā, aññehi kariyamānāya puññakiriyāya, sammāpaṭipattiyā ca anumodanaṃ saraṇagamananti evaṃ ādayo puññavisesā saṅgahaṃ gacchanti diṭṭhijukammavaseneva tesaṃ ijjhanato.
对他人的行为进行净化,就是追问和检举,这种追问所依据而生起的事项,就是检举的依据——也就是见、闻、疑三类。因此说“检举的理由”。其中“以见”,是表原因的工具格,意思是“以所见为原因”。那这个“见”到底指什么呢?回答说“违犯”。“看见”在这里的意思就是“以看见为原因”,就像“以慧看见之后”那样的用法。“以闻”等也是如此理解。“从他人”,是指从别人那里,或者听到别人的话。“以见疑”,是指与所见相关的疑,或者以那种方式被怀疑的违犯。剩下两个词也是这样。检举的方式,或是出示事实,或是拒绝共住,或是拒绝合宜的行为。但如果在这里详细展开,就太繁琐了,所以说“这是此处的简要说明”。对于想要详细了解的人,为了指出通达的方法,就说“详细解释则应……了知”。巴利
Parassa paṭipattiyā sodhanattho anuyogo codanā, sā yāni nissāya pavattati, tāni codanāvatthūni diṭṭhasutaparisaṅkitāni. Tenāha ‘‘codanākāraṇānī’’ti. Diṭṭhenāti ca hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ , diṭṭhena hetunāti attho. Kiṃ pana taṃ diṭṭhanti āha ‘‘vītikkama’’nti . Disvāti ca dassanahetūti ayamettha attho yathā ‘‘paññāya cassa disvā’’ti. ‘‘Sutenā’’tiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Parassāti parato, parassa vā vacanaṃ sutvā.Diṭṭhaparisaṅkitenāti diṭṭhānugatena parisaṅkitena, tathā parisaṅkitena vā vītikkamena. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Codeti vatthusandassanena vā saṃvāsappaṭikkhepena vā sāmīcippaṭikkhepena vā. Imasmiṃ pana atthe vitthāriyamāne atippapañco hotīti āha ‘‘ayamettha saṅkhepo’’ti. Vitthāraṃ pana icchantānaṃ tassa adhigamupāyaṃ dassento ‘‘vitthāro pana…pe… veditabbo’’ti āha.
所谓“欲往生”,就是指由诸欲而往生、具足诸欲的意思。而“具足”是指受用那些欲,“获得”是指得到那些欲,所以说“受用诸欲或获得诸欲”。“现前欲”是指不像第二类、第三类那样由自己化现,也不是由他人化现。然而,因为他们是靠自己的努力和行为的果报而生活,所以从这两方面来说,这些欲对他们来说是现前的,因此称为“现前欲”。而那些欲对他们来说大多数是系缚的,所以说为“系缚欲”。“四天界居住者”是指从四大王天开始直到兜率天的诸天。“堕恶趣者”是指堕入恶趣的众生。“由他人化现的欲为他们所有”,就是“他化自在欲”。巴利
Kāmūpapattiyoti kāmehi upapannatā, samannāgatatāti attho. Samannāgamo ca tesaṃ paṭisevanaṃ, samadhigamo cāti āha ‘‘kāmūpasevanā kāmapaṭilābhā vā’’ti. Paccupaṭṭhitakāmāti dutiyatatiyarāsīnaṃ viya sayaṃ, parehi ca animmitā. Uṭṭhānakammaphalūpajīvibhāvato pana tadubhayavasena paccupaṭṭhitā kāmā etesanti paccupaṭṭhitakāmā. Te pana tesaṃ yebhuyyena nibaddhāni hontīti ‘‘nibaddhakāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Catudevalokavāsinoti cātumahārājikato paṭṭhāya yāva tusitā devā. Vinipātikāti āpāyikā. Paranimmitā kāmā etesanti paranimmitakāmā.
依自然受用而言,这是通过比量推断而了知,不是现前亲证。随自己的意愿而受用,意思是他们随各自所好而令对方被享用。行淫欲这一句,则是为了否定某些人的说法。因此说然而有些人等。这些人主张:夜摩天只需互相拥抱,兜率天只需彼此握手,化乐天只需笑,他化自在天只需互相凝视,欲事就能成办。他们又说其余两类天则是通过两两交合而成办的,因为那些天众没有对诸欲的离染,而且诸欲层层增上、越来越殊妙。不过,只应当说他们没有余势流出。欲事,是指能平息当下热恼的触乐。诸欲,是指诸欲的受用对象。本来就是自然的,意思是与下界同类。称为同一,意思是同一种类、同一形态,或者说共称为同一、性质相同。巴利
Pakatisevanavasenāti anumānato jānanaṃ vadati, na paccakkhato. Vasaṃ vattentīti yathāruci pātabyataṃ āpajjanti. ‘‘Methunaṃ paṭisevantī’’ti idaṃ pana kecivādapaṭisedhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘keci panā’’tiādi. Te ‘‘yāmānaṃ aññamaññaṃ āliṅgitamattena, tusitānaṃ hatthāmasanamattena, nimmānaratīnaṃ hasitamattena, paranimmitavasavattīnaṃ olokitamattena kāmakiccaṃ ijjhatī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Itaresaṃ dvinnaṃ dvayaṃdvayasamāpattiyā vā’’ti vadanti tādisassa kāmesu virajjanassa tesu abhāvato, kāmānañca uttaruttari paṇītapaṇītatarapaṇītatamabhāvato. Kevalaṃ pana nissandābhāvo tesaṃ vattabbo. Kāmakiccanti taṅkhaṇikapariḷāhūpasamāvahaṃ phassasukhaṃ. Kāmāti kāmūpabhogā. Pākatikā evāti heṭṭhimehi ekasadisā eva. Ekasaṅkhātanti ekarūpaṃ samānarūpanti, samaññātaṃ samānabhāvanti vā attho.
“获得乐”就是指证得禅乐。“下面”是指从初禅地往下,在人间或天界。“初禅的乐”是指善的初禅。就处地来说,在梵众天或梵辅天也确实可以体验到“下劣与超越”的情况,因为在梵众天或梵辅天修成善的禅那之后,能在梵辅天或大梵天享受异熟乐。这里因为是在讲依第二禅地、第三禅地而有的第二禅乐、第三禅乐的投生,所以只就初禅地来说初禅乐的投生。“浸润”是指透彻地浸满,意思是说,被禅那之乐以及由禅那所生的殊妙色法所触及的(这些——光音天等——)身体殊妙、充盈。因此说“遍浸润”等。因为异熟乐比善乐更为寂静,所以更殊妙、更多现起,因此说“这也是就异熟禅那乐而说的”。“他们的”是指光音天众的。因为有喜之乐极为广大,所以那些心被它遍压者的有贪大大生起。“唯是寂静的”是指因寻、伺的扰动和喜的激荡离去,而极为寂静。正因为如此寂静,它才以自己的诸缘而达于殊胜,故说为“殊妙”。因此说“唯是殊妙的”。以少分乐、究竟乐相应之乐而满足、欢喜、现起的喜,名为兜率天。因为他们从此以上再无更胜之乐,所以不希求,因此说“从此……乃至……满足”。 “第三禅的乐”是指第三禅的异熟乐。巴利
Sukhapaṭilābhāti sukhasamadhigamā. Heṭṭhāti paṭhamajjhānabhūmito heṭṭhā manussesu, devesu vā. Paṭhamajjhānasukhanti kusalapaṭhamajjhānaṃ. Bhūmivasenapi heṭṭhuparibhāvo labbhateva brahmakāyikesu, brahmapurohitesu vā kusalajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā brahmapurohitesu, mahābrahmesu vā vipākasukhānubhavanassa labbhanato. Ettha ca dutiyatatiyajjhānabhūmivasena dutiyatatiyasukhūpapattīnaṃ vuccamānattā paṭhamajjhānabhūmivaseneva paṭhamajjhānasukhūpapatti vuttā. Tintāti temitā, jhānasukhena ceva jhānasamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭṭhakāyena ca paṇītā vittāti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘samantato tintā’’tiādi. Yasmā kusalasukhato vipākasukhaṃ santataratāya paṇītataraṃ bahulañca pavattati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘idampi vipākajjhānasukhaṃ eva sandhāya vutta’’nti. Tesanti ābhassarānaṃ. Sappītikassa sukhassa ativiya uḷārabhāvato tena ajjhotthatacittānaṃ bhavalobho mahā uppajjati. Santamevāti vitakkavicārasaṅkhobhapītiubbilāvivigamena ativiya upasantaṃyeva. Tathā santabhāveneva hi taṃ attano paccayehi padhānabhāvaṃ nītatāya ‘‘paṇīta’’nti vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘paṇītamevā’’ti. Atappakena sukhapāramippattena sukhena saṃyuttāya tusāya pītiyā itā pavattāti tusitā. Yasmā te tato uttari sukhassa abhāvato eva na patthenti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tato…pe… santuṭṭhā hutvā’’ti. Tatiyajjhānasukhanti tatiyajjhānavipākasukhaṃ.
七圣慧:从第八位圣者(即初果向)开始,七种圣者各自特有的智慧。除了出世间的慧以外,其余的都叫慧。一切三地所摄的慧,既不能说是有学,也不能说是无学,所以叫非有学非无学,也就是凡夫的慧。巴利
Satta ariyapaññāti aṭṭhamakato paṭṭhāya sattannaṃ ariyānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ āveṇikapaññā. Ṭhapetvā lokuttaraṃ paññaṃ avasesā paññā nāma. Sabbāpi tebhūmikā paññā ‘‘sekkhā’’tipi na vattabbā, ‘‘asekkhā’’tipi na vattabbāti nevasekkhānāsekkhā, puthujjanapaññā.
“由瑜伽所安排”是指由慧所安排、由慧所转化、由方便慧所成就的。“诸业处中”:在这里,业本身就是业处;或者说,业既是业又是处,因为是谋生方式等的依止处,所以叫业处。这个道理在手艺处上也同样适用。其中,业有两种:低劣的,比如编竹器之类的业;殊胜的,比如农耕、经商之类的业。手艺也有两种:低劣的,比如编竹器之类的手艺;殊胜的,比如印算之类的手艺。明就是明处,应当知道那是如法的,就像龙曼陀罗、护卫咒、驱策咒。然而,这些(业处、手艺处、明处),有些像菩萨一样的智者,希望众生安乐而住,他们不见他人所作,也不学他人所作;不听闻不行者,而是以自己的法性思维而作。以智慧以自己的法性思维所作,他人学而作时,所作也与之相似。“业为自有”:了知“此业是众生自己的,这业不是我们的”这一智慧。“随顺谛”:是观智。因为它随顺于通达谛,所以称为“随顺谛”。现在为了显示其生起方式,而说“色是无常”等。其中,以“或”字的不决定之义,也应看作已摄受苦、无我相,因为无间故。凡是无常的,那就是苦。凡是苦的,那就是无我。所谓“这样的”,是指如此下面所指示的自性。“随顺忍”等是慧的同义词。它因为以不违背见下面所说的业处等五种原因而随顺,又因为以利益众生的行持而不违背道谛、胜义谛和涅槃,所以随顺,故为随顺。所有这些原因,它能忍、能持、能见,故为忍。它见,故为见。它欢喜,故为欢喜。它思惟,故为思惟。它观察,故为观察。那些业处等法,以此思惟而思惟,能忍可,故为法思惟忍。不从他人听闻而获得,即不听闻他人的教诫之言,自己思维而获得。这被称为:这被称为思所成慧。然而,这(思所成慧)只出现在众所周知的菩萨身上。在那里,随顺谛智也只出现在最后有者的两位菩萨身上,其余的慧则出现在所有圆满波罗蜜的大慧者身上。巴利
Yogavihitesūti paññāvihitesu paññāpariṇāmitesu upāyapaññāya sampāditesu. Kammāyatanesūti ettha kammameva kammāyatanaṃ, kammañca taṃ āyatanañca ājīvādīnanti vā kammāyatanaṃ. Esa nayo sippāyatanesupi. Tattha ca duvidhaṃ kammaṃ hīnañca vaḍḍhakikammādi, ukkaṭṭhañca kasivāṇijjādi. Sippampi duvidhaṃ hīnañca naḷakārasippādi, ukkaṭṭhañca muddagaṇanādi. Vijjāva vijjāṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ dhammikameva nāgamaṇḍalaparittaphudhamanakamantasadisaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tāni panetāni ekacce paṇḍitā bodhisattasadisā manussānaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ ākaṅkhantā neva aññehi kariyamānāni passanti, na vā katāni uggaṇhanti. Na karontānaṃ suṇanti, atha kho attano dhammatāya cintāya karonti. Paññavantehi attano dhammatāya cintāya katānipi aññehi uggaṇhitvā karontehi katasadisāneva honti. Kammassakatanti ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ sattānaṃ sakaṃ, idaṃ no saka’’nti evaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ. Saccānulomikanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Tañhi saccapaṭivedhassa anulomanato ‘‘saccānulomika’’nti vuccati. Idānissa pavattanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpaṃ aniccanti vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha vā-saddena aniyamatthena dukkhānattalakkhaṇānipi gahitānevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ nānantariyakabhāvato. Yañhi aniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ, tadanattāti [(sijjhanato) adhikapāṭho viya dissati]. Yaṃ evarūpanti yaṃ evaṃ heṭṭhā niddiṭṭhasabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Anulomikaṃ khanti’’ntiādīni paññāvevacanāni . Sā hi heṭṭhā vuttānaṃ kammāyatanādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ kāraṇānaṃ apaccanīkadassanena anulomanato, tathā sattānaṃ hitacariyāya maggasaccassa, paramatthasaccassa ca nibbānassa avilomanato anulometīti ca anulomikā. Sabbānipi etāni kāraṇāni khamati sahati daṭṭhuṃ sakkotīti khanti. Passatīti diṭṭhi. Rocetīti ruci. Munātīti muti. Pekkhatīti pekkhā. Te ca kammāyatanādayo dhammā nijjhāyamānā etāya nijjhānaṃ khamantīti dhammanijjhānakkhanti. Parato asutvā paṭilabhatīti aññassa upadesavacanaṃ asutvā sayameva cintento paṭilabhati. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ cintāmayā paññā nāma vuccati. Sā panesā abhiññātānaṃ bodhisattānameva uppajjati. Tatthāpi saccānulomikañāṇaṃ dvinnameva bodhisattānaṃ antimabhavikānaṃ, sesapaññā sabbesampi pūritapāramīnaṃ mahāpaññānaṃ uppajjati.
“从别人那里听闻而获得”:看到别人正在做各种工作场所的事等,或者看到别人已经做好的成品,或者听到正在说话的人所说的话,或者在老师身边学习而获得的一切,都应当知道这些就叫作“从别人那里听闻而获得”。“已得定者”:指具备定的人,这只是举一个例子。因为在这里,“修习慧”是特指观智和道智而说的。巴利
Parato sutvā paṭilabhatīti kammāyatanādīni parena kariyamānāni, parena katāni vā disvāpi parassa kathayamānassa vacanaṃ sutvāpi ācariyasantike uggahetvāpi paṭiladdhā sabbā parato sutvā paṭiladdhanāmāti veditabbā. Samāpannassāti samāpattisamaṅgissa, nidassanamattametaṃ. Vipassanāmaggapaññā hi idha ‘‘bhāvanāpaññā’’ti visesato icchitāti.
所谓“武器”,是为了摧破敌对者而需要的。可是,没有像贪等烦恼那样的敌对者,而能摧破它的,只有佛语。因此说“听闻本身就是武器”,接着又说“从意义上说,那就是三藏佛语”。现在,为了阐明这个意思,先以“正因为那……”开头,然后用“以听闻为武器”等经文语句来证明。其中,“断除不善”是指通过彼分断等方式舍弃不善。“修习善”是指生起并增长止观等善法。“守护自己清净”是指通过断除不善和修习善法,使自身从贪等染污中清净而安住。巴利
Āvudhaṃ nāma paṭipakkhavimathanatthaṃ icchitabbaṃ, rāgādisadiso ca paṭipakkho natthi, tassa ca vimathanaṃ buddhavacanamevāti ‘‘sutameva āvudha’’nti vatvā ‘‘taṃ atthato tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacana’’nti āha. Idāni tamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘taṃ hī’’ti ādiṃ vatvā ‘‘sutāvudho’’tiādinā (a. ni. 7.67) suttapadena samattheti. Tattha akusalaṃ pajahatīti tadaṅgādivasena akusalaṃ pariccajati. Kusalaṃ bhāvetīti samathavipassanādikusalaṃ dhammaṃ uppādeti vaḍḍheti ca. Suddhaṃ attānaṃ pariharatīti tena akusalappahānena, tāya ca kusalabhāvanāya rāgādisaṃkilesato visuddhaṃ attabhāvaṃ pavatteti.
“身已远离者”,是指舍弃了群体聚集、从其中抽身而出的人。这种身远离并不只是独处一处,而是说以初禅等与出离相应,所以说“乐于出离者”。“心远离”,是指断除了烦恼的聚集,心由此从烦恼中脱离出来。而这种心远离是依禅那、解脱等而成就的,所以说“心地清净、达到最上纯净者”。“依远离”就是涅槃。因为证得涅槃,人才成为无依著者。因此说“无依著的人”,意思是已达到无为状态、已证得涅槃的人,以及具足果定的人。听闻也正因具有依止的作用而被称为武器,所以说“这也是……”。因为经中确实这样说:“正是依靠那……”在这里,虽然听闻和远离也要靠慧才能成办这里所说的武器作用,但慧即使没有听闻、或没有某些远离,也能成办这里所说的武器作用。因此,为了显示慧的这种能力,才把它单独说为武器。所以说“谁拥有这慧,他就无论从何处……”等等。巴利
Vivekaṭṭhakāyānanti gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ vajjetvā tato apakaḍḍhitakāyānaṃ. Svāyaṃ kāyaviveko na kevalaṃ ekākībhāvo, atha kho paṭhamajjhānādi nekkhammayogatoti āha ‘‘nekkhammābhiratāna’’nti. Cittavivekoti kilesasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya tato cittassa vivittatā. Sā pana jhānavimokkhādīnaṃ vasena hotīti āha ‘‘parisuddhacittānaṃ paramavodānappattāna’’nti. Upadhivivekoti nibbānaṃ. Tadadhigamena hi puggalassa nirupadhitā. Tenāha ‘‘nirupadhīnaṃ puggalāna’’nti, visaṅkhāragatānaṃ adhigatanibbānānaṃ, phalasamāpattisamaṅgīnañcāti attho. Sutampi avassayaṭṭheneva āvudhaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘ayampī’’ti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘tañhi nissāyā’’ti. Kāmañcettha sutapavivekāpi paññāvaseneva yathādhippetaāvudhattasādhakā , paññā pana sutena, ekaccapavivekena vā vināpi idhādhippetaāvudhattasādhanīti tato paññā sāmatthiyadassanatthaṃ visuṃ āvudhabhāvena vuttā. Tenāha ‘‘yassa sā atthi, so na kutocī’’tiādi.
“未知当知根”:“未知、未了知的法”,是指在无始的轮回流转中,未曾知道、未曾了知的不死法;或者,是指为了了知未曾知道的四圣谛法而修行的人,由这种先前的努力所生起的根。巴利圣典在摄受分中说“有九根”,那是为了显示由先前努力所成就的现起状态的差别而说的;但从意义上看,它其实就是道正见。所以他说“这是入流道智的名称”。“已知根”:就是了知的根,不超越由第一道所已知的范围,正是对那些已被那道所知的四圣谛法的了知之根,所以这样说。因此他说“成为已知者的了知之根”。“了知故为已知者”:已知的状态就是“已知”,或者说是已知者的状态,或者依了知的作用而成为的状态,所以叫“成为已知者”。“于已了知者中”:是指在已了知应知的四圣谛而安住的人中。因此他说“达到了知作用究竟者”,意思是达到遍知等各类了知作用的终点的人。巴利
Nāññātaṃ aviditaṃ dhammanti anamatagge saṃsāravaṭṭe na aññātaṃ aviditaṃ amatadhammaṃ, catusaccadhammameva vā jānissāmīti paṭipannassa iminā pubbābhogena uppannaṃ indriyaṃ. Yaṃ pāḷiyaṃ saṅgahavāre ‘‘nava indriyāni hontī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ pubbābhogasiddhaṃ pavattiākāravisesaṃ dīpetuṃ vuttaṃ, atthato pana maggasammādiṭṭhi eva sāti āha ‘‘sotāpattimaggañāṇassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Aññindriyanti ājānanakaindriyaṃ, paṭhamamaggena ñātamariyādaṃ anatikkamitvā tesaṃyeva tena maggena ñātānaṃ catusaccadhammānaṃ jānanakaindriyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘aññābhūtaṃ ājānanabhūtaṃ indriya’’nti. Ājānātīti añño, aññassa bhūtaṃ, ājānanavasena vā bhūtanti aññabhūtaṃ.Aññātāvīsūti jānitabbaṃ catuariyasaccaṃ ājānitvā ṭhitesu. Tenāha ‘‘jānanakiccapariyosānappattesū’’ti, pariññādibhedassa jānanakiccassa pariniṭṭhānappattesu.
肉眼即眼净色。所谓肉眼,是由四界、色、香、味、食素、所依、形态、命根、性根、身净色、眼净色这十四部分组成的肉团。巴利
Maṃsacakkhu cakkhupasādoti maṃsacakkhu nāma catasso dhātuyo, vaṇṇo, gandho, raso, ojā, sambhavo, saṇṭhānaṃ, jīvitaṃ, bhāvo, kāyappasādo, cakkhupasādoti evaṃ cuddasasambhāro maṃsapiṇḍo.
把遍处光明扩大之后,因为能在其中看见色法,所以说“天眼通是依于光明的智”。除天眼之慧以外的世间慧即是慧眼,由于天眼通已被单独列出,“慧眼是世间与出世间的智慧”这个意思,虽然没有直接说出来,实际上已经成立。巴利
Kasiṇālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā tattha rūpadassanato ‘‘dibbacakkhu ālokanissitaṃ ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Dibbacakkhupaññāvinimuttā eva lokiyapaññā paññācakkhūti ayamattho avuttasiddho dibbacakkhussa visuṃ gahitattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘paññācakkhu lokiyalokuttarapaññā’’ti.
增上戒就是更殊胜的戒。应当修学,意思是应当反复练习。所谓增上戒,是因为它具备无余的身语律仪,又是道戒的基础。增上心,因为是道定的基础。增上慧,因为是道慧的基础。现在,为了用理由说明它们为什么是增上戒等,说了“即使在未生起时也……”等话。其中,“未生起”指还没有现起。增上戒正是证得涅槃的助缘。“具足”这里应当把“希求证得涅槃的人”带进来,联系起来理解。巴利
Adhikaṃ visiṭṭhaṃ sīlanti adhisīlaṃ. Sikkhitabbatoti āsevitabbato. Adhisīlaṃ nāma anavasesakāyikavācasikasaṃvarabhāvato, maggasīlassa padaṭṭhānabhāvato ca. Adhicittaṃ maggasamādhissa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato. Adhipaññā maggapaññāya adhiṭṭhānabhāvato. Idāni nesaṃ adhisīlādibhāvaṃ kāraṇena paṭipādetuṃ ‘‘anuppannepi hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha anuppanneti appavatte. Adhisīlameva nibbānādhigamassa paccayabhāvato. Samāpannāti ettha ‘‘nibbānaṃ patthayantenā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
行善者得善,作恶者得恶。
造作者确实要承受这两者,因为造作者会紧跟着。巴利
‘‘Kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ, pāpakārī ca pāpakaṃ; Anubhoti dvayampetuṃ, anubandhañhi kāraka’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.256);
他们这样说:这样,通过对过去和未来轮回根本之苦的观察,这种了知业为自作自受的智慧,既是生起悚惧的所依,又是促发解脱期盼的助缘,这就是增上慧。世间戒等被称为增上戒等,是方便说;为了显示那确实是非方便说、直接的含义,才说了“一切……”等语。巴利
Evaṃ atīte, anāgate ca vaṭṭamūlakadukkhasallakkhaṇavasena saṃvegavatthutāya vimuttiākaṅkhāya paccayabhūtā kammassakatāpaññā adhipaññā’’ti vadanti. Lokiyasīlādīnaṃ adhisīlādibhāvo pariyāyenāti nippariyāyameva taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbaṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
五门身,就是指在五门中生起的触等法的集合。这个身由于已被修习的状态,就是修习,所以叫身修习。因为诸漏尽者通过证得最上道,一切烦恼都已断除;从断除的那一刻起,他们就完全不再串习。因此,对他们来说,连应当生起的眼识、耳识所认知的法都不存在,更何况那些粗劣的呢?所以,他们的五门身本身就是善修的。因此说:“诸漏尽者……是善修的。”他们不像其他人那样软弱,因为那些能导致软弱的烦恼已被彻底断除。巴利
Pañcadvārikakāyoti pañcadvāresu kāyo phassādidhammasamūho. Kāyo ca so bhāvitabhāvena bhāvanā cāti kāyabhāvanā nāma. Yasmā khīṇāsavānaṃ aggamaggādhigamanena sabbasaṃkilesā pahīnāti pahīnakālato paṭṭhāya sabbaso āsevanābhāvato natthi tesaṃ bhāviniyāpi cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, pageva kāḷakā, tasmā pañcadvārikakāyo subhāvito eva hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘khīṇāsavassa hi…pe… subhāvito hotī’’ti. Na aññesaṃ viya dubbalā dubbalabhāvakarānaṃ kilesānaṃ sabbaso pahīnattā.
观是见无上,因为以无常随观等方式,完全正确地照见了诸行。道是行道无上,因为没有比它更超胜的行道。果是解脱无上,因为具有不动摇的性质。或者,果是见无上,因为即使在现观涅槃之后,也能持续生起一整天。涅槃是解脱无上,因为超越了一切有为法。为了显示涅槃具有见的无上性,把“见”这个词理解为业格,于是说:“因为再没有比这更超胜、更值得见的了。”没有比这更超胜的,就是无上;无上本身就是无上性,所以说“最上、最胜”。巴利
Vipassanā dassanānuttariyaṃ aniccānupassanādivasena saṅkhārānaṃ sammadeva dassanato. Maggo paṭipadānuttariyaṃ taduttaripaṭipadāya abhāvato. Phalaṃ vimuttānuttariyaṃ akuppabhāvato. Phalaṃ vā dassanānuttariyaṃ divasampi nibbānaṃ paccakkhato disvā pavattanato. Nibbānaṃ vimuttānuttariyaṃ sabbasaṅkhatavinissaṭattā. Dassana-saddaṃ kammasādhanaṃ gahetvā nibbānassa dassanānuttariyatā vuttāti dassento ‘‘tato uttarañhi daṭṭhabbaṃ nāma natthī’’ti āha. Natthi ito uttaranti anuttaraṃ, anuttarameva anuttariyanti āha ‘‘uttamaṃ jeṭṭhaka’’nti.
所谓“其余”,就是前面说过的剩下内容。按五法门和四法门来说,定有三种。通过“三种定”这个说法,也应该知道:在经典中,五法门的分法其实已经出现了。这里应当说明的内容,在《究竟义灯》的《清净道论注释》里已经讲过,所以应当按照那里所说的方法来理解。巴利
Sesoti vuttāvaseso pañcakanayena, catukkanayena ca tividho samādhi, iminā eva ca samādhittayāpadesena suttantesupi pañcakanayo āgato evāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paramatthamañjūsāyaṃ visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.38) vuttameva, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
名称从那里而来,所以叫“来处”,也就是从那个来源而来。从功德来说,是从自性来说。从所缘来说,是从所缘法来说。“执取无我”是指先确立“一切行都是无我”这样的观。“见无我”是指首先通达诸行的“无我”特相。“从无我出起”是指以出起为导向的观以无我的方式运作,从而达到道的出起。因为那些执著实有的烦恼——也就是以我执为条件、与邪见相伴的烦恼——已被镇伏,所以这种观如实把握我空,因此名为“空”。这样一来,岂不是说观是从功德而得到“空”这个名称,而不是从“来处”得名吗?如果从毫不迂曲的严格意义上说,确实没有。这话没错,但那是在“获得名称”的层面上说的,并不是在“赋予名称”的层面上说的,所以没有过失。或者也可以说,经教的说法本来就是方便迂曲的说法,不像阿毗达摩论说那样毫不迂曲,因此更没有任何过失。巴利
Āgacchati nāmaṃ etasmāti āgamanaṃ, tato āgamanato.Saguṇatoti sarasato. Ārammaṇatoti ārammaṇadhammato. Anattato abhinivisitvāti ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā anattā’’ti vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā. Anattato disvāti paṭhamaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ ‘‘anattā’’ti anattalakkhaṇaṃ paṭivijjhitvā. Anattato vuṭṭhātīti vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāya anattākārato pavattāya maggavuṭṭhānaṃ pāpuṇāti. Asuññatattakārakānaṃ kilesānaṃabhāvāti attābhinivesapaccayānaṃ diṭṭhekaṭṭhānaṃ kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanato vipassanā suññatā nāma attasuññatāya yāthāvato gahaṇato. Nanu evaṃ vipassanāya saguṇato suññatā, na āgamanatoti nippariyāyato natthīti? Saccametaṃ nāmalābhe, na pana nāmadāneti nāyaṃ doso. Atha vā suttantakathā nāma pariyāyakathā, na abhidhammakathā viya nippariyāyāti bhiyyopi na koci doso.
因为从功德和所缘来获得名称时,会出现混淆,因为同一个事物也能获得别的名称。但从“来处”来获得名称时,不会混淆,因为不会获得别的名称,也不可能如此,所以说“另一个”等。没有那些造作相状的烦恼,是指以执取常相等相为缘的烦恼已被镇伏。虽然这观生起时确实在破除常相等相,但由于没有舍弃诸行的相状,所以从严格意义上并不获得“无相”之名。不过,这是从方便角度说的。正因为如此,在阿毗达摩中,由于是以严格的方式开示,才单独提出道的“无相”之名。而在经典中也有:巴利
Yasmā saguṇato, ārammaṇato ca nāmalābhe saṅkaro hoti ekasseva nāmantaralābhasambhavato. Āgamanato pana nāmalābhe saṅkaro natthi nāmantaralābhābhāvato, asambhavato ca, tasmā ‘‘aparo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nimittakārakakilesābhāvāti niccanimittādiggāhakapaccayānaṃ kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanato. Kāmañcāyaṃ vipassanā niccanimittādiṃ ugghāṭentī pavattati, saṅkhāranimittassa pana avissajjanato na nippariyāyato animittanāmaṃ labhatīti. Pariyāyena panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā hi nippariyāyadesanattā abhidhamme maggassa animittanāmaṃ uddhaṭaṃ. Sutte ca –
当修无相,断除慢随眠。
从此,通过断除慢,你将寂静地生活。巴利
‘‘Animittañca bhāvehi, mānānusayamujjaha; Tato mānābhisamayā, upasanto carissasī’’ti. (su. ni. 344; saṃ. ni. 1.212);
无相章已呈现。因为不存在造作誓愿的烦恼,即由于镇伏了作为追求快乐等誓愿之条件的诸烦恼。巴利
Animittapariyāyo āgato. Paṇidhikārakakilesābhāvāti sukhapaṇidhiādipaccayānaṃ kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanato.
因为远离了贪等,所以是空的——这是从彻底断除、舍弃的角度来说的。贪等本身就是贪的相。因为先前生起的贪等,会成为后来生起的贪等的因。贪等本身就是那种誓愿的缘,所以称为贪之誓愿等。涅槃因为是无为的状态,本身就脱离了一切有为,所以应当看作:它远离贪等,是空的;它没有贪等的相,也没有贪等的誓愿。在这里,行舍智连同随顺智,就是趣向出起的观。它观照为空时,称为“空性”;观照为苦时,因为渴爱的誓愿被干枯,所以称为“无愿”。它站在为证得道而趣入的行道位置上,给道安立“空、无相、无愿”的名称。再者,从“来处”得名时,也可以依功德和所缘来得名,这是成立的;但反过来,依功德和所缘得名时,并不是在所有情况下都能依来处得名。这是为了使名称圆满而有的别因,也是为了确定“一切道都可以依功德和所缘而结合三种名称,但并非都依来处得名”。所以,从直接、非迂曲的意义上说,依来处得名才是主要的,不是依其他方式;但从迂曲、广义上说,三种得名方式都可以接受。义注中就是以“三种说”等来展开这一考察的,应当这样理解。巴利
Rāgādīhi suññattāti samucchedavasena pajahanato rāgādīhi vivittattā. Rāgādayo eva rāganimittādīni. Purimuppannā hi rāgādayo parato uppajjanakarāgādīnaṃ kāraṇaṃ hoti. Rāgādayo eva tathā paṇidhānassa paccayabhāvato rāgapaṇidhiādayo. Nibbānaṃ visaṅkhārabhāveneva sabbasaṅkhāravinissaṭattā rāgādīhi suññaṃ, rāgādinimittapaṇidhivirahitañcāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca saṅkhārupekkhā sānulomā vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā, sā suññato vipassantī ‘‘suññatā’’ti vuccati, dukkhato passantī taṇhāpaṇidhisosanato ‘‘appaṇihitā’’ti. Sā maggādhigamāya āgamanapaṭipadāṭhāne ṭhatvā maggassa ‘‘suññataṃ animittaṃ appaṇihita’’nti nāmaṃ deti. Āgamanato ca nāme laddhe saguṇato ca ārammaṇato ca nāmaṃ siddhameva hoti, na pana saguṇārammaṇehi nāmalābhe sabbattha āgamanato nāmaṃ siddhaṃ hotīti paripuṇṇanāmasiddhihetuttā, ‘‘saguṇārammaṇehi sabbesampi nāmattayayogo, na āgamanato’’ti vavatthānakarattā ca nippariyāyato āgamanatova nāmalābho padhānaṃ, na itarehi, pariyāyato pana tidhā nāmalābho icchitabboti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘tividhā kathā’’tiādinā ayaṃ vicāro katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
所谓“清净的状态”,是指通过去除烦恼的污秽而达到的纯净、无染污的状态。因此说:应当依据三种善行来理解。巴利
Sucibhāvoti kilesāsucivigamena suddhabhāvo asaṃkiliṭṭhabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ vasena veditabbo’’ti.
牟尼的这些,就是牟尼行。凡是由于了知自他两种利益而成为牟尼的那些法,就是这里所说的“成就牟尼的牟尼行道法”。其中,身方面不做不该做的、做该做的,以“此身中有头发”等(方式)了知被称为身的所缘,并且对身的集、灭、味、过患、出离如实遍知,依这种遍知而生起的观道,以及通过它舍断对身的欲贪,灭除身行之后所应证得的定等——这一切以身门而运作的牟尼行道法,就叫作身牟尼。因此,为了显示这个含义,圣典中说了“断除三种身恶行”等。其余两种(语牟尼和意牟尼)也是同样的道理。其中的差别是:依变异语和声响语而生起的慧,是以语为所缘的智;从集等方面遍知该语,就是语遍知。依八十一种世间心而生起的智,是以意为所缘的智;从集等方面遍知该意,就是意遍知。巴利
Munino etānīti moneyyāni. Yehi dhammehi ubhayahitamunanato muni nāma hoti, te evaṃ vuttāti āha ‘‘munibhāvakarā moneyyapaṭipadā dhammā’’ti. Tattha yasmā kāyena akattabbassa akaraṇaṃ, kattabbassa ca karaṇaṃ, ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.377; ma. ni. 1.110; 3.153; a. ni. 6.29; 10.60; vibha. 356; khu. pā. 3.1; netti. 47) kāyasaṅkhātassa ārammaṇassa jānanaṃ, kāyassa ca samudayato atthaṅgamato assādato ādīnavato nissaraṇato ca yāthāvato parijānanaṃ, tathā parijānanavasena pavatto vipassanāmaggo, tena ca kāye chandarāgassa pajahanaṃ, kāyasaṅkhāraṃ nirodhetvā pattabbasamāpatti cāti sabbe ete kāyamukhena pavattā moneyyapaṭipadā dhammā kāyamoneyyaṃ nāma. Tasmā tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tividhakāyaduccaritassa pahāna’’ntiādinā pāḷi āgatā. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Tattha copanavācañceva saddavācañca ārabbha pavattā paññā vācārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ. Tassa vācāya samudayādito parijānanaṃ vācāpariññā. Ekāsītividhaṃ lokiyacittaṃ ārabbha pavattañāṇaṃ manārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ. Tassa samudayādito parijānanaṃ manopariññāti ayameva viseso.
成就由此而来,所以叫“益”,也就是善法的增长,因此说“益就是增长”。“非益”是成就通过它而离去,也就是善法的减损,因此说“非益就是不增长”。“那两者的”指益和非益两者的。“因由、方法”是通过它而接近、到达益和非益。其中,增长有两种:从无利的减损而来,以及从有利的生起而来;不增长也同样有两种:从有利的减损而来,以及从无利的生起而来。“了知它们”就是如实了知以上所说的、名为益和非益的种种增长与不增长。善巧即是熟练、精妙。为了依圣典显示那两者,才说了“这确实说过”等语。巴利
Ayanti ito sampattiyoti āyo, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhibuddhīti āha ‘‘āyoti vuḍḍhī’’ti. Apenti sampattiyo etenāti apāyo, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ hānīti āha ‘‘apāyoti avuḍḍhī’’ti. Tassa tassāti āyassa ca apāyassa ca. Kāraṇaṃ upāyo upeti upagacchati etena āyo, apāyo cāti. Tattha duvidhā vuḍḍhi anatthahānito, atthuppattito ca, tathā avuḍḍhi atthahānito, anatthuppattito ca. Tesaṃ pajānanāti tesaṃ āyāpāyasaññitānaṃ yathāvuttappabhedānaṃ vuḍḍhiavuḍḍhīnaṃ yāthāvato pajānanā. Kosallaṃ kusalatā nipuṇatā. Tadubhayampi pāḷivaseneva dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,所说的“益善巧”,就是对不善法的不生起与灭尽、对善法的生起与增长,这样的慧。现在,为了依照圣典的方式显示“非益善巧”,说了“其中,什么是……”等。其中,所说的“非益善巧”,就是对善法的不生起与灭尽、对不善法的生起与增长,这样的慧。在这里,有人会这样想:“益善巧可以是慧,但非益善巧怎么会成为慧呢?”他认为“能产生非益的能力就叫非益善巧”。然而,那只是他个人的想法。实际上,有慧的人会如实了知:“当我这样作意时,未生的善法不生起,已生的善法灭尽;未生的不善法生起,已生的不善法增长。”他了知之后,就不让未生的不善法生起,舍断已生的不善法;让未生的善法生起,使已生的善法修习圆满。这样,非益善巧也是慧。“一切”是指属于益善巧方面的和属于非益善巧方面的所有法。“随其方便”是指在各种应作之事中成为方法。巴利
Tattha idaṃ vuccatīti yā imesaṃ akusaladhammānaṃ anuppattinirodhesu, kusaladhammānañca uppattibhiyyobhāvesu paññā, idaṃ āyakosallaṃ nāma vuccati. Idāni apāyakosallampi pāḷivaseneva dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha katama’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha idaṃ vuccatīti yā imesaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ anuppajjananirujjhanesu, akusaladhammānañca uppattibhiyyobhāvesu paññā, idaṃ apāyakosallaṃ nāma vuccatīti. Etthāhaāyakosallaṃ tāva paññā hotu, apāyakosallaṃ kathaṃ paññā nāma jātāti evaṃ maññati ‘‘apāyuppādanasamatthatā apāyakosallaṃ nāmā’’ti, taṃ pana tassa matimattaṃ. Paññavā eva hi ‘‘mayhaṃ evaṃ manasi karoto anuppannā kusalā dhammā nuppajjanti, uppannā nirujjhanti. Anuppannā akusalā dhammā uppajjanti, uppannā vaḍḍhantī’’ti pajānāti, so evaṃ ñatvā anuppanne akusale dhamme na uppādeti, uppanne pajahati. Anuppanne kusale dhamme uppādeti, uppanne bhāvanāpāripūriṃ pāpeti. Evaṃ apāyakosallampi paññā evāti. Sabbāpīti āyakosallapakkhikāpi apāyakosallapakkhikāpi. Tatrupāyāti tatra tatra karaṇīye upāyabhūtā.
为了对治那个(紧急情况),也就是为了应对紧急的事务,或者为了避开危险,仅仅是以了知“即时生起之因”的方式。所谓“即时生起”,是指在那个场合、那个刹那就有它的生起,所以叫“即时生起”,也就是依场合而生起的因,仅仅是以了知那个(因)的方式。巴利
Tassa tikicchanatthanti accāyikassa kiccassa, bhayassa vā pariharaṇatthaṃ ṭhānuppattiyakāraṇajānanavasenevāti ṭhāne taṅkhaṇe eva uppatti etassa atthīti ṭhānuppattikaṃ, ṭhānaso uppajjanakakāraṇaṃ, tassa jānanavaseneva.
以陶醉的方式现行,意思是:由于自己所依之物本身具有令人陶醉的性质,就以生起骄慢的方式现行的那些自负。无病,就是没有病。生慢之因,就是使骄慢生起。住于青年,就是立足于青年,意思是倚仗年轻。一切有生命者,其寿命都会被死亡所摧破,并且总是伴随着苦;不看这两件事,只依靠生命能持续存在、又容易得到的条件,于是生起陶醉,这就是寿命慢。为了说明这一点,才说了长寿等等这些话。巴利
Majjanākāravasena pavattamānāti attano vatthuno madanīyatāya madassa āpajjanākārena pavattamānā uṇṇatiyo. Nirogoti arogo. Mānakaraṇanti mānassa uppādanaṃ. Yobbane ṭhatvāti yobbane patiṭṭhāya, yobbanaṃ apassāyāti attho. Sabbesampi jīvitaṃ nāma maraṇapabhaṅguraṃ dukkhānubandhañca, tadubhayaṃ anoloketvā, pabandhaṭṭhitipaccayā sulabhatañca nissāya uppajjanakamado jīvitamadoti dassetuṃ ‘‘ciraṃ jīvi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
增上是指最上者,意思是主宰。从增上而来的,就是增上依止。那是什么?就是不造恶。因此说“我只有这么多”等等。在这里,戒等应当看作只是世间的,所以“依解脱”是指世间解脱。最上就是主宰、尊胜的意思。在这里,以自己和法为增上而不造恶,应当知道是依于惭的力量;以世间为增上而不造恶,是依于愧的力量。巴利
Adhipati vuccati jeṭṭhako, issaroti attho. Tato adhipatito āgataṃ ādhipateyyaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Pāpassa akaraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ettakomhī’’tiādi. Tattha sīlādayo lokiyā eva daṭṭhabbā, tasmā vimuttiyāti lokiyavimuttiyā. Jeṭṭhakanti issaraṃ, garunti attho. Ettha ca attānaṃ, dhammañca adhipatiṃ katvā pāpassa akaraṇaṃ hiriyā vasena veditabbaṃ. Lokaṃ adhipatiṃ katvā akaraṇaṃ ottappassa vasena.
“论事”是言论产生的基础。因为离开了这些,言论就无法产生,所以说“言论的原因”。“长时”这个词的意思前面已经讲过,不过从义理上说,它只是法的生起流转本身。这里说的法就是诸蕴,而离开诸蕴并没有它们的去处,所以说“过去法,意思是过去的诸蕴”。这个“长时”,就像方位等一样,从义理上说只是依据法的生起流转而施设的概念,并不是依于施设概念而存在的真实法。为了说明这个道理,所以说“此外”等。巴利
Kathāvatthūnīti kathāya pavattiṭṭhānāni. Yasmā tehi vinā kathā nappavattati, tasmā ‘‘kathākāraṇānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Addhāna-saddassa attho heṭṭhā vutto eva, so panatthato dhammappavattimattaṃ . Dhammā cettha khandhā eva, tabbinimuttā ca tesaṃ gati natthīti āha ‘‘atītaṃ dhammaṃ, atītakkhandheti attho’’ti. Ayañca addhā nāma disādi viya atthato dhammappavattiṃ upādāya paññattimattaṃ, na upādā na bhūtadhammoti tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
为了详细解释前面简略说过的“以破除之义和以令了知之义”这句话,接着说了“宿住”等语。“宿住”是指过去世曾住过的诸蕴。“黑暗”是指愚痴之暗。“刺破”就是摧毁、断除的意思。正是通过破除那遮蔽的愚痴黑暗,使宿住和死生变得清晰明了、昭然显现,所以称为“明”。“彼”是指死生。巴利
‘‘Tamavijjhanaṭṭhena viditakaraṇaṭṭhenā’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘pubbenivāsā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pubbenivāsanti pubbe nivutthakkhandhe. Tamanti mohatamaṃ. Vijjhatīti vihanati, pajahatīti attho. Teneva ca paṭicchādakatamavijjhanena pubbenivāsañca viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ karotīti vijjāti. Tanti cutūpapātaṃ.
由于能带来投生为殊胜天人的果报,所以叫天住。有人问:这样的话,其他几种不也成了天住吗?不是的。因为慈、悲、喜是以利益众生等方式生起的,各有不同;而舍则因为无过失、最殊胜,早已确立了梵住这个名称。因为极其清净、能断除对立的烦恼而应当证得,因为应当证得,或者因为证得圣位之后紧接着就是圣,所以叫圣。又或者因为是诸圣者所拥有的,所以叫圣住。巴利
Upapattidevavisesabhāvāvaho vihāroti katvā dibbo vihāro. Nanu evaṃ aññamaññānampi dibbavihārabhāvo āpajjatīti? Na tāsaṃ sattesu hitūpasaṃhārādivasena pavattiyā savisesaṃ niddosaṭṭhena, seṭṭhaṭṭhena ca brahmavihārasamaññāya niruḷhabhāvato. Suvisuddhito paṭipakkhasamucchindanavasena araṇīyato pattabbato, ariyabhāvappattiyā vā anantaraṃ ariyo. Ariyānaṃ ayanti vā ariyo vihāro.
剩下的部分和前文所说的一样。巴利
Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
306 “pubbe”一词,在前面《大念处》注释的说明里已经讲过了。巴利
306.Pubbeti heṭṭhā mahāsatipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ.
所谓“欲”,就是通过欲求的方式而有的欲。“欲性”就是欲的状态,或者令其成为欲的方式。“想作”就是想做的欲求。“善”就是熟练,从善巧所生。“法欲”就是对自性的欲求。要知道,这个“欲”其实有很多种:渴爱之欲、见之欲、精进之欲、法之欲。这里指的是想作的善法欲。“生欲”就是让那个欲生起;能令它转起,就叫做“生”。“作策励”就是作加行、作精勤。“发勤精进”就是令身精进和心精进转起。“策励心”就是用那个俱生精进把心提振起来。“勤”就是作勤精进。这些词句应当依次与生起、修习、多作、持续造作相配合。为了避免繁复,所以说“此处是略说”。巴利
Yo chandoti yo chandiyanavasena chando. Chandikatāti chandabhāvo, chandikaraṇākāro vā. Kattukamyatāti kattukāmatā. Kusaloti cheko kosallasambhūto . Dhammacchandoti sabhāvacchando. Ayañhi chando nāma taṇhāchando, diṭṭhichando, vīriyachando, dhammacchandoti bahuvidho. Idha kattukamyatākusaladhammacchando adhippeto. Chandaṃ janetīti taṃ chandaṃ uppādeti. Taṃ pavattento hi janeti nāma. Vāyāmaṃ karotīti payogaṃ parakkamaṃ karoti. Vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti kāyikacetasikavīriyaṃ pavatteti. Cittaṃ upatthambhetīti teneva sahajātavīriyena cittaṃ ukkhipati. Padahatīti padhānaṃ vīriyaṃ karoti. Paṭipāṭiyā panetāni padāni uppādanāsevanābhāvanābahulīkammasātaccakiriyāhi yojetabbāni. Vitthāraṃ pariharanto ‘‘ayamettha saṅkhepo’’tiādimāha.
依于欲:所谓“有欲的人心得定,我就像这样”,如此依止于欲,把欲作为主导、上首、先行而生的定,就是欲定。以勤为核心:就是出于勤,或者已经达到勤的状态。诸行:这里说的是能成办四种作用的正勤精进。与那些法:就是与前面所说的定和精进俱起、相应。神足的足:以成就为同义,以能成就为义;众生依靠它而成就、增长、达到殊胜,所以称为“神”;这些与近行禅那等善心相应的欲定、勤行,就支持义来说,是足。因为前面的神是后面神足的足、基础和立足处,所以也说“成为神的足”。在其余的中:指第二神足等。虽然《迦那瓦沙巴经》中也谈到了神足的详细考察,但那也只是简略说的,所以说“广分别……已开示”。巴利
Chandaṃ nissāyāti ‘‘chandavato cetosamādhi hoti, mayhaṃ evaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ chandaṃ nissāya chandaṃ dhuraṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā pavatto samādhi chandasamādhi. Padhānabhūtāti padhānajātā, padhānabhāvaṃ vā pattā. Saṅkhārāti catukiccasādhakaṃ sammappadhānavīriyaṃ vadati. Tehi dhammehīti yathāvuttasamādhivīriyehi upetaṃ sampayuttaṃ. Iddhiyā pādanti nipphattipariyāyena ijjhanaṭṭhena, ijjhanti etāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iminā vā pariyāyena ‘‘iddhī’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gatānaṃ upacārajjhānādikusalacittasampayuttānaṃ chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena pādabhūtaṃ. Yasmā purimā iddhi pacchimāya iddhiyā pādo pādakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘iddhibhūtaṃ vā pāda’’nti ca vuttaṃ. Sesesupīti dutiyaiddhipādādīsu. Kāmañcettha janavasabhasuttepi iddhipādavicāro āgato, sopi saṅkhepato evāti āha ‘‘vitthāro pana…pe… dīpito’’ti.
307 “现法”是指现前存在的自身,所以说“就在这个自身当中”。“为了乐住”,是为了以没有烦恼、没有染着的快乐而安住。“果等至禅那”指四种果等至的禅那。“在后分”指证得漏尽之后的部分。“所生成的禅那”指所证得的色界禅那与无色界禅那。巴利
307.Diṭṭhadhammo vuccati paccakkhabhūto attabhāvoti āha ‘‘imasmiṃyeva attabhāve’’ti. Sukhavihāratthāyāti nikkilesatāya nirāmisena sukhena viharaṇatthāya. Phalasamāpattijhānānīti cattāripi phalasamāpattijhānāni. Aparabhāgeti āsavakkhayādhigamato aparabhāge. Nibbattitajjhānānīti adhigatarūpārūpajjhānāni.
“日月、灯、摩尼珠等”这句话里,用“灯”这个词来指代灯具;用“等”这个字来包括火炬、闪电之类。“光明”:就是作意——无论是白天还是夜里,都按照所获得的样子,把日月等光明作意、放在心里。“他如此作意”:就像善修光明遍的人那样,他的遍光明能随自己的意愿、想多大就多大。那光明在夜里现前,他就借此建立白昼想,像白天一样远离昏沉和睡眠。因此说“如昼,如夜”。“如夜里所见的光明”:就像夜里所见的月光等光明那样,已经获得、现前。“白天也如此作意”:就是用夜里所见的方式,在白天也把那光明作意、放在心里。“不被覆盖”:不被昏沉睡眠的覆盖所遮蔽。“不被遮挡”:不被遮盖。“有光耀”:具有智的光耀。这可以是去除昏沉睡眠的光明,也可以是遍光明,或者遍作光明;就像随烦恼光明一样,这一切光明都是由智所生起的。“为了获得智见”:是为了获得天眼智。因为天眼智对于色界天的色法和其余对象的“见”义,在这里被称为“智见”。“作意光明想”:这里所说的光明,是去除昏沉睡眠的光明。“遍作光明”:是为了天眼智而作为前行修习所生起的光明。其中,依前一种光明,特别说“诸漏尽者”;因为他的昏沉睡眠已彻底断除,其他人则不是。依后一种光明,说“于彼已来或未来”等。其中,“于彼”指天眼智;“已来”指已获得;“未来”指未获得。因为只有那样的人,依根本禅那之力才能生起遍作光明,而那光明与清净、皎洁等殊胜功德相应,所以说“根本……乃至……修习”就是如此所说。巴利
Sūriyacandapajjotamaṇiādīnanti pajjotaggahaṇena padīpaṃ vadati. Ādi-saddena ukkāvijjulatādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Ālokoti manasi karotīti sūriyacandālokādiṃ divā, rattiñca upaladdhaṃ yathāladdhavaseneva manasi karoti citte ṭhapeti. Tathāva naṃ manasi karoti, yathāssa subhāvitālokakasiṇassa viya kasiṇāloko yadicchakaṃ yāvadicchakaṃ. So āloko rattiyaṃ upatiṭṭhati, yena tattha divāsaññaṃ ṭhapeti divā viya vigatathinamiddho hoti. Tenāha ‘‘yathā divā tathā ratti’’nti. Yathā rattiṃ āloko diṭṭhoti yathā rattiyā candālokādiāloko diṭṭho upaladdho. Evameva divā manasi karotīti rattiṃ diṭṭhākāreneva divā taṃ ālokaṃ manasi karoti citte ṭhapeti. Apihitenāti thinamiddhapidhānena na pihitena. Anaddhenāti asañchāditena. Saobhāsanti sañāṇobhāsaṃ. Thinamiddhavinodanaālokopi vā hotu kasiṇālokopi vā parikammālokopi vā, upakkilesāloko viya sabbāyaṃ āloko ñāṇasamuṭṭhāno vāti. Ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhatthāyāti dibbacakkhuñāṇapaṭilābhatthāya. Dibbacakkhuñāṇañhi rūpagatassa dibbassa, itarassa ca dassanaṭṭhena idha ‘‘ñāṇadassana’’nti adhippetaṃ. ‘‘Ālokasaññaṃ manasi karotī’’ti ettha vuttaāloko thinamiddhavinodanaāloko. Parikammaālokoti dibbacakkhuñāṇāya parikammakaraṇavasena pavattitaāloko. Tattha purimassa vasena ‘‘khīṇāsavassā’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Tassa hi thinamiddhaṃ suppahīnaṃ hoti, na aññesaṃ. Dutiyassa vasena ‘‘tasmiṃ vā āgatepī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tasminti dibbacakkhuñāṇe. Āgatepīti paṭiladdhepi. Anāgatepīti appaṭiladdhepi. Yasmā tathārūpassa pādakajjhānasseva vasena parikammaālokassa sambhavo, yato taṃ parisuddhapariyodātatādiguṇavisesupasaṃhitaṃ, tasmā āha ‘‘pādaka…pe… bhāvetīti vutta’’nti.
“七处”指的是“前行、后退时都保持正知”等经文所说的七处。虽然对有学来说也有已遍知的情况,但只有漏尽者才是究竟已遍知所依处的,所以说“漏尽者的所依处已被了知”等。由于如实了知所依处和所缘:就像找蛇的人,一旦知道蛇的巢穴,蛇也就等于被找到了,因为凭咒术和药草的力量很容易抓住它;同样,当受的所依处——即作为受之根基的处所——和所缘都被了知时,即使是初学者也能了知受,因为从自相和共相两方面都容易把握它,更何况已经遍知所依处的漏尽者。对于他来说,受在生起、住立、坏灭的每一刹那都被了知、都清清楚楚。因此说“受是这样生起的”等等。这只是举例说明,为了显示巴利经典中把握受、想、寻等,所以又说“不仅”等,借此表明其余一切法也从生起等方面被了知。巴利
Sattaṭṭhānikassāti ‘‘abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hotī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.214; 2.69; ma. ni. 1.102) vuttassa sattaṭṭhānikassa. Satipi sekkhānaṃ pariññātabhāve ekantato pariññātavatthukā nāma arahanto evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘khīṇāsavassa vatthu viditaṃ hotī’’tiādi. Vatthārammaṇaviditatāyāti vatthuno, ārammaṇassa ca yāthāvato viditabhāvena. Yathā hi sappapariyesanaṃ carantena tassa āsaye vidite sopi vidito eva ca hoti mantāgadabalena tassa gahaṇassa sukarattā, evaṃ vedanāya āsayabhūte vatthumhi, ārammaṇe ca vidite ādikammikassapi vedanā viditā eva hoti salakkhaṇato, sāmaññalakkhaṇato ca tassā gahaṇassa sukarattā, pageva pariññātavatthukassa khīṇāsavassa. Tassa hi uppādakkhaṇepi ṭhitikkhaṇepi bhaṅgakkhaṇepi vedanā viditā pākaṭā honti. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ vedanā uppajjantī’’tiādi. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ, yadidaṃ pāḷiyaṃ vedanāsaññāvitakkaggahaṇanti dassento ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādimāha , tena avasesato sabbadhammānampi uppādādito viditabhāvaṃ dasseti.
现在,不只是从刹那的角度,而且从缘的角度和无常等的角度,不只是依着漏尽者,还要依着某些有学,为了说明受等法的被了知,所以说了“再者……”这一段。其中,“无明集”是指无明的生起,也就是存在的意思。因为生起虽然与灭相反,但也可以用来表达存在,所以意思是:前世已经成立的无明存在时,这一世受就生起。应当知道,无明等过去、未来、现在等时态的诸法,以及作为它们助缘的生起等,也都包含在内了。在受流转的诸缘中,因为触的力量特别强,所以单独取触来说“触集”。取了触之后,由于流转缘是共通的,依处、所缘等也就都被包含进来了。因此,对一切受毫无遗漏地从缘的角度见到它的生起,这一点已经说明了。用“出生的相”等,则是从刹那的角度说明见其生起。“由此而生起”所以叫“生起”;生起既是缘的相,也是刹那的相,把两者合在一起说“这样,受的生起就被了知了”。巴利
Idāni na kevalaṃ khaṇato eva, atha kho paccayatopi aniccāditopi na kevalaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃyeva vasena, atha kho ekaccānaṃ sekkhānampi vasena vedanādīnaṃ viditabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha avijjāsamudayāti avijjāya uppādā, atthibhāvāti attho. Nirodhavirodhī hi uppādo atthibhāvavācakopi hotīti tasmā purimabhavasiddhāya avijjāya sati imasmiṃ bhave vedanāya uppādo hotīti attho. Avijjādīhi atītakālikādīhi tesaṃ sahakāraṇabhūtāni uppādādīnipi gahitānevāti veditabbaṃ. Vedanāya pavattipaccayesu phassassa balavabhāvato so eva gahito ‘‘phassasamudayā’’ti. Tasmiṃ pana gahite pavattipaccayatāsāmaññena vatthārammaṇādīnipi gahitāneva hontīti sabbassāpi vedanāya anavasesato paccayato udayadassanaṃ vibhāvitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Nibbattilakkhaṇa’’ntiādinā khaṇavasena udayadassanamāha. Uppajjati etasmāti uppādo, uppajjanaṃ uppādoti paccayalakkhaṇaṃ, khaṇalakkhaṇañca ubhayaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahetvā āha ‘‘evaṃ vedanāya uppādo vidito hotī’’ti.
以无常来作意:这个受不是恒常的,它有开始有结束,被生起和坏灭所限定,刹那即坏,只是暂时存在。因此,当人把它作意为“无常”,也就是以无常来作意时,它的坏灭和消散就会显现出来,被清楚地知道。
以苦来作意:正因为是无常,受才被生起和坏灭所逼迫,是苦法,是苦的依处。因此,当人把它作意为“苦”,也就是以苦来作意时,它就会显现为可怕、令人恐惧,被清楚地知道。
同样,正因为是无常、是苦,受才是无我的、不坚实的、没有核心的、不能自主的、空虚的。因此,当人把受作意为“无我”,也就是以无我来作意时,它就会显现为空、为虚、为无主,被清楚地知道。
“以坏灭”等,是对前面所说内容的总结。因此,“以坏灭、以怖畏、以空来了知受”,应当按含义理解为格位的变化。
“无明灭则受灭”:通过最高的道使无明不再生起而灭尽,受也就不再生起而灭尽;因为因不存在,果也就不存在。其余部分应依照“集”门所说的方式来了知。
这里的“定修习”,是指诸圣者达到顶点的观定修习。作为它基础的禅那等至,也应当了知。巴利
Aniccato manasi karototi vedanā nāmāyaṃ anaccantikatāya ādiantavatī udayabbayaparicchinnā khaṇabhaṅgurā tāvakālikā, tasmā ‘‘aniccā’’ti aniccato manasi karoto. Tassā khayato, vayato ca upaṭṭhānaṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Dukkhato manasi karototi aniccattā eva vedanā udayabbayapaṭipīḷitatāya, dukkhamatāya, dukkhavatthutāya ca ‘‘dukkhā’’ti manasi karoto bhayato bhāyitabbato tassā upaṭṭhānaṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotīti. Tathā aniccattā, dukkhattā eva ca vedanā attarahitā asārā nissārā avasavattinī tucchāti vedanaṃ anattato manasi karoto suññato rittato asāmikato upaṭṭhānaṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. ‘‘Khayato’’tiādi vuttasseva atthassa nigamanaṃ. Tasmā vedanaṃ khayato bhayato suññato jānātīti atthavasena vibhattipariṇāmo veditabbo. Avijjānirodhā vedanānirodhoti aggamaggena avijjāya anuppādanirodhato vedanāya anuppādanirodho hoti paccayābhāve abhāvato. Sesaṃ samudayavāre vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ. Idha samādhibhāvanāti sikhāppattā ariyānaṃ vipassanāsamādhibhāvanā. Tassā pādakabhūtā jhānasamāpatti veditabbā.
就像《大本经》里已经说过的那样(《长部》2.62)。巴利
Vuttanayameva mahāpadāne (dī. ni. 2.62).
308 不取限量:不像修不净观那样只取一个局部区域,而是即使在一个众生中也不取限量,毫无遗漏地遍满。因为这类心没有可取的限量,所以称为“无量”;“无量”本身就是“无量心”。巴利
308.Pamāṇaṃ aggahetvāti asubhabhāvanā viya padesaṃ aggahetvā. Ekasmimpi satte pamāṇāggahaṇena anavasesapharaṇena. Natthi etāsaṃ gahetabbaṃ pamāṇanti hi appamāṇā, appamāṇā eva appamaññā.
以“不可依止”之义,称为“非依止”。在这里,比丘不依止它们,就能够修学三学,这些(不依止的法)就是(非依止)的同义词。而这些(非依止之法)是:对诸资具经过省察而受用、忍耐堪忍、避开应当避开的、遣除应当遣除的。因此说“经过省察而忍受一种”等。其中,因为正确地显现、现前、明了,所以称为“省察”,即“以智慧”。所谓“经过省察而受用”,是指:在受用时,不善法减退、善法增长,那就是(应当)受用(的方式),因此说“只受用适合受用的”。在忍耐等方面,道理也是这样。“不让入内”:指不让它在自己内心中生起。巴利
Apassayitabbaṭṭhena apassenāni, idha bhikkhu yāni apassāya tisso sikkhā sikkhituṃ samattho hoti, tesameva adhivacanaṃ. Tāni panetāni paccayānaṃ saṅkhāya sevitā adhivāsanakkhanti, vajjanīyavajjanaṃ, vinodetabbavinodanañca. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhāyekaṃ adhivāsetī’’tiādi . Tattha sammadeva khāyati upaṭṭhāti paṭibhātīti saṅkhā, ñāṇanti āha ‘‘saṅkhāyāti ñāṇenā’’ti. Saṅkhāya sevitā nāma yaṃ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, tassa sevanāti āha ‘‘sevitabbayuttakameva sevatī’’ti. Adhivāsanādīsupi eseva nayo. Anto pavisitunti abbhantare attano citte pavattituṃ na deti.
圣种四法的注释巴利
Ariyavaṃsacatukkavaṇṇanā
309 “vaṃsa”这个词,在“越过脊梁而坐”这类说法里,指的是放在两根椽子交接处的短杆。巴利
309.Vaṃsa-saddo ‘‘piṭṭhivaṃsaṃ atikkamitvā nisīdatī’’tiādīsu dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ gopānasīnaṃ sandhānaṭṭhāne ṭhapetabbadaṇḍake āgato.
就像一根被藤蔓缠得密密麻麻的宽大竹竿。
对儿女和妻子的那种牵挂;
就像竹丛里的竹笋,不粘不染,
在“应独自而行,像犀牛角一样”等语句中。巴利
‘‘Vaṃso visālova yathā visatto, Puttesu dāresu ca yā apekkhā; Vaṃse kaḷīrova asajjamāno, Eko care khaggavisāṇakappo’’tiādīsu. (apa. 1.1.94);
在“无节”等句中。在“鼓声、腰鼓声、竹声、铜钹声”等语中,指的是某种特定的乐器,也叫“竹”。在“以无节的脊骨杀死大象”等语中,指的是大象等动物脊背中间的部位。在“我要延续家族血统”等语中(《长部》3.267),指的是家族血统。在“守护传承者、维护传统者”等语中(《清净道论》1.42),指的是功德的次第相续流转。但在这里,应当理解为以“四资具知足”和“修习乐住”为内涵的功德相续。为了通过譬喻显示这个“传承”既指家族传承也指功德传承,所以说了“正如……”等话。其中,刹帝利传承就是刹帝利家族血统,其余各句也是同样的道理。沙门传承则指沙门传统、沙门相续。说到“根香等”时,其中的“等”字,应当知道就像包含了心材香等一样,这里也包含了奶酪等。第二个“等”字,则包含了迦尸布、生酥等。“圣”这个词,也用于居住在被称为“圣处”的地方的人们,如说“阿难,只要有圣处”(《长部》2.152;《优陀那》76);也用于世间的善人,如“你们确实是圣者,具足清净的身业……我是其中一员”等(《中部》1.35)。但在这里,为了显示那些以“远离烦恼”等获得词源解释、证悟圣谛的人才是这里所指的,所以设了“那么谁是圣者”这个问题,然后说“圣者被称为”等话。巴利
Akaṇḍake. ‘‘Bherisaddo mudiṅgasaddo vaṃsasaddo kaṃsatāḷasaddo’’tiādīsu tūriyavisese, yo ‘‘veṇū’’ tipi vuccati. ‘‘Abhinnena piṭṭhivaṃsena mato hatthī’’tiādīsu hatthiādīnaṃ piṭṭhivemajjhe padese. ‘‘Kulavaṃsaṃ ṭhapessāmī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.267) kulavaṃse. ‘‘Vaṃsānurakkhako paveṇīpālako’’tiādīsu (visuddhi. 1.42) guṇānupubbiyaṃ guṇānaṃ pabandhappavattiyaṃ. Idha pana catupaccayasantosabhāvanārāmatāsaṅkhātaguṇānaṃ pabandhe daṭṭhabbo. Tassa pana vaṃsassa kulanvayaṃ, guṇanvayañca nidassanavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha khattiyavaṃsoti khattiyakulanvayo . Eseva nayo sesapadesupi. Samaṇavaṃso pana samaṇatanti samaṇapaveṇī. Mūlagandhādīnanti ādi-saddena yathā sāragandhādīnaṃ saṅgaho, evamettha gorasādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Dutiyena pana ādi-saddena kāsikavatthasappimaṇḍādīnaṃ. Ariya-saddo amilakkhūsupi manussesu vattati, yesaṃ pana nivāsanaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘ariyaṃ āyatana’’nti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘yāvatā, ānanda, ariyaṃ āyatana’’nti (dī. ni. 2.152; udā. 76) lokiyasādhujanesupi ‘‘ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhakāyakammantā…pe… tesaṃ ahaṃ aññataro’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.35). Idha pana ye ‘‘ārakā kilesehī’’tiādinā laddhanibbacanā paṭividdhaariyasaccā, te eva adhippetāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ke pana te ariyā’’ti pucchaṃ katvā ‘‘ariyā vuccantī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,先把从大誓愿劫开始直到现在这一劫之间出现的正自觉者,按他们的真实样貌展示出来;然后再把其他正自觉者、独觉佛和佛弟子也包括进来,为了毫无遗漏地显示一切圣者,所以说了“再者……”等话。这里的意思是:只要教法还没有消失,导师就相当于仍然在世——这是指这位世尊,以及现在还在世的佛弟子们,这就是“对现在的摄取”。如果认为各个时代各有各的“现在者”,那就不应该再去摄取过去和未来了。现在,就像世尊在讲说六六法时(《中部》3.420),用八种方式赞叹说:“比丘们,我要为你们讲说初善、中善、后善,有意义、有文采,完全圆满、清净的梵行,也就是这六六法。”同样,在这大圣种的教导中,对于圣者的种姓,他也曾用九种方式赞叹说:“比丘们,有这四种圣种,是最初的、久远的、传统的、古老的,不混杂、过去不曾混杂,现在不混杂、未来也不混杂,不被沙门、婆罗门和智者所非议。”(《增支部》4.28)现在先把这些赞语引出来,以称赞的方式加以赞叹,所以说“而这四种……”等。“最初”,应当理解为在一切种姓中最为殊胜,并且能成就殊胜,所以叫最初。应当理解为“久远”,是因为被久远者所认知,也因为佛陀等圣者一向都这样实行。应当理解为“种姓”,是因为这是佛陀等圣者的种姓。应当理解为“古老”,就是古旧的。不是最近才产生的,就是不是新近才有的。“不混杂”,就是没有被丢弃、没有被抛弃。因此说“没有被移除”。 “过去不曾被移除”,就是过去不曾被抛弃,因为它是圆满三种学处的方便,所以过去不曾被舍弃。正因如此,现在也不被移除,未来也不会被移除。那些真正了知法之本性的人,就是智者,是止息了恶行的沙门,是除灭了恶行的婆罗门,他们不非议、不拒绝这些。凡是不可非议的,就是不可指责、不可呵责的。由于不可舍弃,所以不可拒绝。巴利
Tattha ye mahāpaṇidhānakappato paṭṭhāya yāvāyaṃ kappo, etthantare uppannā sammāsambuddhā, te tāva sarūpato dassetvā tadaññepi sammāsambuddhe, paccekabuddhe, buddhasāvake ca saṅgahetvā anavasesato ariye dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yāva sāsanaṃ na antaradhāyati, tāva satthā dharati eva nāmāti imameva bhagavantaṃ, ye cetarahi buddhasāvakā, te ca sandhāya paccuppannaggahaṇaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vā kāle te te paccuppannāti ce, atītānāgataggahaṇaṃ na kattabbaṃ siyā. Idāni yathā bhagavā ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsessāmi, yadidaṃ chachakkānī’’ti chakkadesanāya (ma. ni. 3.420) aṭṭhahi padehi vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi, evaṃ mahāariyavaṃsadesanāya ariyānaṃ vaṃsānaṃ ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, ariyavaṃsā aggaññā rattaññā vaṃsaññā porāṇā asaṃkiṇṇā asaṃkiṇṇapubbā na saṅkīyanti na saṅkīyissanti appaṭikuṭṭhā samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī’’ti (a. ni. 4.28) yehi navahi padehi vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi, tāni tāva ānetvā thomanāvaseneva vaṇṇento ‘‘te kho panete’’tiādimāha. Aggāti jānitabbā sabbavaṃsehi seṭṭhabhāvato, seṭṭhabhāvasādhanato ca. Dīgharattaṃ pavattāti jānitabbā rattaññūhi, buddhādīhi tehi ca tathā anuṭṭhitattā. Vaṃsāti jānitabbā buddhādīnaṃ ariyānaṃ vaṃsāti jānitabbā. Porāṇāti purātanā. Na adhunuppattikāti na adhunātanā. Asaṃkiṇṇāti na khittā na chaḍḍitā. Tenāha ‘‘anapanītā’’ti. Na apanītapubbāti na chaḍḍitapubbā tissannaṃ sikkhānaṃ paripūraṇūpāyabhāvato na paricattapubbā. Tato eva idānipi na apanīyanti, anāgatepi na apanīyissanti. Ye dhammasabhāvassa vijānaneva viññū samitapāpasamaṇā ceva bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇā ca, tehi appaṭikuṭṭhā appaṭikkhittā. Ye hi na paṭikkositabbā, te aninditabbā agarahitabbā. Apariccajitabbatāya appaṭikkhipitabbā hontīti.
“知足者”在这里,为了说明什么才是真正想要的知足,所以说“以资具知足而知足”。在这里,比丘也可以通过禅那、观等方式而知足。“随其所得”就是随这个、随那个。“itara”这个词是不定词,重复说的时候,就和“任何”同义,所以说成“随何所得”。这个不定词既可以指粗劣等当中的某一种,也可以指随所得等当中的某一种。为了说明这里取的是第二种含义,所以接着说“再者……”等。难道随所得等不就是粗劣等吗?确实如此,但还是有区别。因为对随所得而得的粗劣等的知足,就是随所得知足,而不是另一种知足。它不只是依靠资具,也依靠适合自身身体力量的程度。而且,粗、劣等三种在衣服上也能得到;中等则通于四种资具;最后一种只在衣服和坐卧处上能得到,应当这样理解。“这三种知足”是总括来说的。那些把病缘药归入饮食,在衣服上说二十种、饮食上说十五种、坐卧处上说十五种,合起来称为五十种知足的人,所有这些都按各自情况包含在这三种知足之中。巴利
Santuṭṭhoti ettha yathādhippetasantosameva dassento ‘‘paccayasantosavasena santuṭṭho’’ti vuttaṃ. Jhānavipassanādivasenapi idha bhikkhuno santuṭṭhatā hotīti. Itarītarenāti itarena itarena. Itara-saddoyaṃ aniyamavacano, dvikkhattuṃ vuccamāno yaṃkiñci-saddehi samānattho hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘yena kenacī’’ti. Svāyaṃ aniyamavācitāya eva yathā thūlādīnaṃ aññataravacano, evaṃ yathāladdhādīnampi aññataravacanoti tattha dutiyapakkhasseva idha icchitabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘atha kho’’tiādimāha . Nanu ca yathāladdhādayopi thūlādayo eva? Saccametaṃ, tathāpi atthi viseso. Yo hi yathāladdhesu thūlādīsu santoso, so yathālābhasantoso eva, na itaro. Na hi so paccayamattasannissayo icchito, atha kho attano kāyabalasāruppabhāvasannissayopi. Thūladukādayo ca tayopi cīvare labbhanti. Majjhimo catupaccayasādhāraṇo, pacchimo pana cīvare, senāsane ca labbhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Ime tayo santose’’ti idaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikavasena vuttaṃ. Ye hi parato gilānapaccayaṃ piṇḍapāte eva pakkhipitvā cīvare vīsati, piṇḍapāte pannarasa, senāsane pannarasāti samapaṇṇāsasantosā vuccanti, te sabbepi yathārahaṃ imesu eva tīsu santosesu saṅgahaṃ samosaraṇaṃ gacchantīti.
应当知道什么是衣,也就是应当从种类上知道:这是如法的衣。衣的来源地,就是衣产生的地方。粪扫衣,就是粪扫衣,也就是具备粪扫衣特征的衣,应当知道,这是它的意思。衣知足,就是对于衣,凡是能得到的,一切都要知足。与衣相关的头陀支也应当知道,也就是依靠这些,知足者因为对衣知足而真正成为知足的人。麻衣、棉衣、丝衣、毛衣、麻布衣、混纺衣,这些就是麻等各类。其中,麻衣是用麻线织成的麻布衣,其余几种也一样。麻布衣是用麻绳线做成的衣。混纺衣则是把麻线等各类线部分混合起来做成的衣。有些人说,混纺衣也只是麻制的。如果是这样,那岂不是没有别的布料种类了吗?并不是没有,而是为了说明这些的随顺种类,所以说了细麻布等。等这个字,包括了丝绢布、月色布、中国布、神通生布、天授布等。其中,细麻布是麻布的随顺,因为它是麻制的。丝绢布是产在丝绢地方的布。无死藏中说,丝绢布是丝的一种。月色布和中国布,分别是产在月色地方和中国地方的布。丝绢布等这三种,是丝的随顺,因为它们是由虫所造的线织成的。神通生布,是依靠福德神通化现给善来比丘的衣,它也是麻等中的一种,所以也是随顺的。天神所给的衣叫天授布,这就像结网天女给阿那律长老的布那样,那也是麻等中的一种,因为是其中之一。这些是包含在内的限定说法,意思就是这些正是。诸佛等能够受用的如法衣。巴利
Cīvaraṃ jānitabbanti ‘‘idaṃ nāma cīvaraṃ kappiya’’nti jātito cīvaraṃ jānitabbaṃ. Cīvarakkhettanti cīvarassa uppattikkhettaṃ. Paṃsukūlanti paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ, paṃsukūlalakkhaṇappattaṃ cīvaraṃ jānitabbanti attho. Cīvarasantosoti cīvare labbhamāno sabbo santoso jānitabbo.Cīvarapaṭisaṃyuttāni dhutaṅgāni jānitabbāni, yāni tosanto cīvarasantosena sammadeva santuṭṭho hotīti. Khomakappāsikakoseyyakambalasāṇabhaṅgāni khomādīni. Tattha khomaṃ nāma khomasuttehi vāyitaṃ khomapaṭacīvaraṃ, tathā sesānipi. Sāṇanti sāṇavākasuttehi katacīvaraṃ. Bhaṅganti pana khomasuttādīni sabbāni ekaccāni vomissetvā katacīvaraṃ. ‘‘Bhaṅgampi vākamayamevā’’ti keci. Chāti gaṇanaparicchedo. Yadi evaṃ ito aññā vatthajāti natthīti? No natthi, sā pana etesaṃ anulomāti dassetuṃ ‘‘dukūlādīnī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ādi-saddena paṭṭuṇṇaṃ, somārapaṭṭaṃ, cīnapaṭṭaṃ , iddhijaṃ, devadinnanti etesaṃ saṅgaho. Tattha dukūlaṃ sāṇassa anulomaṃ vākamayattā. Paṭṭuṇṇadese sañjātavatthaṃ paṭṭuṇṇaṃ. ‘‘Paṭṭuṇṇaṃ koseyyaviseso’’ti hi amarakose vuttaṃ. Somāradese, cīnadese ca jātavatthāni somāracīnapaṭṭāni. Paṭṭuṇṇādīni tīṇi koseyyassa anulomāni pāṇakehi katasuttamayattā. Iddhijaṃ ehibhikkhūnaṃ puññiddhiyā nibbattaṃ cīvaraṃ, taṃ khomādīnaṃ aññataraṃ hotīti tesameva anulomañca. Devatāhi dinnaṃ cīvaraṃ devadinnaṃ, taṃ kapparukkhe nibbattaṃ jāliniyā devakaññāya anuruddhattherassa dinnavatthasadisaṃ, tampi khomādīnaṃyeva anulomaṃ hoti tesu aññatarabhāvato. Imānīti antogadhāvadhāraṇavacanaṃ, imāni evāti attho. Buddhādīnaṃ paribhogayogyatāya kappiyacīvarāni.
现在,为了用限定词说明已经被排除的那些(不如法衣)的一部分,说了“吉祥草衣”等。其中,用吉祥草或其他类似的草做成的衣,是吉祥草衣。用嫩树皮等纤维做成的衣,是树皮纤维衣。用四角或三角木板做成的衣,是木板衣。用人发做成的毯,是人发毯。用牦牛尾毛、马尾毛等做成的,是毛毯。用蜘蛛丝织成的布,是蜘蛛丝布。兽皮,指鹿皮等任何一种皮。用猫头鹰的翅膀缝起来做成的衣,是猫头鹰翅膀衣。用白桦树皮等做成的树皮布,就是所谓蒂里达卡布。用很细的藤条纤维织成的,是藤布。用灯心草纤维做成的,是灯心草布。同样还有香蕉树布。用细竹篾做成的,是竹布。用“等”字还包括树皮衣等。这些是不如法的衣,因为它们是外道的旗帜。巴利
Idāni avadhāraṇena nivattitāni ekadesena dassetuṃ ‘‘kusacīra’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kusatiṇehi, aññehi vā tādisehi tiṇehi katacīvaraṃ kusacīraṃ. Potakīvākādīhi vākehi katacīvaraṃ vākacīraṃ. Catukkoṇehi, tikoṇehi vā phalakehi katacīvaraṃ phalakacīraṃ. Manussānaṃ kesehi katakambalaṃ kesakambalaṃ. Cāmarīvālaassavālādīhi kataṃ vālakambalaṃ. Makacitantūhi vāyito potthako. Cammanti migacammādi yaṃ kiñci cammaṃ. Ulūkapakkhehi ganthetvā katacīvaraṃ ulūkapakkhaṃ. Bhujatacādimayaṃ rukkhadussaṃ, tirīṭakanti attho. Sukhumatarāhi latāvākehi vāyitaṃ latādussaṃ. Erakavākehi kataṃ erakadussaṃ. Tathā kadalidussaṃ. Sukhumehi veḷuvilīvehi kataṃ veḷudussaṃ. Ādi-saddena vakkalādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Akappiyacīvarāni titthiyaddhajabhāvato.
依据八种论母,也就是依据《大品》379段所说的“以界施、以约定施”等八种衣的产生论母。世尊之所以建立“诸比丘,有这八种论母”等论母,是为了显示获得衣的范围。所谓论母,就是像母亲一样能产生衣。墓地衣:丢在墓地的布。店前衣:丢在店门口的布。路上衣:求功德的人从窗户扔到路上的弃布。垃圾堆衣:丢在垃圾堆的弃布。浴衣:洗澡用的布,巫医给人洗过头后,把它当作“晦气布”丢掉就走了。渡口衣:丢在沐浴渡口的碎布。火烧衣:被火烧过的地方,人们会把它丢掉。牛嚼衣等则是显而易见的,人们同样会丢掉它们。巴利
Aṭṭhannañca mātikānaṃ vasenāti ‘‘sīmāya deti, katikāya detī’’tiādinā (mahāva. 379) āgatānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ cīvaruppattimātikānaṃ vasena. Cīvarānaṃ paṭilābhakkhettadassanatthañhi bhagavatā ‘‘aṭṭhimā, bhikkhave, mātikā’’tiādinā mātikā ṭhapitā. Mātikāti hi mātaro cīvaruppattijanikāti. Sosānikanti susāne patitakaṃ. Pāpaṇikanti āpaṇadvāre patitakaṃ. Rathiyanti puññatthikehi vātapānantarena rathikāya chaḍḍitacoḷakaṃ. Saṅkārakūṭakanti saṅkāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍitacoḷakaṃ. Sinānanti nhānacoḷaṃ, yaṃ bhūtavejjehi sīsaṃ nhāpetvā ‘‘kāḷakaṇṇīcoḷaka’’nti chaḍḍetvā gacchanti. Titthanti titthacoḷakaṃ sinānatitthe chaḍḍitapilotikā. Aggidaḍḍhanti agginā daḍḍhappadesaṃ. Tañhi manussā chaḍḍenti. Gokhāyitakādīni pākaṭāneva. Tānipi hi manussā chaḍḍenti.
“升幢”的意思是:人们上船或者冲进战场时,把幢竿竖起来,而原本系在幢竿上的那件覆身衣,已经被他们丢掉了。巴利
Dhajaṃ ussāpetvāti nāvaṃ ārohantehi vā yuddhaṃ pavisantehi vā dhajayaṭṭhiṃ ussāpetvā tattha baddhaṃ pārutacīvaraṃ, tehi chaḍḍitanti adhippāyo.
“接受者比丘”是指接受居士所施衣的比丘。“约一个月”是指被称为衣月的那一个月期间。允许寻思,超过那个时间就不允许,这是本意。因为教法中的一切修行都是为了调伏渴爱。粪扫衣比丘只用半个月就做,因为他获得衣不依赖他人;而其他比丘因为依赖他人,所以被允许以一个月为限。这样,从半个月乃至……寻思知足,是因为寻思的时间有限。巴利
Sādakabhikkhunāti gahapaticīvarassa sādiyanabhikkhunā. Ekamāsamattanti cīvaramāsasaññitaṃ ekamāsamattaṃ. Vitakketuṃ vaṭṭati, na tato paranti adhippāyo. Sabbassāpi hi taṇhāniggahatthāya sāsane paṭipattīti. Paṃsukūliko addhamāseneva karotīti aparapaṭibaddhattā paṭilābhassa. Itarassa pana parapaṭibaddhattā māsamattaṃ anuññātaṃ. Iti māsaddha…pe… vitakkasantoso vitakkanassa parimitakālikattā.
有位长老想请那里的上座长老做自己的同伴,但因为恭敬,他只在村口说:“尊者,我要走了。”上座长老知道他的心意后,说:“贤友,我去。”上座长老为了不让这位比丘的寻思有可乘之机,一边提问,一边走进了村庄。“被大便所障碍”是指被大便逼迫。那时,因为忆念世尊修苦行的事迹,对如来生起了强烈的喜悦和欢愉之势,烦恼被镇伏,就在那时……证得了三果。巴利
Mahātheraṃ tattha attano sahāyaṃ icchantopi garugāravena gāmadvāraṃ ‘‘bhante gamissāmi’’ iccevamāha. Mahātheropissa ajjhāsayaṃ ñatvā ‘‘ahaṃ pāvuso gamissāmī’’ti āha. ‘‘Imassa bhikkhuno vitakkassa avasaro mā hotū’’ti pañhaṃ pucchamāno gāmaṃ pāvisi. Uccārapalibuddhoti uccārena pīḷito. Tadā bhagavato dukkarakiriyānussaraṇamukhena tathāgate uppannapītisomanassavegassa balavabhāvena kilesānaṃ vikkhambhitattā tasmiṃyeva…pe… tīṇi phalāni patto.
“我能在哪里得到呢?”连这样的念头,也是以利养为先导的,所以才说“不思惟”。至于“我将得到美好的、我将得到称心的”这类思惟,那还用说吗?那么,应当怎么说呢?他说“唯以业处为首而前往”,这就表明:为了袈裟,什么都不应当思惟。巴利
‘‘Kattha labhissāmī’’ti cintanāpi lābhāsāpubbikāti tathā ‘‘acintetvā’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘sundaraṃ labhissāmi, manāpaṃ labhissāmī’’ti evamādicintanāya kā nāma kathā. Kathaṃ pana vattabbanti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasīseneva gamana’’nti, tena cīvaraṃ paṭicca kiñcipi na cintetabbaṃ evāti dasseti.
不优雅的人甚至可能成为非理寻求的助缘,所以(世尊)说“带上举止优雅的比丘”。巴利
Apesalo appatirūpāyapi pariyesanāya paccayo bhaveyyāti ‘‘pesalaṃ bhikkhuṃ gahetvā’’ti vuttaṃ.
有人正把它拿来时:某个人知道“这些比丘正在四处寻找粪扫衣”,于是从墓地之类的地方把那块被丢弃的布拿来。巴利
Āhariyamānanti susānādīsu patitakaṃ vatthaṃ ‘‘ime bhikkhū paṃsukūlapariyesanaṃ carantī’’ti ñatvā kenaci purisena tato ānīyamānaṃ.
像这样,对已获得之物接受的人也是同样:只要不破坏因获得而生起的知足,就接受已得之物。所谓“仅以自己够用的量”,就是对所得到的粪扫衣布料,为了做成单层或双层衣,只取自己够用的分量;这个限定词排除了再往上多求的念头。巴利
Evaṃ laddhaṃ gaṇhantassāpīti evaṃ paṭilābhasantosaṃ akopetvāva laddhaṃ gaṇhantassāpi. Attano pahonakamattenevāti yathāladdhānaṃ paṃsukūlavatthānaṃ ekapaṭṭadupaṭṭānaṃ atthāya attano pahonakapamāṇeneva, avadhāraṇena uparipaccāsaṃ nivatteti.
在村里为了乞食而四处走动时,像次第乞食的人那样,按门户的顺序一家一家走,这叫作远离贪求,因为对衣服的贪求已经被远远地抛开了。巴利
Gāme bhikkhāya āhiṇḍantena sapadānacārinā viya dvārapaṭipāṭiyā caraṇaṃ loluppavivajjanaṃ nāma cīvaraloluppassa dūrasamussāritattā.
维持生命,就是让这个身体继续运转。巴利
Yāpetunti attabhāvaṃ pavattetuṃ.
不是适合洗涤的,而是适合用来洗东西的。巴利
Dhovanupagenāti dhovanayoggena.
树叶,就是芒果叶、阎浮叶之类的叶子。巴利
Paṇṇānīti ambajambādipaṇṇāni.
不令扰动:不令知足受到扰动。仅以够用的量:对于内衣等物,想要做什么,就按照刚好够做那件东西的量,取来所得的粗的细的等布料来做。巴利
Akopetvāti santosaṃ akopetvā . Pahonakanīhārenevāti antaravāsakādīsu yaṃ kātukāmo, tassa pahonakaniyāmeneva yathāladdhaṃ thūlasukhumādiṃ gahetvā karaṇaṃ.
所谓“只覆盖三个圆环的量”,意思是:下衣要遮住脐环和膝环,上衣要遮住喉环和膝环——像这样,只是做到遮住这三个圆环的程度。不过从实际含义来说,这正好就是前面所说的三衣中最低限度的尺寸。巴利
Timaṇḍalapaṭicchādanamattassevāti ‘‘nivāsanaṃ ce nābhimaṇḍalaṃ; jāṇumaṇḍalaṃ, itaraṃ ce galavāṭamaṇḍalaṃ, jāṇumaṇḍala’’nti evaṃ timaṇḍalapaṭicchādanamattasseva karaṇaṃ; taṃ pana atthato tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ heṭṭhimantena vuttaparimāṇameva hoti.
没有加以审查,就是没有审查。巴利
Avicāretvāti na vicāretvā.
在缝边的时候:指把布片拼起来缝的时候。七次:指缝七道线。巴利
Kusibandhanakāleti maṇḍalāni yojetvā sibbanakāle. Sattavāreti sattasibbanavāre.
以劫点为指示,对任何事物都不做改变,这就是劫知足。巴利
Kappabinduapadesena kassaci vikārassa akaraṇaṃ kappasantoso.
寒冷等的对治由义准而成立,所以为了说明受用袈裟的主要目的,才说“仅以遮蔽羞处为限度”。因此世尊说:“只是为了遮蔽羞处。”巴利
Sītapaṭighātādi atthāpattito sijjhatīti mukhyameva cīvaraparibhoge payojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘hirikopīnapaṭicchādanamattavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘yāvadeva hirikopīnapaṭicchādanattha’’nti (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.68; mahāni. 162).
可以这么做,但知足并不会因此动摇,因为资具和应供者未得。巴利
Vaṭṭati, na tāvatā santoso kuppati sambhārānaṃ, dakkhiṇeyyānañca alābhato.
安住在六和敬法上,意思是安住在与持戒的比丘们共同受用的状态中。巴利
Sāraṇīyadhamme ṭhatvāti sīlavantehi bhikkhūhi sādhāraṇato paribhoge ṭhatvā.
通过“如是”等语句,说明第一圣种中的粪扫衣支与三衣支,以及它们对那个圣种的助缘关系,从而表明:这些法互相令对方生起,也互相支撑。这个道理对后面的内容也同样适用。巴利
‘‘Itī’’tiādinā paṭhamassa ariyavaṃsassa paṃsukūlikaṅgatecīvarikaṅgānaṃ, tesañca tassa paccayataṃ dassento iti ime dhammā aññamaññassa samuṭṭhāpakā, upatthambhakā cāti dīpeti. Esa nayo ito paratopi.
对于“知足且称赞”这句话,存在四种情况。其中只有第四种情况是导师所称赞、所赞许的,大长老就是依据这一点而作了这样的开示。第一种:自己知足,却不称赞知足,比如那罗迦长老(详见《经集·那罗迦经》)。第二种:自己不知足,却称赞知足,比如释迦族的优波难陀(详见《波罗夷》515、527、532、537等段落)。第三种:自己不知足,也不称赞知足,比如拉鲁陀夷长老(详见《长老偈注》第二册·优陀夷长老偈注释)。第四种:自己知足,也称赞知足,比如大迦叶长老。巴利
‘‘Santuṭṭho hoti vaṇṇavādī’’ti ettha catukkoṭikaṃ sambhavati, tattha catutthoyeva pakkho satthārā vaṇṇito thomitoti mahātherena tathā desanā katā. Eko santuṭṭho hoti, santosassa vaṇṇaṃ na katheti seyyathāpi thero nālako (suttanipāte nālakasutte vitthāro) eko na santuṭṭho hoti, santosassa vaṇṇavādī seyyathāpi upanando sakyaputto (pārā. 515, 527, 532, 537 vākyakhandhesu vitthāro). Eko neva santuṭṭho hoti, na santosassa vaṇṇaṃ katheti. Seyyathāpi thero lāḷudāyī (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.udāyittheragāthāvaṇṇanā) eko santuṭṭho ceva hoti, santosassa ca vaṇṇavādī seyyathāpi thero mahākassapo.
“非理求”就是说不合理的寻求。因此说“不相应”,也就是对安住在教法中的人来说,是不相应、不相称、不合适的。“作欺诳等”是指:为了得到袈裟等资具,对他人装模作样、故作姿态来欺骗和令人惊叹。“怖畏”是指被渴爱的恐惧所逼,一层又一层地恐惧。“遍怖畏”是指从四面八方都感到恐惧。就像一切身业和语业都只是为了这个目的才生起一样,他从一切方面都感到恐惧。所谓“所染着”就是被染着,这里指的是以贪欲为特征的那种。“没有这种所染着”,所以说“无所染着……无有贪着”。“迷执”是指因渴爱而迷惑,或者指对那(五蕴)聚合的执取。“未入”是指还没有到达。“不陷”是指没有被压住。“不被缠缚”是指没有被渴爱的覆盖所遮蔽。“见其过患”是指见到现世和来世的过患。通过(这样的理解)能从染着的受用中出离,这就叫“出离”,也就是知足。能了知这一点,就叫“出离慧”。因此说“只是……了知地了知”。巴利
Anesananti ayuttaṃ esanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘appatirūpa’’nti, sāsane ṭhitānaṃ na patirūpaṃ asāruppaṃ ayogyaṃ. Kohaññaṃ karontoti cīvaruppādanimittaṃ paresaṃ kuhanaṃ vimhāpanaṃ karonto. Uttasatīti taṇhāsantāsena uparūpari tasati. Paritasatīti parito tasati. Yathā sabbe kāyavacīpayogā tadatthā eva jāyanti, evaṃ sabbabhāgehi tasati. Gadhitaṃ vuccati gaddho, so cettha abhijjhālakkhaṇo adhippeto. Gadhitaṃ etassa natthīti agadhitoti āha ‘‘agadhito…pe… lobhagiddho’’ti. Mucchanti taṇhāvasena muyhanaṃ, tassa vā samussayaṃ adhigataṃ. Anāpanno anupagato. Anotthatoti anajjhotthato. Apariyonaddhoti taṇhāchadanena acchādito. Ādīnavaṃ passamānoti diṭṭhadhammikaṃ, samparāyikañca dosaṃ passanto. Gadhitaparibhogato nissarati etenāti nissaraṇaṃ, idamatthikatā, taṃ pajānātīti nissaraṇapañño. Tenāha ‘‘yāvadeva…pe… pajānanto’’ti.
不抬高自己:就是既不抬高自己,也不举扬自己,不把自己放到更高的位置上。“我……”等说法,是展示抬高自己的方式。不贬低他人:就是不轻视别人,不把别人看低。对于袈裟的知足:是指在前面所说的那二十种袈裟知足。在这里,通过把握所说的知足,其实也已经把握了为了袈裟而做不如法寻求、犯戒等情形,因为知足存在时这些就存在,知足不存在时这些就不存在。但赞叹、抬高自己、贬低他人这些并没有被一并把握,所以才说了“或者在赞叹等上面”这个可选项。而这里“贤善”等,是显示那些能成就上述知足等品质的法。其中,“贤善”显示生起这些法的智慧,“不懒惰”显示策励精进的活力,“正知”显示神变慧,“正念”显示在其中不混乱地运作。巴利
Nevattānukkaṃsetīti attānaṃ neva ukkaṃseti na ukkhipati na ukkaṭṭhato dahati. ‘‘Aha’’ntiādi ukkaṃsanākāradassanaṃ. Na vambhetīti na hīḷayati nihīnato na dahati. Tasmiṃ cīvarasantoseti tasmiṃ yathāvutte vīsatividhe cīvarasantose . Kāmañcettha vuttappakārasantosaggahaṇena cīvarahetu anesanāpajjanādipi gahitameva tasmiṃ sati tassa bhāvato, asati ca abhāvato, vaṇṇavāditānattukkaṃsanā paravambhanāni pana gahitāni na hontīti ‘‘vaṇṇavāditādīsu vā’’ti vikappo vutto. Ettha ca ‘‘dakkho’’tiādi yesaṃ dhammānaṃ vasenassa yathāvuttasantosādi ijjhati, taṃ dassanaṃ. Tattha ‘‘dakkho’’ti iminā tesaṃ samuṭṭhāpanapaññaṃ dasseti, ‘‘analaso’’ti iminā paggaṇhanavīriyaṃ, ‘‘sampajāno’’ti iminā pāṭihāriyapaññaṃ ‘‘paṭissato’’ti iminā tattha asammosavuttiṃ dasseti.
应当从分类上了解团食。所谓团食田,就是团食产生的地方。应当从分类上了解对团食的知足。在这里,药物也属于团食这一类。因为酥等也是要拿来受用的。巴利
Piṇḍapāto jānitabboti pabhedato piṇḍapāto jānitabbo. Piṇḍapātakkhettanti piṇḍapātassa uppattiṭṭhānaṃ. Piṇḍapātasantoso jānitabboti piṇḍapāte santoso pabhedato jānitabbo. Idha bhesajjampi piṇḍapātagatikameva. Āharitabbato hi sappiādīnampi gahaṇaṃ kataṃ.
团食田,就是团食产生的地方。像田地一样的田地。因为在这里生起,或者通过它而生起,所以叫生起处。比丘的团食,确实可以从僧团产生,也可以透过指定等方式产生。其中,应当布施给整个僧团的饭食,叫僧团食。指定几位比丘之后应当布施的饭食,叫指定食。邀请之后应当布施的饭食,叫邀请食。以分发筹签的方式应当布施的饭食,叫筹食。在半个月中的某一天应当布施的饭食,叫半月食。在布萨日应当布施的饭食,叫布萨日食。在布萨日次日应当布施的饭食,叫次日食。应当布施给客比丘的饭食,叫客食。放在常设之家后应当布施的饭食,叫常设食。指定某间小屋而应当布施的饭食,叫小屋食。由村民等以轮流方式应当布施的饭食,叫轮流食。指定某座精舍而应当布施的饭食,叫精舍食。其余的种类,一看名称就明白。巴利
Piṇḍapātakkhettaṃ piṇḍapātassa uppattiṭṭhānaṃ. Khettaṃ viya khettaṃ. Uppajjati ettha, etenāti ca uppattiṭṭhānaṃ. Saṅghato vā hi bhikkhuno piṇḍapāto uppajjati uddesādivasena vā. Tattha sakalassa saṅghassa dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ saṅghabhattaṃ. Katipaye bhikkhū uddisitvā uddesena dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ uddesabhattaṃ. Nimantetvā dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ nimantanaṃ. Salākadānavasena dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ salākabhattaṃ. Ekasmiṃ pakkhe ekadivasaṃ dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ pakkhikaṃ. Uposathe dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ uposathikaṃ. Pāṭipadadivase dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ pāṭipadikaṃ. Āgantukānaṃ dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ āgantukabhattaṃ. Dhuragehe eva ṭhapetvā dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ dhurabhattaṃ. Kuṭiṃ uddissa dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ kuṭibhattaṃ. Gāmavāsīādīhi vārena dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ vārabhattaṃ. Vihāraṃ uddissa dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ vihārabhattaṃ. Sesāni pākaṭāneva.
他心里寻思:“我今天到底该去哪里乞食呢?”当长老说“我们去哪里乞食”时,回答“尊者,去某个村子”,这当然是可以这样回答的。但针对那个“思量之后”所说的心,才说“这样思量之后”。从那时起,就是从站在寻思处、开始寻思的那个时候起。“从那以后如果再继续寻思,就会从圣种中堕落”——这句话应当根据三种圣种者来理解,不是只针对独自乞食的人。因为一切圣种者都只被允许寻思一次,不能再往后。成为外者,就是处在圣种状态之外。这种寻思上的知足,不会因为业处作意而受扰乱,反而会变得清净。从这里往后各项也是同样的道理。因此说“应当以业处为首要而行”。巴利
Vitakketi ‘‘kattha nu kho ahaṃ ajja piṇḍāya carissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Kattha piṇḍāya carissāmā’’ti therena vutte ‘‘asukagāme bhante’’ti kāmametaṃ paṭivacanadānaṃ , yena pana cittena ‘‘cintetvā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ettakaṃ cintetvā’’ti. Tato paṭṭhāyāti vitakkamāḷake ṭhatvā vitakkitakālato paṭṭhāya. ‘‘Tato paraṃ vitakkento ariyavaṃsā cuto hotī’’ti idaṃ tiṇṇampi ariyavaṃsikānaṃ vasena gahetabbaṃ, na ekacārikasseva. Sabbopi hi ariyavaṃsiko ekavārameva vitakketuṃ labhati, na tato paraṃ. Paribāhiroti ariyavaṃsikabhāvato bahibhūto. Svāyaṃ vitakkasantoso kammaṭṭhānamanasikārena na kuppati, visujjhati ca. Ito paresupi eseva nayo. Tenevāha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasīsena gantabba’’nti.
所谓“应当取”一语中的 eva 一词,是用于非常规位置。应当这样连接理解:只应取仅够维持生存之量。巴利
Gahetabbamevāti aṭṭhānappayutto eva-saddo. Yāpanamattameva gahetabbanti yojetabbaṃ.
这里说的“在此”,是指在接受团食这件事上。“少”是指比维持自己所需的量还少。为了让施主心生欢喜,应当取用。所谓“依照定量”,就是按照维持自己所需的量来取用少量。为了说明“应当依照定量取用”的理由,才说了“在接受中”等话。“污损”就是破坏、去除。“摧毁”就是以不恰当的使用而毁坏。“教法”就是导师的教诫。不遵行,就是不实践。巴利
Etthāti etasmiṃ piṇḍapātapaṭiggahaṇe. Appanti attano yāpanapamāṇatopi appaṃ. Gahetabbaṃ dāyakassa cittārādhanatthaṃ. Pamāṇenevāti attano yāpanappamāṇeneva appaṃ gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Pamāṇena gahetabba’’nti ettha kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭiggahaṇasmiñhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Makkhetīti viddhaṃseti apaneti. Vinipātetīti vināseti aṭṭhānaviniyogena. Sāsananti satthu sāsanaṃ anusiṭṭhiṃ. Na karoti nappaṭipajjati.
就像次第乞食的修行者那样,按门户的先后顺序而行,这就是远离贪求的知足,所以说“应当按门户的先后顺序而行”。巴利
Sapadānacārino viya dvārapaṭipāṭiyā caraṇaṃ loluppavivajjanasantosoti āha ‘‘dvārapaṭipāṭiyā gantabba’’nti.
Harāpetvāti即去掉多余的。巴利
Harāpetvāti adhikaṃ apanetvā.
从对食物的贪染中出离,因此称为“出离”。为了消除饥饿而说的这番话,而维持身体等目的,则是从事理上引申出来的。所以说“由于饥饿……乃至……称为知足”。巴利
Āhāragedhato nissarati etenāti nissaraṇaṃ. Jighacchāya paṭivinodanatthaṃ kathā, kāyassaṭhitiādipayojanaṃ pana atthāpattito āgataṃ evāti āha ‘‘jighacchāya…pe… santoso nāmā’’ti.
把食物收存起来,即使是在当天,也不得受用,这是这里的意思。至于其他情况,则已经被这条学处本身禁止了。所谓“安住在可忆念之法中”,是指安住在与持戒的比丘们共同分享受用的状态中。巴利
Nidahitvā na paribhuñjitabbaṃ tadahupīti adhippāyo. Itaratthā pana sikkhāpadeneva vāritaṃ. Sāraṇīyadhamme ṭhitenāti sīlavantehi bhikkhūhi sādhāraṇabhogibhāve ṭhitena.
所谓“坐卧具”,就是躺卧的地方和坐的地方。无论在哪里,比如在床上等地方,或在精舍等地方躺下,那就是“卧具”;无论在哪里,比如在椅子上等地方坐下,那就是“坐具”。把这两者合在一起,就叫做“坐卧具”。因此才说“床”等等。其中,床是有脚架的那种床,椅子也是这样。床褥和椅褥是两种褥子。精舍是用围墙围起来的整个住处。有人说是“长口殿”。半檐殿就是长形殿。有人说是“单面有顶的坐卧具”。殿是方形殿。有人说是“纵长的方形殿”。楼阁是平顶殿。窟是纯粹的山洞。洞是有门闩的洞穴。垒是墙壁很厚、不用椽子而直接用砖盖顶的房子。也有人说是“像望楼那样建造的”。阁是单尖顶、多角的一种特殊居所。有人说是“圆形建造的坐卧具”。巴利
Senāsanenāti sayanena, āsanena ca. Yattha yattha hi mañcādike, vihārādike ca seti, taṃ senaṃ. Yattha yattha pīṭhādike āsati, taṃ āsanaṃ. Tadubhayaṃ ekato katvā ‘‘senāsana’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘mañco’’tiādi. Tattha mañco masārakādi, tathā pīṭhaṃ. Mañcabhisi, pīṭhabhisīti duvidhā bhisi. Vihāro pākāraparicchinno sakalo āvāso. ‘‘Dīghamukhapāsādo’’ti keci. Aḍḍhayogoti dīghapāsādo. ‘‘Ekapassacchadanakasenāsana’’nti keci. Pāsādoti caturassapāsādo. ‘‘Āyatacaturassapāsādo’’ti keci. Hammiyaṃ muṇḍacchadanapāsādo. Guhāti kevalā pabbataguhā. Leṇaṃ dvārabandhaṃ. Aṭṭo bahalabhittikaṃ gehaṃ, yassa gopānasiyo aggahetvā iṭṭhakāhi eva chadanaṃ hoti. ‘‘Aṭṭālakākārena kariyatī’’tipi vadanti. Māḷo ekakūṭasaṅgahito anekakoṇo patissayaviseso ‘‘vaṭṭākārena katasenāsana’’nti keci.
关于团食,应当依照团食中所说的方式来了知,也就是像“行者比丘心里想‘今天我要住在哪里’”这样等等的说法,都要随其相应按照团食部分所讲的方式来了知。还有“从那之后如果再继续思惟,就会从圣种退失,成为圣种之外的人”,以及“寻找坐卧处时,也不该想‘我能在哪里得到呢’,而应该以业处为首要,直接前往”等等,这一切也都依照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Piṇḍapāte vuttanayenevāti ‘‘sādako bhikkhu ‘ajja kattha vasissāmī’ti vitakketī’’tiādinā yathārahaṃ piṇḍapāte vuttanayena veditabbā, ‘‘tato paraṃ vitakkento ariyavaṃsā cuto hoti paribāhiro’’ti, ‘‘senāsanaṃ gavesantenāpi’kuhiṃ labhissāmī’ti acintetvā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva gantabba’’nti ca evamādi sabbaṃ purimanayeneva.
为什么这里大长老在开示资具知足时,没有提到病缘药知足呢?为了说明不该这样理解,他说:“然而病缘药也已经包含在团食里了。”他的意思是,两者在可以取用这一点上是相同的。如果真是这样,那是不是也应该像团食那样,把寻思知足等十五种知足都算进去呢?为了说明并非如此,他说了“在那处”等话。这里难道不是只有十二头陀支被分别运用,而常坐不卧支在任何地方都没有被分别运用吗?所以他说:“常坐不卧支属于乐修习圣种。”为了说明这个含义也早已见于注释书中,他引用了“尊者也有此说”等话。巴利
Kasmā panettha paccayasantosaṃ dassentena mahātherena gilānapaccayasantoso na gahitoti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbanti dassento ‘‘gilānapaccayo pana piṇḍapāte eva paviṭṭho’’ti āha, āharitabbatāsāmaññenāti adhippāyo. Yadi evaṃ tattha piṇḍapāte viya vitakkasantosādayopi pannarasa santosā icchitabbāti? Noti dassento āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Nanu cettha dvādaseva dhutaṅgāni viniyogaṃ gatāni, ekaṃ pana nesajjikaṅgaṃ na katthaci viniyuttanti āha ‘‘nesajjikaṅgaṃ bhāvanārāmaariyavaṃsaṃ bhajatī’’ti. Ayañca attho aṭṭhakathāruḷho evāti dassento ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādimāha.
“就像铺开大地一样”等等,是为了显示圣种开示极其难行,也显示这个开示所涉范围广大。因为这种开示在为了证得圣道而详细展开时,是以成千种方式庄严的,就像在《心生起品》里那样;而这里讲的乐修习圣种,在为了证得圣道而详细展开时也是如此,所以说“以千种方式庄严……开始开示”。由于摧破对立而直接面对,所以有欢喜、安住、乐园,也就是“安住”的意思,因此说“欢喜就是它的意思”。复合词也可以依不同的格构成有财释,比如“胸毛”“颈黑”,所以说“以断为乐园的人,就叫断乐园”。或者从应当安住的角度来说,断就是他的乐园,这样就叫断乐园——在这里应当知道复合词是这样组合理解的。通过“正在断除时感到快乐”这句话,显示了断乐园这个词的具格义和持业释复合词。由于说了“正在修习时感到快乐”,乐修习这个词在这里也应当以同样的道理来理解。巴利
‘‘Pathaviṃpattharamāno viyā’’tiādi ariyavaṃsadesanāya sudukkarabhāvadassanaṃ mahāvisayatāya tassā desanāya. Yasmā nayasahassapaṭimaṇḍitā hoti ariyamaggādhigamāya vitthārato pavattiyamānā desanā yathā taṃ cittuppādakaṇḍe, ayañca bhāvanārāmaariyavaṃsakathā ariyamaggādhigamāya vitthārato pavattiyamānā evaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sahassanayappaṭimaṇḍitaṃ…pe… desanaṃ ārabhī’’ti. Paṭipakkhavidhamanato abhimukhabhāvena ramaṇaṃ āramaṇaṃ ārāmoti āha ‘‘abhiratīti attho’’ti. Byadhikaraṇānampi padānaṃ vasena bhavati bāhiratthasamāso yathā ‘‘urasilomo, kaṇṭhekāḷoti āha ‘‘pahāne ārāmo assāti pahānārāmo’’ti. Āramitabbaṭṭhena vā ārāmo, pahānaṃ ārāmo assāti pahānārāmoti evamettha samāsayojanā veditabbā. ‘‘Pajahanto ramatī’’ti etena pahānārāmasaddānaṃ kattusādhanataṃ, kammadhārayasamāsañca dasseti. ‘‘Bhāvento ramatī’’ti vuttattā bhāvanārāmoti etthāpi eseva nayo.
虽然因为适合修习而说“常坐不卧支属于乐修习圣种”,但依常坐不卧支来说,常坐不卧的比丘在某些犯戒情况中是无犯的;为了涵盖这一点,就说了“十三头陀支”,并且因为主张“涉及律的地方应立足于重处”,从不舍弃减损的修行角度来说,修行确实只属于立足于律的人,所以说“十三……中略……就已宣说”。诚然,在经藏和阿毗达摩藏中,各处也都有戒论;然而,当那些能使戒清净的功德被宣说时,正如以戒论之广而宣说了律藏,同样以修习论之广,经藏和阿毗达摩藏也由第四圣种而宣说了,所以说“由乐修习者,其余两藏也已宣说”。“他修习出离而欢喜”——因为这里的教说是以出离句为开头展开的,或者因为一切止、观、道法都各自从对立面出离而称为出离,而这些在此都有出现,所以这段文句称为“出离品”,因此说“应以出离品解说”。所以注释书中说:“一切善法都可称为出离。”以《十上经》的方式,就是以《十上经》的法,或者说是依《十上经》中所说的道理。其余两者也是同样的道理。巴利
Kāmaṃ ‘‘nesajjikaṅgaṃ bhāvanārāmaariyavaṃsaṃ bhajatī’’ti vuttaṃ bhāvanānuyogassa anucchavikattā, nesajjikaṅgavasena pana nesajjikassa bhikkhuno ekaccāhi āpattīhi anāpattibhāvoti tampi saṅgaṇhanto ‘‘terasannaṃ dhutaṅgāna’’nti vatvā ‘‘vinayaṃ patvā garuke ṭhātabba’’nti icchitattā sallekhassa apariccajanavasena paṭipatti nāma vinaye ṭhitassevāti āha ‘‘terasannaṃ…pe… kathitaṃ hotī’’ti. Kāmaṃ suttābhidhammapiṭakesupi (dī. ni. 1.7.194; vibha. 508) tattha tattha sīlakathā āgatā eva, yehi pana guṇehi sīlassa vodānaṃ hoti, tesu kathitesu yathā sīlakathābāhullaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ kathitaṃ hoti, evaṃ bhāvanākathābāhullaṃ suttantapiṭakaṃ, abhidhammapiṭakañca catutthena ariyavaṃsena kathitameva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhāvanārāmena avasesaṃ piṭakadvayaṃ kathitaṃ hotī’’ti. ‘‘So nekkhammaṃ bhāvento ramatī’’ti nekkhammapadaṃ ādiṃ katvā tattha desanāya pavattattā, sabbesampi vā samathavipassanāmaggadhammānaṃ yathāsakaṃpaṭipakkhato nikkhamanena nekkhammasaññitānaṃ tattha āgatattā so pāṭho ‘‘nekkhammapāḷī’’ti vuccatīti āha ‘‘nekkhammapāḷiyā kathetabbo’’ti. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sabbepi kusalā dhammā nekkhammanti pavuccare’’ti (itivu. aṭṭha. 109). Dasuttarasuttanta pariyāyenāti dasuttarasuttantadhammena, dasuttarasuttante (dī. ni. 3.350) āgatanayenāti vā attho. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.
“他”指的是精勤修习觉醒的比丘。“出离”是指因为从欲乐中出离出来,所以被称为出离的初禅近行。这里特指初禅的前分修习,就像《分别论》(分别论508, 538)中“他在世间断除了贪欲”等所说的那样。因此在“无嗔”等词语中,也应该同样理解其含义。这里如果还有什么需要说明的,应当依照《梵网经疏》中所说的方式来理解。因为这里的开示是依有忧恼的八种等至、十八种大观以及四种圣道而展开的。巴利
Soti jāgariyaṃ anuyutto bhikkhu. Nekkhammanti kāmehi nikkhantabhāvato nekkhammasaññitaṃ paṭhamajjhānūpacāraṃ. ‘‘So abhijjhaṃ loke pahāyā’’tiādinā (vibha. 508, 538) āgatā paṭhamajjhānassa pubbabhāgabhāvanāti idhādhippetā , tasmā ‘‘abyāpāda’’ntiādīsupi evameva attho veditabbo. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ brahmajālaṭīkāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Saupāyāsānañhi aṭṭhannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ, aṭṭhārasannaṃ mahāvipassanānaṃ, catunnaṃ ariyamaggānañca vasenettha desanā pavattāti.
“修习一法而欢喜,断除一法而欢喜”这句话,并不是按照《十上经》里那种表述方式说的;不过在《十上经》里,教导是这么说的:“有一法应当修习,有一法应当断除。”尽管如此,因为从意义上并没有差别,所以在《无碍解道》的“出离品”中,就按照那里出现的表述方式说:“修习一法而欢喜,断除一法而欢喜。”其余的段落也是同样的道理。而且,这个“圣种”的教导,本来是大师所安立的,是法将舍利弗长老以结集的方式,把大师所说的教导汇集到这里的。所以,为了在《大圣种经》中按照大师教导的表述方式来作总结,就说:“比丘们,比丘这样就是乐于修习的人。”从这以后,在《念处篇》和《阿毗达摩论说篇》等当中,也是同样的道理。这里虽然只按身随观简略地作了连接,但应当按二十一个方面详细地理解其连接。在“无常”等解释中,需要说明的内容,应当依照《清净道论注》中所说的方式来理解。巴利
‘‘Ekaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvento ramati, ekaṃ dhammaṃ pajahanto ramatī’’ti ca na idaṃ dasuttarasutte āgataniyāmena vuttaṃ, tattha pana ‘‘eko dhammo bhāvetabbo, eko dhammo pahātabbo’’ti (dī. ni. 3.351) ca desanā āgatā. Evaṃ santepi yasmā atthato bhedo natthi, tasmā paṭisambhidāmagge nekkhammapāḷiyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.24, 3.41) āgatanīhāreneva ‘‘ekaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvento ramati, ekaṃ dhammaṃ pajahanto ramatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sesavāresupi. Yasmā cāyaṃ ariyavaṃsadesanā nāma satthu paññattāva satthārā hi desitaṃ desanaṃ āyasmā dhammasenāpati sāriputtatthero saṅgāyanavasena idhānesi , tasmā mahāariyavaṃsasutte satthudesanānīhārena nigamanaṃ dassento ‘‘evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhāvanārāmo hotī’’ti āha. Eseva nayo ito paresu satipaṭṭhānapariyāyaabhidhammaniddesapariyāyesupi. Kāmañcettha kāyānupassanāvaseneva saṅkhipitvā yojanā katā, ekavīsatiyā pana ṭhānānaṃ vasena vitthārato yojanā veditabbā. ‘‘Aniccato’’ (visuddhi. ṭī. 2.698) tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāsu vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
310 310. 在这里,以防护等成就方式而精勤,并且凭借这些,所以称为勤。最上精进,就是最殊胜的精进,因为它能成就最殊胜之义。防护者的已生精进:为了使贪欲等不生起,以正念现前,在眼等根门关闭而不懈怠者所生起的精进。断除者:指正在去除。已生精进:指为成就那断除而转起的精进。修习者的已生精进:在这里也是同样的道理。定相:就是定本身。因为先前已生起的定,是后来生起的定得以分离的因,所以说为定相。巴利
310. Saṃvarādīnaṃ sādhanavasena padahati ettha, etehīti ca padhānāni. Uttamavīriyānīti seṭṭhavīriyāni visiṭṭhassa atthassa sādhanato. Saṃvarantassa uppannavīriyanti yathā abhijjhādayo na uppajjanti, evaṃ satiyā upaṭṭhāpane cakkhādīnaṃ pidahane analasassa uppannavīriyaṃ. Pajahantassāti vinodentassa. Uppannavīriyanti tasseva pajahanassa sādhanavasena pavattavīriyaṃ. Bhāventassa uppannavīriyanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Samādhinimittanti samādhi eva. Purimuppannasamādhi hi parato uppajjanakasamādhipavivekassa kāraṇaṃ hotīti ‘‘samādhinimitta’’nti vuttaṃ.
从远离依处来说,是指从蕴依等诸依中远离、脱离。依于彼,是指以道证得彼涅槃为因。贪等在此处离染,或者通过它而离染,所以叫离染。灭也应该这样理解。因为这里觉支是就混合的方式来说的,所以说了依所缘或依应证得。其中,依应证得是指以随顺趋向涅槃的状态。转向舍弃,是指以舍弃的方式转向,也就是以彻底舍离的方式和以投入的方式而转向的习性。因此说了两种舍弃等。所谓蕴的彻底舍弃,是指以断除与蕴相应的烦恼的方式。以何种方式,观智断除烦恼,就以何种方式值得说它断除那与彼相俱的、彼所缘的诸蕴,因此说观智……乃至……彻底舍弃。因为观智达到出起趋向的状态,以倾向、倾斜、偏向的方式,决定性地获得值得说它投入涅槃,而道以正断的方式彻底舍弃烦恼和诸蕴,所以依次以观智和道的方式,也应了知投入、彻底舍弃、舍弃。为了舍弃,是指为了彻底舍离的舍弃和为了投入的舍弃。转向,是指成熟、消化。那转向,因为达到出起趋向的状态和达到圣道的状态而被认可,所以说观智达到观智的状态和道的状态。在剩余诸句中,是指在法觉支等剩余觉支的范畴中。巴利
Upadhivivekattāti khandhūpadhiādiupadhīhi vivittattā vinissaṭattā. Taṃ āgammāti taṃ nibbānaṃ maggena adhigamahetu. Rāgādayo virajjanti ettha, etenāti vā virāgo. Evaṃ nirodhopi daṭṭhabbo. Yasmā idha bojjhaṅgā missakavasena icchitā, tasmā ‘‘ārammaṇavasena adhigantabbavasena vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha adhigantabbavasenāti taṃninnatāvasena. Vossaggapariṇāminti vossajjanavasena pariṇāmitaṃ pariccajanavasena ceva pakkhandanavasena ca pariṇamanasīlaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘dve vossaggā’’tiādi. Khandhānaṃ pariccajanaṃ nāma tappaṭibaddhakilesappahānavasenāti yenākārena vipassanā kilese pajahati, tenevākārena taṃnimittake, khandhe ca ‘‘pajahatī’’ti vattabbataṃ arahatīti āha ‘‘vipassanā…pe… pariccajatī’’ti. Yasmā vipassanā vuṭṭhānagāminibhāvaṃ pāpuṇantī ninnapoṇapabbhārabhāvena ekaṃsato nibbānaṃ ‘‘pakkhandatī’’ti vattabbataṃ labhati, maggo ca samucchedavasena kilese, khandhe ca pariccajati, tasmā yathākkamaṃ vipassanāmaggānaṃ vasena pakkhandanapariccāgavossaggāpi veditabbā. Vossaggatthāyāti pariccāgavossaggatthāya ceva pakkhandanavossaggatthāya ca. Pariṇamatīti paripaccati. Taṃ pariṇamanaṃ vuṭṭhānagāminibhāvappattiyā ceva ariyamaggabhāvappattiyā ca icchitanti āha ‘‘vipassanābhāvañceva maggabhāvañca pāpuṇātī’’ti. Sesapadesūti ‘‘dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādīsu sesasambojjhaṅgakoṭṭhāsesu.
所谓“好的”,是因为它能通过镇伏不善的盖等恶法、摧破贪欲,而带来纯粹的利益,又极为难得,所以称为“好”、称为“美妙”。确实没有别的定相这样难得,也没有别的定相能直接对治贪欲。关于“守护”:这里的守护,是指证得定之后,为了让定不退失而那样去修习;而这种修习又是通过摧破它的对立面来进行的,所以说“定……”等。“骨想等”,就是指骨禅那等,这是以“想”的名称来说禅那。巴利
Bhaddakanti abhaddakānaṃ nīvaraṇādipāpadhammānaṃ vikkhambhanena rāgavidhamanena ekantahitattā, dullabhattā ca bhaddakaṃ sundaraṃ. Na hi aññaṃ samādhinimittaṃ evaṃdullabhaṃ, rāgassa ca ujuvipaccanīkabhūtaṃ atthi. Anurakkhatīti ettha anurakkhanā nāma adhigatasamādhito yathā na parihāni hoti, evaṃ paṭipatti, sā pana tappaṭipakkhavidhamanenāti āha ‘‘samādhī’’tiādi. Aṭṭhikasaññādikāti aṭṭhikajjhānādikā. Saññāsīsena hi jhānaṃ vadati.
以一次通达而于四谛法之智:是指在四圣谛中,以一次现观的方式生起的智,也就是道智的意思。由于含摄于四谛之故,对含摄于四谛之中的灭法——涅槃的智,就称之为果智。因为紧接道之后无间生起的果,是随顺于道而转起的,它是通过寂止与断除那些属于集方面的诸法而转起,因此在灭谛中,对于道的证悟现观,果智也随顺其而转起,所以说“于法之智”就是指果智本身,而不是指任何一种以涅槃为所缘的智。因此说了“如所说”等话。在这里,道慧因为通达四圣谛之法,固然可以称为“法智”;但果慧为什么也能称为“法智”呢?这个疑问已经被澄清了:因为它是以灭法为所缘而转起的。这两种慧,都因为不依赖他人、是自身亲证,并且对圣谛之法从作用和所缘两方面而转起,所以应当知道它们都是“法智”。因为在圣谛中,“法”这个词,是指它们不颠倒的自性,或者指最殊胜的有为法——圣道,以及它的果法。与这些相应的慧,就是“法智”。巴利
Ekapaṭivedhavasena catusaccadhamme ñāṇanti catūsu ariyasaccesu ekābhisamayavasena pavattañāṇaṃ, maggañāṇanti attho. Catusaccantogadhattā catusaccabbhantare nirodhadhamme nibbāne ñāṇaṃ, tena phalañāṇaṃ vadati. Yasmā maggānantarassa phalassa maggānuguṇā pavatti, yato taṃsamudayapakkhiyesu dhammesu paṭippassaddhippahānavasena pavattati, tasmā nirodhasaccepi yo maggassa sacchikiriyābhisamayo, tadanuguṇā pavattīti phalañāṇasseva dhamme ñāṇatā vuttā, na yassa kassaci nibbānārammaṇassa ñāṇassa . Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi. Ettha ca maggapaññā tāva catusaccadhammassa paṭivijjhanato dhammeñāṇaṃ nāma hotu, phalapaññā pana kathanti codanā sodhitā hoti nirodhadhammaṃ ārabbha pavattanato. Duvidhāpi hi paññā aparappaccayatāya attapaccakkhato ariyasaccadhamme kiccato ca ārammaṇato ca pavattattā ‘‘dhammeñāṇa’’nti veditabbā. Ariyasaccesu hi ayaṃ dhamma-saddo tesaṃ aviparītasabhāvattā, saṅkhatappavaro vā ariyamaggo, tassa ca phaladhammo. Tattha paññā taṃsahagatā dhammeñāṇaṃ.
“随智”就是随行的智。“现前见之后”是指用道智现前通达四谛之后。“如同现在”是说:就像现在这五取蕴是苦谛一样,过去、未来的五取蕴也同样是苦谛,这是从相似的角度来说的。集谛和道谛也是同样的道理。“就是这”是表示决定。不过在灭谛上,并没有相似可言,因为它是恒常的,而且是单一自性的。这样,对于那个智的随行,也就是对于那个法智,以“在过去也是如此”等方式随行、跟随,这就是“随智”。这是“随智”这句话的义理连接。“他这样说”等,是用原典来解释前面所说的义理。“他”是指证得法智而安住的比丘。“以此法”:这个“法”因为以法为行境,依行境的称呼而说为“法”,也就是道智;或者这里的工具格当作受格来理解,即以此已了知的法;意思是了知这四圣谛法之后而安住的道智。“以所见”:指以照见而见谛法之后而安住。“以所得”:指证得诸谛之后而安住。“以所了知”:指了知诸谛之后而安住。“以所通达”:指通达四圣谛法之后而安住——这是《分别论注》中解说的义理。不过这两种——道智和果智——都是法智。而作为省察的根源和导引之因,由这两种“以此法”来说,并非说不通。同样,因为了知四圣谛法,或者因为与称为道果的法在证谛上相应,所以有导引;因此,“以此法”是指以这个法作为智的所缘,或者以与智相应,而说“以所了知”,这也并非说不通。“于过去未来引导方法”:于过去和未来引导、携带、推动方法。然而这不是道智的作用,而是省察智的作用;不过世尊说道智于过去未来如同引导方法,因为道是根本。已修习道的人,就会有所谓的省察。这引导方法并不是生起别的智,而只是智本身的运作方式。巴利
Anvayeñāṇanti anugamanañāṇaṃ. Paccakkhato disvāti cattāri saccāni maggañāṇena paccakkhato paṭivijjhitvā. Yathā idānīti yathā etarahi pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ, evaṃ atītepi anāgatepi pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccamevāti ca sarikkhaṭṭhena vuttaṃ. Esa nayo samudayasacce, maggasacce ca. Ayamevāti avadhāraṇe. Nirodhasacce pana sarikkhaṭṭho natthi tassa niccattā, ekasabhāvattā ca. Evaṃ tassa ñāṇassa anugatiyaṃ ñāṇanti tassa dhammeñāṇassa ‘‘evaṃ atītepī’’tiādinā anugatiyaṃ anugamane anvaye ñāṇaṃ. Idaṃ anvaye ñāṇanti yojanā. ‘‘Tenāhā’’tiādinā yathāvuttamatthaṃ pāḷiyā vibhāveti. Soti dhammañāṇaṃ patvā ṭhito bhikkhu. Iminā dhammenāti dhammagocarattā gocaravohārena ‘‘dhammo’’ti vuttenamaggañāṇena, upayogatthe vā karaṇavacanaṃ, iminā dhammena ñātenāti imaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ ñāṇena jānitvā ṭhitena maggañāṇenāti attho. Diṭṭhenāti dassanena saccadhammaṃ passitvā ṭhitena. Pattenāti saccānaṃ patvā ṭhitena. Viditenāti saccāni viditvā ṭhitena. Pariyogāḷhenāti catusaccadhammaṃ pariyogāhetvā ṭhitenāti evaṃ tāvettha abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 796) attho vutto. Duvidhampi pana maggaphalañāṇaṃ dhammeñāṇaṃ. Paccavekkhaṇāya ca mūlaṃ, kāraṇañca nayanayanassāti duvidhenāpi tena dhammenāti na na yujjati. Tathā catusaccadhammassa ñātattā, maggaphalasaṅkhātassa vā dhammassa saccapaṭivedhasampayogaṃ gatattā nayanayanaṃ hotīti tena iminā dhammena ñāṇavisayabhāvena, ñāṇasampayogena vā ñātenāti ca attho na na yujjatīti. Atītānāgate nayaṃ netīti atīte, anāgate ca nayaṃ neti harati peseti. Idaṃ pana na maggañāṇassa kiccaṃ, paccavekkhaṇañāṇakiccaṃ, satthārā pana maggañāṇaṃ atītānāgate nayanayanasadisaṃ kataṃ maggamūlakattā. Bhāvitamaggassa hi paccavekkhaṇā nāma hoti. Nayidaṃ aññaṃ ñāṇuppādanaṃ nayanayanaṃ, ñāṇasseva pana pavattivisesoti.
“范围”是指对他人之心的环绕而行、限定、划定,也就是那个界限。因此说“在于对他人心的判别”。其余的部分叫作“世俗中智”,因为被世俗约定称为“智”。从词义上说,“世俗中的智”就是世俗中智。因为不像法智等那样具有殊胜的贯通作用,只是以了知并照亮对象的共通性这一点,被世俗约定为“智”,所以包含在其中。或者,它是依世俗而转起的,也就是通过世俗之门来把握意义,所以是世俗中智。又或者,其余与另外三种智不同类的智,由于以彼不同类之共通性而归入世俗中智,所以称为世俗中智。巴利
Paresaṃ cetaso parito ayanaṃ paricchindanaṃ pariyo, tasmiṃ pariye. Tenāha ‘‘paresaṃ cittaparicchede’’ti. Avasesaṃ sammutimhiñāṇaṃ nāma ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti sammatattā. Vacanatthato pana sammutimhi ñāṇanti sammutimhiñāṇaṃ. Dhammeñāṇādīnaṃ viya hi sātisayassa paṭivedhakiccassa abhāvā visayobhāsanasaṅkhātajānanasāmaññena ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti sammatesu antogadhanti attho. Sammutivasena vā pavattaṃ sammutimhiñāṇaṃ sammutidvārena atthassa gahaṇato. Avasesaṃ vā itarañāṇattayavisabhāgaṃ ñāṇaṃ tabbisabhāgasāmaññena sammutimhiñāṇamhi paviṭṭhattā sammutimhiñāṇaṃ nāma hotīti.
虽然预流道智等其实也就是苦智等,但这里是按最殊胜的说法才说“令证得阿罗汉果之后”。依此而脱离轮回,所以叫“出离”,也就是以四谛为业处。前两谛属于轮回,因为它们是流转的运转和运转之因;后两谛则属于还灭,因为它们是还灭的止息和止息之因。“倾向”是指观的倾向,因为它对世间智没有相似的趣入方式。不倾向还灭,就是于还灭没有倾向,因为还灭不是它的对象。“教法”是指业处的教导。“受持”就是让它成为可以口头诵持的,也就是使之成为口中可诵之内容;从经典文句与义理上,依适宜方式,由听闻、记持、遍问、如理作意等,以心持续领纳而得。“修行”是依了知名色等次第,修习相应的瑜伽业行。巴利
Kāmaṃ sotāpattimaggañāṇādīni dukkhañāṇādīniyeva, ukkaṭṭhaniddesena panevamāha ‘‘arahattaṃpāpetvā’’ti. Vaṭṭato niggacchati etenāti niggamanaṃ, catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Purimāni dve saccāni vaṭṭaṃ pavattipavattihetubhāvato. Itarāni pana dve vivaṭṭaṃ nivattinivattihetubhāvato. Abhinivesoti vipassanābhiniveso hoti lokiyassa ñāṇassa visabhāgūpagamanato. No vivaṭṭeti vivaṭṭe abhiniveso no hoti avisayabhāvato. Pariyattīti kammaṭṭhānatanti. Uggahetvāti vācuggataṃ katvā. Uggahetvāti vā pāḷito, atthato ca yathārahaṃ savanadhāraṇaparipucchanamanasānupekkhanādivasena cittena uddhaṃ uddhaṃ gaṇhitvā. Kammaṃ karotīti nāmarūpapariggahādikkamena yogakammaṃ karoti.
如果只对前两个(谛)有观修的倾向,就只对它们进行受持等,那这四谛的业处怎么成立呢?对此回答说“二”等。虽然后两个谛也确实应当被了知,但在那里并没有“遍知”的意义,所以不是观修的作用范围。只是停留在传闻的层面上,因为极其殊胜所以是可欲的,因为它能引发精勤而无染的喜悦所以是可爱的,因为它能令心意越来越增长、越来越欢喜所以是可意的,这样作意就运转起来了。因此说“名为灭谛”等。在二谛中,是指在作为对象的二谛中,并且以不迷惑的通达,针对它们而转起之道,才名为针对它们而转起。三(谛)是苦、集、道谛。以作用而言,即是不迷惑。一是灭谛。以所缘而言,即以作所缘的方式,也以不迷惑的作用,于彼处通达确实可得。二谛是苦谛与集谛。因为难见,故难以见及。粗显的确实是苦与集,畜生也有苦,对食物等的欲求也明显。以逼迫等、积集等而言,也不能以如实之智彻见“此是苦,此是它的因”,所以它们是甚深的。二是灭谛与道谛。它们因为细微、微细,以自性本身即是甚深,不能以如实之智深入,所以说“难见”。巴利
Yadi purimesu dvīsu eva vipassanābhiniveso, tesu eva uggahādi, kathamidaṃ catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ jātanti āha ‘‘dvīsū’’tiādi. Kāmaṃ pacchimānipi dve saccāni abhiññeyyāni, pariññeyyatā pana tattha natthīti na vipassanābyāpāro. Kevalaṃ pana anussavamatte ṭhatvā accantapaṇītabhāvato iṭṭhaṃ, ātappakanirāmisapītisañjananato kantaṃ, uparūpari abhirucijananena manassa vaḍḍhanato manāpanti manasikāraṃ pavatteti. Tenāha ‘‘nirodhasaccaṃ nāmā’’tiādi. Dvīsu saccesūti dvīsu saccesu visayabhūtesu , tāni ca uddissa asammohapaṭivedhavasena pavattamāno hi maggo te uddissa pavatto nāma hotīti. Tīṇi dukkhasamudayamaggasaccāni. Kiccavasenāti asammuyhanavasena. Ekanti nirodhasaccaṃ. Ārammaṇavasenāti ārammaṇakaraṇavasenapi asammuyhanakiccavasenapi tattha paṭivedho labbhateva. Dve saccānīti dukkhasamudayasaccāni. Duddasattāti daṭṭhuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā. Oḷārikā hi dukkhasamudayā, tiracchānagatānampi dukkhaṃ, āhārādīsu ca abhilāso pākaṭo. Pīḷanādiāyūhanādivasenapi ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ, idaṃ assa kāraṇa’’nti yāthāvato ñāṇena ogāhituṃ asakkuṇeyyattā tāni gambhīrāni. Dveti nirodhamaggasaccāni. Tāni saṇhasukhumabhāvato sabhāveneva gambhīratāya yāthāvato ñāṇena durogāhattā ‘‘duddasānī’’ti.
预流支等四法的解释巴利
Sotāpattiyaṅgādicatukkavaṇṇanā
311 所谓“流”,就是圣流,这里省略了前面的字。从它最初、最先的进入来说,就是入流,也就是获得初道。它的支分是达成目标的途径和原因,所以叫入流支。因此说“流……乃至……之义”。由于身业等寂静、具足寂静法、宣说寂静法,所以是寂静的人,也就是善士。其中,正是依靠他们才能听闻能带来四谛通达的正法,为了指出他们,所以说“佛等善士”。正法是寂静之法,或者说是属于圣者之法。因为依照教导实践时,它能使人不堕入恶趣之苦和轮回之苦,所以如此等类,由于具有殊胜功德的缘故,是寂静的、现存的、值得赞叹的、美好的法,或者是圣者之法,或者是能成就圣者之法的法,所以叫正法,即如“在此,比丘学习法”等所说的教理学习。然而,由于所缘广大,并非一切都能给一切人带来殊胜,因此为了指出适合各人的,所以说“听闻适合的三藏法”。如理作意前面已经说过。这里说的“前分行道”,是指观修习的加行。巴利
311.Soto nāma ariyasoto purimapadalopena, tassa ādito sabbapaṭhamaṃ pajjanaṃ sotāpatti, paṭhamamaggapaṭilābho. Tassa aṅgāni adhigamūpāyabhūtāni kāraṇāni sotāpattiyaṅgāni. Tenāha ‘‘sotā…pe… attho’’ti. Santakāyakammāditāya santadhammasamannāgamato, santadhammapavedanato ca santo purisāti sappurisā. Tattha yesaṃ vasena catusaccasampaṭivedhāvahaṃ saddhammassavanaṃ labbhati, te eva dassento ‘‘buddhādīnaṃ sappurisāna’’nti āha . Santo sataṃ vā dhammoti saddhammo. So hi yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne apāyadukkhe, saṃsāradukkhe ca apatante dhāretīti evamādi guṇātisayayogavasena santo saṃvijjamāno, pasattho, sundaro vā dhammo, sataṃ vā ariyānaṃ dhammo, tesaṃ vā tabbhāvasādhako dhammoti saddhammo, ‘‘idha bhikkhu dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇātī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 5.73) vuttā pariyatti. Sā pana mahāvisayatāya na sabbā sabbassa visesāvahāti tassa tassa anucchavikameva dassento āha ‘‘sappāyassa tepiṭakadhammassa savana’’nti. Yonisomanasikāro heṭṭhā vutto eva. Pubbabhāgapaṭipattiyāti vipassanānuyogassa.
以不坏净信:这是指通过通达四谛、了知佛等诸功德而生起的净信。这种净信在面对诸天等任何对象时都不会被动摇,坚固不动,所以说“以不动净信”。于此:就是在这四种法当中的食四法。依粗劣与殊胜之物:是依米饭、粥等粗劣之物以及殊胜之物。关于食物的粗与细,注释书中已经详细说明,比如“比起豪猪的食物,孔雀的食物是细的”等等。巴利
Aveccappasādenāti saccasampaṭivedhavasena buddhādīnaṃ guṇe ñatvā uppannappasādena, so pana pasādo devādīsu kenacipi akampiyatāya niccaloti āha ‘‘acalappasādenā’’ti. Etthāti etasmiṃ catukkattaye āhāracatukke. Lūkhapaṇītavatthuvasenāti odanakummāsādikassa lūkhassa ceva paṇītassa ca vatthuno vasena. Sā panāyaṃ āhārassa oḷārikasukhumatā ‘‘kumbhilānaṃ āhāraṃ upādāya morānaṃ āhāro sukhumo’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.11) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vitthārato āgatā eva.
“以所缘住”是指:以被称为所缘的转起缘之处为依凭。安住在这里,就是“住”;所缘本身就是住,所以叫“所缘住”。因此说“色所缘”等。这里“所缘”的意思应当理解为“支持、资助”,而不只是取境之相。作为支持的色靠近了,所以叫“色近依”。因此说“成为靠近的色”等。它依色蕴而住,因为离开色蕴就无法转起。“彼”是指依色蕴而安住、转起。“此”是指“色近依”这个说法。色蕴是它的行境、转起处和缘,所以说“以色蕴为行境”;色蕴作为资助因,是它的依处,所以说“以色为依处”。这样,通过这三句说明了:对于行作识来说,色蕴正是以资助因的身份存在的。就像用佐料把饭润泽、调好,使它变得可口、容易消化一样,被欢喜所润泽、滋养的业识,也变得欢喜而适合成熟为异熟果,这叫作“似润泽”。其余与嗔相应等的不善法,以及善法,以强力依止的方式被润泽,也应这样连接理解。“如此转起”是指以“色近依”等说法的方式而转起。在异熟法性上,它增长……中略……达到。其中,从不颠倒的果出生来说,是“增长”;从迂回的果出生来说,是“长大”;从等流果出生来说,是“广大”。或者,从现法受业的果出生来说,是“增长”;从生受业的果出生来说,是“长大”;从后后受业的果出生来说,是“广大”。完全以感受近依等的方式来说,“到达”只存在于无色界,因此说“然而,以这些”等。这样理解之后,巴利文中“vā”(或)这个词的采用也就说得通了。正如以“色近依”等说法,行作识的强力依止——色等——被包含在内,同样,由它所产生的那些法也被包含在内,出于这个意图,说“以四法……中略……没有说”。因为异熟法也是以异熟法识为近依而存在的,由于它被欢喜所润泽。因此说“欢喜润泽”。这些在《尸迦罗越经》中已经详细说明了。巴利
Ārammaṇaṭṭhitivasenāti ārammaṇasaṅkhātassa pavattipaccayaṭṭhānassa vasena. Tiṭṭhati etthāti ṭhiti, ārammaṇameva ṭhiti ārammaṇaṭṭhiti. Tenevāha ‘‘rūpārammaṇa’’ntiādi. Ārammaṇattho cettha upatthambhanattho veditabbo, na visayalakkhaṇova. Upatthambhanabhūtaṃ rūpaṃ upetīti rūpūpāyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘rūpaṃ upagataṃ hutvā’’tiādi. Rūpakkhandhaṃ nissāya tiṭṭhati tena vinā appavattanato. Tanti rūpakkhandhaṃ nissāya ṭhānappavattanaṃ. Etanti ‘‘rūpūpāya’’nti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Rūpakkhandho gocaro pavattiṭṭhānaṃ paccayo etassāti rūpakkhandhagocaraṃ rūpaṃ sahakārīkāraṇabhāvena patiṭṭhā etassāti rūpappatiṭṭhaṃ. Iti tīhi padehi abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ pati rūpakkhandhassa sahakārīkāraṇabhāvoyevettha vutto. Upasittaṃ viya upasittaṃ, yathā byañjanehi upasittaṃ sinehitaṃ odanaṃ rucitaṃ, pariṇāmayogyañca, evaṃ nandiyā upasittaṃ sinehitaṃ kammaviññāṇaṃ abhirucitaṃ hutvā vipākayogyaṃ hotīti. Itaranti dosasahagatādiakusalaṃ, kusalañca upanissayakoṭiyā upasittaṃ hutvāti yojanā. Evaṃ pavattamānanti evaṃ rūpūpāyanti desanābhāvena pavattamānaṃ. Vipākadhammatāya vuddhiṃ…pe… āpajjati. Tatthāpi nippariyāyaphalanibbattanavasena vuddhiṃ, pariyāyaphalanibbattanavasena viruḷhiṃ, nissandaphalanibbattanavasena vepullaṃ. Diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaphalanibbattanena vā vuddhiṃ, upapajjavedanīyaphalanibbattanavasena viruḷhiṃ, aparāpariyāyaphalanibbattanavasena vepullaṃ āpajjatīti yojanā. Ekantato vedanupāyādivasena patti nāma arūpabhave yevāti āha ‘‘imehi panā’’tiādi. Evañca katvā pāḷiyaṃ kataṃ vā-saddaggahaṇañca samatthitaṃ hoti. ‘‘Rūpūpāya’’ntiādinā yathā abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa upanissayabhūtā rūpādayo gayhanti, evaṃ tena nibbattetabbāpi te gayhantīti adhippāyena ‘‘catukkavasena…pe… na vutta’’nti āha. Vipākopi hi dhammo vipākadhammaviññāṇaṃ upagataṃ nāma hoti tathā nandiyā upasittattā. Tenāha ‘‘nandūpasecana’’nti. Vitthāritāneva siṅgālasutte.
依靠这个而有健康,所以叫“有”,也就是病的缘药。完全增长的有,就是“非有”。这里的“a”这个字有增长的意思,就像“防护与非防护”“果与非果”那样。油、蜜、糖等,这个“等”字包含了生酥和鲜奶油,这里举出油等只是举例。应当知道,所有病的缘药都包括在内。或者,“有与非有”应当理解为小的和大的再生有。这样理解的话,“但以这些”这句话就说得通了。因为第四圣种特别以断除有之再生为目的。渴爱的生起,就是渴爱的产生,也就是由于衣服等而生起的渴爱。在加行精进的时候,就是在修习的加行时刻。不能忍受寒等,这是针对修行前阶段说的。能忍受就是能克制、能征服。以寻的寂止为例,实际上是依一切烦恼的寂止方式而运行的道。巴利
Bhavati etena ārogyanti bhavo, gilānapaccayo. Parivuddho bhavo abhavo. Vuddhiattho hi ayaṃ akāro yathā ‘‘saṃvarāsaṃvaro, (pārā. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā; dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) phalāphalaṃ’’ti ca . Telamadhuphāṇitādīnīti ādi-saddena sappinavanītānaṃ gahaṇaṃ, telādīnaṃ gahaṇañcettha nidassanamattaṃ. Sabbassāpi gilānapaccayassa saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā bhavābhavoti khuddako ceva mahanto ca upapattibhavo veditabbo. Evañca sati ‘‘imesaṃ panā’’tiādivacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Bhavūpapattipahānattho hi visesato catutthaariyavaṃso. Taṇhuppādānanti taṇhuppattīnaṃ, cīvarādihetu uppajjanakataṇhānanti attho. Padhānakaraṇakāleti bhāvanānuyogakkhaṇe. Sītādīni na khamatīti bhāvanāya pubbabhāgakālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Khamatīti sahati abhibhavati. Vitakkasamananti nidassanamattaṃ. Sabbesampi kilesānaṃ samanavasena pavattā paṭipadā.
以定、禅那等来分类的法,之所以叫“法句”,是因为人们依靠它来理解、来修行。无贪本身就是法句,所以叫“无贪法句”。这是从无贪这一方面来说的;另一方面,则是以无贪为主导的那一类法,叫“无贪法句”。无嗔就是没有嗔恨,意思是慈。善安住之念,就是对身体等所缘,完全正确地安立的念。以念为首,是就念为主导这个角度说的。因为诸禅那以定为增上,所以说“或是等至”。当然,即使在修习有识的不净观时,禅那的修习也是以无贪为主导的,因为它是通过对身体的厌嫌、以执取厌恶相的方式进行的;但当它依七种执取善巧等方式进行时,它的运作是以念为主导的。为了把它归入第三法句,才说“或者依十种不净观”。梵住的修习是以给予利益等方式进行的,能对治嗔恚,以无嗔为增上,所以说“四梵住……是法句”。这里的关联是:指那些所证得的禅那等。对食物厌恶相的观察,从行走等行为中进行,这要靠想本身极为坚固才能做到,因为这个想是以坚固想为根基的,所以对食物的厌恶想也收摄在第三法句中。遍处的修习,由于是无色定与神通的依止,入出息的第一阶段修习,因为是七觉支、明与解脱圆满之因,特别以定为增上,所以它被第四法句所收摄。依四界分别而证得的诸法,也应当收摄在这里面,但因为以慧为增上,所以没有收摄进去。巴利
Samādhijhānādibhedo dhammo pajjati paṭipajjīyati etenāti dhammapadaṃ. Anabhijjhāva dhammapadaṃ anabhijjhādhammapadaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva alobhapakkhe nayo, itarapakkhe pana anabhijjhāpadhāno dhammakoṭṭhāso anabhijjhādhammapadaṃ. Akopoti adoso, mettāti attho. Suppaṭṭhitasatīti kāyādīsu sammadeva upaṭṭhitā sati. Satisīsenāti satipadhānamukhena. Samādhipadhānattā jhānānaṃ ‘‘samāpatti vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāmaṃ saviññāṇakaasubhepi jhānabhāvanā alobhappadhānā hoti kāyassa jigucchanena, paṭikkūlākāraggahaṇavasena ca pavattanato, sattavidhauggahakosallādivasena panassā pavatti satipadhānāti tatiyadhammapadeneva naṃ saṅgaṇhitukāmo ‘‘dasa asubhavasena vā’’ti āha. Hitūpasaṃhārādivasena pavattanato brahmavihārabhāvanā byāpādavirodhinī abyāpādappadhānāti āha ‘‘catubrahma…pe… dhammapada’’nti. Tattha adhigatāni jhānādīnīti yojanā. Gamanādito āhārassa paṭikkūlabhāvasallakkhaṇaṃ saññāya thirabhāveneva hoti tassā thirasaññāpadaṭṭhānattāti āhāre paṭikkūlasaññāpi tatiyadhammapade eva saṅgahaṃ gatā. Āruppasamādhiabhiññānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato kasiṇabhāvanā, sattavidhabojjhaṅgavijjāvimuttipāripūrihetuto ānāpānesu paṭhamaānāpānabhāvanā visesato samādhipadhānāti sā catutthadhammapadena saṅgahitā. Catudhātuvavatthānavasena adhigatānipi ettheva saṅgahetabbāni siyuṃ, paññāpadhānatāya pana na saṅgahitāni.
在诸法的受持中,第一种是裸形外道的修行方式,因为它在现在就是苦的,在未来也会带来恶趣之苦和轮回之苦。这里说的“裸形外道的修行方式”,应当理解为只是举例而已,因为也可以看到其他外道游方者同样有带来现世与未来两种苦的修行方式。第二种……是梵行的修习,因为即使现在还有苦,它也能在未来带来安乐。“在诸欲中溃烂”:就是随自己的欲望尽情享受欲乐。加了“即使”这个词,用在“即使得不到”的地方,是要说明:得不到的人尚且如此,更何况得到的人呢。巴利
Dhammasamādānesu paṭhamaṃ acelakapaṭipadā etarahi ca dukkhabhāvato, anāgatepi apāyadukkhavaṭṭadukkhāvahato. Acelakapaṭipadāti ca nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ channaparibbājakānampi ubhayadukkhāvahapaṭipattidassanato. Dutiyaṃ…pe… brahmacariyacaraṇaṃ etarahi satipi dukkhe āyatiṃ sukhāvahattā. Kāmesu pātabyatā yathākāmaṃ kāmaparibhogo. Alabhamānassāpīti pi-saddena ko pana vādo labhamānassāti dasseti.
恶戒等恶法的抑制与阻挡,就是“蕴”的含义,而这个“蕴”指的就是戒等本身,所以说“功德蕴”。应当知道,因为“蕴”这个词的领域是功德,所以它就有了“功德”的含义。“解脱蕴”:从对立面来说,指的是已经完全善巧解脱的功德法,不是指尚未解脱的,也不是指正在解脱过程中的。因此,与它们一同被宣说的戒蕴等前三者也包含在内,所以说“这里指的是果位的戒,在四种情况下,说的都是果位”。由此可知,这里的“解脱蕴”,指的是被果所包含的正思惟、正精进和正念。巴利
Dussīlyādipāpadhammānaṃ khambhanaṃ paṭibandhanaṃ khandhaṭṭho, so pana sīlādi evāti āha ‘‘guṇaṭṭho khandhaṭṭho’’ti. Guṇavisayatāya khandha-saddassa guṇatthatā veditabbā. Vimuttikkhandhoti paṭipakkhato suṭṭhu vimuttā guṇadhammā adhippetā, na avimuttā, nāpi vimuccamānāti tehi saha desanaṃ āruḷhā sīlakkhandhādayopi tayoti āha ‘‘phalasīlaṃ adhippetaṃ, catūsupi ṭhānesu phalameva vutta’’nti ca. Eteneva cettha vimuttikkhandhoti phalapariyāpannā sammāsaṅkappavāyāmasatiyo adhippetāti veditabbaṃ.
以“支持”的作用,相应诸法能在那里稳固地生起;由此也应知道,无惭和无愧在各自范围内“有力”这一点同样成立。因为对它们来说,并非决定具有“不被对立面动摇”的性质。惭和愧“不被对立面动摇”这一点,确实更为殊胜,因为善法力量强大,而不善法力量微弱。所以世尊说:“无力者被有力者压制,种种灾患碾碎他们。”这是依菩提分法来说的,因此说为“依止、观、道的方式”。巴利
Upatthambhanaṭṭhena sampayuttadhammānaṃ tattha thirabhāvena pavattanato, eteneva ahirikaanottappānampi savisaye balaṭṭho siddho veditabbo. Na hi tesaṃ paṭipakkhehi akampiyaṭṭho ekantiko. Hirottappānañhi akampiyaṭṭho sātisayo kusaladhammānaṃ mahābalabhāvato, akusalānañca dubbalabhāvato. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘abalā naṃ balīyanti, maddante naṃ parissayā’’ti (su. ni. 776; mahāni. 5; netti. paṭiniddesavāre 5) bodhipakkhiyadhammavasenāyaṃ desanāti ‘‘samathavipassanāmaggavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
这里的“adhi”只是前缀,并不像“增上心”等词里的“adhi”那样,具有增上、统摄等含义。为了说明“adhiṭṭhāna”这个词可以表示工具格、依格和状态,论师才说了“依此……”等话。意思是:依靠那个依处,具有殊胜功德的人安住在自己的正行中;他们也正是安住在那个依处,也就是安住在正道上。所以,住处就是依处,就是正行。以第一种依处来说。“最胜果慧”这是按最高标准来说的。“烦恼的寂止”是指烦恼彻底永远止息。按第一种解释,依处只是部分地被提到,并不是全部提到。为了说明它们是完全被提到的,才说了“又以第一种……”等话。“以……为首”这句话,统摄了禅那、神通和慧,以及道慧。“以说真实语为首”:“为首”这个词统摄了离妄语的戒真实语。第三种解释里,“为首”这个词统摄了烦恼的三种断除:违犯断、缠缚断,以及由下道断随眠。“已镇伏的烦恼”这句话,说明了通过等至以镇伏方式平息烦恼;而“为首”这个词,则统摄了应由下道以彻底断除方式平息烦恼。阿罗汉果慧是按最高标准来说的,否则就可能把真实语等也包括进去。涅槃因为是不忘失之法,所以以最上义来说是“谛”;因为是一切烦恼断除的所缘,所以是“舍”;因为是一切行寂止的状态,所以是“寂止”。因此,长老的意思是:它特别应当被称为这些。由于慧是殊胜了知的结果,由于烦恼无余断尽和寂止时生起,所以“舍”和“寂止”特别指最胜果智。长老说:“其余诸者,已说阿罗汉果慧。”巴利
Adhīti upasaggamattaṃ, na ‘‘adhicitta’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 185) viya adhikārādiatthaṃ. Karaṇādhikaraṇabhāvasādhanavasena adhiṭṭhāna-saddassa atthaṃ dassento ‘‘tenavā’’tiādimāha. Tena adhiṭṭhānena tiṭṭhanti attano sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ guṇādhikā purisā, te eva tattha adhiṭṭhāne tiṭṭhanti sammāpattiyā, ṭhānameva adhiṭṭhānameva sammāpaṭipattiyanti yojanā. Paṭhamena adhiṭṭhānena. Aggaphalapaññāti ukkaṭṭhaniddesoyaṃ. Kilesūpasamoti kilesānaṃ accantavūpasamo . Paṭhamena nayena adhiṭṭhānāni ekadesatova gahitāni, na nippadesatoti nippadesatova tāni dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamena cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ādiṃ katvā’’ti etena jhānābhiññāpaññañceva maggapaññañca saṅgaṇhāti. Vacīsaccaṃ ādiṃ katvāti ādi-saddena viratisaccaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tatiyena ādi-saddena kilesānaṃ vītikkamapariccāgaṃ, pariyuṭṭhānapariccāgaṃ, heṭṭhimamaggehi anusayapariccāgañca saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Vikkhambhite kilese’’ti etena samāpattīhi kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanavasena vūpasamaṃ vatvā ādi-saddena heṭṭhimamaggehi kātabbaṃ tesaṃ samucchedavasena vūpasamaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Arahattaphalapaññā kathitā ukkaṭṭhaniddesatova, aññathā vacīsaccādīnampi gahaṇaṃ siyā. Nibbānañca asammosadhammatāya uttamaṭṭhena saccaṃ, sabbasaṃkilesapariccāganimittatāya cāgo, sabbasaṅkhārūpasamabhāvato upasamoti ca visesato vattabbataṃ arahatīti therassa adhippāyo. Pakaṭṭhajānanaphalatāya paññā, anavasesato kilesānañcajante ca vūpasante ca uppannattā cāgo, upasamoti ca visesato aggaphalañāṇaṃ vuccatīti thero āha ‘‘sesehi arahattaphalapaññā kathitā’’ti.
问难解答等四部分的注释巴利
Pañhabyākaraṇādicatukkavaṇṇanā
312 “黑”是指污秽,意思是让心变得不光明清净。不过这里特指已经构成业道的行为,所以说“十不善业道之业”。又因为它是投生为黑的因,所以称为黑。因此说“带来黑报”。投生到恶趣,以及在人间投生为下贱种姓,就是黑报。这里说的是它那种黑暗的状态。“令投生”:就是使之投生。“白”:就是洁白,意思是让心变得光明清净。又因为它是投生为白的因,所以称为白。因此说“带来白报”。投生到天界,以及在人间投生为高贵种姓,就是白报。这里说的是它那种光明的状态。不过按照最上等的说法,说“投生到天界”,意思就是使之投生。“杂业”:就是有时造黑业,有时造白业,像这样混合起来所造的业。说了“带来苦乐之报”之后,为了显示其中苦乐生起的方式,所以说了“杂业……”等。业的黑、白这个名称,是根据它是黑、白投生的因来说的。由于它趋向损减,这里不把能摧毁黑、白两者、使业穷尽的业当作白的同义词,所以说“摧伏二者……这就是这里的含义”。其中“二者之果报”,是指所获得的二者之果报。因为包含在生存中的果报,这里才称为“白报”,并不是指究竟清净的圣果之报。巴利
312.Kāḷakanti malīnaṃ, cittassa apabhassarabhāvakaraṇanti attho. Taṃ panettha kammapathappattameva adhippetanti āha ‘‘dasaakusalakammapathakamma’’nti. Kaṇhābhijātihetuto vā kaṇhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kaṇhavipāka’’nti. Apāyūpatti, manussesu ca dobhaggiyaṃ kaṇhavipāko. Ayaṃ tassa tamabhāvo vutto. Nibbattanatoti nibbattāpanato. Paṇḍaranti odātaṃ, cittassa pabhassarabhāvakaraṇanti attho. Sukkābhijātihetuto vā sukkaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sukkavipāka’’nti. Saggūpapatti, manussesu sobhaggiyañca sukkavipāko. Ayaṃ tassa jotibhāvo vutto. Ukkaṭṭhaniddesena pana ‘‘sagge nibbattanato’’ti vuttaṃ, nibbattāpanatoti attho. Missakakammanti kālena kaṇhaṃ, kālena sukkanti evaṃ missakavasena katakammaṃ. ‘‘Sukhadukkhavipāka’’nti vatvā tattha sukhadukkhānaṃ pavattiākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘missakakammañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kammassa kaṇhasukkasamaññā kaṇhasukkābhijātihetutāyāti apacayagāmitāya tadubhayaviddhaṃsakassa kammakkhayakarakammassa idha sukkapariyāyopi na icchitoti āha ‘‘ubhaya…pe… ayamettha attho’’ti. Tattha ubhayavipākassāti yathādhigatassa ubhayavipākassa. Sampattibhavapariyāpanno hi vipāko idha ‘‘sukkavipāko’’ti adhippeto, na accantaparisuddho ariyaphalavipāko.
宿命智和众生的死生智,要通过现前亲证来作证;其余的神通,则要通过获得它们,并以不迷惑的通达和现前亲证来作证。那么,这里所说的省察智不也是以现前的方式生起的吗?确实,它是以现前的方式生起,因为它见到了自性,但它并不是以亲证的方式生起,因为它是在亲证之后才回头观察的。所以这样说:“以身……”等。巴利
Pubbenivāso sattānaṃ cutūpapāto ca paccakkhakaraṇena sacchikātabbā; itare paṭilābhena asammohapaṭivedhavasena paccakkhakaraṇena ca sacchikātabbā. Nanu ca paccavekkhaṇāpettha paccakkhato pavattatīti? Saccaṃ paccakkhato pavattati sarūpadassanato, na pana paccakkhakaraṇavasena pavattati paccakkhakārīnaṃ piṭṭhivattanato. Tenāha ‘‘kāyenā’’tiādi.
“向下冲”是指置于下方而打击、使它们往下走。而这样的状态就是向下沉没,所以说“令沉没”。以欲之义它是欲,又以如前所述之义它是暴流,所以叫欲暴流;或者说,是在诸欲中的暴流。为了说明有暴流就是有贪,所以说了“在色有、无色有中……”等。其中,第一种是对再生之有的贪,第二种是对业有的贪,第三种是伴随有见的贪。正如以染着的含义称为贪,同样地,以向下牵拉的含义称为暴流。巴利
Ohanantīti heṭṭhā katvā hananti gamenti. Tathābhūtā ca adho sīdenti nāmāti āha ‘‘osīdāpentī’’ti. Kāmanaṭṭhena kāmo ca so yathāvuttenatthena ogho cāti, kāmesu oghoti vā kāmogho. Bhavogho nāma bhavarāgoti dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpārūpabhavesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paṭhamo upapattibhavesu rāgo, dutiyo kammabhavesu, tatiyo bhavadiṭṭhisahagato. Yathā rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, evaṃ ohanaṭṭhena ‘‘ogho’’ti vutto.
它们把业和果报连接起来,把这一存在和另一存在等连接起来,把众生系缚于苦中并撞击、逼迫他们,所以叫“轭”。从意义上看,应当知道它们和瀑流一样,因为它们实际上就是欲轭、有轭等。巴利
Yojentīti kammaṃ vipākena, bhavādiṃ bhavantarādīhi dukkhe satte yojenti ghaṭṭentīti yogā. Oghā viya veditabbā atthato kāmayogādibhāvato.
令其远离:就是让修行者从欲轭等束缚中脱离出来。会造杂染的联结叫“轭”,会打结的叫“结”,或者像锁链和环扣那样绑在一起,这叫“结”,这就是它们两者的区别。障碍:以不让出离的方式,不放它走,把它捆住。即此:就是按自己心里现起的那些见解来说,比如持常见等说法。真实:就是事实。巴利
Visaṃyojentīti paṭipannaṃ puggalaṃ kāmayogādito viyojenti. Saṃkilesakaraṇaṃ yojanaṃ yogo, ganthikaraṇaṃ (ganthakaraṇaṃ dha. sa. mūlaṭī. 20-25), saṅkhalikacakkalikānaṃ viya paṭibaddhatākaraṇaṃ vā ganthanaṃ gantho, ayaṃ etesaṃ viseso. Palibundhatīti nissarituṃ appadānavasena na muñceti vibandhati. Idamevāti attano yathāupaṭṭhitaṃ sassatavādādikaṃ vadati. Saccanti bhūtaṃ.
这些被称为“取”,是因为人们以强烈、牢固的方式执取所缘。然而,它们那样执取,从意义上说也就是执取本身,所以经文说“取即执取、执持”。就执取的意义来说,是依欲贪的力量而牢固执取。再者,就执取的意义来说,是依邪妄执的力量而牢固执取。“以此”:指通过这些戒禁等。“清净”:指轮回清净。“由此”:指由这种执见。当人施设并宣说“我”时,同时也以执著的力量而执取。巴利
Bhusaṃ , daḷhañca ārammaṇaṃ ādīyati etehīti upādānāni. Yaṃ pana tesaṃ tathāgahaṇaṃ, tampi atthato ādānamevāti āha ‘‘upādānānīti ādānaggahaṇānī’’ti. Gahaṇaṭṭhenāti kāmanavasena daḷhaṃ gahaṇaṭṭhena. Puna gahaṇaṭṭhenāti micchābhinivisanavasena daḷhaṃ gahaṇaṭṭhena. Imināti iminā sīlavatādinā. Suddhīti saṃsārasuddhi. Etenāti etena diṭṭhigāhena. ‘‘Attā’’ti paññāpento vadati ceva abhinivesanavasena upādiyati ca.
所谓“生类”,是指那些众生虽然并不混杂,但因为同一类别而看起来像是混在一起,所以叫“生类”。不过从意义上说,这些“生类”其实是依卵生等出生方式而区分的、诸蕴的部分流转差异,因此说“生类就是部分”。所谓“卧处”,是指花铺等睡觉的地方。或者,那些在那里躺卧而出生的,所以用“卧处”来指代。这里的“卧处”应依人类和地居天来理解。在腐鱼等处虫类出生。所谓“像化生一样”,是指像化生那样落下;或者因为不依赖外部条件,因不依赖外在条件而行善的化生者就叫“化生”,这里说的正是这些“化生者”。在“天和人”中,这里为了说明所说的“天”是指哪些天,所以讲“在地居天中”。巴利
Yavanti tāhi sattā amissitāpi samānajātitāya missitā viya hontīti yoniyo, tā pana atthato aṇḍādiuppattiṭṭhānavisiṭṭhā khandhānaṃ bhāgaso pavattivisesāti āha ‘‘yoniyoti koṭṭhāsā’’ti. Sayanasminti pupphasantharādisayanasmiṃ. Tattha vā te sayitā jāyantīti sayanaggahaṇaṃ. Tayidaṃ manussānaṃ, bhummadevānañca vasena gahetabbaṃ. Pūtimacchādīsu kimayo nibbattanti. Upapatitā viyāti upapajjavasena patitā viya. Bāhirapaccayanirapekkhatāya vā upapatane sādhukārino opapātino, te eva idha ‘‘opapātikā’’ti vuttā. Devamanussesūti ettha ye deve sandhāya devaggahaṇaṃ, te dassento ‘‘bhummadevesū’’ti āha.
因为自己失念、在饮食上行为不当而死,所以说“第一类是以嬉戏放逸的方式”;因为对自己和他人心怀恶意而死,所以说“第三类是以心起恶意的方式”。他们既不是因自己的思心而死,也不是因他人的思心而死,纯粹是因为福报耗尽而死,因此,第四类……应当知道。巴利
Attano satisammosena āhārappayogena maraṇato ‘‘paṭhamo khiḍḍāpadosikavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Attano parassa ca manopadosavasena maraṇato ‘‘tatiyo manopadosikavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Neva attasañcetanāya maranti, na parasañcetanāya kevalaṃ puññakkhayeneva maraṇato, tasmā catuttho…pe… veditabbo.
对供养清净等四类的注释巴利
Dakkhiṇāvisuddhādicatukkavaṇṇanā
313 313. 被称为布施的供养,不是指被称为应施之物的东西。清净和广大光明,这应当通过大果报来了知,所以说“有大果报”。巴利
313. Dānasaṅkhātā dakkhiṇā, na deyyadhammasaṅkhātā. Visujjhanā mahājutikatā, sā pana mahāphalatāya veditabbāti āha ‘‘mahapphalā hontī’’ti.
“非圣者”是指不善之人。这些人行为卑劣,所以经文说“低劣者”。“言说”是指一切言说或言语表达,从含义上说,就是如此生起的思。因此经文说“在此……”等等。巴利
Anariyānanti asādhūnaṃ. Te pana nihīnācārā hontīti āha ‘‘lāmakāna’’nti. Vohārāti sabbohārā abhilāpā vā, atthato tathāpavattā cetanā. Tenāha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi.
对“自苦行”等四句的解说巴利
Attantapādicatukkavaṇṇanā
314 在这两者当中,“裸形者”只是一个举例,因为着衣的游方者等那些从事自我折磨的人也都包括在内。巴利
314. Tesu acelakoti nidassanamattaṃ channaparibbājakānampi attakilamathaṃ anuyuttānaṃ labbhanato.
不是具足戒等功德的人,就是以戒等功德不圆满的人。巴利
Na sīlādisampannoti sīlādīhi guṇehi aparipuṇṇo.
所谓“暗”,是因为缺少光明,所以成了黑暗。因此说“成了黑暗”,意思是像黑暗一样存在、生起,因为缺少光明;或者说达到了黑暗的状态。所谓“正是那个暗”,就是指前面所说的那种暗。“彼岸”就是从那边去、归宿、终结的意思。用“生在低处……等”这一段,说明他的黑暗性;用“圆满三种恶行”这一段,说明他以黑暗为归宿,因为达到了没有光明的状态。成为那样之后,就是“生在低处……等”。用“圆满三种善行”这一段,说明他以光明为归宿,因为达到了光明的状态。其余两处,按照所说的方法理解其含义。巴利
Tamoti appakāsabhāvena tamobhūto. Tenāha ‘‘andhakārabhūto’’ti, andhakāraṃ viya bhūto jāto appakāsabhāvena, andhakārattaṃ vā pattoti attho. Tamamevāti vuttalakkhaṇaṃ tamameva. Paraṃ parato ayanaṃ gati niṭṭhāti attho. ‘‘Nīce…pe… nibbattitvā’’ti etena tassa tamabhāvaṃ dasseti, ‘‘tīṇi duccaritāni paripūretī’’ti etena tamaparāyanabhāvaṃ appakāsabhāvāpattito. Tathāvidho hutvāti nīce…pe… nibbattetvā. ‘‘Tīṇi sucaritāni paripūretī’’ti etena tassa jotiparāyanabhāvaṃ dasseti pakāsabhāvāpattito. Itaradvaye vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo.
“ma”这个字只是为了连接词与词之间的音,就像在“aññamañña”(相互)这类词里一样(《经集》605)。“由四种风”是指从四个方向吹来的风。“外道的论说”是指那些持邪见者的言论。说了“不可动摇”之后,接着指出其中的原因:“因为信仰不动摇”,也就是由道所产生的信仰。关于“因为烦恼微薄”,这里应当从两种原因来理解其微薄:一是偶尔才生起,二是现行微弱。因为对一来者来说,烦恼不像随顺轮回的凡夫那样频繁生起,只是偶尔才生起;而且即使生起,也不像随顺轮回的凡夫那样以压制、征服的方式生起,而是因为已被两种道所断除,所以只是微弱、细微地生起。这样一来,由于烦恼微薄,功德庄严而柔和,一来者就被称为“沙门莲花”。由于贪和嗔不存在——也就是由于彻底断除了贪和嗔这些障碍功德展现的烦恼——他很快就会开花。也就是说,通过最高之道而绽放,不久之后就会圆满无余的功德庄严,所以将会开花。因此,不还者被称为“沙门芬陀利迦”。“芬陀利迦”就是红莲花。据说那种花很快就开。“钵头摩”是白莲花,那种花要很久才开——他们是这么说的。由于结缚作者的烦恼——也就是使心被束缚的上分烦恼——彻底不存在,所以称为“沙门善软者”,因为他在沙门的身份上达到了极其柔软的状态。巴利
Ma-kāro padasandhimattaṃ ‘‘aññamañña’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 605) viya. Catūhi vātehīti catūhi disāhi uṭṭhitavātehi. Parappavādehīti paresaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ vādehi. ‘‘Akampiyo’’ti vatvā tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘acalasaddhāyā’’ti, maggenāgatasaddhāya. Patanubhūtattāti ettha dvīhi kāraṇehi patanubhāvo veditabbo adhiccuppattiyā, pariyuṭṭhānamandatāya ca. Sakadāgāmissa hi vaṭṭānusārimahājanassa viya kilesā abhiṇhaṃ na uppajjanti, kadāci karahaci uppajjanti. Uppajjamānā ca vaṭṭānusārimahājanassa viya maddantā abhibhavantā na uppajjanti, dvīhi pana maggehi pahīnattā mandā mandā tanukākārā uppajjanti. Iti kilesānaṃ patanubhāvena guṇasobhāya guṇasoraccena sakadāgāmī samaṇapadumo nāma. Rāgadosānaṃ abhāvāti guṇavikāsavibandhānaṃ sabbaso rāgadosānaṃ abhāvena. Khippameva pupphissatīti aggamaggavikasanena nacirasseva anavasesaguṇasobhāpāripūriyā pupphissati. Tasmā anāgāmī samaṇapuṇḍarīko nāma. ‘‘Puṇḍarīka’’nti hi rattakamalaṃ vuccati. Taṃ kira lahuṃ pupphissati. ‘Paduma’nti setakamalaṃ, taṃ cirena pupphissatī’’ti vadanti. Ganthakārakilesānanti cittassa baddhabhāvakarānaṃ uddhambhāgiyakilesānaṃ sabbaso abhāvā samaṇasukhumālonāma samaṇabhāvena paramasukhumālabhāvappattito.
315 就像在诸谛当中,诸圣谛被包含在内一样,在诸蕴当中,取蕴也被包含在内。指出了诸蕴可以按世间和出世间来分类之后,因为其他那些蕴不具备取蕴的性质,所以说“取蕴是世间的”。巴利
315. Saccesu viya ariyasaccāni khandhesu upādānakkhandhā antogadhāti khandhesu lokiyalokuttaravasena vibhāgaṃ dassetvā itaresu tadabhāvato ‘‘upādānakkhandhā lokiyā vā’’ti āha.
应当去:就是应当在那里投生。比如业有,从究竟意义上说,即使没有造作者,也能靠因缘和合而成立,世俗上就说这是“由具有那种相续特征的有情所造”;同样,具有投生存在特征的诸趣,从究竟意义上说即使没有去者,也依各自不同的业——那些业被称为“已造作”——而由那些有情在世俗上说“应当去”。对谁生起,增长那个,就只是生起,这就是乐,也就是福。这里没有这种福,所以叫地狱。正因如此,这里没有任何可贪爱享受的东西,所以说“无味”。在无间地狱等地方,“地狱”一词也被惯用,所以说“连同处所,诸蕴被说”。在日天宫等特定地方,“天”一词在世间也被惯用,所以说“第四种也包括处所”。巴利
Gantabbāti upapajjitabbā. Yathā hi kammabhavo paramatthato asatipi kārake paccayasāmaggiyā siddho ‘‘taṃsamaṅginā santānalakkhaṇena sattena kato’’ti voharīyati, evaṃ upapattibhavalakkhaṇā gatiyo paramatthato asatipi gamake taṃtaṃkammavasena yehi tāni kammāni ‘‘katānī’’ti vuccanti, tehi ‘‘gantabbā’’ti voharīyanti. Yassa uppajjati, taṃ brūhanto eva uppajjatīti ayo, sukhaṃ. Natthi ettha ayoti nirayo. Tato eva assādetabbamettha natthīti ‘‘nirassādo’’ti āha. Avīciādiokāsepi nirayasaddo niruḷhoti āha ‘‘sahokāsena khandhā kathitā’’ti. Sūriyavimānādi okāsavisesepi loke deva-saddo niruḷhoti āha ‘‘catutthe okāsopī’’ti.
他住在自己的地盘上,转生为饿鬼或大蟒蛇,因为心黏着在那里,也因为志趣低劣。他用各种理由说明过患之后,为了让别人得不到,就这样做——因为他依赖不正当的手段,依赖强势。由于对容貌的悭吝,他只赞叹自己的容貌;对别人的容貌,就说“这算什么容貌”,指出各种缺点。证悟之法只属于圣者们,而圣者们对法不悭吝,因为悭吝已被彻底断除,所以对证悟之法悭吝根本不可能。因此说“对教理法”等。他想:“这人学了此法之后,会颠倒曲解义理而把它毁掉”——这是出于对法的顾念而不给。他想:“这人学了此法之后,会掉举、傲慢、心不寂静,造下非福业”——这是出于对人的顾念而不给。这不算悭吝,因为根本不具备悭吝的特征。巴利
Āvāseti visaye bhummaṃ. Peto vā ajagaro vā hutvā nibbattati laggacittatāya, hīnajjhāsayatāya ca. Tehi tehi kāraṇehi ādīnavaṃ dassetvā yathā aññe na labhanti, evaṃ karoti attano visamanissitatāya, balavanissitatāya ca. Vaṇṇamacchariyena attano eva vaṇṇaṃ vaṇṇeti, paresaṃ vaṇṇo ‘‘kiṃ vaṇṇo eso’’ti taṃ taṃ dosaṃ vadati. Paṭivedhadhammo ariyānaṃyeva hoti, te ca taṃ na maccharāyanti macchariyassa sabbaso pahīnattāti tassa asambhavo evāti āha ‘‘pariyattidhamme’’tiādi. ‘‘Ayaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ uggahetvā aññathā atthaṃ viparivattetvā nassessatī’’ti dhammānuggahena na deti. ‘‘Ayaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ uggahetvā uddhato unnaḷo avūpasantacitto apuññaṃ pasavissatī’’ti puggalānuggahena na deti. Na taṃ adānaṃ macchariyaṃ macchariyalakkhaṇasseva abhāvato.
“它们阻止心”:它们阻挡、不让那些依靠禅那等条件生起的善心生起。“成为盖”:就是处在盖的状态。说“被阿拉汉道所断除”,这是承认有爱随眠也具有盖的性质,这一点需要考察。这里有什么需要考察的呢?因为《发趣论·盖之六法集》第8节等文句说“在无色界中,依欲欲盖而有昏眠盖”,所以不能说这里只是“方便说”;因为一切三界之法都具有可意、可爱的性质,所以有爱也可以算作欲欲,这是可以成立的。因此,说“欲欲成为盖”时,指的就是有爱随眠。因为它正是被阿拉汉道所断除的。由于《法集论》第1162节等文句说“在那时,心的不灵巧性”,所以昏沉是心的疾病。同样,由于《法集论》第44节等文句说“在那时,受蕴的……”,所以睡眠是三蕴的疾病。在这里,通过心的疾病,说明的只是心的不灵巧;而通过三蕴的疾病,因为昏眠是导致入睡的原因,所以色身也连带受到影响。同样,对于掉举:通过“同样地”这个词,是把掉举也归为被阿拉汉道所断除,并不是说它被两者所断除。因为掉举并不具有那种两者的性质。至于有些人说“这是凡夫相续中的,还是有学相续中的”,那在这里并不适用,因为这里所指的只是有学相续中的情况。巴利
Cittaṃ nivārentīti jhānādivasena uppajjanakaṃ kusalacittaṃ nisedhenti tathāssa uppajjituṃ na denti. Nīvaraṇappattoti nīvaraṇāvattho. ‘‘Arahattamaggavajjho’’ti etena bhavarāgānusayassapi nīvaraṇabhāvaṃ anujānāti, taṃ vicāretabbaṃ. Kimettha vicāretabbaṃ? ‘‘Āruppe kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ paṭicca thinamiddhanīvaraṇa’’nti (paṭṭhā. 3.nīvaraṇagocchake 8) ādivacanato na yidaṃ ‘‘pariyāyena vutta’’nti sakkā vattuṃ, sabbesampi tebhūmakadhammānaṃ kāmanīyaṭṭhena kāmabhāvato bhavarāgassapi kāmacchandabhāvassa icchitattā. Tasmā ‘‘kāmacchando nīvaraṇappatto’’ti bhavarāgānusayamāha. So hi arahattamaggavajjho. ‘‘Yā tasmiṃ samaye cittassa akalyatā’’ti (dha. sa. 1162) ādivacanato thinaṃ cittagelaññaṃ. Tathā ‘‘yā tasmiṃ samaye vedanākkhandhassā’’ti (dha. sa. 44) ādivacanato middhaṃ khandhattayagelaññaṃ. Ettha ca cittagelaññena cittasseva akalyatā, khandhattayagelaññena pana rūpakāyassapi thinamiddhassa niddāhetuttā. Tathā uddhaccanti uddhaccassa arahattamaggavajjhataṃ upasaṃharati tathā-saddena , na ubhayataṃ. Na hi tassa tādisī ubhayatā atthi. Yaṃ pana keci vadanti ‘‘puthujjanasantānavutti sekkhasantānavuttī’’ti, taṃ idha anupayogi sekkhasantānavuttino eva cettha adhippetattā.
“以那些”是指那些结。这里没有特别区分“下分”和“上分”,而是笼统地举出“结”这个词,是为了配合接下来要说的四类人。因为任何烦恼都还没有被镇伏,所以无论如何都还不能免除堕落;欲有成为执取内在的特殊条件,对这些众生来说,以内在的含义,称为“内”。色有和无色有则相反,称为“外”。正因如此,一个人的下分结如果还没有被断除,就被称为“内有结者”;如果那些结已经被断除,就被称为“外有结者”。所以,由于内在的束缚还没有被彻底切断,而外在的有分相续又在持续运转,就说他“内被束缚,卧于外”。所谓“卧”,是就无间断运转的有分相续来说的。虽然他们外在的束缚也还没有被断除,但因为内在的束缚更为粗重,所以才这样说。因此说“因为他们于欲有有结”。依照这个道理,其余两者的含义也应当这样理解。另外,当下分结还没有被断除、并且获得了条件时,上分结是不被计入的。这里因为只是就圣者才举出这四类人,凡夫虽然也可能有这种情况,但并没有被列出。巴利
Tehīti saṃyojanehi. ‘‘Orambhāgiyāni uddhambhāgiyānī’’ti visesaṃ anāmasitvā ‘‘saṃyojanānī’’ti sādhāraṇato paduddhāro idāni vuccamānacatukkānucchavikatāvasena, kassacipi kilesassa avikkhambhitattā kathañcipi avinipāteyyatāmutto kāmabhavo ajjhattaggahaṇassa visesapaccayattā imesaṃ sattānaṃ abbhantaraṭṭhena anto nāma. Rūpārūpabhavo tabbipariyāyato bahi nāma. Tathā hi yassa orambhāgiyāni saṃyojanāni appahīnāni, so ajjhattasaṃyojano vutto, yassa tāni pahīnāni, so bahiddhāsaṃyojano, tasmā anto asamucchinnabandhanatāya, bahi ca pavattamānabhavaṅgasantānatāya antobaddhā bahisayitā nāma. Nirantarappavattabhavaṅgasantānavasena hi sayitavohāro. Kāmaṃ nesaṃ bahibandhanampi asamucchinnaṃ, antobandhanassa pana thūlatāya evaṃ vuttaṃ . Tenāha ‘‘tesañhi kāmabhave bandhana’’nti. Iminā nayena sesadvayepi attho veditabbo. Asamucchinnesu ca orambhāgiyasaṃyojaniyesu laddhappaccayesu uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni agaṇanūpagāni hontīti. Ariyānaṃyeva vasenettha catukkassa uddhaṭattā labbhamānāpi puthujjanā na uddhaṭā.
“学处的部分”是指应当学习的那一部分。通过它来学习,所以叫“学处”,也就是达到修学目标的方法。这些内容前文已经讲过了,因此应当依据前文所说的方式来理解,这就是这里的意趣。巴利
Sikkhākoṭṭhāsoti sikkhitabbabhāgo. Pajjati sikkhā etenāti sikkhāpadaṃ, sikkhāya adhigamupāyoti. Āgatāyeva, tasmā tattha āgatanayeneva veditabbāti adhippāyo.
不能处等五组的详细解释巴利
Abhabbaṭṭhānādipañcakavaṇṇanā
316 “开示之首”就是指开示的教示本身,因此即使是入流者等人,也没有能力(造作此类恶行)。如果真是这样,那为什么还要这样开示呢?于是他说:“凡夫与漏尽者……”等等。巴利
316.Desanāsīsamevāti desanāpadeso eva, tasmā sotāpannādayopi abhabbā. Yadi evaṃ kasmā tathā desanāti āha ‘‘puthujjanakhīṇāsavāna’’ntiādi.
亲属遭遇不幸时,那些亲属的毁灭会破坏他们的利益和安乐,所以称为不幸。财富遭遇不幸时,道理也是一样。至于疾病等不幸,则要结合“谁的病”等说法来理解。它们不是不善,因为本性没有污染;也不受三相支配,因为属于不存在的法。相反,其余的情况则是不善,并且受三相支配。巴利
Ñātibyasane yesaṃ ñātīnaṃ vināso, tesaṃ hitasukhaṃ viddhaṃseti, tasmā byasatīti byasanaṃ. Bhogabyasanepi eseva nayo. Rogabyasanādīsu pana ‘‘yassa rogo’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Neva akusalāni asaṃkiliṭṭhasabhāvattā. Na tilakkhaṇāhatāni abhāvadhammattā. Itaraṃ pana vuttavipariyāyato akusalaṃ, tilakkhaṇāhatañca.
功德丰盛状态的成就。巴利
Guṇehi samiddhabhāvā sampadā.
指明事相:就是指出他犯戒所依的那件事本身的实际情形。指明犯戒:就是指出他所犯的那条罪。拒绝共住:就是禁止布萨、自恣等共同参与的做法,不与之共同行事。拒绝应行的恭敬:就是不做礼拜等应有的恭敬行为。由检举者:就是由举发的人。被检举者的时机:就是被检举的人应被检举的适当时机。人:就是应被检举的那个人。审察之后:就是审察“这个人是否处于应被检举的状态”之后。使他蒙受恶名:就是使比丘们蒙受恶名——“这些人用不实之事诽谤我,使我陷入不幸和灾祸。”巴利
Vatthusandassanāti yasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ tassa āpatti, tassa sarūpato dassanā. Āpattisandassanāti yaṃ āpattiṃ so āpanno, tassā dassanā. Saṃvāsapaṭikkhepoti uposathapavāraṇādisaṃvāsassa paṭikkhipanaṃ akaraṇaṃ. Sāmīcipaṭikkhepo abhivādanādisāmīcikiriyāya akaraṇaṃ. Codayamānenāti codentena. Cuditakassa kāloti cuditakassa puggalassa codetabbakālo. Puggalanti codetabbaṃ puggalaṃ. Upaparikkhitvāti ‘‘ayaṃ cuditakalakkhaṇe tiṭṭhati, na tiṭṭhatī’’ti vīmaṃsitvā. Ayasaṃ āropeti ‘‘ime maṃ abhūtena abbhācikkhantā anayabyasanaṃ āpādentī’’ti bhikkhūnaṃ ayasaṃ uppādeti.
精勤支五法的解释巴利
Padhāniyaṅgapañcakavaṇṇanā
317 317. “精勤”就是努力精进;一个专注于修习的修行者,他的这种状态就叫“修习随行”,也就是精勤的状态。因为具备精勤,所以叫“精勤者”;把ka改成ya,就说成“精勤支”。由于前面说“从发愿开始一路而来”,所以辟支菩萨和声闻菩萨从发愿以来就有的信心,也叫做“来征信”;但这里按照最殊胜的说明,指的是“一切知菩萨”。因为是从证得中产生的,所以与最上道果相应的信,也叫做“证得信”,也就是经中说的、作为入流者支分的那种信。“以不动性故”,是指不被对立面所压倒,具有不可动摇的特性。“信入”,是指完全进入、投身其中之后生起的坚定信解。“净信生起”,就是在值得净信的对象上生起净信。“善通达”,意思是极为透彻地通达了,就像凭这种通达,一切知智已经如在手中一样。如果有人因为佛陀的善觉性,对佛的信心坚定不动摇,那么由于法的善法性、僧的善行道性,他对法和僧的信心也同样坚定不动摇。若不是这样,那是不可能、没有道理的。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,若有人对佛有净信,他也就对法有净信,对僧有净信。”等等。精勤之力能够成就,是因为他认真地精勤:“凭借这条道路,我一定会从老死中解脱。”巴利
317. Padahatīti padahano; bhāvanaṃ anuyutto yogī, tassa bhāvo bhāvanānuyogo padahanabhāvo. Padhānaṃ assa atthīti padhāniko, ka-kārassa ya-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘padhāniyo’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya āgatattā’’ti vuttattā paccekabodhisattasāvakabodhisattānampi paṇidhānato pabhuti āgatā saddhā āgamanasaddhā eva, ukkaṭṭhaniddesena pana ‘‘sabbaññubodhisattāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Adhigamato samudāgatattā aggamaggaphalasampayuttāpi adhigamanasaddhā nāma, yā sotāpannassa aṅgabhāvena vuttā. Acalabhāvenāti paṭipakkhena anabhibhavanīyattā niccalabhāvena. Okappananti okkantitvā pakkhanditvā adhimuccanaṃ. Pasāduppatti pasādanīye vatthusmiṃ pasīdanameva. Suppaṭividdhanti suṭṭhu paṭividdhaṃ, yathā tena paṭivedhena sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ hatthagataṃ ahosi, tathā paṭividdhaṃ. Yassa buddhasubuddhatāya saddhā acalā asampavedhī, tassa dhammasudhammatāya, saṅghasuppaṭipannatāya ca saddhā na tathāti aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, buddhe pasanno, dhamme so pasanno, saṅghe so pasanno’’tiādi. Padhānavīriyaṃ ijjhati ‘‘addhā imāya paṭipadāya jarāmaraṇato muccissāmī’’ti sakkaccaṃ padahanato.
“少”这个音在这里表示“不存在”的意思,就像在“少字……中略……然而”这类句子中的用法一样,所以这里说“无病”。所谓“均等消化者”,是指以均匀的方式消化所吃食物的体质。消化力强的人,因为胆汁失调等缘故,会以猛烈的方式引发疾病;消化力弱的人,因为风力失调等缘故,会以微弱的方式引发疾病。因此说“不过冷,不过热”。由于众生消化之火的弱强差别,依次与冷、热相伴,所以说“过冷消化者”等等。如实地说出过失,就是暴露自己的过错,所以说“如实地揭示自己的缺点”。“趋向生灭者”,是指能洞见诸行的生起与坏灭,这就是这里的含义,所以说“于生与灭……”等等。“清净者”,即远离一切烦恼。“有能力穿透者”,是指以那一分的观照,就有能力断除其余的部分。“导向那种种苦的灭尽”:这里所说的“苦”,是指如果尚未证得此智便会持续生起的苦,一旦证得便不再生起。正是针对这个而说。因此,这位瑜伽行者被称为“小入流者”。巴利
Appa-saddo abhāvattho ‘‘appa-saddassa…pe… kho panā’’tiādīsu viyāti āha ‘‘arogo’’ti. Samavepākiniyāti yathābhuttaṃ āhāraṃ samākāreneva paccanasīlāya. Daḷhaṃ katvā paccantī hi gahaṇī ghorabhāvena pittavikārādivasena rogaṃ janeti, sithilaṃ katvā paccantī mandabhāvena vātavikārādivasena. Tenāha ‘‘nātisītāya nāccuṇhāyā’’ti. Gahaṇītejassa mandatikkhatāvasena sattānaṃ yathākkamaṃ sītuṇhasahagatāti āha ‘‘atisītagahaṇiko’’tiādi. Yāthāvato accayadesanā attano āvikaraṇaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ attano aguṇaṃ pakāsetā’’ti. Udayatthagāminiyāti saṅkhārānaṃ udayaṃ, vayañca paṭivijjhantiyāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘udayañcā’’tiādi. Parisuddhāyāti nirupakkilesāya. Nibbijjhituṃ samatthāyāti tadaṅgavasena avasesaṃ pajahituṃ samatthāya. Tassa tassa dukkhassa khayagāminiyāti yaṃ dukkhaṃ imasmiṃ ñāṇe anadhigate pavattārahaṃ, adhigate na pavattati, taṃ sandhāya vadati. Tathā hesa yogāvacaro ‘‘cūḷasotāpanno’’ti vuccati.
净居天等五类的解释巴利
Suddhāvāsādipañcakavaṇṇanā
318 从“他们只住在净居天”等语句,也说明即使在三种时间里,他们被称为净居者这一点都不会改变。说到“远离烦恼之垢”,是在说明名身清净的同时,实际上也显示了色身的清净。因此说“不来者与漏尽者”。巴利
318.‘‘Suddhāāvasiṃsū’’tiādinā addhattayepi tesaṃ suddhāvāsapariyāyo abyabhicārīti dasseti. Kilesamalarahitāti nāmakāyaparisuddhiṃ vadanto eva rūpakāyaparisuddhimpi atthato dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘anāgāmikhīṇāsavā’’ti.
在无烦天等天界,不论生在哪里,都不会超过那里寿量的中间。或者说“中途”,就是指在那寿量中间之前,也就是还在那个范围之内。“触及中间”,是指超过了寿量的中间。所以说“超越”。“以少用”,是指不用勉力。“不疲劳”,就是不疲倦。“以乐”,就是没有困难。“向上流者”,是因为他的渴爱之流和轮回之流有向上输送的性质;或者他需要向上走才能获得道流,所以叫向上流者。“去往色究竟天者”,就是前往色究竟天。“净化后”,是说他在各个天界受生时,就像在净化那些天界一样。或者说,他在那里受生之后,因为不再适合再度受生,就从那里离去,净化并镇伏了称为“天再生有”的自己这个蕴世间中的有贪之垢。这位圣者先在无烦天住一千劫,没能证得阿拉汉果,就去无热天;在那里住两千劫,也没能证得阿拉汉果,就去善见天;在那里住四千劫,也没能证得阿拉汉果,就去善现天;在那里住八千劫,也没能证得阿拉汉果,就去色究竟天;住在那里,证得了最上之道。巴利
Āyuno majjhanti avihādīsu yattha yattha uppanno, tattha tattha āyuno majjhaṃ anatikkamitvā. Antarā vāti tassa antarāva orameva. Majjhaṃ upahaccāti āyuno majjhaṃ aticca. Tenāha ‘‘atikkamitvā’’ti. Appayogenāti anussahanena. Akilamantoti akilanto. Sukhenāti akicchena. Uddhaṃ vāhibhāvena uddhaṃ assa taṇhāsotaṃ, vaṭṭasotañcāti uddhaṃsoto; uddhaṃ vā gantvā paṭilabhitabbato uddhaṃ assa maggasotanti uddhaṃsoto. Akaniṭṭhaṃ gacchatīti akaniṭṭhagāmī. Sodhetvāti tattha tattha uppajjanto te te devaloke sodhento viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘cattāro devaloke sodhetvā’’ti. Tattha tattha vā uppajjitvā puna anuppajjanārahabhāveneva tatopi gacchanto devūpapattibhavasaññite attano khandhaloke bhavarāgamalaṃ visodhetvā vikkhambhetvā. Ayañhi avihesu kappasahassaṃ vasanto arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇitvā atappaṃ gacchati, tatthāpi dve kappasahassāni vasanto arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇitvā sudassaṃ gacchati, tatthāpi cattārikappasahassāni vasanto arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇitvā sudassiṃ gacchati, tatthāpi aṭṭhakappasahassāni vasanto arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇitvā akaniṭṭhaṃ gacchati, tattha vasanto aggamaggaṃ adhigacchati.
五心荒芜的解释巴利
Cetokhilapañcakavaṇṇanā
319 所谓“心荒芜”,从含义上说就是疑和嗔。当它们在某个心相续中生起时,就会以那个相续的粗涩、僵硬的状态而存在,更不用说与它们相应的心了。所以说“心的僵硬状态”。就像因为具足相好而领纳了导师一切色身的美妙,同样,因为具足一切知智而领纳了一切法身的美妙。为了显示以这两者为依据的疑惑,所以说“对身体疑惑”等。
“热力”:以热力烧尽烦恼,就是正精进。所以说“为热力就是为了策发精进”。
“为再三的修习”:就是再三地致力于修习。
“为持续的作用”:就是无间断地致力于修习。
“对证悟之法疑惑”:这里问:怎么会对出世间法生起疑惑呢?并不是以出世间法为所缘而生起的;而是对通过传闻和思惟推度所得、被构想出来的形态生起疑惑。为了说明这一点,所以说“观……他们说这个存在吗?不存在吗?他这样疑惑着”。这里的“学处”应当理解为前行学处。在这里,由于证得殊胜时有大的过患,又因为共住接触而成为原因,嗔怒会频繁生起,所以特别把“对同梵行者”的嗔说为心荒芜的范围。但有些人说:“除此(同梵行者)之外在其他处的嗔怒不能被理解为非心荒芜。”如果这样,这个道理对疑也适用。因此应当只按照文句本身来理解。巴利
319.Cetokhilā nāma atthato vicikicchā kodho ca, te pana yasmiṃ santāne uppajjanti, tassa kharabhāvo kakkhaḷabhāvo hutvā upatiṭṭhanti, pageva attanā sampayuttacittassāti āha ‘‘cittassa thaddhabhāvo’’ti. Yathā lakkhaṇapāripūriyā gahitāya sabbā satthurūpakāyasirī gahitāva nāma hoti, evaṃ sabbaññutāya sabbā dhammakāyasirī’’ gahitā eva nāma hotīti tadubhayavatthukameva kaṅkhaṃ dassento ‘‘sarīre kaṅkhamāno’’tiādimāha. Ātapati kileseti ātappaṃ, sammāvāyāmoti āha ‘‘ātappāyāti vīriyakaraṇatthāyā’’ti. Punappunaṃ yogāyāti bhāvanaṃ punappunaṃ yuñjanāya. Satatakiriyāyāti bhāvanāya nirantarappayogāya. ‘‘Paṭivedhadhamme kaṅkhamāno’’ti ettha kathaṃ lokuttaradhamme kaṅkhā pavattatīti? Na ārammaṇakaraṇavasena, anussavākāraparivitakkaladdhe parikappitarūpe kaṅkhā pavattatīti dassento āha ‘‘vipassanā…pe… vadanti, taṃ atthi nu kho natthīti kaṅkhatī’’ti. Sikkhāti cettha pubbabhāgasikkhā veditabbā. ‘‘Kāmañcettha visesuppattiyā mahāsāvajjatāya ceva saṃvāsanimittaghaṭṭanāhetu abhiṇhuppattikatāya ca ‘sabrahmacārīsū’ti kopassa visayo visesetvā vutto, tato aññatthāpi pana kopo ‘na cetokhilo’ti na sakkā viññātu’’nti keci. Yadi evaṃ vicikicchāyapi ayaṃ nayo āpajjati, tasmā yathārutavaseneva gahetabbaṃ.
以心缚为首的五种解释巴利
Cetasovinibandhādipañcakavaṇṇanā
320 心缚:因为不给善心生起的机会而系缚善心,所以叫心缚。当它们系缚时,就像紧紧握住拳头一样,因此说“系缚心”等。贪欲之人既享受所依之欲,也享受烦恼之欲,所以说“于所依欲及于烦恼欲”。于自己的身体:指自己的业生身,或自己的有身。于外部的色:指他人的身体,以及不与根相连的色。饱腹者:使腹部饱满、堆积、充满。床座之乐:依卧于床座而生起的乐。转侧:翻身。专注:以渴爱来专注。如此,这五种都是贪的差别,应当知道被说为心缚。巴利
320. Pavattituṃ appadānavasena kusalacittaṃ vinibandhantīti cetasovinibandhā. Taṃ pana vinibandhantā muṭṭhigāhaṃ gaṇhantī viya hontīti āha ‘‘cittaṃ bandhitvā’’tiādi. Kāmagiddho puggalo vatthukāme viya kilesakāmepi assādeti abhinandatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vatthukāmepi kilesakāmepī’’ti. Attano kāyeti attano karajakāye, attabhāve vā. Bahiddhārūpeti paresaṃ kāye, anindriyabaddharūpe ca. Udaraṃ avadihati upacinoti paripūretīti udarāvadehakaṃ. Seyyasukhanti seyyāya sayanavasena uppajjanakasukhaṃ. Saṃparivattakanti saṃparivattetvā. Paṇidhāyāti taṇhāvasena paṇidahitvā. Iti pañcavidhopi lobhaviseso eva cetovinibandho vuttoti veditabbo.
这些只是被说成属于世间的,因为这里只提到了色根。第一、第二、第四根属于世间,因为它们属于有限的地界。第三和第五根以欲界和色界为顶,或者以欲界、色界、无色界为顶。把世间和出世间的根都说了之后,再连接起来理解。应当说“依止观与道果”,但这里说的是“依止观与道”。巴利
Lokiyāneva kathitāni rūpindriyānaṃyeva kathitattā. Paṭhamadutiyacatutthāni lokiyāni parittabhūmakattā. Tatiyapañcamāni kāmarūpaggabhūmikattā, kāmarūpārūpaggabhūmikattā ca. Lokiyalokuttarāni kathitānīti ānetvā yojanā. ‘‘Samathavipassanāmaggaphalavasenā’’ti vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Samathavipassanāmaggavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
五出离的解释巴利
Nissaraṇiyapañcakavaṇṇanā
321 321. 应当说“nissaraṇīyā”(能出离)的地方,把词缩短说成了“nissarantī”(出离)。因为这里的“anīya”这个词缀表示主动者,就像“niyyānikā”(能导出的)那样。所以论师说“nissaṭā”(已出离)。那么是从哪里出离的呢?从各自的对立面出离。以没有命(灵魂)的意义称为界,所以说“自性是空的、没有自我的”。从义理上说,这些是法界、意界、识界的不同。对这样的比丘来说,由于烦恼的缘故,对诸欲的作意根本不存在,所以说“为了审察”。意思是,他正在审察:“现在我的心倾向于出离,欲的寻思还会不会生起呢?”所谓“跃入”,就是深深进入,但在他那里并没有这个,所以说“不进入”。所谓“净信”,就是喜爱和安住,也就是解脱、胜解,论师把这一切都包含进来说“不获得净信”等等。然而,他的心既然是这样的,怎么会停留在那里呢?所以说“然而……”等等。“那”(taṃ)指初禅。“他的”(assa)指那位比丘的。“心跃入”:这是把遍作心和禅那心作为同一生起而合在一起说的。因为已行于其境,即只在自身的所缘中生起。因为不退减,即属于安住分,或者属于殊胜分。因为善解脱,即依镇伏解脱而真正解脱。因为伤害心和身,所以是苦;因为燃烧,所以是热恼,即欲的焦灼。他不感受,因为不生起。从那里出离,所以是出离。谁出离?诸欲。这样说来,“诸欲”用属格表示主动者,非常合适。从诸欲从那里“已出离”这一点来说,禅那也从欲“已出离”而得到这样的表述,所以说“因为从诸欲出离”。这样先依镇伏说了欲的出离,现在为了依断舍显示究竟的出离,所以说了“然而……”等等。巴利
321. Nissarantīti nissaraṇīyāti vattabbe rassaṃ katvā niddeso. Kattari hesa anīya-saddo yathā ‘‘niyyānikā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘nissaṭā’’ti. Kuto pana nissaṭāti? Yathāsakaṃ paṭipakkhato. Nijjīvaṭṭhena dhātuyoti āha ‘‘attasuññasabhāvā’’ti. Atthato pana dhammadhātumanoviññāṇadhātuvisesā. Tādisassa bhikkhuno kilesavasena kāmesu manasikāro nāma natthīti āha ‘‘vīmaṃsanattha’’nti. ‘‘Nekkhammanissitaṃ idāni me cittaṃ, kiṃ nu kho kāmavitakkopi uppajjatī’’ti vīmaṃsantassāti attho. Pakkhandanaṃ nāma anuppaveso, so pana tattha natthīti āha ‘‘na pavisatī’’ti. Pasādaṃ nāma abhirucisantiṭṭhānaṃ , vimuccanaṃ adhimuccananti taṃ sabbaṃ pakkhipanto vadati ‘‘pasādaṃ nāpajjatī’’tiādi. Evaṃbhūtaṃ panassa cittaṃ tattha kathaṃ tiṭṭhatīti āha ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi. Tanti paṭhamajjhānaṃ. Assāti bhikkhuno. Cittaṃ pakkhandatīti parikammacittena saddhiṃ jhānacittaṃ ekaṭṭhavasena ekajjhaṃ gahetvā vadati. Gocare gatattāti attano ārammaṇe eva pavattattā. Ahānabhāgiyattāti ṭhitibhāgiyattā, visesabhāgiyattā vā. Suṭṭhu vimuttanti vikkhambhanavimuttiyā sammadeva vimuttaṃ. Cittassa kāyassa ca hananato vighāto, dukkhaṃ. Paridahanato pariḷāho, kāmadaratho. Na vedayati anuppajjanato. Nissaranti tatoti nissaraṇaṃ. Ke nissaranti? Kāmā. Evañca katvā kāmānanti kattari sāmivacanaṃ suṭṭhu yujjati. Yadaggena kāmā tato ‘‘nissaṭā’’ti vuccanti, tadaggena jhānampi kāmato ‘‘nissaṭa’’nti vattabbataṃ labhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘kāmehi nissaṭattā’’ti. Evaṃ vikkhambhanavasena kāmanissaraṇaṃ vatvā idāni samucchedavasena accantatova nissaraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yo panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“其余部分”是指其余的部分。不过,这里有一个差别:论师在说明差别时,先说“以那禅那为足处”等是没有差别的,在第二和第三轮中完全没有提到这一点;但在第四轮中,为了显示这一点也是一个差别,所以说“在究竟出离这里,应当把阿拉汉果联系起来理解”。巴利
Sesapadesūti sesakoṭṭhāsesu. Ayaṃ pana visesoti visesaṃ vadantena ‘‘taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā’’tiādiko avisesoti vatvā dutiyatatiyavāresu sabbaso anāmaṭṭho, catutthavāre pana ayampi visesoti dassetuṃ ‘‘accantanissaraṇe cettha arahattaphalaṃ yojetabba’’nti vuttaṃ.
因为以无色界禅那作为基础,证得最高的道并安住在阿罗汉果的人,他的心可以说已经完全脱离了色法。他从果定出定之后,为了审察而将心转向色法时,这个状态就是这里所要说明的。以上是就止行者的情况,说了前面四种;而这里则是就纯观行者的情况来说的,所以论师说“纯诸行”等。接着“有身已不存在”这一念头生起:意思是,他正在审察“如今我的有身相续已经不存在了”,这样的心念生起。巴利
Yasmā arūpajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā aggamaggaṃ adhigantvā arahatte ṭhitassa cittaṃ sabbaso rūpehi nissaṭaṃ nāma hoti. Tassa hi phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhāya vīmaṃsanatthaṃ rūpābhimukhaṃ cittaṃ pesentassa idamakkhātanti samathayānikānaṃ vasena heṭṭhā cattāro vārā kathitā, idaṃ pana sukkhavipassakassa vasenāti āha ‘‘suddhasaṅkhāre’’tiādi. Puna sakkāyo natthīti uppannanti idāni me sakkāyappabandho natthīti vīmaṃsantassa uppannaṃ.
解脱处的五种法解说巴利
Vimuttāyatanapañcakavaṇṇanā
322 322. 从解脱来说,从轮回之苦中解脱出来的处所和原因,就是“解脱处”,所以论师说“解脱的原因”。对于了知圣典含义的人来说,就是如实了知“这里讲的是戒,这里讲的是定,这里讲的是慧”等等各项圣典含义。对于了知圣典文句的人来说,就是如实地观察那些阐明含义的圣典文句。嫩喜:就是刚刚生起、柔软的喜生起。怎么生起呢?当人观察所说的法时,把握与自身相应的身、语、意行为,获得喜悦,具有欢悦特相的欢悦就生起。成为满足状态的强力喜:因为依靠先前生起的喜而得到反复修习,成为极度满足的状态,能够成为止息身心疲劳的轻安的助缘,这样获得力量的喜就生起。因为名身轻安时,色身也一定轻安,所以只说“名身轻安”。获得乐:就是获得能够成为接下来要说的心等持之助缘的心所法、出离世俗的乐。“得定”:这里并不是指任何一种定,而是指无上定。为了说明这一点,论师说“以阿罗汉果定而得定”。“此……”等语,是为了说明对于那样的修行者,如前所说的定成就得以生起的原因。这就是它的解脱处性。“引导”:就是引导。定本身就是定的相:因为在业处圣典中所说的定,是后来生起的修定之因,所以是定的相。因此论师说“在老师面前”等等。巴利
322. Vimuttiyā vaṭṭadukkhato vimuccanassa āyatanāni kāraṇāni vimuttāyatanānīti āha ‘‘vimuccanakāraṇānī’’ti. Pāḷiatthaṃ jānantassāti ‘‘idha sīlaṃ āgataṃ, idha samādhi, idha paññā’’tiādinā taṃ taṃ pāḷiatthaṃ yāthāvato jānantassa. Pāḷiṃ jānantassāti tadatthajotanaṃ pāḷiṃ yāthāvato upadhārentassa. Taruṇapītīti sañjātamattā mudukā pīti jāyati. Kathaṃ jāyati? Yathādesitadhammaṃ upadhārentassa tadanucchavikameva attano kāyavacīmanosamācāraṃ pariggaṇhantassa somanassappattassa pamodalakkhaṇaṃ pāmojjaṃ jāyati. Tuṭṭhākārabhūtā balavapītīti purimuppannāya pītiyā vasena laddhāsevanattā ativiya tuṭṭhākārabhūtā kāyacittadarathapassambhanasamatthāya passaddhiyā paccayo bhavituṃ samatthā balappattā pīti jāyati. Yasmā nāmakāye passaddhe rūpakāyopi passaddho eva hoti, tasmā ‘‘nāmakāyo paṭipassambhati’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Sukhaṃ paṭilabhatīti vakkhamānassa cittasamādhānassa paccayo bhavituṃ samatthaṃ cetasikaṃ nirāmisaṃ sukhaṃ paṭilabhati vindati. ‘‘Samādhiyatī’’ti ettha na yo koci samādhi adhippeto, atha kho anuttarasamādhīti dassento ‘‘arahatta phalasamādhinā samādhiyatī’’ti āha. ‘‘Ayañhī’’tiādi tassā desanāya tādisassa puggalassa yathāvuttasamādhipaṭilābhassa kāraṇabhāvavibhāvanaṃ. Tassa vimuttāyatanabhāvo. Osakkitunti nayituṃ. Samādhiyeva samādhinimittanti kammaṭṭhānapāḷiāruḷho samādhiyeva parato uppajjanakabhāvanāsamādhissa kāraṇabhāvato samādhinimittaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ācariyasantike’’tiādi.
“解脱”说的是阿罗汉果,因为它是从一切烦恼中彻底止息而得的解脱。“使之圆满”就是成就、完成。在无常随观智中生起的想,以无常随观智为依止缘,意思是与那种智同时生起。其余几种情况也是同样的道理。至于这里应当说明的内容,应按照《清净道论注疏》里所说的方式来了知。巴利
Vimuttivuccati arahattaṃ sabbaso kilesehi paṭippassaddhivimuttīti katvā. Paripācentīti sādhenti nipphādenti. Aniccānupassanāñāṇe nissayapaccayabhūte uppannasaññā, tena ñāṇena sahagatāti attho. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.37, 306) vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
323 323. “以自己为增上,即内”:在复合词的语境里,“adhi”这个词既有“增上”的意思,也有“生起”的意思,这里取这两个意思来说,所以“缘于自己、针对自己而生起的”就叫作“内”。在自身相续中存在的东西,就是“内处”。在自身相续的内部,眼等也被称为内处;不过,为了说明它们到底是凭什么样的“内性”才被称为“内者”,才把它清楚地解释为“内者”。从词源上看,“内内者”就是“内内处”,这要像理解“调御者”那样来理解。所谓“从彼内”,就是从那些被称为内者的东西。与内者相对的是外者,就像内法和外法相对一样。“内者”指的是自己相续中的眼等;同样,色等则叫作“外者”。而真正的内,只是自相续中的眼、色等,除此之外的都是外。说到“识聚”:虽然这些识因为时间不同,并没有同时聚合在一起,但因为心把它们一同聚集起来,所以称为“聚”,就像说“受蕴”一样。“依止眼净色者”:指依眼净色为缘而生起的善、不善异熟识,用“眼识性”这一共性把它们合在一起说。这是“眼所依的触”,不是“眼门的触”。“对于这些触”:是指除了这十种以净色为依处的异熟触之外。“依此理”:就是依前面说触的那个道理。在“爱六法”里,围绕着爱而生起的爱,应该知道就是“法爱”。巴利
323. Attānaṃ adhi ajjhattā,adhi-saddo samāsavisaye adhikāratthaṃ, pavattiatthañca gahetvā pavattatīti attānaṃ adhikicca uddissa pavattā ajjhattā; ajjhattesu bhavāni ajjhattikānīti niyakajjhattesupi abbhantarāni cakkhādīni vuccanti, tāni pana yena ajjhattabhāvena ‘‘ajjhattikānī’’ti vuccanti, tamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassento ‘‘ajjhattikānī’’ti āha. Saddatthato pana ajjhattajjhattāniyeva ajjhattajjhattikāni yathā ‘‘venayiko’’ti (ma. ni. 1.246; a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 8) daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tato ajjhattatoti tato ajjhattajjhattato, yāni ajjhattikāni vuttāni. Ajjhattikānañhi paṭiyogīni bāhirāni ajjhattadhammānaṃ viya bahiddhādhammā. ‘‘Ajjhattikānī’’ti hi saparasantānikāni cakkhādīni vuccanti, tathā rūpādīni ‘‘bāhirānī’’ti. Ajjhattāni pana sasantānikā eva cakkhurūpādayo, tato aññeva bahiddhāti. ‘‘Viññāṇasamūhā’’ti ettha yadipi tesaṃ viññāṇānaṃ samodhānaṃ natthi bhinnakālikattā, cittena pana ekajjhaṃ abhisaṃyūhanavasena samūhatā vuttā yathā ‘‘vedanākkhandho’’ti. Cakkhupasādanissitanti cakkhupasādaṃ nissāya paccayaṃ labhitvā uppannaṃ kusalākusalavipākaviññāṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇatāsāmaññena ekajjhaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Cakkhusannissito samphasso, na cakkhudvāriko. Imedasa samphasseti ime pasādavatthuke dasa vipākasamphasse ṭhapetvā. Eteneva nayenāti etena phasse vutteneva nayena. Taṇhāchakke taṇhaṃ ārabbha pavattāpi taṇhā dhammataṇhāti veditabbā.
“无依止”就是“无应诺”,这是把 va 转成 ya 之后作出的解释。当师长有什么吩咐时,出于恭敬而应诺,这就是“应诺”,也就是应诺的行为,或者与此相应的一切恭敬。如果在他那里没有这样的应诺,就叫“无应诺”,意思是缺少恭敬。因此说他“生活无依止”。就像为佛塔所做的一切等同于为大师本人所做的一样,在佛塔前所做的也等同于在大师面前所做的,所以经文才说“在般涅槃之后”等等。不恭敬地前往,就是没有生起尊重敬意而走近。譬如学处的一部分被破坏时,以及不恭敬被造作时,一切学处都被破坏;于一切处所造的不恭敬,从整体上说就是摄律仪的破坏,从部分上说也是破坏。同样,对一位比丘……乃至……不恭敬也就被造作了。仅仅由于无敬意,学处就已经不圆满,因此说“不圆满学处者,名为不恭敬”。不放逸相就是正行道。“二种”就是依法与依财而分为二种。巴利
Appaṭissayoti appaṭissavo, va-kārassa ya-kāraṃ katvā niddeso. Garunā kismiñci vutte gāravavasena paṭissavanaṃ paṭissavo, paṭissavabhūtaṃ, taṃsabhāgañca yaṃ kiñci gāravaṃ, natthi etasmiṃ paṭissavoti appaṭissavo, gāravarahito. Tenāha ‘‘anīcavuttī’’ti. Yathā cetiyaṃ uddissa kataṃ satthu katasadisaṃ, evaṃ cetiyassa purato kataṃ satthu purato katasadisaṃ evāti āha ‘‘parinibbute panā’’tiādi. Sakkaccaṃ na gacchatīti ādaraṃ gāravaṃ uppādetvā na upasaṅkamati. Yathā sikkhāya ekadese kopite, agārave ca kate sabbā sikkhā kuppati, sabbattha ca agāravaṃ kataṃ nāma hoti samudāyato saṃvarasamādānaṃ avayavato bhedoti. Evaṃ ekabhikkhusmiṃpi…pe… agāravo katova hoti. Anādariyamattenapi sikkhāya aparipūriyevāti āha ‘‘apūrayamānova sikkhāya agāravo nāmā’’ti. Appamādalakkhaṇaṃ sammāpaṭipatti. Duvidhanti dhammāmisavasena duvidhaṃ.
“与喜相应的伺察”是指与喜悦一起生起的伺。这里的“upa”只是语助词,所以注释者说“与喜悦相应的伺”。因为在阿毗达摩中确实有这样的说明:“寻、伺……乃至随伺”。所谓“成为喜悦的原因”,是从它的自性来说,也是从意向来说,都是喜悦生起的条件。虽然欲界的寻与伺互不分离,但按作用来分,寻因为首先投向目标,它的作用更为突出。此后才是伺的作用,因此针对这一点,先用“寻之后”这种表示前时动作的方式来说,然后再说“以伺加以界定”。已经反复练习过的伺,它的作用就像慧一样。因此《藏论》中说:“伺是对治疑的。”在“见同分者”这句话里,一个人依某种见而被称为见同分,这里指的是《憍赏弥经》中所说的初道正见,所以说“《憍赏弥经》讲了初道”。这里,也就是在这部经中,以“见”这个词已经把四道的正见全都包括进去了,所以说“四道也都讲了”。巴利
Somanassūpavicārāti somanassasahagatā vicārā adhippetā, upasaddo ca nipātamattanti āha ‘‘somanassasampayuttā vicārā’’ti. Tathā hissa abhidhamme (dha. sa. 8) ‘‘cāro vicāro…pe… upavicāro’’ti niddeso pavatto. Somanassakāraṇabhūtanti sabhāvato, saṅkappatopi somanassassa uppattiyā paccayabhūtaṃ. Kāmaṃ parittabhūmakā vitakkavicārā aññamaññamaviyogino , kiriyābhedato pana paṭhamābhinipātatāya vitakkassa byāpāro sātisayo. Tato paraṃ vicārassāti taṃ sandhāya ‘‘vitakketvā’’ti pubbakālakiriyāvasena vatvā ‘‘vicārena paricchindatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Laddhapubbāsevanassa vicārassa byāpāro paññā viya hoti. Tathā hi ‘‘vicāro vicikicchāya paṭipakkho’’ti peṭake vuttaṃ. ‘‘Diṭṭhisāmaññagato’’ti ettha yāya diṭṭhiyā puggalo diṭṭhisāmaññaṃ gato vutto, sā paṭhamamaggasammādiṭṭhi kosambakasutte adhippetoti āha ‘‘kosambakasutte paṭhamamaggo kathito’’ti. Idhāti imasmiṃ sutte. Catūsupi maggesu sammādiṭṭhi diṭṭhiggahaṇena gahitāti āha ‘‘cattāropi maggā kathitā’’ti.
诤论根本六法的解说巴利
Vivādamūlachakkavaṇṇanā
325 “易怒者”是指有发怒习性的人。因为那人没有断除愤怒,所以不能称为已离愤怒的人,因此说“具足愤怒”。“怀恨者”是指有怨恨,或者说有怀恨习性的人。所谓“诤论”,生起时大多数情况下首先以两人为起因,所以说“两位比丘的诤论”。接着,为了通过这个例子说明它如何给许多人带来不利,便以“如何”等语开始讲述。“内部众”是指在众会内部。巴利
325.Kodhanoti kujjhanasīlo. Yasmā so appahīnakodhatāya vigatakodhano nāma na hoti, tasmā ‘‘kodhena samannāgato’’ti āha. Upanāho etassa atthi, upanayhanasīloti vā upanāhī. Vivādo nāma uppajjamāno yebhuyyena paṭhamaṃ dvinnaṃ vasena uppajjatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vivādo’’ti. So pana yathā bahūnaṃ anatthāvaho hoti, taṃ nidassanamukhena dassento ‘‘katha’’ntiādimāha. Abbhantaraparisāyāti parisabbhantare.
“抹恩”是指:即使它的作用是抹掉别人的功德,也会像扔粪便的人先被粪便弄脏一样,先污染自己。具有这种心态的人就是“抹恩者”。“攀比”是指:像咬住一样,把别人的功德去掉。具有这种心态的人就是“攀比者”。因为攀比的人不肯给别人分担责任,总是自己平摊开来占着。因此说“他具有以争胜为特征的攀比”。至于“嫉妒者”等词的含义,按照前面所说的方式就很容易理解。这里应当把邪见理解为已经达到业道程度的邪见,所以说“持无有论者、持无因论者、持无作用论者”。巴利
Paraguṇamakkhanāya pavattopi attano kārakaṃ gūthena paharantaṃ gūtho viya paṭhamataraṃ makkhetīti makkho, so etassa atthīti makkhī. Palāsatīti palāso, parassa guṇe ḍaṃsitvā viya apanetīti attho, so etassa atthīti palāsī. Palāsī puggalo hi dutiyassa dhuraṃ na deti, samaṃ pasāretvā tiṭṭhati. Tenāha ‘‘yugaggāhalakkhaṇena palāsena samannāgato’’ti. ‘‘Issukī’’tiādīnaṃ padānamattho heṭṭhā vuttanayattā suviññeyyova. Kammapathappattāya micchādiṭṭhiyā vasenettha micchādiṭṭhi veditabbāti āha ‘‘natthikavādī ahetukavādī akiriyavādī’’ti.
出离六法的注释巴利
Nissaraṇiyachakkavaṇṇanā
326 “减退”:是指让善心衰退之后,仅仅以不布施的方式继续运作。“说非真实之语”:是指用“我确实已修习慈心解脱”这类话,宣说自己身上并不存在的功德。因为考虑到“心解脱”这个词,才说“已脱离”。“再无瞋恚”:是指现在知道“我的瞋恚确实已经完全没有了”。巴利
326.Hāpetvāti kusalacittaṃ parihāpetvā pavattitumeva appadānavasena. Abhūtaṃ byākaraṇaṃ byākaroti ‘‘mettā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā’’tiādinā (a. ni. 6.13) attani avijjamānaṃ guṇabyāhāraṃ byāharati. Cetovimutti-saddaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘nissaṭā’’ti vuttaṃ. Puna byāpādo natthīti idāni mama byāpādo nāma natthi sabbaso natthīti ñatvā.
说了“无相”之后,为了说明正是因为缺少哪些相,阿拉汉果等至才被称为无相,所以接着说了“因为此……”等话。其中,贪的相就是贪相,或者贪本身就是相。由“等”这个字,应当理解为包含了嗔相等等。以色、受等诸行为相,就是色相等等。那些同样的相以常等方式呈现出来,就是常相等等。这个相在阿拉汉果中完全不存在,因此说“因为此……被称为无相”。随逐相,就是跟随那个相,以那个相为所缘而生起。巴利
‘‘Animittā’’ti vatvā yesaṃ nimittānaṃ abhāvena arahattaphalasamāpattiyā animittatā, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha rāgassa nimittaṃ, rāgo eva vā nimittanti rāganimittaṃ. Ādi-saddena dosanimittādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Rūpavedanādisaṅkhāranimittaṃ rūpanimittādi. Tesaññeva niccādivasena upaṭṭhānaṃ niccanimittādi. Tayidaṃ nimittaṃ yasmā sabbena sabbaṃ arahattaphale natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sā hi…pe… animittāti vuttā’’ti. Nimittaṃ anusaratīti taṃ nimittaṃ anugacchati ārabbha pavattati.
“我慢”就是以“我是”这种方式生起、以自我为对象的慢。这里说的是:认为“这个叫做我的东西就是‘我是’”,它以色为特征,或者在受等当中以某一种为特征,认为“这个叫做自我的东西就是我”。因为靠它能连根拔除“我是”的慢,所以叫“我慢的连根拔除”,也就是阿拉汉道。再说“再也没有我慢”,是在说明它不再生起这一法性,从而点明那正是连根拔除本身。巴利
Asmimānoti ‘‘asmī’’ti pavatto attavisayo māno. Ayaṃ nāma ahaṃ asmīti rūpalakkhaṇo, vedanādīsu vā aññataralakkhaṇo ayaṃ nāma attā ahaṃ asmi. ‘‘Asmī’’ti māno samugghāṭīyati etenāti asmimānasamugghāto, arahattamaggo. Puna asmimāno natthīti tassa anuppattidhammatāpādanaṃ kittento samugghātattameva vibhāveti.
无上等六法的详细解说巴利
Anuttariyādichakkavaṇṇanā
327 327. “没有比这些更高、更殊胜的”,所以叫“无上”;无上本身就是“无上事”,就像“无边”本身就是“无边事”一样,因此说“无上事就是无上”。所谓“见无上”,是因为它能带来无上果的特殊利益。这个道理也适用于其余各项。“获得七种圣财”,是指获得信等七种出世间的财富。“圆满三学”,是指增上戒学等三学的圆满。其中,圆满应当理解为就无学者而言。因为从善凡夫开始,七类有学只能说是正在圆满三学,而阿拉汉才是已圆满学。因此,这些无上事被说为有世间的,也有出世间的。巴利
327. Natthi etesaṃ uttarāni visiṭṭhānīti anuttarāni, anuttarāni eva anuttariyāni yathā anantameva ānantariyanti āha ‘‘anuttariyānīti anuttarānī’’ti. Dassanānuttariyaṃ nāma anuttaraphalavisesāvahattā. Esa nayo sesesupi. Sattavidhaariyadhanalābhoti sattavidhasaddhādilokuttaradhanalābho. Sikkhattayapūraṇanti adhisīlasikkhādīnaṃ tissannaṃ sikkhānaṃ paripūraṇaṃ. Tattha paripūraṇaṃ nippariyāyato asekkhānaṃ vasena veditabbaṃ. Kalyāṇaputhujjanato paṭṭhāya hi satta sekkhā tisso sikkhā pūrenti nāma, arahā pana paripuṇṇasikkhoti. Iti imāni anuttariyāni lokiyalokuttarāni kathitāni.
随念本身就是现法利益、后世利益等安乐的因,所以称为随念处。像这样随念:正如佛随念能成为殊胜证得的依处,对于以“彼世尊确实是这样……”等方式随念佛功德的人也是如此。近行业处,是指能直接带来近行禅那的业处;而通过辗转相续,乃至能带来世间与出世间的殊胜,直到证得阿拉汉果。巴利
Anussatiyoeva diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikādihitasukhānaṃ kāraṇabhāvato ṭhānānīti anussatiṭṭhānāni. Evaṃ anussaratoti yathā buddhānussati visesādhigamassa ṭhānaṃ hoti, evaṃ ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.157, 255) buddhaguṇe anussarantassa. Upacārakammaṭṭhānanti paccakkhato upacārajjhānāvahaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ, paramparāya pana yāva arahattā lokiyalokuttaravisesāvahaṃ.
常住六法的注释巴利
Satatavihārachakkavaṇṇanā
328 “常住处”是指一切时候都持续不断的安住方式。因为除了入定的时段和落入有分心的时段以外,诸漏尽者就是靠着这六支舍的安住方式,在一切时候安住。
“以眼见色”是依照所依处来说的。这是一种带比喻的说法,就像说“用弓射中”一样。所以,应该理解为:以所依处为首,来指代依于所依处而生的识,因此说“以眼识见色”。
“对可爱的不贪染”:面对可爱的所缘时不生起贪染,因为道已经把它彻底断除了。
“既不欢喜”:也不会因为世俗牵挂式的爱染而欢喜。
“也不忧恼”:也不会因为信心的变坏而忧恼。
“不审察”:对于可爱的、不可爱的、中舍的所缘,不以平等、不以正确的方式作意,也就是不如理地取着。那些在未漏尽者身上会生起的痴,因为道已经把它彻底根除,所以不再生起。
他只是以智舍的方式,以平等心而住。这是就他修行圆满、智慧圆满来说的,因此说“以念”等等。
“六支舍”:在六个门中运作的、以念与正知为依托的舍,有六个组成部分。与智相应的心是能够生起的,因为离开了它们,正知就不可能存在。
“大心”:也就是八种大作用心能够生起。
“恒常安住”:即使在还没有生起智的因缘时,也因为有持续运作的差别。
“十种心”:八种大作用心,加上笑心生起心和确定心,一共十种心能够生起。它们也以不贪、不瞋的方式运作,这是共同的。
既然说“以舍而住”,那么对于以六支舍的方式而来的这些恒常安住,有人质问“喜又是怎么得到的呢”,他自己就回答说“从反复修习而得到”。
虽然诸漏尽者面对可爱和不可爱的所缘时,因为不放弃自己清净的本性,大多数时候都像处于中舍一样以舍而住,但有时候,在那种没有心的造作的情况下,对于那种本质上可爱的所缘,阿罗汉的心也会以如实取取其本性这种方式,生起为与喜相应而运作,而那确实是依靠过去的反复修习。因此说“从反复修习而得到”。巴利
328.Niccavihārāti sabbadā pavattanakavihārā. Ṭhapetvā hi samāpattivelaṃ, bhavaṅgavelañca khīṇāsavā imināva chaḷaṅgupekkhāvihārena sabbakālaṃ viharanti. Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti nissayavohārena vuttaṃ. Sasambhārakathā hesā yathā ‘‘dhanunā vijjhatī’’ti. Tasmā nissayasīsena nissitassa gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbanti āha ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇena disvā’’ti. Iṭṭhe arajjantoti iṭṭhe ārammaṇe rāgaṃ anuppādento maggena samucchinnattā. Neva sumano hoti gehasitapemavasenapi. Na dummano pasādaññathattavasenapi. Asamapekkhaneti iṭṭhepi aniṭṭhepi majjhattepi ārammaṇe na samaṃ na sammā ayoniso gahaṇe. Yo akhīṇāsavānaṃ moho uppajjati, taṃ anuppādento maggeneva tassa samugghāṭitattā. Ñāṇupekkhāvaseneva upekkhako viharati majjhatto. Ayañcassa paṭipattivepullappattiyā , paññāvepullappattiyā vāti āha ‘‘satiyā’’tiādi. Chaḷaṅgupekkhāti chasu dvāresu pavattā satisampajaññassa vasena chāvayavā upekkhā. Ñāṇasampayuttacittāni labbhanti tehi vinā sampajānatāya asambhavato. Mahācittānīti aṭṭhapi mahākiriyacittāni labbhanti. Satatavihārāti ñāṇuppattipaccayarahitakālepi pavattibhedanato. Dasa cittānīti aṭṭha mahākiriyacittāni hasituppādavoṭṭhabbanacittehi saddhiṃ dasa cittāni labbhanti. Arajjanādussanavasena pavatti tesampi sādhāraṇāti.‘‘Upekkhako viharatī’’ti vacanato chaḷaṅgupekkhāvasena āgatānaṃ imesaṃ satatavihārānaṃ ‘‘somanassaṃ kathaṃ labbhatī’’ti codetvā ‘‘āsevanato labbhatī’’ti sayameva pariharatīti. Kiñcāpi khīṇāsavo iṭṭhāniṭṭhepi ārammaṇe majjhatte viya bahulaṃ upekkhako viharati attano parisuddhapakatibhāvāvijahanato, kadāci pana tathā cetobhisaṅkhārābhāve yaṃ taṃ sabhāvato iṭṭhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ, tattha yāthāvasabhāvaggahaṇavasenapi arahato cittaṃ somanassasahagataṃ hutvā pavattateva, tañca kho pubbāsevanavasena. Tenāha ‘‘āsevanato labbhatī’’ti.
六种再生方式的注释巴利
Abhijātichakkavaṇṇanā
329 关于“生”这句,这里的“abhi”只是个前缀,并不表示特别的意思,所以说成“生”。在“再生”这个词里,也是同样的道理。而“生”这个词本身含有因的词义,就是“产生”。关于生,以及能产生它的那些业,由于它们有黑白善恶的分别,该说的前面已经说过了。通过止息来熄灭烦恼,所以叫涅槃。如果它是黑的,就像那十种不善业;如果是白的,就像布施、持戒等善业。这两类黑白的果报也是这样。经文里说“再生”,指的是阿罗汉果。因为那是在烦恼完全止息的尽头生起的,这就是涅槃,就像贪的灭尽尽头称为贪尽、嗔的灭尽尽头称为嗔尽、痴的灭尽尽头称为痴尽一样。巴利
329. ‘‘Abhijātiyo’’ti ettha abhi-saddo upasaggamattaṃ, na atthavisesajotakoti āha ‘‘jātiyo’’ti. Abhijāyatīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Jāyatīti ca antogadhahetuatthapadaṃ, uppādetīti attho. Jātiyā, taṃnibbattakakammānañca kaṇhasukkapariyāyatāya yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Paṭippassambhanavasena kilesānaṃ nibbāpanato nibbānaṃ sace kaṇhaṃ bhaveyya yathā taṃ dasavidhaṃ dussīlyakammaṃ. Sace sukkaṃ bhaveyya yathā taṃ dānasīlādikusalakammaṃ. Dvinnampi kaṇhasukkavipākānaṃ. Arahattaṃ adhippetaṃ ‘‘abhijāyatī’’ti vacanato. Taṃ kilesanibbānante jātattā nibbānaṃ yathā rāgādīnaṃ khayante jātattā rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo mohakkhayoti.
《抉择分六》的注释巴利
Nibbedhabhāgiyachakkavaṇṇanā
“通达”指的是涅槃,因为它的含义是应当以道智去通达、应当以道智去证知。“灭尽随观智中的想”:意思是依灭尽随观智作为所依缘而生起的想,与那个智相应俱行。巴利
Nibbedhovuccati nibbānaṃ maggañāṇena nibbijjhitabbaṭṭhena, paṭivijjhitabbaṭṭhenāti attho. Nirodhānupassanāñāṇeti nirodhānupassanāñāṇe nissayapaccayabhūte uppannā saññā, tena sahagatāti attho.
330 “以成就获得之义”是指:通过获得戒成就等一直到正等觉成就这些成就,或者说,成就的获得就是“成就获得”,它的因就是“成就获得之义”,也就是以那个成就获得之义。因此说“因为是成就获得的因”。信,因为追求两种利益的人应当把它当作财富来看待,所以叫财富,也就是信财。“在此处”就是指在这些财富当中。它最为殊胜,因为它是获得一切成就的因,而且能通过净化那些财富的染污,使它们产生大光明、大遍满。因此说“以慧……”等。其中,“住立于慧”是指:以业自性慧为立足点,圆满善行等,从而投生天界;在那里,又安住于慧、立足于波罗蜜,从而证得声闻波罗蜜智等。巴利
330.Sampattipaṭilābhaṭṭhenāti sīlasampattiādīnaṃ sammāsambodhipariyosānānaṃ sampattīnaṃ paṭilābhāpanaṭṭhena, sampattīnaṃ vā paṭilābho sampattipaṭilābho, tassa kāraṇaṃ sampattipaṭilābhaṭṭho, tena sampattipaṭilābhaṭṭhena. Tenevāha ‘‘sampattīnaṃ paṭilābhakāraṇato’’ti. Saddhāva ubhayahitatthikehi dhanāyitabbaṭṭhena dhanaṃ saddhādhanaṃ. Etthāti etesu dhanesu. Sabbaseṭṭhaṃ sabbesaṃ paṭilābhakāraṇabhāvato, tesañca saṃkilesavisodhanena mahājutikamahāvipphārabhāvāpādanato. Tenāha ‘‘paññāya hī’’tiādi. Tattha paññāya ṭhatvāti kammassakatāpaññāya patiṭṭhāya sucaritādīnipūretvā saggūpagā honti. Tattha ceva pāramitā paññāya ca ṭhatvā sāvakapāramiñāṇādīni paṭivijjhanti.
定资具:它们庄严定、促成定,所以叫定资具,也就是正见等作为定之资粮的诸法。不过在这里,特指那些作为助伴因的,所以说定之随从。巴利
Samādhiṃ parikkharonti abhisaṅkharontīti samādhiparikkhārā, samādhissa sambhārabhūtā sammādiṭṭhiādayo. Idha pana sahakārīkāraṇabhūtā adhippetāti āha ‘‘samādhiparivārā’’ti.
不善者的法,因为那些法使他们成为不善。「非善」就是不好、应当被呵责的。因此说「低劣的」。说了「唯为观行者所说」之后,为了说明那观行如何生起,又说「于他们中」等。因为道智是殊胜地通达四圣谛,所以应当说它特别就是「观」;而具足这道智的圣者,就是观行者。巴利
Asataṃ asādhūnaṃ dhammā tesaṃ asādhubhāvasādhanato. Asantāti asundarā gārayhā. Tenāha ‘‘lāmakā’’ti. ‘‘Vipassakasseva kathitā’’ti vatvā tassa vipassanānibbattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tesupī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Catunnampi hi saccānaṃ visesena dassanato maggapaññā sātisayaṃ ‘‘vipassanā’’ti vattabbā, taṃsamaṅgī ca ariyo vipassanakoti.
善士之法,就是善士自己的法,不是不善士的法。只有通过法随法行地实践,才能成为知法者等,而不是单靠读诵巴利法句等就能成就。所说的,是指经、应颂等佛说,以及其他能让人明白自利、利他的文句。以对义理善巧而了知义,就是知义者。如实了知自己,就是按照实际情况,以了知自己的程度来了知自己。之所以只说在接受与受用上知量,是因为由此也能了知在寻求与施舍上的知量,这样就没有过失。为了证得瑜伽,就是为了致力于修习。过于狭小,就是极为短暂,因为对于极其敏锐的人,在那样短的时间内也无法仔细审察。八种众,就是刹帝利众等八种众。另有一些人说,取比丘众等四种和刹帝利众等人众四种,合起来说为八种。知道“我亲近此人时,不善法减退,善法增长,因此应亲近他;与此相反,其他不应亲近”这样应亲近与不应亲近的人,就是知人者。如此,也能了知那些人的教化是殊胜还是低劣。巴利
Sappurisānaṃ dhammāti sappurisānaṃyeva dhammā, na asappurisānaṃ. Dhammānudhammapaṭipattiyā eva hi dhammaññuādibhāvo , na pāḷidhammapaṭhanādimattena. Bhāsitassāti suttageyyādibhāsitassa ceva tadaññassa ca attatthaparatthabodhakassa padassa. Atthakusalatāvasena atthaṃ jānātīti atthaññū . Attānaṃ jānātīti yāthāvato attano pamāṇajānanavasena attānaṃ jānāti. Paṭiggahaṇaparibhogamattaññutāhi eva pariyesanavissajjanamattaññutāpi bodhitā hontīti ‘‘paṭiggahaṇaparibhogesu’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Evañhi tā anavajjā hontīti. Yogassa adhigamāyāti bhāvanāya anuyuñjanassa. Atisambādhanti atikhuddakaṃ atikkhapaññassa tāvatā kālena tīretuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā. Aṭṭhavidhaṃ parisanti khattiyaparisādikaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ parisaṃ. Bhikkhuparisādikaṃ catubbidhaṃ khattiyaparisādikaṃ manussaparisaṃyeva puna catubbidhaṃ gahetvā aṭṭhavidhaṃ vadanti apare. ‘‘Imaṃ me sevantassa akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, tasmā sevitabbo, vipariyāyato tadañño asevitabbo’’ti evaṃ sevitabbāsevitabbaṃ puggalaṃ jānātīti puggalaññū. Evaṃ tesaṃ puggalānampi bodhanaṃ ukkaṭṭhaṃ, nihīnaṃ vā jānāti nāma.
331 331. “未满十年之事”。注释说“由于省略了开头的词,这是指未满十年等之事”。此人现在已经没有十年了,所以叫“未满十年者”。“问题”:就是想要了解的义理。为了表明“他不再是十年戒腊者”仅仅是他们的看法,所以用了“据说”一词。为了说明“未满十年”仅仅是一种假立之说,正如期望他达到无所怖畏、无所沮沉等状态一样,因此才有“不单单如此”等说明。“在村落中行走”:是指在村落中为了托钵而行走。巴利
331.‘‘Niddasavatthūnī’’ti. ‘‘Ādi-saddalopenāyaṃ niddeso’’ti āha ‘‘niddasādivatthūnī’’ti. Natthi dāni imassa dasāti niddaso. Pañhoti ñātuṃ icchito attho. Puna dasavasso na hotīti tesaṃ matimattanti dassetuṃ ‘‘so kirā’’ti kirasaddaggahaṇaṃ. ‘‘Niddaso’’ti cetaṃ desanāmattaṃ, tassa nibbīsādibhāvassa viya ninnavādibhāvassa ca icchitattāti dassetuṃ ‘‘na kevalañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Gāme vicarantoti gāme piṇḍāya vicaranto.
这个名称并不是外道的叫法,因为他们身上没有这种特征。即使在佛教中,这个名称也不用于有学圣者,更何况凡夫呢。为了说明这个名称究竟属于谁、是基于什么原因而说的,所以接着说了“这是漏尽者的……”等等。因为他的结生不再生起,这是可以直接现见的原因。其他那些在经典中出现的原因,则是通过辗转传承而来的。巴利
Na idaṃ titthiyānaṃ adhivacanaṃ tesu tannimittassa abhāvā. Sāsanepi sekkhassāpi na idaṃ adhivacanaṃ, kimaṅgaṃ pana puthujjanassa. Yassa panetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, yena ca kāraṇena, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘khīṇāsavasseta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Appaṭisandhikabhāvo hissa paccakkhato kāraṇaṃ. Paramparāya itarāni, yāni pāḷiyaṃ āgatāni.
正确地受持学处,就是正受学处。而这个正受学处,应当从学处的圆满来理解,所以说“圆满三学”。或者,从一开始就正确地守护学处,就是正受学处。从意义上说,这个正受学处以圆满为界限,因为不守护的话就完全不存在,守护的话就是圆满。浓厚欲就是坚固的意欲。未来指的是紧接着要来的日子等时间,不是指来生,所以说“在未来,乃至第二天等”。正在圆满学处的时候,安住于其中、意乐不退失,就是以无常等理正确地审察三界诸法、法随观,所以说“这是观的增语”。令渴爱止息,是指通过离欲随观等观智的力量所成就的渴爱镇伏。于一体性,是指远离人群喧闹和烦恼杂染的独处状态。精进发动,是指正勤精进的策励,而这就是一切精进的全面提升,所以说“圆满身心的精进”。念与慧行,就是具念而作和正知而作。精进发动只有依靠念与正知的力量才能成就。见通达,就是依正见而通达,所以说“见道”。因为当通达四圣谛成就时,道正见就已经成就了。巴利
Sikkhāya sammadeva ādānaṃ sikkhāsamādānaṃ, taṃ panassā pāripūriyā veditabbanti āha ‘‘sikkhattayapūraṇe’’ti. Sikkhāya vā sammadeva ādito paṭṭhāya rakkhaṇaṃ sikkhāsamādānaṃ, tañca atthato pūraṇe paricchinnaṃ arakkhaṇe sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvato, rakkhaṇe ca paripūraṇato. Bahalacchandoti daḷhacchando. Āyatinti anantarānāgatadivasādikālo adhippeto , na anāgatabhavoti āha ‘‘anāgate punadivasādīsupī’’ti. Sikkhaṃ paripūrentassa tattha niviṭṭhaatthitā avigatapematā, tebhūmakadhammānaṃ aniccādivasena sammadeva nijjhānaṃ dhammanisāmanāti āha ‘‘vipassanāyetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Taṇhāvinayaneti virāgānupassanādivipassanāñāṇānubhāvasiddhe taṇhāvikkhambhane. Ekībhāveti gaṇasaṅgaṇikākilesasaṅgaṇikāvigamasiddhe vivekabhāve. Vīriyārambheti sammappadhānavīriyassa paggaṇhane, taṃ pana sabbaso vīriyassa paribrūhanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘kāyikacetasikassa vīriyassa pūraṇe’’ti. Satiyañceva nepakkabhāve cāti satokāritāya ceva sampajānakāritāya ca. Satisampajaññabaleneva vīriyārambho ijjhati. Diṭṭhipaṭivedheti sammādiṭṭhiyā paṭivijjhane. Tenāha ‘‘maggadassane’’ti. Saccasampaṭivedhe hi ijjhamāne maggasammādiṭṭhi siddhā eva hoti.
「不净随观智」是指依十种或十一种不净的随观而生起的智慧。这其实是苦随观的熟练智。「过患随观智」是指依诸行无常、苦、变易性所暗示的过患的随观而生起的智慧。「以未断除之义」是指未被道所断除的状态。「随眠」是指在相续中一再地眠伏。因为一旦获得因缘,那些应当生起的烦恼就像在相续中一再地睡着一样,所以它们在这种情况下被称为「随眠」。「达到强力」是指达到强盛。而这种达到强力,应当理解为欲贪等独有的、不与其他法共通的特有性质。正如在阿毗达摩中所说:「断除强力随眠」。欲贪本身就是随眠,所以是欲贪随眠。然而,那些说「欲贪的随眠是欲贪随眠」的人,那只是他们自己的见解。因为并不存在一个脱离欲贪、名为欲贪随眠的东西。如果他们说是「它的种子」,那在究竟意义上也是找不到的。其余诸随眠也是同样的道理。巴利
Asubhānupassanāñāṇeti dasavidhassa, ekādasavidhassāpi vā asubhassa anupassanāvasena pavattañāṇe. Idañhi dukkhānupassanāya paricayañāṇaṃ. Ādīnavānupassanāñāṇeti saṅkhārānaṃ aniccadukkhavipariṇāmatāsaṃsūcitassa ādīnavassa anupassanāvasena pavattañāṇe. Appahīnaṭṭhenāti maggena asamucchinnabhāvena. Anusentīti santāne anu anu sayanti. Kāraṇalābhe hi sati uppannārahā kilesā santāne anu anu sayitā viya honti, tasmā te tadavatthā ‘‘anusayā’’ti vuccanti. Thāmagatoti thāmappatto. Thāmagamanañca aññehi asādhāraṇo kāmarāgādīnameva āveṇiko sabhāvo daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi vuttaṃ abhidhamme ‘‘thāmagatānusayaṃ pajahatī’’ti. Kāmarāgo eva anusayo kāmarāgānusayo. Ye pana ‘‘kāmarāgassa anusayo kāmarāgānusayo’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ. Na hi kāmarāgavinimutto kāmarāgānusayo nāma koci atthi. Yadi ‘‘tassa bīja’’nti vadeyyuṃ, tampi tabbinimuttaṃ paramatthato na upalabbhatevāti. Eseva nayo sesesupi.
诤事止息七法注释巴利
Adhikaraṇasamathasattakavaṇṇanā
在这里被处理的,就是诤事。什么被处理?止。如何被处理?以止的方式。因此,那些止是以止的方式进行的,所以说“诤事得以平息”等等。已生起的已生起,就是已经出现的种种。为平息义,就是为止息之义。巴利
Adhikarīyanti etthāti adhikaraṇāni. Ke adhikarīyanti? Samathā. Kathaṃ adhikarīyantīti? Samanavasena, tasmā te tesaṃ samanavasena pavattantīti āha ‘‘adhikaraṇāni samentī’’tiādi. Uppannānaṃ uppannānanti uṭṭhitānaṃ uṭṭhitānaṃ. Samathatthanti samanatthaṃ.
“以十八事”——这是一种特征性的说法,就像说“如果我的病发作了,就该用这个药”。所以,当人们因为其中某一事而争论时,就说他们“以十八事而争论”。“口骂”就是辱骂。“举罪”就是追问、追究。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhī’’ti lakkhaṇavacanametaṃ yathā ‘‘yadi me byādhī dāheyyuṃ dātabbamidamosadha’’nti, tasmā tesu aññataraññatarena vivadantā ‘‘aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi vivadantī’’ti vuccanti. Upavadanāti akkoso. Codanāti anuyogo.
“现前毗尼”:因为诤事是当面平息,所以叫现前毗尼。“多数决”:当集会的大众中,说法者占多数时,举行多数决羯磨,就叫多数决。“此”:就是指上面所说的四种现前,这就称为现前毗尼。巴利
Adhikaraṇassa sammukhāva vinayanato sammukhāvinayo. Sannipatitaparisāya dhammavādīnaṃ yebhuyyatāya yebhuyyasikakammassa karaṇaṃ yebhuyyasikā. Ayanti ayaṃ yathāvuttā catubbidhā sammukhatā sammukhāvinayo nāma.
僧团和合意义上的现前,并不是指做事的个人随便怎样现前都算。所谓真实性,就是如是性。因为这里的“法”字是“真谛”的同义词,就像在“说法者”等说法中那样。“律”:因为靠它来调伏,所以叫律,是世尊为了平息各种诤事而说的规则;这个律的现前,就是律的现前。因此说“如彼……现前”。“由谁”:是由哪个人。“义敌”:指在诤事意义上的敌对者。僧团的现前缺失时,就只由公认的个人来平息。巴利
Saṅghasāmaggivasena sammukhībhāvo, na yathā tathā kārakapuggalānaṃ sammukhātā. Bhūtatāti tacchatā. Saccapariyāyo hi idha dhamma-saddo ‘‘dhammavādī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.9, 194) viya. Vineti etenāti vinayo, tassa tassa adhikaraṇassa vūpasamanāya bhagavatā vuttavidhi, tassa vinayassa sammukhatā vinayasammukhatā. Tenāha ‘‘yathā taṃ…pe… sammukhatā’’ti. Yenāti yena puggalena. Vivādavatthusaṅkhāte atthe paccatthikā atthapaccatthikā. Saṅghasammukhatā parihāyati sammatapuggaleheva vūpasamanato.
“此”指的是诤论事。所谓“不因贪欲而行”等等,说的是具备五个条件的裁判者。在隐覆投票等做法中,如果无惭者占多数,就应当采用隐覆投票;如果有惭者占多数,就应当采用公开投票;如果愚者占多数,就应当采用耳语投票。通过某种做法能让持法者成为多数,这就叫多数决,所以说“以持法者占多数”等等。巴利
Nanti vivādādhikaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Na chandāgatiṃ gacchatī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ. Guḷhakādīsu alajjussannāya parisāya guḷhako salākaggāho kātabbo lajjussannāya vivaṭako, bālussannāya sakaṇṇajappako. Yassā kiriyāya dhammavādino bahutarā, sā yebhuyyasikāti āha ‘‘dhammavādīnaṃ yebhuyyatāyā’’tiādi.
“以四种止息而平息”,这是从总摄一切的角度来说的。不过在这里,应当理解为两两各自平息。裁定方式是这样的:如果没有犯戒,就让双方互相请求原谅;如果确实有犯戒,就指出所犯的戒,以举罪的方式裁定。至于出罪,将在后面讲犯戒事的止息时说到。巴利
‘‘Catūhisamathehi sammatī’’ti idaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikavasena vuttaṃ. Tattha pana dvīhi dvīhi eva vūpasamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ vinicchitanti sace āpatti natthi, ubho khamāpetvā, atha atthi, āpattiṃ dassetvā ropanavasena vinicchitaṃ. Paṭikammaṃ pana āpattādhikaraṇasamathe parato āgamissati.
不是沙门所相应的,是非沙门的,是沙门们不该做的,就在那件事上。当有违犯和越轨的时候。巴利
Na samaṇasāruppaṃ assāmaṇakaṃ, samaṇehi akattabbaṃ, tasmiṃ. Ajjhācāre vītikkame sati.
“对抗者”是指隐瞒的人。因为恶法增盛,这人就更加恶劣,对他应当做的羯磨就是“恶作治罚”。仅靠现前毗奈耶并不能平息,因为如果没有那样性质的承认或忍耐,就无法平息。巴利
Paṭicaratoti paṭicchādentassa. Pāpussannatāya pāpiyo, puggalo, tassa kattabbakammaṃ tassa pāpiyasikaṃ. Sammukhāvinayeneva vūpasamo natthi paṭiññāya tathārūpāya, khantiyā vā vinā avūpasamanato.
这里“于此”是指发露所犯的罪。对于已经承认自己犯戒等情形,说“你以后应当防护”这样的话,以及通过给予别住等做法而进行的言语行为,就是“对已承认者的处理”。巴利
Etthāti āpattidesanāya. Paṭiññāte āpannabhāvādike karaṇaṃ kiriyā ‘‘āyatiṃ saṃvareyyāsī’’ti, parivāsadānādivasena ca pavattaṃ vacīkammaṃ paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ.
“随宜”是指按照前面所说的方式——“以两种止、四种止、三种止、一种止”——来随宜对应。“于此”是指在这部经里,或者在这个关于止的探讨里。“决断理趣”是指在决断上的理路本身。因此说“然而详细的部分……”等等。意思是:既然在《一切善见》律注(《小品注》184-187)中已经说过了,就应当依照那里所说的理路来理解。巴利
Yathānurūpanti ‘‘dvīhi samathehi catūhi tīhi ekenā’’ti evaṃ vuttanayena yathānurūpaṃ. Etthāti imasmiṃ sutte, imasmiṃ vā samathavicāre. Vinicchayanayoti vinicchaye nayamattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘vitthāro panā’’tiādi. Samantapāsādikāyaṃ vinayaṭṭhakathāya (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 184-187) vutto, tasmā vuttanayeneva veditabboti adhippāyo.
333 不真实,就是并非真实。因为不能引导人出离,所以是邪的体性。因为颠倒而说,所以是真实的;因为能引导人出离,所以是正的体性,是不颠倒而说。巴利
333.Ayāthāvāti na yāthāvā. Aniyyānikatāya micchāsabhāvā. Viparītavuttikatāya yāthāvā. Niyyānikatāya sammāsabhāvā aviparītavuttikā.
334 334. “沉没于可厌之处,所以叫懈怠”——这是把 da 音转成 ta 音。一个人因为某种法而被称为“懈怠者”,这里就是用“懈怠”这个词来表示那种懈怠状态。即使没有专门表达状态的词,状态的含义也能被理解,比如“布的白色”。所以这里的意思是:作为懈怠状态之依据的那些事。因此说“意思是懈怠的原因”。所谓“业”,就是适合沙门的这类事,所以说“观察衣等”。“精进”指策励的精进,而它如果以经行等方式来做,也可获得“身精进”的称呼,所以说“两种”。Pattiyā 是“到达”之义。Osīdana 是“在修习加行上的退缩”。 Māsehi ācitaṃ nicitaṃ viya 即 māsācitaṃ,我这样认为。因为月份以湿润之差而显得沉重,所以说“如湿润的月份”等。其意是:已从病状中康复。巴利
334. Kucchitaṃ sīdatīti kusīto da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā. Yassa dhammassa vasena puggalo ‘‘kusīto’’ti vuccati, so kusītabhāvo idha kusīta-saddena vutto. Vināpi hi bhāvajotanaṃ saddaṃ bhāvattho viññāyati yathā ‘‘paṭassa sukka’’nti, tasmā kusītabhāvavatthūnīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘kosajjakāraṇānīti attho’’ti. Kammaṃ nāma samaṇasāruppaṃ īdisanti āha ‘‘cīvaravicāraṇādī’’ti. Vīriyanti padhānavīriyaṃ, taṃ pana caṅkamanavasena karaṇe ‘‘kāyika’’ntipi vattabbataṃ labhatīti āha ‘‘duvidhampī’’ti. Pattiyāti pāpuṇanatthaṃ. Osīdananti bhāvanānuyoge saṅkoco. Māsehi ācitaṃ nicitaṃ viyāti māsācitaṃ, taṃ maññe. Yasmā māsā tintāvisesena garukā honti, tasmā ‘‘yathā tintamāso’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vuṭṭhito hoti gilānabhāvāti adhippāyo.
335 “那些”指的是发起事。“依此理趣”就是依照在懈怠事中所说的那个理趣。应当理解其含义如下:像“他发起两种精进”等说法,以及“这是第一,来吧,我应当发起精进”这样在修习中奋起努力,就是“第一发起事”等等。因为最初以某种方式生起的奋起努力,就是之后发起精进的原因。与适当的省察相结合的奋起努力,或者以那些奋起努力为根本的省察,应当知道有八种发起事。巴利
335.Tesanti ārambhavatthūnaṃ. Imināva nayenāti iminā kusītavatthūsu vutteneva nayena. ‘‘Duvidhampi vīriyaṃ ārabhatī’’tiādinā, ‘‘idaṃ paṭhamanti idaṃ handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmīti evaṃ bhāvanāya abbhussahanaṃ paṭhamaṃ ārambhavatthū’’tiādinā ca attho veditabbo. Yathā tathā paṭhamaṃ pavattaṃ abbhussahanañhi upari vīriyārambhassa kāraṇaṃ hoti. Anurūpapaccavekkhaṇāsahitāni hi abbhussahanāni, tammūlakāni vā paccavekkhaṇāni aṭṭha ārambhavatthūni veditabbāni.
336 336.“亲近”:对于他所布施的对象,因为对方让施者生起欢喜,所以就成了与对方相会的因缘。因此说“在这里,欣悦就是布施的原因”。“由怖畏”:就是因为怖畏。难道怖畏不像贪欲等那样,会使思变得不清净吗?那为什么这里把它算进去呢?为了说明这里说的怖畏不是指对盗贼等的怖畏,所以说了“在此”等话。“他曾给过我”:这是忆念过去曾受过的帮助而布施,针对这个说的。“他将给与我”:这是怀着期望回报的心而布施,针对这个说的。“善哉,布施”:这是说“这布施是智者所安立的”,安住于善行而布施。“为了庄严”:为了美化。“为了资具”:为了装备。因为布施后,观察它的人会生起喜悦、喜、悦等,贪、瞋、嫉、悭等则远离。现在,布施通过增长随顺之法、使违逆之法远离,以及美化修习之心和作为资具,所以说“为了庄严,为了资具而布施”。因此说“布施确实使心变得柔软”等。心变得柔软,施主得到“他以这个摄受了我”的想法,受施者也得到。因此说“使两者的心都变得柔软”。巴利
336.Āsajjāti yassa deti, tassa āmodanahetu tena samāgamanimittaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ettha āsādanaṃ dānakāraṇaṃ nāmā’’ti. Bhayāti bhayahetu. Nanu bhayaṃ nāma laddhukāmatā rāgādayo viya cetanāya avisuddhikaraṃ, taṃ kasmā idha gahitanti? Na idaṃ tādisaṃ corabhayādiṃ sandhāya vuttanti dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Adāsi meti yaṃ pubbe kataṃ upakāraṃ cintetvā dīyati, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dassati meti paccupakārāsīsāya yaṃ dīyati, taṃ sandhāya vadati. Sāhu dānanti ‘‘dānaṃ nāmetaṃ paṇḍitapaññatta’’nti sādhusamācāre ṭhatvā deti. Alaṅkāratthanti upasobhanatthaṃ. Parivāratthanti parikkhāratthaṃ. Dānañhi datvā taṃ paccavekkhantassa pāmojjapītisomanassādayo uppajjanti, lobhadosaissāmaccherādayo vidūrī bhavanti. Idāni dānaṃ anukūladhammaparibrūhanena, paccanīkadhammavidūrībhāvakaraṇena ca bhāvanācittassa upasobhanāya ca parikkhārāya ca hotīti ‘‘alaṅkāratthaṃ, parivāratthañca detī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘dānañhi cittaṃ mudukaṃ karotī’’tiādi. Muducitto hoti laddhā dāyake ‘‘iminā mayhaṃ saṅgaho kato’’ti, dātāpi laddhari. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhinnampi cittaṃ mudukaṃ karotī’’ti.
未调伏者的调伏:那些未调伏、不驯顺的人,因为他的布施而变成调伏、驯顺,服从于他的掌控。不布施会破坏已调伏者:而不布施,则会通过给先前已调伏、驯顺的人制造烦恼,来败坏他们的心。布施者昂首:布施者昂首挺胸,说爱语的人也因为成为他人敬重的对象而昂首。受施者低头:受施者因为布施,也因为被爱语所摄受,而对摄受他们的人低头顺从。巴利
Adantadamananti adantā anassavāpissa dānena dantā assavā honti vase vattanti. Adānaṃ dantadūsakanti adānaṃ pana pubbe dantānaṃ assavānampi vighātuppādanena cittaṃ dūseti. Unnamanti dāyakā, piyaṃvadā ca paresaṃ garucittīkāraṭṭhānatāya . Namanti paṭiggāhakā dānena, piyavācāya laddhasaṅgahā saṅgāhakānaṃ.
以庄严心所作的布施才是最殊胜的,因为它没有染污、极为清净,而且是殊胜功德的因缘。巴利
Cittālaṅkāradānameva uttamaṃ anupakkiliṭṭhatāya, suparisuddhatāya, guṇavisesapaccayatāya ca.
337 “因布施故”,就是以布施为因;意思是,因为已经造作并累积了布施所成的福德。“再生”,是指在人间或天界的投生。“确立”,是指并非只生起一次,而是让心以同样的方式持续不断地转起,这样就是确立;而这个确立本身就是依止,所以说“就是它的同义词”。“增长”,是让它增长,不是让它减少。“已倾向”,是已倾向、已趣入、已朝向、已倾斜。或者,“已倾向”是指殊胜——从绝对意义上说,“上”就是殊胜,即使在中间阶段也有下、中、上的差别;因此说“上未修习”,意思是:在那之后,为了更高的道果,还没有修习。“能转起”,是指这样决意后,布施所成的心能转起。至于经典里说的“而且这”等话,应当理解为是在显示:往生到那里时,没有破戒等障碍投生的缺失,而不应理解为只是在显示布施所成的福德本身能带来那样的转起。巴利
337.Dānapaccayāti dānakāraṇā, dānamayapuññassa katattā upacitattāti attho. Upapattiyoti manussesu, devesu ca nibbattiyo. Ṭhapetīti ekavārameva anuppajjitvā yathā uparūpari tenevākārena pavattati, evaṃ ṭhapeti. Tadeva casa adhiṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘tasseva vevacana’’nti. Vaḍḍhetīti brūheti, na hāpeti. Vimuttanti adhimuttaṃ, ninnaṃ poṇaṃ pabbhāranti attho. Vimuttanti vā visiṭṭhaṃ. Nippariyāyato uttari nāma paṇītaṃ majjhepi hīnamajjhimavibhāgassa labbhanatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘uttari abhāvitanti tato upari maggaphalatthāya abhāvita’’nti. Saṃvattati tathā paṇihitaṃ dānamayacittaṃ. Yaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘tañca kho’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ tatrūpapattiyā vibandhakāradussīlyābhāvadassanaparaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, na dānamayassa puññassa kevalassa taṃsaṃvattanatādassanaparanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
已断除贪欲的人,是指已经断除了欲贪的人。因为他可能还会投生到梵天界,但已断除有贪的人就不会。这里用“离贪”这个词,指的是对诸欲的离贪,正是靠这种离贪才可能投生梵天界。所以接着说“仅仅以布施”等等。如果这样的话,布施在那里又有什么用呢?回答说“然而布施……”等等。以布施使心柔软:即使对心怀怨恨的怨敌,因为对方接受了自己的布施,心也会变得柔软。巴利
Samucchinnarāgassāti samucchinnakāmarāgassa. Tassa hi siyā brahmaloke upapatti, na samucchinnabhavarāgassa. Vītarāgaggahaṇena cettha kāmesu vītarāgatā adhippetā, yāya brahmalokūpapatti siyā. Tenāha ‘‘dānamattenevā’’tiādi. Yadi evaṃ dānaṃ tattha kiṃ atthiyanti āha ‘‘dānaṃ panā’’tiādi. Dānena muducittoti baddhāghāte verīpuggalepi attano dānasampaṭicchanena mudubhūtacitto.
众:环坐,且从四面八方、此处彼处聚集而来,所以叫众,也就是团体。巴利
Parisīdati parito ito cito ca samāgacchatīti parisā, samūho.
所谓“世间法”,就是众生世间里必然会出现的法。因此说“从这些法里解脱的人,根本不存在”等等。因为那些世间法一次又一次地跟在世间后面转,有时候是法追着世间跑,有时候是世间追着法跑,为了说明这个道理,就引了“这八种”这段经文(《增支部》8.6)。得到食物、衣服等东西,就是“利得”;或者从“应当得到”这个角度说,那些东西本身就是利得。没有这些东西,就是“无利得”。这里说“利得”的时候,也把贪求利得的那种执取包含进去了;说“无利得”的时候,也把排斥无利得的那种抗拒包含进去了。就像有血液存在时,脓就会由伤口产生一样,顺境存在时,逆境就已经得到了机会,所以说“利得到来的时候,无利得其实也已经到了”。这个道理对称赞等情形也一样适用。巴利
Lokassa dhammāti sattalokassa avassambhāvī dhammā. Tenāha ‘‘etehi mutto nāma natthī’’tiādi. Yasmā te lokadhammā aparāparaṃ kadāci lokaṃ anupatanti, kadāci te loko, tasmā tañcettha atthaṃ dassento ‘‘aṭṭhime’’ti suttapadaṃ (a. ni. 8.6) āhari. Ghāsacchādanādīnaṃ laddhi lābho, tāni eva vā laddhabbato lābho. Tadabhāvo alābho. Lābhaggahaṇena cettha tabbisayo anurodho gahito, alābhaggahaṇena virodho. Yasmā lohite sati tadupaghātavasena pubbo viya anurodhe sati virodho laddhāvasaro eva hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘lābhe āgate alābho āgato evā’’ti. Esa nayo yasādīsupi.
340 果依止于它、以它为所缘而持续生起,所以叫“事”,这里说的就是因,这个意思前面已经讲过。因此说“愤恨事”就是愤恨的因。这个叫“忿怒”的东西,在某个事上生起时,不是只生起一次,而是会一再地生起,所以经文说“结缚”。或者,由某种特别的缘而生起的愤恨,就像被绑在自己的所缘境上一样不肯离开,还会再次生起,针对这个意思说“结缚愤恨”。而它依缘而生起,就是令它产生,所以说“作”、“令生起”。巴利
340. Vasati tattha phalaṃ tannimittakatāya pavattatīti vatthu, kāraṇanti vuttovāyamattho. Tenāha ‘‘āghātavatthūnīti āghātakāraṇānī’’ti. Kopo nāmāyaṃ yasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ uppajjati, na tattha ekavārameva uppajjati, atha kho punapi uppajjatevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘bandhatī’’ti. Atha vā yo paccayavisesena uppajjamāno āghāto savisaye baddho viya na vigacchati, punapi uppajjeyyeva, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘āghātaṃ bandhatī’’ti. Taṃ panassa paccayavasena nibbattanaṃ uppādanamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘karoti uppādetī’’ti.
“那在这件事上哪里能得到呢?”这里说的“那”是指代行为。应当通过上下文来理解它的意思,所以接着说了“愿那无意义的行为不要发生”等等。凭什么说能得到呢?因为它根本没有实际意义。众生确实是业的所有者,他们难道会因为谁的喜好而受苦或享乐吗?所以这里的意思是:那只是我在那件事上白白生气罢了。或者也可以说,“那”指的是引发愤怒的原因,在这个人身上哪里能得到呢?因为在究竟意义上,既没有该被生气的人,也没有能生气的人。这里只有诸行,也就是所谓的五蕴。那些被称为“众生”的诸行,短暂、刹那即逝,谁对谁生气呢?这就是它的意思。除了从不生起之外,哪里还有什么“得到”呢?巴利
Taṃ kutettha labbhāti ettha tanti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ, padajjhāhārena ca attho veditabboti dassento ‘‘taṃ anatthacaraṇaṃ mā ahosī’’tiādimāha. Kena kāraṇena laddhabbaṃ niratthakabhāvato. Kammassakā hi sattā, te kassa ruciyā dukkhitā, sukhitā vā bhavanti, tasmā kevalaṃ tasmiṃ mayhaṃ kujjhanamattaṃ evāti adhippāyo. Atha vā taṃ kopakaraṇamettha puggale kuto labbhā paramatthato kujjhitabbassa, kujjhanakassa ca abhāvato. Saṅkhāramattañhetaṃ, yadidaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ. Yaṃ ‘‘satto’’ti vuccati, te saṅkhārā ittarakālā khaṇikā, kassa ko kujjhatīti attho. Lābhā nāma ke siyuṃ aññatra anuppattito.
341 341. 有情居:有情住在这里,所以叫有情居。身异想异等种种有情类。因为这些有情类,对于包含在其中的有情来说,由于这种包含关系,就像总体作为部分的依托,如同说“树上有枝”那样,可以这样称呼,所以说“有情的住处,就是居住的处所,这是它的意思”。净居天也是有情居,正如经文所说:“诸比丘,除了净居天,我在漫长的轮回中未曾住过的有情居,实在不容易得到。”既然这样,为什么这里没有把它列入?对此说出理由:“因为并非一切时”等。然而,广果天应当知道只属于第四有情居。巴利
341. Sattā āvasanti etesūti sattāvāsā. Nānattakāyā nānattasaññī ādibhedā sattanikāyā. Yasmā te te sattanikāyā tappariyāpannānaṃ sattānaṃ tāya eva tappariyāpannatāya ādhāro viya vattabbataṃ arahanti samudāyādhāratāya avayavassa yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā’’ti , tasmā ‘‘sattānaṃ āvāsā, vasanaṭṭhānānīti attho’’ti vuttaṃ. Suddhāvāsāpi sattāvāsova ‘‘na so, bhikkhave, sattāvāso sulabharūpo, yo mayā anāvutthapubbo iminā dīghena addhunā aññatra suddhāvāsehi devehī’’ti vacanato. Yadi evaṃ kasmā idha na gahitāti tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘asabbakālikattā’’tiādi. Vehapphalo pana catutthaṃyeva sattāvāsaṃ bhajatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
342 被称为“寂止者”,是因为能带来轮回之苦的止息。而轮回之苦只有在烦恼止息时才会止息,不是靠别的途径,因此说“令烦恼止息”。能导向那止息的正觉,所以叫“导向正觉”。巴利
342.Opasamikoti vaṭṭadukkhassa upasamāvaho, taṃ pana vaṭṭadukkhaṃ kilesesu upasantesu upasamati, na aññathā, tasmā ‘‘kilesūpasamakaro’’ti vuttaṃ. Takkaraṃ sambodhaṃ gametīti sambodhagāmī.
在某个天众群体里,说法不能成立,因为那里根本没有听闻的能力,所以经中说“长寿天众”指的就是这个,因此说“无想有或无色有”。巴利
Yasmiṃ devanikāye dhammadesanā na viyujjati savanasseva abhāvato, so pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘dīghāyuko devanikāyo’’ti adhippetoti āha ‘‘asaññabhavaṃ vā arūpabhavaṃ vā’’ti.
343 343. “应当次第而住”,就是次第住。“按顺序”,就是依次。“应当等至而住”,就是等至之后、成为具足者,应当如此安住。巴利
343. Anupubbato viharitabbāti anupubbavihārā. Anupaṭipāṭiyāti anukkamena. Samāpajjitabbavihārāti samāpajjitvā samaṅgino hutvā viharitabbavihārā.
344 “次第灭”是指按照次第、依照顺序而运作的灭。因此说“按顺序的灭”。巴利
344.Anupubbanirodhāti anupubbena anukkamena pavattetabbanirodhā. Tenāha ‘‘anupaṭipāṭiyā nirodhā’’ti.
345 比丘具足戒等这些法,因为以法为依靠,只依法就能得到庇护、成为主宰、克服一切,所以被称为“有庇护者”。那些让他成为有庇护者的法,就叫做“作庇护者法”,因此说“有庇护……作依止的法”。其中,“为自己作依止”,是指对那些让他成为有庇护者的法,它们为他建立自己的依止。没有依止就是没有庇护,有依止就是有庇护;所以依止的含义就是庇护的含义。巴利
345. Yehi sīlādīhi samannāgato bhikkhu dhammasaraṇatāya dhammeneva nāthati īsati abhibhavatīti nāthoti vuccati, te tassa nāthabhāvakarā dhammā ‘‘nāthakaraṇā’’ti vuttāti āha ‘‘sanāthā…pe… patiṭṭhākarā dhammā’’ti. Tattha attano patiṭṭhākarāti yassa nāthabhāvakarā, tassa attano patiṭṭhāvidhāyino. Appatiṭṭho anātho, sappatiṭṭho sanāthoti patiṭṭhattho nāthattho.
为了说明“善”是因为与善的功德相应,才说“具足戒等功德”。“友”以润滑为特征,某人具有这种特征,就是“友”;依前述方式,那善为彼所有,所以“善友”一词只是说明其存在而已。为了说明他与那善友一切时都不分离而住,才说“善同伴”,因此说了“这些……”等话。“这些”就是指这位比丘的那些善友。“同行”就是一起行动。未共处时以心亲近相通,共处时则身心皆亲近。巴利
Kalyāṇaguṇayogato kalyāṇāti dassento ‘‘sīlādiguṇasampannā’’ti āha. Mijjanalakkhaṇā mittā etassa atthīti mitto, so vuttanayena kalyāṇo assa atthīti tassa atthitāmattaṃ kalyāṇamittapadena vuttaṃ. Assa tena sabbakālaṃ avijahitavāsoti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kalyāṇasahāyo’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘tevassā’’tiādi. Tevassāti te eva kalyāṇamittā assa bhikkhuno. Saha ayanatoti saha vattanato. Asamodhāne cittena, samodhāne pana cittena ceva kāyena ca sampavaṅko.
对那位随顺、恭敬的人来说,说话是容易的,所以叫“易受教”。因此说“应当用温和的方式对他说”等等。“堪忍”就是能忍,为了显示他这种堪忍的特质,才说“以严厉的……”等等。“从左边”是指错误地、不如理地执取。“对抗”是指以敌对的状态站着。“从右边执取”是指正确地、如理地执取。巴利
Sukhaṃ vaco etasmiṃ anukūlagāhimhi ādaragāravavati puggaleti suvaco. Tenāha ‘‘sukhena vattabbo’’tiādi. Khamoti khantā, tamevassa khamabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘gāḷhenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vāmatoti micchā, ayoniso vā gaṇhāti. Paṭippharatīti paṭāṇikabhāvena tiṭṭhati. Padakkhiṇaṃ gaṇhātīti sammā yoniso vā gaṇhāti.
“种种高低”是指广大和微小的事情。“能去到那里”是指:为了成办那里各种大大小小的事情,以方法、以善巧去应对,意思是说有能力完成每一种事情。或者说,“那里的方法”是指对那里应办的每一种事情,成为达成它的方法。巴利
Uccāvacānīti vipulakhuddakāni. Tatrupagamanīyāti tatra tatra mahante, khuddake ca kamme sādhanavasena upāyena upagacchantiyā, tassa tassa kammassa nipphādanena samatthāyāti attho. Tatrupāyāyāti vā tatra tatra kamme sādhetabbe upāyabhūtāya.
“法”是他的欲求,所以叫“法欲者”——这是说,即使词与词之间存在不同的格关系,也能构成这种异位复合词。另一种说法是:因为值得渴求、值得喜爱,所以叫“欲”;法是所渴求的对象,一个人以法为欲求,就是“法欲者”。这里的“法”指的是教理之法,所以论师说“喜爱三藏佛语,就是这个意思”。“言说”就是开示、讲说;“喜爱言说的人”就是“好言说者”。在“而且自己……”这一句里,“而且”这个词带出了“恭敬”一语,因此意思是:他自己也怀着恭敬,想要为人说法。“阿毗达摩”是指七部论,因为它是增上、殊胜的教理之法。“律”是指两部《分别》,因为它能调御身与语。“阿毗毗奈耶”是指犍度与附属部分,因为它特别阐述了增上行持之法。正因为增上行持之法圆满,最初的梵行之法才会圆满。而“法”本身也是教理之法,因为三藏中的前两藏同样属于教法。道与果称为“阿毗达摩”,因为它们直接朝向涅槃法。止息烦恼的因,就是前分的三学,简要来说,就是与还灭相关的止与观。“多喜”是指强烈的喜悦。巴利
Dhamme assa kāmoti dhammakāmoti byadhikaraṇānaṃpi bāhirattho samāso hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Kāmetabbato vā piyāyitabbato kāmo, dhammo; dhammo kāmo assāti dhammakāmo. Dhammoti pariyattidhammo adhippetoti āha ‘‘tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ piyāyatīti attho’’ti. Samudāharaṇaṃ kathanaṃ samudāhāro, piyo samudāhāro etassāti piyasamudāhāro. Sayañcāti ettha ca-saddena ‘‘sakkacca’’nti padaṃ anukaḍḍhati, tena sayañca sakkaccaṃ desetukāmo hotīti yojanā. Abhidhammo sattappakaraṇāni adhiko abhivisiṭṭho ca pariyattidhammoti katvā. Vinayo ubhatovibhaṅgā vinayanato kāyavācānaṃ. Abhivinayo khandhakaparivārā visesato ābhisamācārikadhammakittanato. Ābhisamācārikadhammapāripūrivaseneva hi ādibrahmacariyakadhammapāripūrī. Dhammo eva piṭakadvayassāpi pariyattidhammabhāvato. Maggaphalāni abhidhammo nibbānadhammassa abhimukhoti katvā. Kilesavūpasamakāraṇaṃ pubbabhāgiyā tisso sikkhā saṅkhepato vivaṭṭanissito samatho vipassanā ca. Bahulapāmojjoti balavapāmojjo.
“因义”就是“相义”。因为他的精进努力,是以善法为相。所以他说:“为了他们证得……”。或者说,“在诸善法中”,是指在应当成就的法上使用处格,就像说“心未寂静时,非理作意是它的近因”一样。巴利
Kāraṇattheti nimittatthe. Kusaladhammanimittaṃ hissa vīriyārambho. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ adhigamatthāyā’’ti. Kusalesu dhammesūti vā nipphādetabbe bhummaṃ yathā ‘‘cetaso avūpasame ayonisomanasikārapadaṭṭhāna’’nti.
346 “全分义”就是无余的意思。这里应当以无余遍满的方式来理解全分义,就像在不净相等所缘中那样,不是只停留在某一部分,而是毫无剩余地取过来,这就是它的含义。“以彼为所缘的诸法”,是指以那个遍为所缘而生起的诸法。“田地义”是生起之处的意思。“依止义”是作为生起和持续之处。就像田地是庄稼生起和增长的地方,同样,这个禅那是与它相应的诸法的生起和增长之处;或者对修行者来说,它是产生种种殊胜安乐的因,所以叫田地。“区分之后”这句话,也要和“上方、下方”等连起来理解。因为先作区分之后,才能在一切处扩展遍。“或以种种因”,就是指以上方等处为原因来扩展遍。正如所说的“犹如想看色的人之于光明”:譬如有人用天眼想看上面的色,就向上方扩散光明;想看下面的色,就向下方扩散光明;想从四周看色,就向四周扩散光明。修遍也是同样的道理。巴利
346.Sakalaṭṭhenāti nissesaṭṭhena, anavasesapharaṇavasena cettha sakalaṭṭho veditabbo, asubhanimittādīsu viya ekadese aṭṭhatvā anavasesato gahetabbaṭṭhenāti attho. Tadārammaṇānaṃ dhammānanti taṃ kasiṇaṃ ārabbha pavattanakadhammānaṃ. Khettaṭṭhenāti uppattiṭṭhānaṭṭhena. Adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhenāti pavattiṭṭhānabhāvena. Yathā khettaṃ sassānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānaṃ vaḍḍhiṭṭhānañca , evametaṃ jhānaṃ taṃsampayuttānaṃ dhammānanti, yogino vā sukhavisesānaṃ kāraṇabhāvena. ‘‘Paricchinditvā’’ ti idaṃ uddhaṃ adhoti etthāpi yojetabbaṃ. Paricchinditvā eva hi sabbattha kasiṇaṃ vaḍḍhetabbaṃ. Tena tena vā kāraṇenāti tena tena upariādīsu kasiṇavaḍḍhanakāraṇena. Yathā kinti āha ‘‘ālokamiva rūpadassanakāmo’’ti. Yathā dibbacakkhunā uddhaṃ ce rūpaṃ daṭṭhukāmo, uddhaṃ ālokaṃ pasāreti, adho ce adho, samantato ce rūpaṃ daṭṭhukāmo samantato ālokaṃ pasāreti; evamayaṃ kasiṇanti attho.
“一种”是指地遍等每一种。“不进入其他状态义”,是为了说明不会进入其他遍的状态,或者说,是为了说明不会进入另一种遍的状态。因为从一处扩展的遍,并不会变成从另一处扩展的遍;由此也可知,这些遍之间没有相互混杂。“非其他”,指并非其他地等。因为在水的立足处,并不存在具有自相的地。“其他遍的混杂”,指与水遍等相混杂。“于一切处”,是在其余所有遍中。心不局限于部分,而是无余遍满,由于不执取限量,所以称“无量”。正因为如此,它们才得到“遍”的名称。同样也说“那个就是……”等。“以心遍满”,就是用修习的心去取所缘。因为修习的心对于遍——无论小或大,都是将遍作为一个整体来作意,而不是只取其部分。巴利
Ekassāti pathavīkasiṇādīsu ekekassa. Aññabhāvānupagamanatthanti aññakasiṇabhāvānupagamanadīpanatthaṃ, aññassa vā kasiṇabhāvānupagamanadīpanatthaṃ, na hi aññena pasāritakasiṇaṃ tato aññena pasāritakasiṇabhāvaṃ upagacchati, evampi nesaṃ aññakasiṇasambhedābhāvo veditabbo. Na aññaṃ pathavīādi. Na hi udake ṭhitaṭṭhāne sasambhārapathavī atthi. Añño kasiṇasambhedoti āpokasiṇādinā saṅkaro. Sabbatthāti sabbesu sesakasiṇesu. Ekadese aṭṭhatvā anavasesapharaṇaṃ pamāṇassa aggahaṇato appamāṇaṃ. Teneva hi nesaṃ kasiṇasamaññā. Tathā cāha ‘‘tañhī’’tiādi. Cetasā pharantoti bhāvanācittena ārammaṇaṃ karonto. Bhāvanācittañhi kasiṇaṃ parittaṃ vā vipulaṃ vā sakalameva manasi karoti, na ekadesaṃ.
在除去遍之后的虚空中生起的识,因为是以无量的方式遍满,所以被称为“识遍”。也正因为这样,它被称为“识无边处”。依遍来说,就是依照已除去的遍的方式。应当知道,在除去遍之后的虚空中有上方、下方和横向的方位。因为遍扩展到多大的范围,以虚空修习的方式,那个范围就成为虚空;同样,凡是成为虚空并现前的范围,由于识遍满整个范围而生起,因此从来的方式说,识遍中也有上方、下方和横向的方位。所以他说:“依除去遍之后的虚空,应当知道在彼处生起的识中有上方、下方和横向的方位。”巴利
Kasiṇugghāṭimākāsepavattaviññāṇaṃ pharaṇaappamāṇavasena ‘‘viññāṇakasiṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ ‘‘viññāṇañca’’nti vuccati. Kasiṇavasenāti yathāugghāṭitakasiṇavasena. Kasiṇugghāṭimākāse uddhaṃadhotiriyatā veditabbā. Yattakañhi ṭhānaṃ kasiṇaṃ pasāritaṃ, tattakaṃ ākāsabhāvanāvasena ākāso hotīti; evaṃ yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ ākāsaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhitaṃ, tattakaṃ sakalameva pharitvā viññāṇassa pavattanato āgamanavasena viññāṇakasiṇepi uddhaṃadhotiriyatā vuttāti āha ‘‘kasiṇugghāṭiṃ ākāsavasena tattha pavattaviññāṇe uddhaṃadhotiriyatā veditabbā’’ti.
十不善业道的解说巴利
Akusalakammapathadasakavaṇṇanā
347 因为它们是道的状态,因为它们的运行方式是道的。关于淫欲行为:按满足于自己妻子和通奸这两种,分为两类淫欲行为。那些也确实因为可以贪求,所以称为欲。关于淫欲的对象:指淫欲的对象,即那些众生。邪行:指应受谴责的行为。而它之所以应受谴责,正是因为彻底卑劣,所以说“纯是应受谴责的恶劣行为”。以非正法的意图:指以亲近非正法为意图。巴利
347.Pathabhūtattāti tesaṃ pavattanupāyattā maggabhūtattā. Methunasamācāresūti sadārasantosaparadāragamanavasena duvidhesu methunasamācāresu. Tepi hi kāmetabbato kāmā nāma. Methunavatthūsūti methunassa vatthūsu tesu sattesu. Micchācāroti gārayhācāro. Gārayhatā cassa ekantanihīnatāya evāti āha ‘‘ekantanindito lāmakācāro’’ti. Asaddhammādhippāyenāti asaddhammasevanādhippāyena.
被同族的人守护,叫宗族守护。被同修法的人守护,叫法守护。有丈夫的,叫有主守护。如果国王对她与人行淫定下了处罚,她就是有罚守护。用钱财买来当妻子的,是财买守护。因为喜欢而一起住的,是愿住守护。为了钱财而一起住的,是财住守护。为了衣服而一起住的,是衣住守护。被抓住时说是碰了水钵才被占有的,是触水钵者。被抓住时说是取下了头巾才被占有的,是除头巾者。从贼那里带来的、从军旗那里带来的。刹那妻、片刻妻。以强力征服而违越时,邪淫有大罪过;双方意愿相同则不是这样。有人说:“即使以强力征服而违越,如果被强迫的人接受了非道或行道的随行,因为先前生起的行淫意欲所引发的加行并不存在,所以被强迫的人没有邪淫。”其实,当有行淫之心时,即使没有加行,也不能作为无罪的理由,因为大多数女人本来就没有行淫的加行。如果连那种心都没有,即使先前曾生起行淫之心,对她来说也不构成邪淫;对男人来说也一样,如果没有行淫的加行。因此,依自己的喜好而行的有三种,依强力而行的有三种,这一切,以未取之取的方式,称为“四种要素”。巴利
Sagottehi rakkhitā gottarakkhitā. Sahadhammikehi rakkhitā dhammarakkhitā. Sassāmikā sārakkhā. Yassā gamane raññā daṇḍo ṭhapito, sā saparidaṇḍā. Bhariyābhāvatthaṃ dhanena kītā dhanakkītā. Chandena vasantī chandavāsinī. Bhogatthaṃ vasantī bhogavāsinī. Paṭatthaṃ vasantī paṭavāsinī. Udakapattaṃ āmasitvā gahitā odapattakinī. Cumbaṭaṃ apanetvā gahitā obhatacumbaṭā. Karamarānītā dhajāhaṭā. Taṅkhaṇikā muhuttikā. Abhibhavitvā vītikkame micchācāro mahāsāvajjo, na tathā dvinnaṃ samānacchandatāya. ‘‘Abhibhavitvā vītikkamane satipi maggenamaggapaṭipattiadhivāsane purimuppannasevanābhisandhipayogābhāvato micchācāro na hoti abhibhuyyamānassā’’ti vadanti. Sevanacitte sati payogābhāvo appamāṇaṃ yebhuyyena itthiyā sevanapayogassa abhāvato. Tasmiṃ asati puretaraṃ sevanacittassa upaṭṭhāpanepi tassā micchācāro na siyā, tathā purisassapi sevanapayogābhāveti. Tasmā attano ruciyā pavattitassa vasena tayo balakkārena pavattitassa vasena tayoti sabbepi aggahitaggahaṇena ‘‘cattāro sambhārā’’ti vuttaṃ.
带前缀的词根声音能表达特殊含义,所以“贪求”这个词,是依照“面对他人财物”等说法来解释它的意思。其中,“倾向”是指以贪著那份他人财物的方式而倾向,这里要理解的就是这个意思。或者也可以这样看:带上前缀abhi-的jhā这个词根,在“贪著”这个意思上是固定用法。正是这些带前缀的词根声音在表达特殊含义。不与取的罪轻或罪重,在《梵网经注》里已经说过,所以这里说“像不与取一样,有罪轻的,也有罪重的”。因此,应当依照“对谁的财物生起贪求,若那人德行少则罪轻,德行大则罪重”等说法,来理解罪轻与罪重的区分。应当知道,把财物转归自己,仅凭心念就能成立。巴利
Upasaggavasena atthavisesavācino dhātusaddāti ‘‘abhijjhāyatī’’ti padassa ‘‘parabhaṇḍābhimukhī’’tiādinā attho vutto. Tattha tanninnatāyāti tasmiṃ parabhaṇḍe lubbhanavasena ninnatāyāti ayamettha adhippāyo veditabbo. Abhipubbo vā jhā-saddo lubbhane niruḷho daṭṭhabbo. Upasaggavasena atthavisesavācino eva dhātusaddā. Adinnādānassa appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatā brahmajālavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā) vuttāti āha ‘‘adinnādānaṃ viya appasāvajjā, mahāsāvajjā cā’’ti. Tasmā ‘‘yassa bhaṇḍaṃ abhijjhāyati, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjatā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjatā’’tiādinā appasāvajjamahāsāvajjavibhāgo veditabbo. Attano pariṇāmanaṃ cittenevāti veditabbaṃ.
“破坏利益与安乐”:谁使它生起,当他对谁生起这样的心,在这两者相遇时,就会破坏那人的利益与安乐。粗恶语罪过轻重的区分,在《梵网经注》中已经说明,所以说“如同粗恶语”等等。因此,应当通过“对谁生起嗔害心,若那人德行少则罪过轻,德行大则罪过重”这样的方式,来了知这两种情况的罪轻罪重之别。用“啊,但愿”这样的话,显示的是对他人彻底毁灭的思虑。正是这样,由于这种凶恶的运作,才构成业道的运作。巴利
Hitasukhaṃbyāpādayatīti yo naṃ uppādeti, tassa yaṃ pati cittaṃ uppādeti, tassa tassa sati samavāye hitasukhaṃ vināseti. Pharusavācāya appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatā brahmajālavaṇṇanāyaṃ vibhāvitāti āha ‘‘pharusavācā viyā’’tiādi. Tasmā ‘‘yaṃ pati cittaṃ byāpādeti, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjo, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjo’’tiādinā tadubhayavibhāgo veditabbo. ‘‘Aho vatā’’ti iminā parassa accantāya vināsacintanaṃ dīpeti. Evañhi ssa dāruṇappavattiyā kammapathappavatti.
因为不能如实执取,也就是没有按照真实情况去执取,于是把无常等真实本性的事物,执取成常等颠倒的样子。颠倒而见,就是错误地看。用“像绮语一样”这句话,是为了说明:因为串习轻,所以过失小;因为串习重,所以过失大。执取的方式颠倒,就是邪见所执取的方式成了颠倒。对于事物,是说那事物并没有如它所执取那样的真实体性。以如彼存在的方式,就是按照所执取的那种方式,也就是颠倒的方式。对于那个持邪见的人,或者对于那个事物的显现,就认定:就是这样,绝不是别的样子。巴利
Yathābhuccagahaṇābhāvenāti yāthāvagahaṇassa abhāvena aniccādisabhāvassa niccādito gahaṇena. Micchā passatīti vitathaṃ passati. ‘‘Samphappalāpo viyā’’ti iminā āsevanassa mandatāya appasāvajjataṃ, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjataṃ dasseti. Gahitākāraviparītatāti micchādiṭṭhiyā gahitākāraviparītabhāvo. Vatthunoti tassa ayathābhūtasabhāvamāha. Tathābhāvenāti gahitākāreneva viparītākāreneva. Tassa diṭṭhigatikassa, tassa vā vatthuno upaṭṭhānaṃ, ‘‘evametaṃ na ito aññathā’’ti.
“法性”是指它自身的本性。“部分”是指在以触为第五支等心所成分当中,那些作为组成部分的部分,这就是这里的意思。巴利
Dhammatoti sabhāvato. Koṭṭhāsatoti phassapañcamakādīsu cittaṅgakoṭṭhāsesu ye koṭṭhāsā honti, tatoti attho.
所谓思法,是指以思为本质的法。巴利
Cetanādhammāti cetanāsabhāvā.
有人问:说到“按顺序排列的七者”,在阿毗达摩的业道里不是并没有提到思吗?那么把这七者按顺序说成是业道,就不合理了吧?不是这样。不提到它,是有别的缘故。在阿毗达摩的业道集合中不提到思,并不是因为思不成其为业道;而是因为思有时候是业道,并非任何时候都是,由于它是不是业道并不固定,所以不提到它。可是,当思是业道的时候,它并没有被排除在业道集合之外。巴利
‘‘Paṭipāṭiyā sattā’’ti ettha nanu cetanā abhidhamme kammapathesu na vuttāti paṭipāṭiyā sattannaṃ kammapathabhāvo na yuttoti? Na, avacanassa aññahetukattā. Na hi tattha cetanāya akammapathappattattā (dha. sa. mūlaṭī. akusalakammapathakathāvaṇṇanā) kammapatharāsimhi avacanaṃ, kadāci pana kammapatho hoti, na sabbadāti kammapathabhāvassa aniyatattā avacanaṃ. Yadā pana kammapatho hoti, tadā kammapatharāsisaṅgaho na nivārito.
这里有人问:如果因为思并不永远都是业道,有时是业道、有时不是,所以它的业道身份不确定,因此在业道这一类里就不提它,那么贪欲等法也有还没达到业道状态的情况,按同样的道理,它们的业道身份也不确定,岂不是也该在业道这一类里不提它们吗?这没有过失。因为在那个地方已经说到了贪欲等法具有业道的性质,也说到它们与业道同类。如果这样,那思也应该在那里被提到吗?确实如此。不过,思就像杀生等一样,它的业道身份是清楚明显的,所以可能就没有特别说出来。因为经里说:“比丘们,我说思就是业”,又说:“比丘们,有三种身思是不善的身业”,从这些说法来看,思的业性已经很清楚;而业本身就是作为通向善趣、恶趣以及由那里产生的快乐和痛苦的道路而运作,所以被称为“业道”,这样思的业道身份也就很明显了。但贪欲等法不一样:它们是以思的谋划为本质,才成为善行或恶行;又因为是思所引生的,才成为通向善趣、恶趣以及那里所生苦乐的道路。它们的业道身份并不那么明显。因此,为了显示贪欲等法的这种特相,在阿毗达摩里就没有把思说成是业道;或者也可以这样理解:因为思和它们不同类,所以没有和它们放在一起说。“到达根本”:就是探求根本,意思是在宣说具有根本自性的诸法时。巴利
Etthāha – yadi cetanāya sabbadā kammapathabhāvābhāvato aniyato kammapathabhāvoti kammapatharāsimhi avacanaṃ, nanu abhijjhādīnampi kammapathabhāvaṃ appattānaṃ atthitāya aniyato kammapathabhāvoti tesampi kammapatharāsimhi avacanaṃ āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati kammapathatātaṃsabhāgatā hi tesaṃ tattha vuttattā. Yadi evaṃ cetanāpi tattha vattabbā siyāti? Saccametaṃ, sā pana pāṇātipātādikāvāti pākaṭo tassā kammapathabhāvoti na vuttaṃ siyā. Cetanāya hi ‘‘cetanāhaṃ, bhikkhave, kammaṃ vadāmi (a. ni. 6.63; kathā. 539), tividhā, bhikkhave, kāyasañcetanā akusalaṃ kāyakamma’’nti (kathā. 539) vacanato kammabhāvo pākaṭo; kammaṃyeva ca sugatiduggatīnaṃ, taduppajjanasukhadukkhānañca pathabhāvena pavattaṃ ‘‘kammapatho’’ti vuccatīti pākaṭo tassā kammapathabhāvo. Abhijjhādīnaṃ pana cetanāsamīhanabhāvena sucaritaduccaritabhāvo, cetanājanitabhāvena [cetanājanitataṃbandhatibhāvena (dha. sa. anuṭī. akusalakammapathāvaṇṇanā)] sugatiduggatitaduppajjanasukhadukkhānaṃ pathabhāvo cāti na tathā pākaṭo kammapathabhāvoti te eva tena sabhāvena dassetuṃ abhidhamme cetanā kammapathabhāve na vuttā, atathājātiyattā vā cetanā tehi saddhiṃ na vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mūlaṃ patvāti mūladesanaṃ patvā, mūlasabhāvesu dhammesu desiyamānesūti attho.
“不与取以有情为所缘”这句话,和“五学处只是小所缘”这个提问偈(《分别论》715)是相冲突的。因为杀生等破戒行为的所缘,正是远离杀生等戒法的所缘。远离本来就是依据所应避免违犯的事相而成立的。或者可以这样理解:所谓“以有情为所缘”,是指以被称为有情的诸行作为所缘,只是依据这一点来说的,所以并不矛盾。正如《迷惑冰释》中所说:“这里被说为‘以有情为所缘’的那些学处,是因为它们以被称为有情的诸行作为所缘。”(《分别论注》714)这个道理对后面几项也同样适用。关于异性对象,由于执取“女人、男人”,有人说这是“以有情为所缘”。而像“见一个、闻两个”等杂秽语,则是依所见、所闻、所觉、所识的方式来说的。同样,在“贪欲”一词中,“同样”这个词也把“依所见、所闻、所觉、所识的方式”这一层意思带进来,并不是说只以有情诸行为所缘,而是因为贪欲是依见等而生起的。认为“没有化生有情”(《长部》1.171)而生起的邪见,其意义也是以三界法为所缘,因此说这种邪见以诸行为所缘。那么,邪见怎么能以一切三界法为所缘呢?因为这是共通的方式。当“没有善作恶作诸业之果报”(《长部》1.171;《中部》2.94)这样的邪见生起时,从意义上说,色界和无色界的法也都被包含在内了。巴利
‘‘Adinnādānaṃ sattārammaṇa’’nti idaṃ ‘‘pañcasikkhāpadā parittārammaṇā evā’’ti imāya pañhapucchakapāḷiyā (vibha. 715) virujjhati. Yañhi pāṇātipātādidussīlyassa ārammaṇaṃ , tadeva taṃveramaṇiyā ārammaṇaṃ. Vītikkamitabbavatthuto eva hi viratīti. Sattārammaṇanti vā sattasaṅkhātasaṅkhārārammaṇaṃ, tameva upādāya vuttanti na koci virodho. Tathā hi vuttaṃ sammohavinodaniyaṃ ‘‘yāni sikkhāpadāni ettha ‘sattārammaṇānī’ti vuttāni, tāni yasmā sattoti saṅkhaṃ gate saṅkhāreyeva ārammaṇaṃ karontī’’ti. (Vibha. aṭṭha. 714) esa nayo ito paresupi. Visabhāgavatthuno ‘‘itthī puriso’’ti gahetabbato ‘‘sattārammaṇo’’ti eke. ‘‘Eko diṭṭho, dve sutā’’tiādinā samphappalāpena diṭṭhasutamutaviññātavasena. Tathā abhijjhāti ettha tathā-saddo ‘‘diṭṭhasutamutaviññātavasenā’’ tidampi upasaṃharati, na sattasaṅkhārārammaṇatameva dassanādivasena abhijjhāyanato. ‘‘Natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.171) pavattamānāpi micchādiṭṭhi tebhūmakadhammavisayā evāti adhippāyenassā saṅkhārārammaṇatā vuttā. Kathaṃ pana micchādiṭṭhiyā sabbe tebhūmakadhammā ārammaṇaṃ hotīti? Sādhāraṇato. ‘‘Natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko’’ti (dī. ni. 1.171; ma. ni. 2.94) pavattamānāya atthato rūpārūpāvacaradhammāpi gahitā eva hontīti.
国王们因为乐受占主导,即使在大笑时也会说“杀掉”,但他们的笑是以自我调伏等为对象的,所以论师说“是能决断……”。在这里没有舍受,只有乐受可能出现。由贪生起的妄语,可能伴随乐受或舍受;由嗔生起的妄语,则伴随苦受。所以妄语与三种受相应。按照这个方法,其余(恶行)也应当根据具体情况了知受的差别。巴利
Sukhabahulatāya rājāno hasamānāpi ‘‘ghātethā’’ti vadanti , hāso pana nesaṃ attavūpasamādiaññavisayoti āha ‘‘sanniṭṭhāpaka…pe… hotī’’ti. Majjhattavedano na hoti, sukhavedanova ettha sambhavatīti. Musāvādo lobhasamuṭṭhāno sukhavedano vā siyā majjhattavedano vā, dosasamuṭṭhāno dukkhavedano vāti musāvādo tivedano. Iminā nayena sesesupi yathārahaṃ vedanābhedo veditabbo.
“以嗔和痴为两个根”这句话,是就相应根来说的。因为从“根”的意义上讲,它确实有资助的作用。但如果把“起因根”拿来理解,那就应该说“也以贪和痴为根”。为了肉食、为了花粉之类的原因,人们也会杀生。所以经里才说:“贪是诸业的因,能令其生起……”(增支部3.34)。其余几项也是如此。巴利
Dosamohavasenadvimūlakoti sampayuttamūlameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tassa hi mūlaṭṭhena upakārakabhāvo. Nidānamūle pana gayhamāne ‘‘lobhamohavasenapī’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā. Āmisakiñjakkhahetupi pāṇaṃ hananti. Tenevāha – ‘‘lobho nidānaṃ kammānaṃ samudayāyā’’tiādi (a. ni. 3.34). Sesesupi eseva nayo.
十善业道的解释巴利
Kusalakammapathadasakavaṇṇanā
杀生等……应当知道,这里是就世间、出世间以及两者混合的角度来说明善业道的。由于是怨恨的根源,被称为“怨”的杀生等不善法,会像“你住在我这里,怎么还来?”这样把它计量、驱赶出去,所以叫“离”;或者说,依它而远离,本来应该说成“viramaṇī”,但按照语源规则说成了“veramaṇī”。以受持的方式生起的远离,叫受持离。没有受持戒的人,在遇到应当避免的境况时,依当下现前的违犯对象而生起的远离,叫境遇离。以断除烦恼的方式生起的、与道相应的远离,叫断除离。虽然这里巴利原文只提到“离”,但在《学处分别》(《分别论》703)中也把“思”引出来说明了,所以这里把两者都包括进来说:“也有思,也有离。”所谓“无贪欲”,是说到根本时,在业道这一部分里说的“无贪欲”这个法,从根本上就是无贪,是善根——这里的含义应当这样理解。剩下两个词也是这样。巴利
Pāṇātipātā…pe… veditabbāni lokiyalokuttaramissakavasenettha kusalakammapathānaṃ desitattā. Verahetutāya verasaññitaṃ pāṇātipātādipāpadhammaṃ maṇati ‘‘mayi idha ṭhitāya kathaṃ āgacchasī’’ti tajjantī viya nīharatīti veramaṇī, viramati etāyāti vā ‘‘viramaṇī’’ti vattabbe niruttinayena ‘‘veramaṇī’’ti vuttaṃ. Samādānavasena uppannā virati samādānavirati. Asamādinnasīlassa sampattato yathāupaṭṭhitavītikkamitabbavatthuto virati sampattavirati. Kilesānaṃ samucchindanavasena pavattā maggasampayuttā virati samucchedavirati. Kāmañcettha pāḷiyaṃ viratiyeva āgatā, sikkhāpadavibhaṅge (vibha. 703) pana cetanāpi āharitvā dassitāti tadubhayampi gaṇhanto ‘‘cetanāpi vattanti viratiyopī’’ti āha. Anabhijjhā hi mūlaṃ patvāti kammapathakoṭṭhāse ‘‘anabhijjhā’’ti vuttadhammo mūlato alobho kusalamūlaṃ hotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
以恶戒为所缘,或以与那些恶戒同所缘的命根等为所缘,怎么能舍断恶戒呢?为了说明这一点,才说了“然而,犹如……”等话。应当知道,“舍断”是就通过远离杀生等而现起的方式来说的。但若是以那些恶戒为所缘的状态,它并不能舍断那些恶戒。因为不可能就着同一个所缘来舍断它,这是由于还没有从它脱离的缘故。巴利
Dussīlyārammaṇā tadārammaṇajīvitindriyādiārammaṇā kathaṃ dussīlyāni pajahantīti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pajahantīti veditabbā pāṇātipātādīhi viramaṇavaseneva pavattanato. Atha tadārammaṇabhāve, na so tāni pajahati. Na hi tadeva ārabbha taṃ pajahituṃ sakkā tato avinissaṭabhāvato.
无贪……中略……远离者,意思就是正在舍弃贪欲的人。因为在离开意恶行的远离中,并不存在无贪等本身就能成就对它的舍弃。巴利
Anabhijjhā…pe… viramantassāti abhijjhaṃ pajahantassāti attho. Na hi manoduccaritato virati atthi anabhijjhādīheva tappahānasiddhito.
十圣居的解释巴利
Ariyavāsadasakavaṇṇanā
348 “只有圣者的住处”,所以叫“圣居”,因为非圣者不可能有那样的住处。这里说的“圣”,是以最高标准来说,指的是诸漏尽者;又因为他们一切时候都不离开这些住处而住,所以说“诸圣曾住、正住、将住”。其中“曾住”是指依止而住。因为五支的舍弃等,正是圣者的依止。在这些依止中,也就是在所说的“省察后受用一事、忍受、回避、驱除”这些依止法里,五支的舍弃、各别谛的遮遣、寻的驱除、成就与弃舍——驱除和其余几项正是道的作用,其余的则依靠道而成就。巴利
348. Ariyānameva vāsāti ariyavāsā anariyānaṃ tādisānaṃ asambhavato. Ariyāti cettha ukkaṭṭhaniddesena khīṇāsavā gahitā, te ca yasmā tehi sabbakālaṃ avirahitavāsā eva, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ariyā eva vasiṃsu vasanti vasissantī’’ti. Tattha vasiṃsūti nissāya vasiṃsu. Pañcaṅgavippahīnattādayo hi ariyānaṃ apassayā. Tesu pañcaṅgavippahānapaccekasaccapanodanaesanāsamavayavissajjanāni ‘‘saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevati, adhivāseti, parivajjeti, vinodetī’’ti vuttesu apassenesu vinodanañca maggakiccāneva, itare maggeneva samijjhanti.
所谓“智等”,就是指智以及和它相应的那些法。因此他说“当说到‘智’的时候”等等。在这里应当说明的内容,前面已经讲过了。巴利
Ñāṇādayoti ñāṇañceva taṃsampayuttadhammā ca. Tenāha ‘‘ñāṇanti vutte’’tiādi. Tattha vattabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
由于念已达到圆满,所以能成办守护的作用。“行走时”等语,是在说明持续不断地受持,应当知道这是通过没有散乱来理解的。巴利
Ārakkhakiccaṃ sādheti sativepullappattattā. ‘‘Carato’’tiādinā niccasamādānaṃ dasseti, taṃ vikkhepābhāvena daṭṭhabbaṃ.
已出家者:指凡是进入出家生活的人,而不是已经息灭罪恶的人。称“尊者”者:这是针对仅凭出身而被称为婆罗门的人说的。各别之谛:指那些被各种执持见解的人各自执取、并顽固地执著为“唯有此是真理”的见谛等。因为那些恶见也是由于被执取为“唯有此是真理”,才被称为“谛”。因此说“唯有此”等。已被拔出:指从自己的相续中拔出、移除。对所执取的执取:指在证得圣道之前对所执取的见的执取。舍弃状态的同义词:指以圣道完全舍弃之状态的不同说法。巴利
Pabbajjupagatāti yaṃ kiñci pabbajjaṃ upagatā, na samitapāpā. Bhovādinoti jātimattabrāhmaṇe vadati. Pāṭekkasaccānīti tehi tehi diṭṭhigatikehi pāṭiyekkaṃ gahitāni ‘‘idameva sacca’’nti (ma. ni. 2.187, 203, 427; 3.27; udā. 55; netti. 59) abhiniviṭṭhāni diṭṭhisaccādīni. Diṭṭhigatānipi hi ‘‘idameva sacca’’nti (ma. ni. 2.187, 202, 427; 3.27, 29; netti. 59) gahaṇaṃ upādāya ‘‘saccānī’’ti voharīyanti. Tenāha ‘‘idamevā’’tiādi. Nīhaṭānīti attano santānato nīharitāni apanītāni. Gahitaggahaṇassāti ariyamaggādhigamato pubbe gahitassa diṭṭhigāhassa. Vissaṭṭhabhāvavevacanānīti ariyamaggena sabbaso pariccāgabhāvassa adhivacanāni.
这些没有缺失或不全,所以称为avayā(无减),而说为“无减”,意思就是没有剩余。“寻求”指的是上述所说的欲寻求等。巴利
Natthi etāsaṃ vayo vekalyanti avayāti āha ‘‘anūnā’’ti, anavasesāti attho. Esanāti heṭṭhā vuttakāmesanādayo.
道的功能成就已被说明,因为指出了贪等烦恼已被断除。巴利
Maggassa kiccanipphatti kathitā rāgādīnaṃ pahīnabhāvadīpanato.
通过省察而说的果:也就是借着省察的方式,说明了圣果。因为当人已经证得最高的果时,他完全了知贪等烦恼不再生起的法性,而这种了知就是省察智。巴利
Paccavekkhaṇāya phalaṃ kathitanti paccavekkhaṇamukhena ariyaphalaṃ kathitaṃ. Adhigate hi aggaphale sabbaso rāgādīnaṃ anuppādadhammataṃ pajānāti, tañca pajānanaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇanti.
无学法的十法解说巴利
Asekkhadhammadasakavaṇṇanā
果与那些相应的法,就是“果相应法”,意思是具有圣果体性的相应诸法。在这里,“果相应法”应当理解为:既是果法,也是与那果相应的法。在这两处,说的都是慧:从正见的意义上说是正见,从正知的意义上说是正智。因为见和知在各自对象上的活动方式确实有差别,这种差别下面已经说明过了。“果等至法”是指在果等至中的法,也就是与果等至同时生起的法。因为与圣果相应的诸法,由于从一切对立面彻底解脱的状态,也得以被称为“解脱”。然而,就像无学者的果慧依据见的作用被称为“正见”,依据知的作用也被称为“正智”一样,圣果的定依据等持的意义被称为“正定”,依据解脱的意义也被称为“正解脱”。这样一来,也就支持了第二处提到的“无漏心解脱”这一解脱。巴利
Phalañca te sampayuttadhammā cāti phalasampayuttadhammā, ariyaphalasabhāvā sampayuttā dhammāti attho. Phalasampayuttadhammāti phaladhammā ceva taṃsampayuttadhammā cāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Dvīsupi ṭhānesu paññāva kathitā sammā dassanaṭṭhena sammādiṭṭhi, sammā jānanaṭṭhena sammāñāṇanti ca. Atthi hi dassanajānanānaṃ savisaye pavattiākāraviseso, svāyaṃ heṭṭhā dassito eva. Phalasamāpattidhammāti phalasamāpattiyaṃ dhammā, phalasamāpattisahagatadhammāti attho. Ariyaphalasampayuttadhammāpi hi sabbaso paṭipakkhato vimuttataṃ upādāya ‘‘vimuttī’’ti vattabbataṃ labhanti. Kenaci pana yathā asekkhā phalapaññā dassanakiccaṃ upādāya ‘‘sammādiṭṭhī’’ti vuttā, jānanakiccaṃ upādāya ‘‘sammāñāṇa’’ntipi vuttā eva; evaṃ ariyaphalasamādhi samādānaṭṭhaṃ upādāya ‘‘sammāsamādhī’’ti vutto, vimuccanaṭṭhaṃ upādāya ‘‘sammāvimuttī’’ tipi vutto. Evañca katvā ‘‘anāsavaṃ cetovimutti’’nti dutiyavimuttiggahaṇañca samatthitaṃ hotīti.
问题的合集解说巴利
Pañhasamodhānavaṇṇanā
应当合并,就是应当汇集。巴利
Samodhānetabbāti samāharitabbā.
349 “决意”就是强有力的信。为了让未来的比丘们不产生争执,把世尊在各处开示的义理结集起来,这叫作“合诵”;而这部经的宣说正是促成这件事的原因,因为它是那样发生的,所以说“合诵法门是和合之因”。导师认可了这件事,他以“舍利弗,请你为比丘们说法语”来鼓励,然后从头到尾听着。世尊在这里的认可,通过“善哉,善哉”的随喜而变得明显,所以说“以随喜而成为认可者”。于是这部经就成了“胜利者所说”,而不是声闻所说。就像王臣写好的文书,在没有盖上王印之前,还不算“王书”;一旦盖上印,就成了王书。同样,以“善哉,善哉,舍利弗”等随喜语所表明的、名为认可的胜利者法语之印盖上之后,这部经就成了胜利者亲口所说、直接来自佛陀的教言。至于这里没有详细分析的义理,都是很容易理解的。巴利
349.Okappanāti balavasaddhā. Āyatiṃ bhikkhūnaṃ avivādahetubhūtaṃ tattha tattha bhagavatā desitānaṃ atthānaṃ saṅgāyanaṃ saṅgīti, tassa ca kāraṇaṃ ayaṃ suttadesanā tathā pavattattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅgītipariyāyanti sāmaggiyā kāraṇa’’nti. Samanuñño satthā ahosi ‘‘paṭibhātu ta,ṃ sāriputta, bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiṃ kathā’’ti ussāhetvā ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā suṇanto, sā panettha bhagavato samanuññatā ‘‘sādhu, sādhū’’ti anumodanena pākaṭā jātāti vuttaṃ ‘‘anumodanena samanuñño ahosī’’ti. Jinabhāsito nāma jāto, na sāvakabhāsito. Yathā hi rājayuttehi likhitapaṇṇaṃ yāva rājamuddikāya na lañjitaṃ hoti, na tāva ‘‘rājapaṇṇa’’nti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati, lañjitamattaṃ pana rājapaṇṇaṃ nāma hoti. Evameva ‘‘sādhu, sādhu sāriputtā’’tiādi anumodanavacanasaṃsūcitāya samanuññāsaṅkhātāya jinavacanamuddāya lañjitattā ayaṃ suttanto jinabhāsito nāma jāto āhaccavacano. Yaṃ panettha atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyamevāti.